Claas Dominator 108vx 98vx 88vx

Safety rules
Safety rules
SAFETY RULES Important

The instructions contained in this manual
should be carefully read and observed by all
persons who are concerned with the operation,
maintenance and inspection of this machine,
in order to prevent accidents. Especially the
«SAFETY RULES» in this manual should be
read with the utmost care and adhered to.
The use of spare parts, accessories and
ancillary equipment, which are not originally
manufactured by CLAAS, can change the
specified design characteristics of this CLAAS
machine or can detract from its functional per-
formance, with a possible adverse affect on the
active and/or passive operational safety of the
machine and its occupational safety standards
(accident prevention).
CLAAS are in no way liable for any damage or
personal injury caused through the use of other
than original or approved CLAAS parts,
accessories and ancillary equipment.
Technical data, dimensions and weights are
given as an indication only. CLAAS reserve the
right to make changes subsequently as
technical developments continue. Respon-
sibility for errors or omissions not accepted.
IMPORTANT: Front, rear, right and left refer to
the direction of forward travel.
297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.2.1

Safety rules
Identification of warning and danger signs Correct use of the machine

All parts of this manual having to do with your safety Fitting and retrofitting of ancillary equipment which
or the safe operation of the machine are marked is not originally manufactured by CLAAS, and, in
with the following signs. Please pass all safety addition, also modifications and changes must only
instructions on to other users, too. be carried out with the consent of CLAAS, as any
such actions may have adverse affects on the
safety and operational function of the machine.
DANGER!
Any arbitrary modifications carried out on the
Sign to indicate instructions which must machine will relieve the manufacturer of all liability
be observed. Failure to do so would cause for any resulting damage or injury.
danger to life and limb to the operator and
the people around him.
General safety and accident prevention
☞ Preventive measures regulations
1. In addition to the instructions contained in this
manual, also observe the general safety and
ATTENTION! accident preventive regulations.
2. Always comply with local traffic regulations
Sign to indicate instructions which must
when driving on public roads.
be observed. Failure to do so could result
in damage to the machine. 3. Before starting the engine ensure that the
transmission is in neutral and that all guards
☞ Measures to prevent damage to the
are installed and in their correct position.
machine.
4. Start the engine only from the operator's seat.
Never attempt to start the engine by shortening
across the starting motor terminals as the
NOTE: machine may immediately start to move!
Sign to indicate instructions for a more 5. Before moving away, always check the
effective and economic use of the machine. immediate vicinity of the machine. Ensure
adequate visibility – for a warning, always
blow the horn before starting up!
6. Never run the engine in a closed building!
CAUTION!
7. Clothing worn by the mechanic must be
Sign to indicate instructions which must close-fitting! Avoid wearing loose jackets,
be observed on assembly / disassembly. shirts or ties.
8. Handle fuel with care as it is highly flammable.
Never refuel the machine in the vicinity of
ENVIRONMENT: naked flames or sparks. Do not smoke during
refuelling!
Sign to indicate instructions which must be
observed in order to avoid damage to the 9. Always stop the engine and remove the main
environment. switch key (ignition key) before refuelling. Fill
the fuel tank outdoors. Clean up any spilled fuel
Danger to the environment is caused by irregular
immediately!
handling and incorrect disposal of toxic material
(e.g. old oil). 10. Prevent fires by keeping the machine clean!
11. Take care when handling brake fluid and
The warning and instruction signs placed on battery acid (toxic and corrosive).
the machine provide recommendations for safe 12. Always blow the horn before starting the engine
operation. These instructions involve your safety – and engaging the threshing mechanism!
observe them at all times!
1.2.2 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

Safety rules
Leaving the machine Basic rule

1. When leaving the machine, ensure that it will Always check the operating and road safety of the
not roll away (apply handbrake, chock blocks). machine before starting the engine.
Shut off the engine, remove the main switch key
(ignition key) and lock the operator's cab (if Hydraulic accumulators
installed). – Turn off the battery isolating switch!
Take particular care when working on hydraulic
2. Never leave the machine unattended as long as
accumulators! Hydraulic accumulators are under
the engine is still running.
high pressure!
3. Lower front attachments (cutterbars, maize
In the case of valve-controlled accumulators such
picker head etc.) to the ground before leaving
as e.g. for the Autopilot, the short-circuit screw has
the machine.
to be loosened before starting repair work on the
accumulator so that the hydraulic pressure is
Compressor-type air conditioner relieved.
1. The air conditioning system is filled with HFC
refrigerant R 134A. HFC refrigerants must not
be vented to the atmosphere. – Therefore,
please take appropriate precautions when
working on the compressor-type air conditioner.
2. Maintenance and repairs are only to be carried
out by authorized service centres qualified to
handle refrigerants. Refrigerants must always
be discharged by use of the correct recovery
equipment and disposed of for recycling.
Service
1. Repair, service and cleaning work and the
elimination of malfunctions should only be
performed with the drive and engine switched
off. Remove the main switch key (ignition key)!
2. Escaping fluid (fuel or hydraulic oil) under high
pressure can penetrate the skin and cause
serious injury. If any fluid is injected into the
skin, consult a doctor immediately as otherwise
serious infections may result!
3. Be careful when opening the radiator filler cap.
As long as the engine is hot, the radiator is
under pressure.
4. Dispose of oil, fuel and filters in a way that is
harmless to the environment and in accordance
with existing anti-pollution regulations.
5. Do not attempt to mount a tyre unless you
have the proper equipment and experience to
perform the job safely.
6. Retighten the wheel nuts and wheel bolts
regularly.
7. Only have qualified workshops carry out repair
work on the hydraulic system.

Safety rules

Specifications
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Lubricants chart
Component Type of lubricant Capacity
Gearboxes
DOMINATOR 108 VX
Transmission gearbox CLAAS 6.0 l

hypoid transmission oil
Final drives conforming to 4.5 l each
SAE 85W-90
CLAAS rear wheel drive – (MIL-L-2105B)
API-GL-5-90 0.8 l each
planetary gears
specifications
CLAAS
multi purpose transmission oil
conforming to
Drum speed reduction kit SAE 85W-90 1.0 l
(MIL-L-2105)
API-GL-4-90
specifications
Grain tank unloading tube – Multipurpose grease

200 g each
top / lower angle drive CLAAS EP2
DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX
Transmission gearbox CLAAS 6.0 l

hypoid transmission oil
Final drives conforming to 3.0 l each
SAE 85W-90
CLAAS rear wheel drive – (MIL-L-2105B)
API-GL-5-90 0.8 l each
planetary gears
specifications
CLAAS
multi purpose transmission oil
conforming to
Drum speed reduction kit SAE 85W-90 1.0 l
(MIL-L-2105)
API-GL-4-90
specifications
Grain tank unloading tube – Multipurpose grease

200 g each
top / lower angle drive CLAAS EP2

Specifications
Component Type of lubricant Capacity
Hydraulic system
Working hydraulics and hydro- CLAAS hydraulic oil approx. 20 litres

static ground travel drive VD-Plus HVLPD 46
Multi-grade hydraulic oil,
viscosity class ISO-VG 46
as per DIN 51 524, part 3 **
Foot brake ATE brake fluid Reservoir must always be full

SAE Specifications J 1703
Air Conditioning System
Sanden compressor SD 7 H 15 Sanden oil SP 20 PAG As required

(approx. 210 cm3 refill capacity)
** When selecting hydraulic oil, observe the following guidelines:

Pourpoint < -25 °C (DIN ISO 3016)
Viscosity 0 °C < 600 cSt. (DIN 51 562)
Viscosity 40 °C max. 50.6 cSt. (DIN 51 562)
Viscosity index > 170 (DIN ISO 2909)
The oil must have detergent properties!

Specifications
Working hydraulics
Quantity / Litres
Refill Oil change Setting pressure at the resp. PRV bar
Lift hydraulics 175+15
DOMINATOR 108 VX 8.5 approx. 7 Steering* 115+15
Low-pressure 19+4
Hydrostatic ground travel drive
Quantity / Litres
Setting
Refill Oil change pressure at Pump / Motor bar
the resp. PRV
Operating
420
pressure
DOMINATOR 108 VX 20.2 approx. 8 L4
Charge pressure 18+1
Cold start valve 25+2.5
Operating
420
pressure
DOMINATOR 98 VX 19 approx. 8 S3
Operating
420
pressure
DOMINATOR 88 VX 19 approx. 8 S3
* = When re-adjusting, note the back pressure and add the value.
S3 = SAUER 90 R 075 / 90 M 075
L4 = LINDE HPV 105 / HMF 105

Specifications

General information
General information
GENERAL INFORMATION
Introduction
This CLAAS REPAIR MANUAL has been prepared to
assist all personnel concerned with the maintenance
and service of CLAAS combines and to help preserve
their permanent working order and thus, their high
value.
Experience gathered by both our service engineers
and factory staff has been compiled in this CLAAS
REPAIR MANUAL which explains the procedure of
repairs, the different adjustments to be made, the use
of CLAAS special tools etc.
The illustrations included in support to the explana-
tions show the sequence of major repairs so that minor
repairs can easily be drawn out.
The CLAAS REPAIR MANUAL is filled in a folder
which allows to insert supplementary pages as issued
following technical developments and to have always
an updated manual at hand for reference.
To be sure, always compare settings and filling
capacities with specifications stated in the current
Operator's Manual which applies to the machine.
CLAAS KGaA mbH
Service Department

General information
Introduction to the CLAAS-REPAIR MANUAL

The present CLAAS-REPAIR MANUAL is divided into
main groups and subgroups.
The first figure at the bottom of each page refers to the
main group whereas the second figure following the
point indicates the subgroup; the figure behind the
oblique stroke gives the numerical order of the pages.
Page numbering starts always with the number 1 in
each subgroup.
Where service operations apply to a specific machine
model only, this is clearly indicated in headings. When
a service procedure applies to all machines covered
by this book, the machine names are not especially
mentioned.
When supplements are to be added, subgroups are
supplemented or exchanged. All supplements are
inserted in the respective main group / subgroup and
the index is exchanged.
The symbols communicate brief messages when
recurring service procedures are described. Their
meaning is explained at the beginning of this manual.
The section «GENERAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS» at
the beginning of this book contains useful practical
hints. Read and follow these fundamental instructions.
They are the basis for reliable service and durability of
parts after repairs have been carried out.
The description of a particular service
procedure can easily be found by checking
the list of contents of the appropriate main
group / subgroup.

General information
General information
Key to symbols The meaning of the symbols will soon be learned by

the user. The symbols help to quickly recognize recur-
In this CLAAS REPAIR MANUAL a limited number
ring service procedures and they also help to commu-
of symbols from the DIN 30600 of the German Stan-
nicate information shown by the illustrations.
dard Institution (DIN) have been used.
Remove, Prevent damage

Grease
dismantle to material
Disassemble Oil Special tool
Drain,
Assemble Adjust, set
drain outlet
Install, Fill,
Visually check
mount Filler opening
Unlock, release,
Mark Overflow
secure
Lock, bound, seal

Balance Bleed
using adhesives
Block up,
Possibly
support,
reusable
hold
Renew on each Note direction of

assembly installation

General information

General information for repair
GENERAL INFORMATION FOR REPAIR – The battery provides the current for the field
excitation required to start the alternator action via
Cause of trouble the charge indicator bulb. Burnt out bulbs must,
Identify the cause of trouble, note all defective parts therefore, be renewed to ensure positive field
and take all precautions to prevent accidents. excitation.
Spare parts Correct tension of steel roller chains

Use genuine CLAAS spare parts and suitable Find the centre point in the slack span between
CLAAS special tools. sprockets. With the tight span slightly under load, push
in the centre point of the slack span with the thumb.
When ordering spare parts and requesting technical
The tension of the chain is correct when its slack span
information always specify the serial number of the
deflects about 2% of the centre distance between
machine. When ordering spare parts and requesting
shafts. Tension of new chains should be checked at
technical information concerning the engine also quote
short intervals.
the engine serial number. When ordering spare parts
and requesting technical information concerning Example: If the distance between the centres of the
mounted implements, the cutterbar and the maize shafts is 500 mm, the slack span of the chain should
picker head, also specify the respective serial num- deflect about 10 mm.
bers. This is necessary to prevent incorrect spare
parts deliveries. Taper ring fasteners (locking cones)
Parts can be securely fastened by taper rings, even
Engine
when large forces are transmitted from the drive ele-
Always disconnect the negative battery cable (-) when ment to the shaft and vice versa. However, the preload
working on the engine. must be correct.
Installation:
Transmission
When fitting the taper rings, it is important that the
Drain off oil before removing the transmission cases. shaft, hub, parallel key and taper rings are thoroughly
Use a plastic or soft metal hammer to separate parts cleaned, that semi-fluid lubricant NLGI grade 00 (e.g.
tightly fitted into each other. Shell Retinax G or its equivalent) is applied and that
the components are tightened to the specified torque
Three-phase alternator in the correct order of assembly.
ATTENTION! ATTENTION!
No solid grease must be used when

– Never disconnect the cables between the assembling the parts.
alternator, voltage regulator and battery with the
alternator running.
Removal:
– Do not connect the battery terminals in reverse
polarity; this will destroy the alternator diodes. After loosening the fixing components that clamp the
taper rings axially in position, use a suitable hammer
– Do not carry out work on live parts unless the and block-ended tube and apply a short, sharp blow to
engine is stopped and the battery cables are dis- loosen the taper ring fasteners.
connected.
– Do not flash connections to check current flow. ATTENTION!
This will damage the semiconductors.
The inside diameter of the tube must be
– Do not use an electric welder on machines unless
large enough to fit over the taper ring.
all the alternator wires are disconnected!

Self-locking bolts of the bolt or at the top end of a female thread spreads
(with adhesive-filled micro capsules) the compound over the full length of thread when the
bolt is being screwed in. As a result, too much break-
Renew self-locking bolts, e.g. Verbus-Plus / away torque is required to remove the bolt, should this
Imbus-Plus or similar bolts on each assembly. be necessary, and the bolt could break.
In exceptional cases, self-locking bolts may be
reused up to three times. Always be sure to tighten Fasteners fitted with liquid locking compound can
the self-locking bolts to the specified torque. easily be loosened after heating them to 200 °C
(392 °F).
Self-locking bolts with adhesive-filled micro capsules
must always be quickly tightened to the specified
torque. When removing these bolts, screw them Correct installation of lock collar bearings
quickly all the way out. These self-locking bolts with Lock collar bearings are tightened by pushing the
adhesive-filled micro capsules must not come in con- eccentric locking collar over the extended inner ring of
tact with sealant or sealing compound (e.g. Epple 33 the bearing and rotating the locking collar in direction
or similar products). of shaft rotation. This clamps the bearing to the shaft.
Instead of self-locking bolts, regular bolts with liquid It is suggested to smear the inner ring and the shaft
locking compound may be used if needed. However, with semi-fluid lubricant NLGI-grade 00 (e.g. Shell
this must not become common practice and care must Retinax G or its equivalent) before mounting the bear-
be taken to use bolts and liquid locking compound only ings. This will make removal of bearings at a later time
in places where it is possible to heat the fasteners to easier, should this be necessary.
about 200 °C (392 °F) for removal. Ensure that the
regular bolts conform to the specified grades The locking collar is tightened by applying light ham-
(8.8/10.9 or similar property classes). mer blows to a punch and tapping the collar in direc-
tion of shaft rotation until a moderate lock is obtained.
Self-locking bolts with adhesive-filled micro capsules Then tighten the set screw. Loosen the bearing by tap-
can only be used where the operating temperature will ping the eccentric collar in the opposite direction of the
not exceed +90 °C (194 °F). rotation of the shaft.
After 24 hours of curing at +20 °C (68 °F) these fasten-
ers can be subjected to full stress. To speed-up curing Correct installation of adapter sleeve bearings
time, the bonded parts can be heated, e.g. to +70 °C
(158 °F) reducing total hardening time to 15 minutes. Adapter sleeve bearings can be mounted to any drawn
or turned shafts, the seatings have not to be especially
finished. This is of advantage because it allows the
Liquid locking compound shaft to be axially moved as required so that the cor-
(e.g. DELO-ML 187 / Loctite 242 or their equivalents) rect alignment is obtained.
Liquid locking compound must only be used at loca- Install the adapter sleeve bearing according to the
tions recommended by the manufacturer. tapered inner ring. Clean the taper lock adapter sleeve
Correct application: and shaft before installing the bearing and check that
the lock nut runs easily along the thread in order to
All metal surfaces where liquid locking compound is to prevent the adapter sleeve from turning on the shaft
be applied must be absolutely free from grease. Use when the nut is being tightened.
«Aktivator» that comes with the workshop package for
cleaning. Tightening the bearing:
Allow the Aktivator to dry off the metal surfaces before First tighten the lock nut to the point where play of the
applying the liquid locking compound. Especially in the adapter sleeve is eliminated and slight preload exists.
case of holes that are not drilled all the way through Then tighten the nut about 90 degrees and continue to
care must be taken to ensure that no remains of turn the nut until the nearest slot fits the tab. Secure
Aktivator (cleaning agent) are left. the nut by properly bending the tab into place.
When fitting bolts with liquid locking compound, try to Loosening the bearing:
apply the compound to the inside thread only (nuts) in Bend up the tab which secures the adapter sleeve lock
small amounts (drops). When using liquid locking com- nut. First back off the nut a few turns only (all of the
pound in holes that are not drilled all the way through, nut's thread must still grip the thread of the adapter
only apply the compound to the bottom end of the sleeve). Then use a suitable block-ended tube and
thread by wetting a length of thread that equals about loosen the taper sleeve by applying a short, sharp
the diameter of the bolt (1 x the nominal diameter of blow.
the bolt). The same applies to any extra long female
threads. Applying the locking compound to the thread

Olive (ferrule) fittings on hydraulic lines Pre-assembly:

When pre-assembling the unit on site or when install- 1. Cut the tube off square. Do not use a pipe cutter!
ing a factory-assembled fitting: always make sure to The tube would be cut at an angle which would
liberally oil the inside of the union, and to tighten the lead to a burr on the inside and outside. Deburr
union nut until resistance is felt and then 1/2-turn past the inside and outside of the tube ends lightly
that point. (do not chamfer!) and clean. The straight end of
a bent tube must be at least twice as long as the
Pre-assembly:
height of the nut, measured from the start of the
1. Cut the tube at right angles. Do not use a pipe radius.
cutter because this will slant the wall of the tube
2. Slide the nut and the profile ring onto the tube.
and causes inside and outside burrs. Very
carefully remove burrs both from the inside and 3. Push the tube into the union until it bottoms and
outside of the tube end (but do not chamfer). tighten the union nut until the profile ring cuts into
Clean all foreign matter from the tube. The straight the tube wall (the tube must not rotate with the
end of a bent tube must be at least twice as long nut). You will notice when this happens because
as the height of the nut, measured from the start resistance is felt at this point.
of the radius.
4. Turn the union nut 1/2-turn past the point of
2. Slide the union nut and olive onto the tube. resistance.
3. Push the tube into the union until it bottoms and 5. Check cutting of fitting into the tube wall: A crest
tighten the union nut until the olive cuts into the must be visible in the space before the profile ring.
tube wall (the tube must not rotate with the nut). The profile ring may rotate but must not move
You will notice when this happens because axially.
resistance is felt at this point.
Final assembly:
4. Turn the union nut 1/2-turn past the point of
Fit the pre-assembled tube into the well oiled coupling,
resistance.
tighten the nut until resistance is felt, then tighten the
5. Check cutting of olive into the tube wall: A crest nut another half turn.
must be visible in the space before the olive fitting
Important: Hold the body of the coupling with a
face and provide snug fitting. The olive may rotate
spanner when tightening the nut!
but must not move axially.
Repeated assembly:
Final assembly:
After loosening the profile ring connections, always
Oil the union liberally. Insert the pre-assembled tube.
tighten the nut until resistance is felt, then tighten a
Tighten the union nut until resistance is felt and then
further half turn.
1/2-turn past that point.
Repeated assembly:
Every time the olive fitting has been loosened,
Leakage at profile ring connections:
retighten the union nut only until snug. Do not over-
tighten the unit. If a connection is leaking, loosen the union nut so that
a little oil runs out, then tighten again according to the
Leakage at olive (ferrule) fitting:
instructions.
If a connection is leaking, loosen the union nut so that
a little oil runs out, then tighten again according to the
ATTENTION!
instructions.
Deviating tightening torques reduce the
Progressive tube fittings on hydraulic lines nominal pressure performance and the
durability of the connections. Leakages and
For all pre-assembled as well as factory delivered slipping out of the tubes will result.
pre-assembled profile ring tube fittings, the final
assembly is completed with the required connections
being well oiled, and the nut tightened 1/2 a turn over
the point where the resistance is distinctly felt.

Taper fitting connections for hydraulic lines – Care for strict cleanliness when working on
hydraulic systems.
Assembly:
– Never mix different oil qualities.
Oil the O-ring on the taper fitting. Tighten the nut
another 1/3 of a turn after the pressure point has been – Run the machine or operate machine assemblies
felt. at low speed after any repair.
ATTENTION!
Deviating tightening torques reduce the

nominal pressure performance and the
durability of the connections. Leakages and
slipping out of the tubes will result.
Welding
ATTENTION!
When carrying out electric welding on

the machine, proceed as follows:
1. Turn off the battery isolating switch.
2. Unplug the connector to the display monitor.
The connector is in the central terminal cabinet,
next to the plug-in type module (11 – Auto reel).
3. Pull out the electric plug-in type modules in the
central terminal compartment.
4. Disconnect the electric connectors between the
engine and the main cable loom.
5. Connect the earth clamp of the welder always in
the near vicinity of the area where the welding is
being carried out.
Some advice for speedy and correct repair:

– Mark machine parts before disassembly to ensure
their correct left-to-right position and balance
when reassembled.
– Fit roll (expansion) pins always with their gap
pointing to the side of load. If fitted with a quarter
of a turn from this position, they will get loose, go
astray or shear off.
– Always renew cotter pins, locking wires, locking
plates, tab washers and lock washers when
carrying out repairs.
– Fit lubricated ball and sleeve bearings with high
quality grease.
– Care for chain sprockets and V-belt pulleys to be
properly aligned.

Maintenance
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
Hydraulic system
DANGER!
When working on the hydraulic system,

please ensure that the engine has been
switched off, the ignition key has been
removed and the machine has been secured
against rolling (parking brake and wheel
chocked).
ATTENTION!
When working on the hydraulic system,

cleanliness is of vital importance in order to
ensure a correct operation of the hydraulic
system.
☞ When dismantling hydraulic components,
ensure they lie on a clean surface
(i.e clean paper or card).
☞ When storing dismantled hydraulic com-
ponents, ensure that all the connections /
openings have been sealed with a bung in
order to prevent dirt ingress.
ENVIRONMENT:
Contain any drained oil in a suitable container and
dispose off in the proper manner.

Maintenance
Checking the hydraulic oil level

Check the oil level on a daily basis with the engine
switched off.
Steering / working hydraulics:
D = Hydraulic tank
C = Fresh air filter element
CAUTION!
Before checking the hydraulic oil level, please

1 ensure that the cutterbar and the reel have been
fully dropped.
The hydraulic oil level must be up to the mark on the

fresh air filter element (C).
Low-pressure / ground drive hydraulics:
P = Hydraulic tank
R = Fresh air filter element
The hydraulic oil level must be up to the mark on the
fresh air filter element (R).
(Fig. 1, 2)
Linde unit Changing the hydraulic oil
DANGER!
Take extreme care when draining hot

hydraulic oil – risk of burning.
ENVIRONMENT:
Contain any drained oil in a suitable container and
dispose off in the proper manner.
3
Sauer unit
Always change the hydraulic oil filter (F) when
changing the hydraulic oil.
(Fig. 3, 4)

Maintenance
Steering hydraulics / working hydraulics:

1. Lower the trunking to its lowest position.
2. Retract all hydraulic rams and stop all motors.
3. Place a suitably large clean container under the
steering ram.
4. Undo the hydraulic pipe (A) from the steering ram
and hang in the container.
5. By turning the steering wheel in the relative direc-
tion, pump out the oil from the hydraulic tank (D).
Refit the hydraulic pipe (A).
5
6. Jack up the rear of the machine in its centre, so
that the load is just taken off the steering axle.
7. After filling the hydraulic tank (D) with fresh oil,
start the engine, turn the steering wheel several
times in each direction, and extend and retract the
rams several times.
8. Check the hydraulic oil level.
(Fig. 5, 6)

Maintenance
Low-pressure / ground drive hydraulics:

Linde HPV 105 and HMF 105
Sauer 90 P 075 / 90 M 075
1. Place a suitably large clean container in order
to drain the oil into under the hydrostatic motor.
2. Remove the drain plug (G) from the hydrostatic
motor, ensuring that the oil is collected. Screw
back the drain plug (G).
3. Fill the hydraulic tank (P) via the fresh air filter
element (R) with fresh hydraulic oil.
7 4. Put the machine into neutral gear.

5. Start the engine in idle and immediately switch off
again.
6. Check the hydraulic oil level in the hydraulic tank
and if necessary top up. Repeat this process until
the oil level in the hydraulic tank (R) remains con-
stant.
7. Start the engine in idle and allow to run.
8. Move the hydrostatic lever forwards for approx.
2 minutes, then the same in reverse.
9. Check the level of the oil in the hydraulic tank.
(Fig. 7, 8)
8

3-D cleaning system
3-D cleaning system
3-D CLEANING SYSTEM
Removing the 3-D cleaning system

Unscrew control lever (C) from the pivot arm (38).
Remove bracket (22) from machine side wall
by unscrewing the mushroom head bolts (21).
NOTE: Before dismounting the bracket (22), the sieve
pan must be removed.
(Fig. 1, 2, 3)
Installing the 3-D cleaning system

Install pre-assembled bracket (22) to the machine side
wall using mushroom head bolts (21).
Loosen hexagon bolt (19). Place the sieve pan exactly
to the centre position of the oscillating range. In this
position, arrest the metal / rubber bearing (28) axially
by tightening the hexagon bolt (19) to the prescribed
tightening torque.
Torque setting for metal / rubber bearing:
M 12 – 80 Nm
2
CAUTION!
The installation sequence must be observed

in all cases to ensure that the rubber bushings
of the metal / rubber bearings are subject to the
same torsional stress on both sides during
oscillating movements of the sieve pan.
Failing to observe the above will result
in premature wear of the metal / rubber
bearings.
Bolt down control lever (C) to the pivot arm (38).

Adjust 3-D cleaning system.
(Fig. 1, 2)

3-D cleaning system
3
3-D sieve pan suspension and cleaning system,
exploded view
1 Washer
2 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 45 DIN 931-8.8
Hexagon nut M 8 DIN 934
Contact washer A 8
3 Bracket
4 Control arm
5 Metal / rubber bearing
6 Washer
7 Contact washer A 10
8 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
9 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer A 10
10 Stand
11 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 90 DIN 931-8.8
12 Washer
13 Connecting rod, right-hand
14 Hexagon nut M 10 DIN 934
16 Bearing
17 Bearing

3-D cleaning system
19 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 100 DIN 931-8.8
20 Washer 17 x 26 x 3
21 Mushroom head bolt
M 10 x 30 DIN 603
Contact washer A 10
22 Bracket
24 Pin
25 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 60 DIN 931-8.8
Contact washer A 8
26 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 70 DIN 931-8.8
27 Control arm
29 Sleeve
32 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer A 8
33 Flange-type ball bearing Pea 204
34 Sheet metal flange Rb y 204
35 Lock collar bearing Yen 204
36 Lock collar W.er's.d.6192871
37 Threaded pin M 6 x 6 DIN 916
38 Pivot arm
(Fig. 3)

3-D cleaning system
4
Adjusting the 3-D cleaning system
Place the machine in a horizontal position
and the sieve pan exactly in centre position.
Determine the dimension (Q) from the machine
side wall to the pivot point (P) and note it down.
Unhinge the hydraulic cylinder (Z) at the pivot point (P)
and control lever (C) at the pivot arm (38).
Start engine and push the pendulum housing (E)
fully to the outside until the hydraulic piston is fully
retracted.
CAUTION!
Keep the pendulum housing (E) in this position

and shut down engine. (Another person is
required to do this.)
Now hang in the pendulum housing (E) at (P).

3-D cleaning system
The dimension (Q) must have been reduced by the

dimension (F) = 70 mm. If not, the dimension (Q) must
be set accordingly at the yoke (G), with the lock nut (B)
released.
When the adjustment is complete, hang in the
control lever (C) and the hydraulic cylinder (Z).
(Fig. 4)
Adjusting the pivot arm using the «3-D gauge»

Let engine run for a short period to bring the pendulum
housing (E) to its centre position.
Place the machine in a horizontal position and the
sieve pan exactly in centre position.
Put the «3-D gauge», Part No. 181 993.1, in place so
that points (3 and 4) make contact at the rear wall and
the blocks (7 and 8) make contact with the lower web
of the bracket (22). Now dislocate the «3-D gauge» in
parallel with the machine side wall until point (5)
makes contact with the pivot arm (38).
5
Now point (6) must make contact with the pivot
arm (38) and / or be aligned with it. If not, unhinge
3 4 the control lever (C) from the pivot arm (38).
Adjust the control lever (C) accordingly at the ball
head (K) with the lock nut (A) released, then tighten
ANLAGE
ANLAGE
bolt.
7 8 When carrying out this setting, make sure that the
pivot arm (38) makes contact with the «3-D gauge»
EINSTELLLEHRE
SCHRÄGE 1,5°
and that the pendulum housing (E) is not being moved.

5
22 When the adjustment is complete, tighten all bolts.
(Fig. 3, 4, 5, 6)
A D
38
6
CS 228
DO78-118
MEGA202-218
LEXION
405-480
DO48-68
40985 6

3-D cleaning system

Air conditioner
Air conditioner
AIR CONDITIONER
Important information on compressor-type

air conditioner
DANGER!
1. Avoid any contact with refrigerants.

Refrigerants may cause serious frostbites
or injuries.
2. Always wear safety glasses when working
on the air conditioner.
3. In case of eye or skin contact rinse with plenty
of sterilized or drinking water immediately and
consult a doctor.
4. Have maintenance and repair work be carried out
by specialised refrigerating equipment workshops
only.
5. Before dismantling the refrigerant circuit for main-
tenance and repair purposes, the refrigerant must
be sucked off using an approved and suitable
recovery unit.
6. Never drain refrigerants to the atmosphere.
7. Refrigerant forms toxic or corrosive substances
when reacting in direct contact with open flames
or hot metal surfaces.
8. Never use compressed air or oxygen to perform
a leak test of the air conditioner
– danger of explosion!
9. Never clean the air conditioner with a hot
water jet when filled – danger of explosion!

Air conditioner
Important information on installing parts

in the compressor-type air conditioner
ATTENTION!
1. Keep refrigerant circuit absolutely free of dust and

moisture. To this end, plug all removed connectors
with suitable plugs.
2. Plugs of new parts should be removed
only immediately before their installation.
3. O-rings shall always be replaced.
4. Before connecting a refrigerant line, apply some
drops of refrigerant oil to the thread and the O-ring
seat.
5. Always use two wrenches when tightening and /
or loosening the refrigerant lines in order to avoid
twisting of the lines.

Air conditioner
Air conditioner – filling up refrigerant

(Air conditioning compressor Sanden Sd 5 h 14)
1. Before evacuating, check if the filter drier must
be replaced.
Checking the filter drier:
An indicator bead is provided at the control
orifice (E).
Blue colour = Filter drier ok
Pink colour = Replace filter drier
1 In addition to this, the filter drier must be replaced

after a major leak, e.g. a broken line, has occurred
in the refrigerant circuit.
2. Before filling up, the air conditioner must be
evacuated and a leak test must be carried out.
3. Filling up refrigerant:
Fill up refrigerant at the air conditioning compres-
sor connections (D, delivery side and S, suction
side).
ATTENTION!
Liquid must absolutely not be filled in at

2
connection (S)!
Use only refrigerant R134a. The required quantity

is approx. 1550 g (comply with the manufacturer's
instructions).
4. Check the refrigerant level at the control orifice (E)
of the filter drier, using the white float ball:
When the white float is at the bottom = lack of
refrigerant
When the white float is at the top = refrigerant
level ok
CAUTION!
The correct refrigerant level should be checked

immediately after the functional test of the
system. During extended periods of standstill
of the system, the liquid level may fall below
the control orifice despite the correct refrigerant
quantity being filled in.
(Fig. 1, 2)

Air conditioner
Checking / filling up refrigerant oil at the air

conditioning compressor
NOTE: The oil level at the compressor must be
checked when a new air conditioning compressor
or a newly sealed air conditioning compressor is
installed.
1. Start diesel engine and let it run at lower idle
speed.
2. Start air conditioning compressor and let run
3 for 10 minutes. Shut down diesel engine.
3. Suck off refrigerant at the connections (D, delivery
side and S, suction side) of the air conditioning
compressor. Proceed very slowly in order to avoid
any refrigerant oil being sucked off as well
(comply with the manufacturer's instructions).
4. Unscrew dust cap (A) and screw out
oil filler plug (B).
5. Remove air conditioning compressor if necessary.
6. Rotate air conditioning compressor to a horizontal
position.
7. Rotate the counterweight (C) to the position
4 shown and insert oil level dipstick, Part No.
181 788.0 (or self-manufactured). While doing so,
the 30° angle of the oil level dipstick must make
contact with the compressor body.
X = 105 mm
W = 30°
Y = 3 mm (distance between marks)
8. The oil level must reach notch 15 (from the
bottom) of the oil level dipstick. Refill refrigerant
oil (SANDEN SP 20) if necessary.
9. Screw in oil filler plug (B) with a new O-ring
and tighten with a tightening torque of 20 Nm.
Put on dust cap (A) and screw in hexagon bolts
5
using liquid screw fastener, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
10. Fill up air conditioner refrigerant.
(Fig. 3, 4, 5)

Air conditioner
Topping up refrigerant oil

NOTE: Refrigerant oil must be topped up when
installing new parts as a certain portion will always
remain in the old parts. However, the oil level in the
air conditioning compressor does not need to be
considered.
Topping-up quantities of refrigerant oil:

Condenser 20 cm³
Per line 20 cm³
Evaporator 40 cm³
Filter drier 10 cm³
Refrigerant loss 20 cm³
Complete refrigerant 40 cm³
Overall system 310 cm³
Top up refrigerant oil into air conditioning compressor
before evacuating / filling the air conditioner
(comply with the manufacturer's instructions).
Use (SANDEN SP 20) refrigerant oil only.
Removing the condenser

Suck off refrigerant from the connections (D, delivery
side and S, suction side). Proceed very slowly in order
to avoid any refrigerant oil being sucked off as well.
(Fig. 6)
Remove radiator chaff screen drive belt (26).

Loosen the quick-release couplings (B) and fold
the radiator chaff screen open.
(Fig. 7)

Air conditioner
Unscrew pipes (C) from the condenser and plug

them at both ends using plugs.
Unscrew condenser from the radiator chaff screen
rear wall (D).
(Fig. 8)
Check condenser for dirt and clean if necessary.

Blow through condenser with compressed air
(5 bar max.).
ATTENTION!
While cleaning, make sure not to damage

the blades.
Installing the condenser

1. Bolt down the condenser at the radiator chaff
screen rear wall (D).
2. Install pipes (C) at the condenser.
CAUTION!
Make absolutely sure to use new O-rings.
3. Swing down radiator chaff screen and lock using

the quick-release couplings (B).
4. Install radiator chaff screen drive belt (26).
5. Top up refrigerant oil.
(Fig. 6, 7, 8)

Air conditioner
Removing the air conditioning compressor

Remove compressor drive belt (2).
Suck off refrigerant from the connections (D, delivery
side and S, suction side). Proceed very slowly in order
to avoid any refrigerant oil being sucked off as well.
CAUTION!
If no plug connector is provided at the plus

9 cable (K) of the air conditioning compressor,
the cab door must be removed on the
DOMINATOR 98 VX (MERCEDES OM 366 LA)
and on the DOMINATOR 108 VX.
(Fig. 9)
Removing the cab door:

Pull the driver's seat fully to the front.
Unscrew the cover (A) on the left-hand side.
(Fig. 10)
10
Unscrew the panels (B and C).

Remove passenger seat. To do this, unscrew
cover (D).
Unscrew cover (L) and remove it.
(Fig. 10, 11)
11

Air conditioner
Loosen the two locks (V) and rotate by 90°.

Slightly swing the door (K) to the front and remove.
(Fig. 12)
12
Disconnect cable plug (E).

Unscrew bracket (M) from brace (N).
(Fig. 13)
13
Unscrew air conditioner hoses (O) and plug

at both ends using plugs.
Unscrew protective tube (P) from support (Q).
Unscrew air conditioning compressor from the
support (Q) and remove completely with protective
tube (P).
(Fig. 14)
14

Air conditioner
Installing the air conditioning compressor

1. Screw air conditioning compressor with protective
tube (P) to support (Q).
2. Screw air conditioner hoses (O) to air conditioning
compressor.
CAUTION!
Make absolutely sure to use new O-rings.

15
3. Install and adjust compressor drive belt (2).
4. Connect cable plug (E).
5. Screw down protective tube (P) to brace (N)
by means of bracket (M).
(Fig. 15, 16)
16
6. Install the cab door.

On DOMINATOR 98 VX
(MERCEDES OM 366 LA)
and on DOMINATOR 108 VX:
Insert door (K) and fasten using the locks (V).
Insert cover (L) and screw down.
Install passenger seat (if provided).
Screw down cover (D).
(Fig. 17, 18)
17
18

Air conditioner
Screw down panels (B and C).

Screw down cover (A) at the left-hand side.
(Fig. 18, 19)
19
7. Check / fill up refrigerant oil level

on the air conditioning compressor.
9. Install compressor drive belt (2) and adjust.
Removing the electro-magnetic clutch

of the air conditioning compressor
Remove compressor drive belt (2).
Push air conditioning compressor upwards
and bolt down to tensioning screw (A).
(Fig. 20)
20
Unscrew dust cap (2).

(Fig. 21, 30)
21

Air conditioner
Unscrew the thrust plate (C). Use special

tool for backing up.
Special tool:
Hole wrench, Part No. 181 624.0
(Fig. 22)
22
Pull off thrust plate (C) using a special tool.

(Fig. 23)
23
Special tool (self-manufactured):

A = dia. 60 mm
B = 7 mm
C = dia. 35 mm
D = dia. 46 mm
E = 3 x 120°
F = 10 mm
G = M 14 x 1.5
1 Hexagon bolt M 14 x 1.5 x 50 DIN 961-8.8
Part No. 233 634.0
3 Hexagon inch-size bolt, ¼" - 20 x 1¼"
24
(Fig. 24)

Air conditioner
Remove dust cap (3) using a screwdriver.

(Fig. 25, 30)
25
Remove outer snap ring (E).

(Fig. 26)
26
Pull off V-belt pulley (F) completely with its bearing,

using a special tool.
Special tool:
Tube, outer dia. 38 mm, inner dia. 31 mm, 35 mm long
(self-manufactured)
Washer, outer dia. 38 mm, inner dia. 6 mm,
2 mm thick (self-manufactured)
ATTENTION!
27 Absolutely no axial pressure may be exerted

on the air conditioner compressor shaft!
(Fig. 27)

Air conditioner
Take out outer snap ring (G).

(Fig. 28)
28
Loosen cable clamp and remove magnet (H).
CAUTION!
If no connector is provided on the magnet (H),

the cable (K) has to be cut.
(Fig. 29)
29

Air conditioner
30
Air conditioning compressor Sanden Sd 5h 14,
exploded view
1 Compressor
2 Dust cap
3 Dust protection
4 Electro-magnetic clutch
5 Assembly set
6 Seal set
7 Seal set
(Fig. 30)

Air conditioner
Installing the electro-magnetic clutch

of the air conditioning compressor
(Air conditioning compressor Sanden Sd 5h 14)
1. Connect cable plug with cable (K).
2. Place magnet in position and fasten cable (K)
with cable clamp.
3. Insert outer snap ring (G).
4. Drive on the V-belt pulley (F) carefully and
completely with its bearing, using a block-ended
tube and secure with an outer snap ring (E).
31
Tube, outer dia. 46 mm, inner dia. 41 mm,
100 mm long (self-manufactured)
(Fig. 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31)
5. Insert dust protection (3) into V-belt pulley (F)

and drive in carefully using a block-ended tube
if necessary.
Tube, outer dia. 60 mm, inner dia. 52 mm,
(Fig. 30, 32)
32
6. Push on existing washers (S)

on the air conditioning compressor shaft.
Insert curved washer (L).
(Fig. 33)
33

Air conditioner
7. Push on thrust plate (C) and slightly pre-tension

with hexagon nut.
8. Measure the clearance between thrust plate (C)
and V-belt pulley (F) using a feeler gauge.
Target value = 0.4 – 0.8 mm
Loosen hexagon nut if necessary and shim
with washers (S).
9. Tighten hexagon nut.
(Fig. 33, 34)
34
10. Put on dust cap (2). Screw in hexagon bolts

using liquid screw fastener, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
11. Install compressor drive belt (2) and adjust.
(Fig. 30, 35)
35

Air conditioner
Air conditioning compressor – removing

the cylinder head / cylinder head gasket
Remove the air conditioning compressor.
Screw out oil filler plug (B) and drain refrigerant oil.
Unscrew cylinder head bolts (C).
(Fig. 36)
36
Remove the cylinder head (D) and the valve plate (E)
from the compressor body, using a flat tool.
ATTENTION!
Sealing faces must not be damaged

in this process.
(Fig. 37, 38)
37
38

Air conditioner
Air conditioning compressor – installing

the cylinder head / cylinder head gasket
NOTE: Clean compressor body, cylinder head (D)
and valve plate (E) before assembling them.
Check sealing faces for damage.
1. Oil valve plate (E) and seal set (7) with refrigerant
oil SANDEN SP 20 and put them in place.
CAUTION!
The coined side of the valve plate (E)

must face the cylinder head (D).
2. Oil cylinder head (D) with refrigerant oil

SANDEN SP 20 at the sealing face and put
it in place.
39
(Fig. 30, 39, 40)
40
3. Insert cylinder head bolts (C) and tighten

in two steps in the prescribed order.
1st step: Torque setting = 20 Nm
2nd step: Torque setting = 32 Nm
4. Check / fill up refrigerant oil level on the air
conditioning compressor.
5. Install air conditioning compressor.
(Fig. 36, 41)
41

Air conditioner
Air conditioning compressor – removing

the shaft seal
Remove air conditioning compressor.
Unscrew dust cap (2).
(Fig. 30, 42)
42
Unscrew thrust plate (C). Use special tool for backing

up.
Special tool:
Hole wrench, Part No. 181 624.0
(Fig. 43)
43
Pull off thrust plate (C) using a special tool.

(Fig. 44)
44
Special tool (self-manufactured):

A = dia.60 mm
B = 7 mm
C = dia. 35 mm
D = dia. 46 mm
E = 3 x 120°
F = 10 mm
G = M 14 x 1.5
1 Hexagon bolt M 14 x 1.5 x 50 DIN 961-8.8
Part No. 233 634.0
3 Hexagon inch-size bolt, ¼" - 20 x 1¼"
45
(Fig. 45)

Air conditioner
Remove curved washer (L) as well as washers (S)

from the air conditioning compressor shaft.
(Fig. 46)
46
Take out dirt scraper (A) as well as snap ring (R).

(Fig. 47, 48)
47
48
Pull out shaft seal (6) using a special tool.

(Fig. 30, 49)
49

Air conditioner
Air conditioning compressor – installing

the shaft seal
NOTE: Deburr and clean the air conditioning
compressor shaft before assembling the unit.
Clean body shaft.
1. Oil the shaft seal (6) with refrigerant oil

SANDEN SP 20 and insert using a special tool.
Use a guide sleeve (D) to do this.
(Fig. 30, 50)
50
2. Insert snap ring (R) as well as dirt scraper (A).

(Fig. 48, 51)
51
3. Push existing washers (S) on the air conditioning

compressor shaft.
Insert curved washer (L).
(Fig. 52)
52

Air conditioner
4. Push on thrust plate (C) and slightly pre-tension

using the hexagon nut.
5. Measure the clearance between thrust plate (C)
and V-belt pulley (F) using a feeler gauge.
Target value = 0.4 – 0.8 mm
Loosen hexagon nut if necessary and shim
with washers (S).
6. Tighten hexagon nut.
(Fig. 52, 53)
53
7. Put on dust cap (2). Screw in hexagon bolts using

liquid screw fastener, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
8. Check / fill up refrigerant oil level on the air
conditioning compressor.
9. Install air conditioning compressor.
(Fig. 30, 54)
54
Removing the expansion valve

Suck off refrigerant at the connections (D, delivery
side and S, suction side) of the air conditioning com-
pressor. Proceed very slowly in order to avoid any
refrigerant oil being sucked off as well (comply with
the manufacturer's instructions).
(Fig. 55)
55
Remove the air diffuser (V).

(Fig. 56)
56

Air conditioner
Carefully remove the heavy-duty insulating tape (A)

from the expansion valve (4) and from the line
connections.
(Fig. 57, 60)
57
Carefully pull off the temperature sensor

mounting bracket (H) from the suction line (22).
(Fig. 58)
58
Pull out temperature sensor (T) from the

evaporator (2).
Unscrew the discharge line (21) from the expansion
valve (4) and plug at both ends using plugs.
(Fig. 59, 60)
59

Air conditioner
Air conditioner
60
Air conditioner (cab side), exploded view 22 Suction line
O-ring 14 x 1.78-n DIN 3771
1 Air conditioning / heating box
O-ring 17 x 1.8-n DIN 3771
1 Housing top
23 Pipe clamp
1 Housing bottom
24 Hexagon bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
2 Evaporator
Hexagon bolt M 6 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
Heating battery
3 Mounting angle
Contact washer B 6
4 Expansion valve
26 Insert
5 Thermostat
6 Hexagon bolt M 6 x 16 DIN 933-8.8 (Fig. 60)
Contact washer B 6
7 Washer 6.4 DIN 9021
8 Turn switch
10 Contact washer B 6
11 Spacer ring
12 Filter mat
13 Grid
14 Hose
15 Pipe clamp
16 Edge protector
17 Insulating strip
Heavy-duty insulating tape
18 Cable ring
19 Cable ring
20 Hose
21 Pressure line
O-ring 7.65 x 1.78-n DIN 3771

Air conditioner
Air conditioner
Installing the expansion valve

1. Screw the discharge line (21) to the expansion
valve (4), using a new O-ring.
2. Push temperature sensor (T) into the
evaporator (2) and fasten on the suction line (22)
using the mounting bracket (H).
(Fig. 60, 61)
61
3. Insulate bare metal parts of the expansion

valve (4) and of the line connections with
heavy-duty insulating tape (A).
NOTE: Insulating the metal parts avoids
the formation of condensation water.
(Fig. 60, 62)
62
4. Screw down the air diffuser (V).

(Fig. 63)
63
Removing the thermostat

Unscrew the air diffuser (V).
(Fig. 64)
64

Air conditioner
Pull off turn switch (8) the remove thermostat (5)

from the panel (A).
(Fig. 60, 65, 66)
65
Pull off cable plug from thermostat (5).

(Fig. 60, 66)
66
Remove cable band (B) and carefully

pull out cable ring (C).
(Fig. 67)
67
Carefully pull out capillary tube (D) from the

evaporator (2).
ATTENTION!
The capillary tube (D) may in no case

be pulled out by force and must not be bent.
(Fig. 60, 68)
68

Air conditioner
Installing the thermostat

1. Bend the capillary tube (D) of the thermostat (5)
at approx. 200 mm from its end by 90° and
carefully push it into the evaporator (2) together
with the cable ring (C) and fasten it with cable
band (B).
ATTENTION!

be pushed in by force and must not be bent.
69
(Fig. 60, 69, 70)
70
2. Connect cable plug to thermostat (5).

(Fig. 60, 71, 72)
71
72

Air conditioner
3. Screw thermostat (5) to the panel (A) and push

on turn switch (8).
(Fig. 60, 71, 73)
73
4. Install air diffuser (V).

(Fig. 74)
74
Removing the evaporator

refrigerant oil being sucked off as well.
(Fig. 75)
75
Unscrew the air diffuser (V).

(Fig. 76)
76

Air conditioner
Pull off turn switch (8) then remove thermostat (5)

from the panel (A).
(Fig. 60, 77)
77
Pull off cable plug from thermostat (5).

(Fig. 60, 78)
78
Carefully remove the heavy-duty insulating tape (R)

from the expansion valve (4) and from the line
connections.
In case of heating:
Mark heating hoses (P), loosen them and pull off
of the heating battery. Collect any draining cooling
liquid.
(Fig. 60, 79)
79
Pull off condensation water hoses (14) on the

right-hand side and (20) on the left-hand side from
the air conditioning / heating box (1).
Unscrew suction line (22) from the air conditioning /
heating box (1) and discharge line (21) from the
expansion valve (4) and plug these lines at both ends.
Unscrew air conditioning / heating box (1) from the cab
roof on the left- and right-hand side at (U) and remove.
(Fig. 60, 79, 80)
80

Air conditioner
Unscrew housing bottom (M) from air conditioning /

heating box (1).
Cut off sealant (silicone) with a knife and remove
housing bottom (M).
(Fig. 60, 81)
81
Remove cable band (B) and carefully pull out

cable ring (C).
Carefully pull out capillary tube (D) from the
evaporator (2).
ATTENTION!

be pulled out by force and must not be bent.
Carefully pull off the temperature sensor mounting

82
bracket (H) and pull temperature sensor (T) out of
the evaporator (2).
Unscrew expansion valve (4) and plug at both ends.
(Fig. 60, 82)
Unscrew evaporator (2) and pull out of the

air conditioning / heating box (1).
(Fig. 60, 83)
83

Air conditioner
Installing the evaporator

1. Insert the evaporator (2) into the air conditioning /
heating box (1) and screw down.
(Fig. 60, 84)
84
2. Push temperature sensor (T) into the

evaporator (2).
3. Bolt the expansion valve (4) to the evaporator (2),
using a new O-ring, and fasten temperature
sensor (T) with the temperature sensor mounting
bracket (H).
(Fig. 60, 85)
85
4. Bend the capillary tube (D) of the thermostat (5)

at approx. 200 mm from its end by 90° and
carefully push it into the evaporator (2) together
with the cable ring (C) and fasten it with cable
band (B).
ATTENTION!
The capillary tube (D) may in no case be

pushed in by force and must not be bent.
86 (Fig. 60, 82, 86)

Air conditioner
5. Screw the housing bottom (M) to the air

conditioning / heating box (1) and seal with
sealant (silicone).
(Fig. 60, 87)
87
6. Screw down air conditioning / heating box (1) to

the cab roof on the left- and right-hand side at (U).
7. Mount suction line (22) to the air conditioning /
heating box (1) and discharge line (21) to the
expansion valve (4), using new O-rings.
8. Push on condensation water hoses (14) on the
right-hand side and (20) on the left-hand side
to the air conditioning / heating box (1).
9. Insulate bare metal parts of the expansion
valve (4) and of the line connections with
heavy-duty insulating tape (R).
88
NOTE: Insulating the metal parts avoids
the formation of condensation water.
10. In case of heating:
Push on heating hoses (P) on the heating battery
according to the marks and fasten with hose
clamps.
(Fig. 60, 88, 89)
89

Air conditioner
11. Connect cable plugs to the thermostat (5).

(Fig. 60, 90, 91)
90
91
12. Screw down thermostat (5) to panel (A) and push

on turn switch (8).
(Fig. 60, 92)
92
13. Bolt down air diffuser (V).

(Fig. 93)
93

Air conditioner
14. In case of heating:

Fill in coolant at the filler plug (E) up to the edge.
K = Water level control orifice
Re-check coolant level and top up if required.
(Fig. 94)
94
Removing the filter drier

refrigerant oil being sucked off as well.
(Fig. 95)
95
Remove discharge line (7) and hose (9) from the filter
drier and plug lines at both ends.
Disconnect cable plug from the low-pressure
switch (1) and from the high-pressure switch (6).
Loosen hose clamp (8) and remove filter drier.
(Fig. 96, 99)
96
Unscrew high-pressure switch (6) from the filter drier.

NOTE: The high-pressure switch (6) may also
be replaced with the air conditioner filled and without
losing refrigerant.
(Fig. 97, 99)
97

Air conditioner
Unscrew the low-pressure switch (1) from the filter

drier.
(Fig. 98, 99)
98
Filter drier, exploded view

1 Low-pressure switch
2 O-ring 7.65 x 1.78-n DIN 3771
3 Container
4 Angle
5 Wiring loom
6 High-pressure switch
7 Pressure line
8 Hose clamp As 60-80 / 12-c7 DIN 3017
9 Hose
10 Bracket
99 (Fig. 99)
Installing the filter drier

1. Mount the low-pressure switch (1) to the filter
drier, using a new O-ring.
(Fig. 99, 100)
100
2. Mount the high-pressure switch (6) to the filter

drier.
(Fig. 99, 101)
101

Air conditioner
3. Fasten filter drier at the bracket (10) using

the hose clamp (8).
4. Connect cable plug to the low-pressure switch (1)
and the high-pressure switch (6).
5. Mount the pressure line (7) and the hose (9) to the
filter drier, using new O-rings.
6. Top up refrigerant oil.
(Fig. 99, 102)
102

Chaff spreader
Chaff spreader
CHAFF SPREADER
Removing the chaff spreader flange housing

Unscrew the cover plate (47).
(Fig. 1, 23)
Unscrew hexagon bolts (1) and remove blower (2).

(Fig. 2, 23)
Unscrew hexagon bolts (23) and remove housing (24)

completely.
(Fig. 3, 23)

Chaff spreader
Dismantling the chaff spreader flange housing

Unscrew hexagon bolt (30) from the front.
Remove bevel gear (27), key (26) and spacer
tube (31).
(Fig. 4, 23)
Pull housing (24) off of the disk (4).

(Fig. 5, 23)
Take circlip (21) out of the housing (24).

(Fig. 6, 23)
Drive deep groove ball bearing (32) out of the

housing (24) using a punch and remove spacer
ring (22).
(Fig. 7, 23)

Chaff spreader
8
Assembling the chaff spreader flange housing
1. Insert circlip (21) into the housing (24).
2. Press deep groove ball bearing (32) and spacer
ring (22) into the housing (24) using a special tool.
(Fig. 8, 9)

Chaff spreader
Special tool:
1 Hexagon bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8,
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Puller shoe, Part No. 181 836.0
3 Tube, inside dia. 35 mm, outside dia. 45 mm,
4 Axial grooved ball bearing,
Part No. 177 899.0
5 Hexagon nut M 16 with collar,
Part No. 244 059.0
(Fig. 10)
10
6. Push disk (4) along with spacer tube (31) into the
housing (24).
7. Insert spacer tube (31) and key (26).
8. Push on bevel gear (27) and bolt down at the front
with washer (28), spring washer (29) and hexagon
bolt (30).
(Fig. 8, 11, 23)
11

Chaff spreader
Installing the chaff spreader flange housing

1. Loosely bolt the pre-assembled housing (24)
to the channel (35) using hexagon bolts (23).
(Fig. 8, 12, 23)
12
2. When measuring the torsional backlash

(0.3 to 0.5 mm), the measuring point must be
in the area of the reference diameter of the bevel
gear (27).
If necessary, set the bevel gear (27) higher
or lower at (A) using shim plates (24).
3. Cover the faces of teeth of the bevel gears (27)
with pattern identification paste and check
the pattern by means of the imprints.
Example:
13 A = Initial setting
B = Required correction
C = Correct setting
If necessary, beat off gib head key (25) of the
bevel gear (27) and dislocate the bevel gear (27)
slightly on the shaft (45).
4. Rub bevel gears (27) with solid lubricant paste,
e.g. Molykote G-n plus and apply multipurpose
grease, e.g. CLAAS multipurpose grease EP 2
to bevel gears (27).
(Fig. 8, 13, 14, 23)
14
5. Bolt down blower (2) to the disk (4) by means

of hexagon bolts (1).
6. Install cover plate (47).
(Fig. 15, 23)
15

Chaff spreader
Removing the chaff spreader drive shaft

Remove cover plate (47).
(Fig. 16, 23)
16
Remove chaff spreader drive belt (16).

Remove the key from V-belt pulley (B) on the
shaft (45) and pull off using a suitable puller.
(Fig. 17, 23)
17
Unscrew guard (C).

(Fig. 18)
18
Loosen the lock collar (15) of lock collar bearing (17).

Unscrew the sheet metal flanges (16) from
the channel (35).
(Fig. 19, 23)
19

Chaff spreader
Unscrew sheet metal flanges (16) from the

channel (35) and remove the shaft (45) completely
from the channel (35).
(Fig. 20, 23)
20
Dismantling the chaff spreader drive shaft

Remove the key of bevel gears (27) on the shaft (45)
and pull off bevel gears (27).
(Fig. 21, 23)
21
Loosen the lock collars (15) and pull off lock collar
bearings (17) along with sheet metal flanges (16)
from the shaft (45).
(Fig. 22, 23)
22

Chaff spreader
23
Chaff spreader, exploded view:
Spring washer 6
Contact washer A 6
Lock nut VM 6
2 Blower, left-hand
Blower, right-hand
3 Guard, left-hand
Guard, right-hand
4 Washer
Contact washer A 6
6 Bracket
Contact washer A 10
8 Pin
11 Bearing
12 Spring clip
Contact washer A 8
14 Washer
15 Lock collar
16 Sheet metal flange
17 Lock collar bearing Yen 205-s

Chaff spreader
18 Thrust washer
19 Plastic bushing
20 Thrust washer
21 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472
22 Spacer ring
Contact washer A 8
24 Housing
Shim plate
25 Gib head key 8 x 7 x 36 DIN 6887
26 Key A 8 x 7 x 32 DIN 6885
27 Bevel gear
28 Washer
29 Spring washer 8
31 Spacer tube
32 Deep groove ball bearing 6005-2rs
33 Bearing
34 Grease nipple As 6 x 1 DIN 71412
35 Channel
37 Cover
38 Locking plate
39 Toggle nut N 100 M 12 DIN 99
41 Washer 13
42 Handle
43 Spacer tube
44 Mushroom head bolt M 8 x 16 x 10 DIN 603-8.8
Contact washer A 8
45 Shaft
Washer 6.4 DIN 125
Contact washer A 6
47 Cover
48 Edge protection
49 Hose clamp
(Fig. 23)

Chaff spreader
Assembling the chaff spreader drive shaft

1. Loosely pre-assemble the shaft (45) with lock
collar bearings (17), sheet metal flanges (16)
and lock collars (15).
2. Pre-assemble bevel gears (27) on the shaft (45),
set to the adjusting dimension (X) and arrest using
gib head keys (25).
Adjusting dimension (X) = 490 mm
(Fig. 8, 24)
Installing the chaff spreader drive shaft

1. Lift the pre-assembled shaft (45) into the
channel (35) and bolt down inside sheet metal
flanges (16) with spacer tubes (43).
(Fig. 8, 23, 24)
24
2. Bolt down the sheet metal flanges (16) with lock

collar bearing (17) at the side to channel (35).
(Fig. 8, 23, 25)
25

Chaff spreader
3. When determining the torsional backlash

gear (27).
If necessary, set the bevel gear (27) higher
or lower at (A) using shim plates (24).
with pattern identification paste and check the
pattern by means of the imprints.
Example:
26 A = Initial setting
C = Correct setting
If necessary dislocate bevel gears (27)
by dislocating the housing (24) in the elongated
holes of the channel (35).
5. Arrest lock collar bearings (17) using lock
collars (15).
(Fig. 8, 23, 26, 27)
27
7. Bolt down guard (C).

8. Drive V-belt pulley (B) on shaft (45), align it and
arrest using a gib head key.
(Fig. 8, 28)
28
9. Install cover plate (47).

10. Install chaff spreader drive belt (16) and adjust it.
(Fig. 8, 29)
29

Chaff spreader

Chaff spreader drive
CHAFF SPREADER DRIVE
Removing the chaff spreader drive bracket

Remove straw walker drive belt (11).
Remove intensive separation system drive belt (12).
Remove keys of V-belt pulley (10) on the shaft (26)
and pull V-belt pulley off.
(Fig. 1, 18)
Loosen the set collar (28) from the jockey pulley

arm (30) and remove the jockey pulley arm (30)
completely.
Unscrew the cover (A) at the hinges.
(Fig. 1, 2, 18)
Unscrew the bracket (34) from the machine side wall.

(Fig. 3, 18)

Dismantling the chaff spreader drive bracket

Remove circlips (24) from the bracket (34).
(Fig. 4, 18)
Drive shaft (26) out of bracket (34) together with deep

groove ball bearing (25), using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 5, 18)
Pull off deep groove ball bearing (25) from the

shaft (26) using a puller.
(Fig. 6, 18)
Drive front deep groove ball bearing (25) out of the

bracket (34) using a tube of outside dia. 40 mm,
inside dia. 30 mm and a length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 7, 18)

Assembling the chaff spreader drive bracket

1. Drive deep groove ball bearing (25) on the
shaft (26) using a tube of outside dia. 40 mm,
(Fig. 8, 18)
2. Drive shaft (26) into the bracket (34) using a tube

of outside dia. 60 mm, inside dia. 50 mm and
a length of 150 mm.
3. Insert front circlip (24) into the bracket (34).
(Fig. 9, 18)
4. Drive rear deep groove ball bearing (25) into the

bracket (34) and at the same time on the
shaft (26) using a tube of outside dia. 40 mm,
5. Insert rear circlip (24) into the bracket (34).
(Fig. 10, 18)
10
Installing the chaff spreader drive bracket

1. Bolt the bracket (34) down to the machine side
wall.
(Fig. 11, 18)
11

2. Bolt down the cover (A) at the hinges.

3. Push on the complete jockey pulley arm (30) and
secure with lock collar (28).
(Fig. 1, 12, 18)
12
4. Align V-belt pulley (10) and fasten it by gib head

key (44) on the shaft (26).
5. Install and adjust intensive separation system
drive belt (12).
6. Install and adjust straw walker drive belt (11).
7. Install and adjust chaff spreader drive belt (16).
Removing the chaff spreader drive jockey

pulley
Loosen the lock collar (28) from the jockey pulley
arm (30) and remove the jockey pulley arm (30)
completely from the bracket (34).
(Fig. 13, 18)
13
Dismantling the chaff spreader drive jockey pulley

Unscrew hexagon bolt (23) and remove jockey
pulley (16, assembled).
Remove circlip (20) from the jockey pulley (17).
(Fig. 14, 18)
14

Pull pin (21) out of jockey pulley (17) together with

deep groove ball bearing (19), using a special tool.
(Fig. 15, 18)
15
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Hexagon flange nut M 16
Part No. 244 059.0
3 Axial grooved ball bearing
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Reducing section
Part No. 181 933.0
5 Washer
16.5 mm x 65 mm x 5 mm
6 Tube
16 Inside dia. 50 mm, outside dia. 60 mm,
(Fig. 16)
Remove circlip (18) and drive pin (21) out of the deep
groove ball bearing (19).
(Fig. 17, 18)
17

18
Chaff spreader drive, exploded view: 32 Grease nipple As 6 x 1 DIN 71412
33 Hex. bolt M 8 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
1 V-belt pulley
Contact washer A 8
Hex. nut M 8 DIN 934
3 Hex. bolt M 6 x 16 DIN 933-8.8
34 Bracket
Contact washer A 6
Hinge
36 Hex. bolt M 8 x 55 DIN 931-8.8
6 Linkage
Contact washer A 8
7 Cotter pin 2 x 18 DIN 1234
8 Guard
37 Bushing
10 V-belt pulley
38 Guard
15 V-belt pulley
40 Plug
16 Jockey pulley, assembled
41 Washer
17 Jockey pulley
42 Bracket
18 Circlip 20 x 1.2 DIN 471
43 Plug
44 Gib head key
20 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472
21 Pin R 11 = Straw walker drive belt (11)
22 Contact washer B 12 R 16 = Chaff spreader drive belt (16)
23 Hex. nut M 12 DIN 934
24 Circlip 62 x 2 DIN 472 (Fig. 18)
26 Shaft
28 Lock collar
29 Tension spring
30 Bracket
31 Bushing

Assembling the chaff spreader drive jockey pulley

pin (21) using a tube of inside dia. 22 mm,
outside dia. 28 mm and a length of 150 mm.
2. Place circlip (18) in position.
(Fig. 18, 19)
19
3. Drive pre-assembled pin (21) into the jockey

pulley (17) using a tube of inside dia. 35 mm,
4. Insert circlip (20).
(Fig. 18, 20)
20
5. Bolt down jockey pulley (16) to the jockey pulley

arm (30) with contact washer (22) and hexagon
nut (23).
Torque setting = 78 Nm
(Fig. 18, 21)
21
Installing the chaff spreader drive jockey

pulley
1. Install complete jockey pulley arm (30) to the
bracket (34) and secure with lock collar (28).
2. Install chaff spreader drive belt (16) and adjust it.
(Fig. 18, 22)
22


Cleaning fan
Cleaning fan
CLEANING FAN
Removing the bearings to the right-hand and
left-hand side of cleaning fan
Left-hand side of machine:
Remove fan variable-speed drive (spring-loaded).
Right-hand side of machine:

Remove guard (R).
Fold down hinged bottom plate (B).
(Fig. 1)

Unscrew magnetic pick-up (J) together with bracket.
(Fig. 2)

Determine the clearance between shaft end and cam
wheel (P) by means of a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 3)

Cleaning fan

Release the safety of cam wheel (P) and pull off
of the shaft using a puller.
(Fig. 4)
DOMINATOR 108 VX:

Remove cotter pin from face-end slotted nut (7) of
the self-aligning ball bearing (4) and loosen using
a special tool.
DOMINATOR 98 – 88 VX:
Remove cotter pin from face-end slotted nut (7) of the
self-aligning ball bearing (4) and loosen using a sickle
spanner.
(Fig. 5, 11)
Special tool:
1 Tube
Part No. 181 611.0
2 Special socket spanner
Part No. 180 142.0
1
(Fig. 6)
2
32030 6
Loosen the taper lock adapter sleeve (2) of the

self-aligning ball bearing (4) using a block-ended tube.
(Fig. 7, 11)

Cleaning fan
Unscrew bearing shell (5).

(Fig. 8, 11)
Support the shaft using a piece of squared timber (K).

Mark bearing plate (1) at the suspension (D) and
unscrew.
(Fig. 9, 11)
Remove self-aligning ball bearing (4) from the shaft

together with bearing shell (3), pull off if necessary.
(Fig. 10, 11)
10

Cleaning fan
Self-aligning ball bearing, exploded view

1 Bearing plate
2 Taper lock adapter sleeve
3 Bearing shell
Felt strip
4 Self-aligning ball bearing 1208 kc/3 DIN 630
(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Self-aligning ball bearing 1207 kc/3 DIN 630
(DOMINATOR 98 – 88 VX)
5 Bearing shell
Felt strip
6 Circlip
24744 11 7 Face-end slotted nut M 40 x 1.5 (M 35 x 1.5)
8 Mushroom head bolt M 8 x 20 DIN 603-8.8
Mushroom head bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 603-8.8
Contact washer A 8
(Fig. 11)
Installing the bearings to the right-hand and

left-hand side of cleaning fan
Push self-aligning ball bearing (4) on the shaft together
with bearing shell (3).
Bolt down bearing plate (1) to suspension (D)
according to the marking.
(Fig. 11, 12, 13)
12
Bolt down bearing shell (5) to the bearing plate (1)

together with bearing shell (3).
Remove piece of square timber (K).
(Fig. 11, 12, 13)
13

Cleaning fan
DOMINATOR 108 VX:

Pre-tighten the face-end slotted nut (7) of the
self-aligning ball bearing (4) with a tightening torque
of 25 Nm using a special tool.
Pre-tighten the face-end slotted nut (7) of the adapter
sleeve bearing with a tightening torque of 20 Nm using
a sickle spanner.
(Fig. 11, 14)
14
DOMINATOR 108 VX:

Turn the face-end slotted nut (7) of the self-aligning
ball bearing (4) further by 60° using a special tool.
Turn the face-end slotted nut (7) of the adapter sleeve
bearing further by 60° using a sickle spanner.
(Fig. 11, 15)
15
Special tool:
1 Tube
Part No. 181 611.0
Part No. 180 142.0
3 Angular-position measuring disc
Part No. 174 358.0
(Fig. 16)
40506 16
Turn the face-end slotted nut (7) further until the

circlip (6) matches the slot.
Secure face-end slotted nut (7).
(Fig. 11, 17)
17

Cleaning fan

Install magnetic pick-up (J) together with bracket.
Drive cam wheel (P) on the shaft according
to the measured dimension and secure it.
(Fig. 18)
18

Check setting of magnetic pick-up.
Check dimension = 1 ± 0.5 mm
(Fig. 19)
19

Install fan variable-speed drive (spring-loaded).
Install guard (R).
Fold up hinged bottom plate (B).
(Fig. 20)
20
Removing the fan blast reduction

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Unscrew fan guard (G).
(Fig. 21)
21

Cleaning fan
On the left-hand machine side, loosen and pull off

the two set collars (15) provided on the tie rods (12)
for changing the fan blast reduction setting.
(Fig. 22, 26)
22
Loosen the clamping bolts (5) in the plate halves (6).

Pull the bottom tie rods (12) out of the machine to the
right.
(Fig. 23, 26)
23
On the left-hand machine side, loosen and pull

off the set collars (15) which arrest the top tie
rods (13 and 14).
Loosen the clamping bolts (5) in the plate halves (6).
(Fig. 24, 26)
24
On the right-hand machine side, unscrew the bearing

angle (3) from the machine housing. Pull out the
tie rods (13 and 14) out of the machine to the right
completely with the bearing angle (3).
Remove the complete fan blast reduction plates from
the machine towards the bottom.
(Fig. 25, 26)
25

Cleaning fan
24764
26
Fan blast reduction, exploded view
DOMINATOR 108 VX
1 Ball head
3 Bearing angle
5 Hexagon bolt M 8 x 25rs DIN 933-8.8
6 Plate half
7 Ball knob
8 Bearing angle
9 Bearing
Contact washer A 6
11 Plate half
12 Tie rod
13 Tie rod
14 Tie rod
15 Set collar
Threaded pin
(Fig. 26)

Cleaning fan
Installing the fan blast reduction

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Place the assembled plates (6 and 11) of the fan blast
reduction laterally on the fan housing.
Push in tie rods (13 and 14). Push the left-hand plates
on tie rod (13, short right-angle bends) and the
right-hand plates on tie rod (14, long right-angle
bends).
Push on bearing angle (3) and loosely bolt to the frame
at (O) for the time being. Loosely screw one hexagon
bolt (5) each into the arms (A) of the plates and into
27
the bearings (L).
(Fig. 26, 27)
Place bearing angles (8) on the tie rods (12) and push
the tie rods through the existing bores at the bottom
of the fan housing and at the same time through the
arms (A) of the plates.
CAUTION!
The fan rotors must be installed.
Loosely screw one hexagon bolt (5) each into the

arms (A) and into the bearings at (U).
28
(Fig. 26, 28)
Screw ball heads (1) on the tie rods (13 and 14) and
lock with hexagon nuts (2).
If necessary, use washers at the mounting points of
the bearing angle (3) to allow the tie rods (13 and 14)
to be displaced without twisting.
(Fig. 26, 29)
29

Cleaning fan
Screw ball knobs (7) on the tie rods (12). If necessary,

use washers at the mounting points of the bearing
angle (8) to allow the tie rods (12) to be displaced
without twisting.
(Fig. 26, 30)
30
On the left-hand side, mount set collars (15) at

the ends of the tie rods at (C and D) and secure.
(Fig. 26, 31, 32)
31
32
Adjusting the fan blast reduction:

Manually push all plates tightly to the fan suction
opening (closed position).
Push in tie rods for left-hand and right-hand plates
almost fully.
Arrest tie rods using hexagon bolts (5) at the arms (A)
of the plates and tighten lock nuts (4).
(Fig. 26, 29, 33)
33

Cleaning fan
Removing the fan shaft

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove bearing on left-hand side of cleaning fan.
If fan blast reduction kit is fitted:
Remove fan blast reduction.
Remove guard (R).

Fold down hinged bottom plate (B).
(Fig. 34)
34
Disconnect cable plug from magnetic pick-up (W).

Mark bearing plate (L) and unscrew from
its suspension (A).
(Fig. 35)
35
Remove fan guard (G) and trough protection if fitted.

(Fig. 36)
36

Cleaning fan
Remove cotter pin from face-end slotted nut (6) of

the centre adapter sleeve bearing (4) and loosen using
a special tool.
To do this, block the fan shaft.
Special tool:
Adjusting tool for straw walker bearings,
Part No. 181 620.0.
Tool holder, Part No. 181 627.0.
(Fig. 37, 51)
37
Press against the bearing plate (1) with a hammer

from the right-hand side and beat against the fan shaft
from the left-hand side with a plastic-tip hammer to
loosen the taper lock adapter sleeve (3) of the adapter
sleeve bearing (4).
(Fig. 38, 39, 51)
38
39
Unscrew the hexagon bolts (K) from all three rotor

hubs.
(Fig. 40)
40

Cleaning fan
Spread apart the clamping rings of the three rotor

hubs, e.g. using a chisel.
(Fig. 41)
41
Emery the bare areas of the fan shaft and oil them.
Pull out the complete fan shaft including its right-hand
bearing from the fan rotors to the right-hand side.
(Fig. 42)
42
Remove bearing on the right-hand side of cleaning

fan.
CAUTION!
Before loosening the face-end slotted nut,

measure the clearance between shaft end and
the outer shoulder of the face-end slotted nut
using a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 43)
43
Installing the fan shaft

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Install bearing on the right-hand side of cleaning fan.
CAUTION!
Before tightening the face-end slotted nut,

observe the previously measured clearance.
(Fig. 43)

Cleaning fan
Push the pre-assembled fan shaft into the fan housing

from the right-hand side and guide it into the clamping
rings of the three rotor hubs and into the centre
adapter sleeve bearing (4).
(Fig. 44, 51)
44
Bolt down the bearing plate (L) to the suspension (A)

according to the markings.
Connect cable plug to the magnetic pick-up (W).
Install bearing on the left-hand side of cleaning fan.
(Fig. 45)
45
Pre-tighten the face-end slotted nut (6) of the centre

adapter sleeve bearing (4) with a tightening torque
of 25 Nm using a special tool.
Mark the face-end slotted nut (6) and turn further
by 60° using a special tool.
Turn the face-end slotted nut (6) further until
the circlip (5) matches the slot. Secure face-end
slotted nut (6).
Special tool:
Adjusting tool for straw walker bearings,
46 Part No. 181 620.0.
Torque wrench, Part No. 181 626.0.
(Fig. 46, 51)

Cleaning fan
Align the three fan rotors centrically in the fan

housings on the fan shaft and arrest using the
hexagon bolts (K).
(Fig. 47)
47
Bolt down fan guard (G) and trough guard if provided.

(Fig. 48)
48
If fan blast reduction kit is fitted:

Install fan blast reduction.
Install guard (R).
Fold up hinged bottom plate (B).
(Fig. 49)
49
Removing the centre cleaning fan bearing

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove fan shaft.
NOTE: Pull out fan shaft only as far as required to
release the centre bearing.
Unscrew the bearing plate (1) from the link (A).
(Fig. 50, 51)
50

Cleaning fan
Centre cleaning fan bearing, exploded view

1 Bearing plate
3 Taper lock adapter sleeve
4 Adapter sleeve bearing Pa 208 k
5 Circlip
6 Face-end slotted nut M 40 x 1.5
7 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer A 12
24750 51 (Fig. 51)
Installing the centre cleaning fan bearing

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Loosely pre-assemble the adapter sleeve bearing
and bolt it down to the link (A).
Install fan shaft.
(Fig. 51, 52)
52
Removing the fan rotors

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove fan shaft.
Push a thin rod (S) though the fan rotors as
a dismounting aid to prevent them from falling out.
Unscrew the separating walls (B) from the fan
housings.
(Fig. 53)
53
Pull out the rod (S) to the side and remove the fan
rotors (G) towards the bottom.
(Fig. 53, 54)
54

Cleaning fan
Installing the fan rotors

DOMINATOR 108 VX
1. Insert the fan rotors (G) from the bottom into the
fan housings and secure against falling out by
pushing in a thin rod (S).
2. Bolt the separating walls (B) down to the fan
housings.
3. Install fan shaft.
(Fig. 53, 54)
Removing the fan housing

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove fan rotors.
Unscrew the fan housing (D) at (E, F, and G) and
remove towards the bottom.
(Fig. 55)
55
Mark the position of levers (B).

Normal position:
Lower lever (B) 2nd hole from the bottom
Upper lever (B) 3rd hole from the bottom
Loosen hexagon bolts (S) and set wind boards fully
down using the levers (B).
(Fig. 56)
56
Left-hand and right-hand side of machine:

Unscrew hexagon bolts (R).
(Fig. 56)
57

Cleaning fan
Remove the fan channel (K) towards the bottom.

(Fig. 58)
58
Installing the fan housing

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Insert the fan channel (K) from the bottom and bolt
down to the machine housing on the left-hand and
right-hand side using hexagon bolts (R).
(Fig. 57, 58)
Install the levers (B) at the previously marked positions

using hexagon bolts (S).
Normal position:
Lower lever (B) 2nd hole from the bottom
Upper lever (B) 3rd hole from the bottom
(Fig. 59)
59
Bolt down fan housing (D) at (E, F, and G).

Install fan rotors.
(Fig. 60)
60

Cleaning fan
Removing the wind boards

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Unscrew the fan guard (G) below the cleaning fan.
Remove trough protection if fitted.
(Fig. 61)
61
Loosen the auger trough at the latches (G) and

remove the transverse plate (Q).
(Fig. 62)
62
Unscrew the wind boards (P) on the left-hand and

right-hand side from the adjusting lever and from
the bearing.
Remove wind boards (P) and the reinforcing profile
to the bottom.
(Fig. 63)
63
Installing the wind boards

DOMINATOR 108 VX
1. Bolt down the wind boards (P) and the reinforcing
profile on the left-hand and right-hand side to the
adjusting lever and to the bearing.
2. Install transverse plate (Q) and lock auger trough.
3. Install fan guard (G) and, if provided, trough guard
below the cleaning fan.
(Fig. 61, 62, 63)

Cleaning fan
Removing the fan shaft

DOMINATOR 98 – 88 VX
Remove bearing on right-hand side of cleaning fan.
On the left-hand side, unscrew the bearing shells (A)
from the suspension (L).
Loosen the adjusting screws of all fan spiders (C).
(Fig. 64)
64
Clean the fan shaft from dirt and paint over its entire
length and pull out to the left-hand side.
(Fig. 65)
65
Installing the fan shaft

1. Emery and oil the fan shaft and push it into the fan
housing from the left-hand side, introduce it into
the clamping hubs of the fan spiders.
2. Mount the bearing shells (A) to the suspension (L)
on the left-hand side.
3. Install bearing on the right-hand side of cleaning
fan.
4. Align the fan rotor centrically in the fan housing
and tighten the adjusting screws of all fan
spiders (C).
5. Install fan variable-speed drive (spring-loaded).
(Fig. 64, 65)

Cleaning fan
Removing the fan spiders

Remove fan shaft.
Unscrew the suspension (L) on the left-hand side.
(Fig. 66)
66
Mark fan spiders and unscrew from the fan blade.

Remove fan spiders to the side.
(Fig. 67)
67
Installing the fan spiders

1. Bolt fan spiders down to the fan blades.
Observe markings.
2. Install suspension (L) on left-hand side.
3. Install fan shaft.
(Fig. 66, 67)

Cleaning fan
Removing the fan rotor

Remove the bearing on the left-hand and right-hand
side of cleaning fan.
Remove panel (A). Remove the suspensions (L) on
the left-hand and right-hand side.
(Fig. 68)
68
Unscrew panel (C) and hinged bottom plate (D).

(Fig. 69)
69
Remove the side cover (E).

(Fig. 70)
70
Remove the fan rotor to the left-hand side.

(Fig. 71)
71

Cleaning fan
Installing the fan rotor

1. Lift the fan rotor into the fan housing from
the left-hand side.
2. Install side cover (E), hinged bottom plate (D)
and panel (C).
3. Install panel (A) and suspensions (L) on the
left-hand and right-hand side.
4. Install bearings on the left-hand and right-hand
side of cleaning fan.
5. Rotate the fan rotor manually.
CAUTION!
The fan rotor must not touch the fan housing.

If necessary, loosen the suspensions (L) and
displace within the elongated holes.
(Fig. 68, 69, 70, 71)
Fan blades
The fan blades and / or bars may now be replaced if
required.
CAUTION!
The fan rotor is balanced. Before unscrewing

the fan blades, mark them and observe any
possibly existing balancing weights.
72

(Fig. 72)

Cleaning fan
Removing the fan housing

Remove fan rotor.
Right-hand and left-hand side of machine:
Unscrew the front rocker arms (P) from the preparation
floor and from the machine side walls.
(Fig. 73)
73
Loosen the auger troughs at the latches (G) and

(Fig. 74)
74
Unscrew and remove the fan housing on both sides

from the machine side walls.
For better accessibility of the upper hexagon bolt
on the left-hand side, remove the left-hand stepped
preparation floor section of the preparation floor.
To do this, loosen two hooks (A) below the preparation
floor and pull out the stepped preparation floor section
to the rear.
(Fig. 75, 76)
75
76

Cleaning fan
Installing the fan housing

1. Push in the left-hand stepped preparation floor
section from the rear and fasten below the
preparation floor by means of two hooks (A).
2. Bolt down the fan housing on both sides
to the machine side walls.
3. Install transverse plate (Q).
4. Lock the auger troughs at the latches (G).
5. Right-hand and left-hand side of machine:
Install the front rocker arms (P) to the preparation
floor and to the machine side walls.
6. Install fan rotor.
(Fig. 73, 74, 75, 76)

Cleaning fan
Removing the wind boards

Loosen the auger troughs at the latches (G) and
(Fig. 77)
77
Unscrew the wind boards (P) on the left-hand and

right-hand side from the adjusting lever and from
the bearing.
Remove wind boards (P) to the bottom.
(Fig. 78)
78
Installing the wind boards

1. Bolt down the wind boards (P) on the left-hand
and right-hand side to the adjusting lever and
to the bearing.
2. Install transverse plate (Q) and lock auger trough.
(Fig. 77, 78)

Concave
Concave
CONCAVE
Removing the stone trap

Dismount the feeder housing.
Remove the drum inspection cover (T).
(Fig. 1)
Remove the concave segments (K).

(Fig. 2)
Unscrew gasket (D) from the concave frame.

(Fig. 3)
Unscrew four hexagon bolts on each of the right-hand

and left-hand sides.
(Fig. 4)

Concave
Raise the axle tube slightly in centre using a jack in

order to relieve the stress of the side panels of the
machine.
Lift out stone trap.
(Fig. 5)
Installing the stone trap

Lift the stone trap into the drum housing and bolt down
using four hexagon bolts on the right-hand and
left-hand side each.
(Fig. 6)
Bolt the gasket (D) on the concave frame.

Install three concave segments (K).
(Fig. 2, 3, 7)
Install drum inspection cover (T).

Install feeder housing.
(Fig. 1)

Concave
Removing the concave

Lower the concave completely.
Remove the stone trap.
If cover plates (G) are provided, dismount two opposite

plates.
(Fig. 8)
Unscrew rake behind concave and concave exit plate

if provided.
(Fig. 9)
Remove the rake behind concave and the concave

exit plate from the drum housing to the front.
(Fig. 10)
10

Concave
Unscrew side cover (P).

(Fig. 11)
11
Press deflector curtain (A) upwards and fix to the

concave frame by means of wire (B).
B
Place a squared timber behind it if needed.
A
(Fig. 12)
40441 12
Fix the concave frame to the threshing drum rasp bars

at four places using wire.
(Fig. 13)
13
Remove guard (W) and cover (S).

(Fig. 14)
14

Concave
Loosen lock nuts (U) and unscrew clamping bolts (M)

on both sides.
(Fig. 15)
15
Unscrew threaded bolt (O) completely with lock nuts

and Belleville springs on both sides.
(Fig. 16)
16
Remove end plates (R) on both sides.

(Fig. 17)
17
Remove threshing drum drive belt (24).

Concave
Loosen set collar (L) and remove jockey pulley

including jockey pulley arm.
(Fig. 18)
18
Remove the cotter pins (B) of the rear concave

suspension on both sides and remove washers.
(Fig. 19)
19
Drive the pins (Z) to the inside on both sides.

(Fig. 20)
20
Remove the sealing plates (C).

(Fig. 21)
21

Concave
Hang up the concave in a suitable lifting device and

raise until the fixing wires at the concave are relieved
from tension.
(Fig. 22)
22
Loosen the wires and lift the concave out to the front.
Unscrew the deflector curtain.
(Fig. 23)
23
Installing the concave

Screw down the deflector curtain to the concave.
Hang up the concave in a suitable lifting device and lift
into the drum housing.
Fix the concave to the threshing drum rasp bars at four
places and turn to the rear position.
Push the pins (Z) through the mounting plates (E) of
the rear concave suspension.
Insert sealing plates (C) and push pins (Z) in com-
pletely. Secure pins (Z) with washers and cotter
24 pins (B).
(Fig. 19, 24, 25)
25

Concave
Insert the end plates (R) on right-hand and left-hand

side and insert the threaded bolts (O) with two
Belleville springs (T) each.
CAUTION!
Install Belleville springs (T) so that a slight

resilient effect is obtained.
(Fig. 26)
26
Tighten the threaded bolts (O) until the Belleville

springs (T) are under a slight pressure.
Secure the threaded bolts (O) using clamping
bolts (M) and lock nuts (U).
(Fig. 26, 27)
27
Push the jockey pulley including the jockey pulley arm

on the shaft and secure by means of set collar (L).
(Fig. 28)
28
Install threshing drum drive belt (24) and adjust.

Concave
Bolt down the rake behind concave and, if provided,

the concave exit plate to the concave frame.
(Fig. 29)
29
If cover plates (G) are provided, fit the dismounted

covers.
(Fig. 30)
30
Basic setting of concave

Place the main adjusting lever (H) for concave setting
from the operator's platform in the third notch from the
top and the adjusting lever (V) in the narrowest
position (e).
(Fig. 31, 32)
31

Concave
32
Adjust the concave entrance (E) on the adjusting
screws (1) of the concave adjusting linkage on both
sides so that a clearance of 13 mm is obtained
between the third concave bar and the threshing
drum bar.
At the same time, adjust the concave exit (A) at the
adjusting screws (2) so that a clearance of 3 mm is
obtained between the third last concave bar and a
threshing drum bar. When this position has been
achieved, firmly secure the concave adjusting linkage
using the lock nuts.
33 (Fig. 32, 33)

Cutterbar drive
Cutterbar drive
CUTTERBAR DRIVE
Removing the cutterbar clutch

Unscrew hydraulic line (A) from the rotary trans-
mission leadthrough (10) and plug at both ends.
Unscrew rotary transmission leadthrough (10) from
the piston (7) and plug at both ends.
Collect any draining hydraulic oil.
For dismantling the rotary transmission
leadthrough (10) – see page 9.4.13, Dismantling the
rotary coupling for the cutterbar engagement.
(Fig. 1, 16)
1
Unscrew slotted nuts (9) using a special tool and back

up the rear slotted nut with a sickle spanner while
loosening the front slotted nut.
Remove the back-up ring (3) located behind it.
Special tool:
Socket wrench Part No. 181 809.0
(Fig. 2, 16)
Pull cylinder (2) off of hydraulic piston (41 or 51), but

do not use force and avoid jamming.
For dismantling the cylinder (2) – see page 9.4.20,
Dismantling the cutterbar engagement ram.
(Fig. 3, 16)

Cutterbar drive
Pull off six Belleville springs (46) from the hydraulic

piston (41 or 51). Observe installation position.
(Fig. 4, 16)
Unscrew hydraulic piston (41 or 51) from the V-belt

pulley (38).
NOTE: Up to serial no. ... the hydraulic piston (41)
has a separate mounting ring (42).
Remove cutterbar drive belt (1).
(Fig. 5, 16)
Remove V-belt pulley (38).

(Fig. 6, 16)
Remove clutch disk (33) with six compression

springs (31).
(Fig. 7, 16)

Cutterbar drive
Number the individual segments of the friction ring (30)

consecutively.
Pull out roughly half of the width of friction ring (30)
from the drive pulley (24). Tape the individual seg-
ments together with adhesive tape and remove friction
ring (30) completely.
CAUTION!
When re-using the friction ring (30), the

individual segments must not be mixed up.
8
(Fig. 8, 16)
Unscrew hexagon bolt (37) with washer (35) from the

face of shaft.
Loosen the conical joint of the clutch hub using
a block-ended tube. In doing so, the inside diameter
of the block-ended tube must extend over the tapered
ring (27).
(Fig. 9, 16)
Remove the front tapered ring (27) and pull off the
clutch hub using a special tool.
Remove key (34) and rear tapered ring (27).
(Fig. 10, 16)
10

Cutterbar drive
Special tool:
4
1 Puller bridge, small size
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 80 DIN 931-8.8
Part No. 235 525.0
3 Washer 8 DIN 125
4 Hexagon bolt
M 16 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
(head-centred)
1 3 2 Part No. 237 463.0
33482 11 (Fig. 11)
Pull off drive pulley (24) using a suitable puller.

Remove spacer ring (21) located behind it.
Unscrew jockey pulley (S).
(Fig. 12, 16)
12
Loosen the belt guard at (A, B and C).

(Fig. 13)
13
Loosen the conical joint of the V-belt pulley (52) using

a block-ended tube. In doing so, the inside diameter of
the block-ended tube must extend over the tapered
ring (53).
(Fig. 14, 16)
14

Cutterbar drive
Remove front tapered ring (53) and pull off V-belt

pulley (52) using a suitable puller.
Remove key (54) and rear tapered ring (53).
(Fig. 15, 16)
15

Cutterbar drive
16
Cutterbar clutch, exploded view
2 Cylinder
3 Back-up ring
4 O-ring 40.2 x 3 -n DIN 3771
5 O-ring 120.25 x 3.53 -n DIN 3771
6 Scraper ring
7 Piston
8 Back-up ring
9 Slotted nut M 35 x 1.5 DIN 70852
10 Rotary transmission leadthrough
11 Circlip 12 x 1 DIN 472
12 Step drive pulley
13 Slotted ring
14 Adapter
15 Thrust washer
17 Deep groove ball bearing 6000 z DIN 625
18 Spacer ring
20 Oil feed
21 Spacer ring
22 Deep groove ball bearing 6208-rs
24 Drive pulley
26 Supporting ring S 40 x 50 DIN 988
27 Tapered ring
28 Clutch, complete
30 Friction ring
31 Compression spring

Cutterbar drive
32 Inner spring
33 Clutch disk
34 Key A 12 x 8 x 45 DIN 6885
35 Washer
36 Circlip 16
38 V-belt pulley
39 Detent edged ring
40 Cheese-head screw M 8 x 25 DIN 4762-8.8
41 Hydraulic piston
(up to serial no. …)
42 Mounting ring
46 Belleville spring
47 O-ring 19.3 x 2.2 -n DIN 6149
(from serial no. …)
48 Back-up ring
50 Spacer ring
51 Hydraulic piston
52 V-belt pulley
53 Tapered ring
54 Key
R 1 = Cutterbar drive belt (1)

R 5 = Threshing mechanism drive belt (5)
R 7 = Sieve pan / fan intermediate drive belt (7)
(Fig. 16)

Cutterbar drive
17

Cutterbar drive
Installing the cutterbar clutch
NOTE:
Apply semi-fluid lubricant e.g. Dealit EP 00 to

all tapered ring joints and hub bores prior to
assembly.
1. Push on rear tapered ring (53) and insert key (54)

into the shaft.
2. Push V-belt pulley (52) on the shaft. Observe
18
installation position.
3. Push on front tapered ring (53) and spacer
ring (21) and pre-press using a special tool.
DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX:
DOMINATOR 108 VX:
CAUTION!
Back up by blocking the threshing drum at the

drum turning disc (D).
(Fig. 17, 18)
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 80 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 242 468.0
2 Washer (35) – existing
3 Spacer tube Part No. 629 176.0
4 Spacer ring (21) – existing
(Fig. 19)
19

Cutterbar drive
4. Remove spacer ring (21).

5. Determine the clearance (X) between the shaft
shoulder and the tapered ring (53). This clearance
must be at least 0.8 mm.
6. Push on spacer ring (21).
(Fig. 17, 20)
20
7. Insert two deep groove ball bearings (22) with

supporting ring (26) and circlip (23) into the drive
pulley (24). Fill the hollow space with multipurpose
grease, e.g. CLAAS multipurpose grease EP 2.
(Fig. 17, 21)
21
8. Install pre-assembled drive pulley (24) using a

special tool.
(Fig. 17, 22)
22

Cutterbar drive
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Hex. flange nut M16 DIN 6331-10
Part No. 244 059.0
4 Spacer tube
Part No. 629 176.0
(Fig. 23)
23

into the shaft.
10. Push clutch hub on the shaft.
11. Push on front tapered ring (27), screw in hexagon
bolt (37) with washer (35) and tighten.
DOMINATOR 108 VX:
24
CAUTION!
Back up by blocking the threshing drum at the

drum turning disc (D).
(Fig. 17, 24)
12. Unscrew hexagon bolt (37) with washer (35).

13. Determine the clearance (Y) between the shaft
shoulder and the tapered ring (27). This clearance
must be at least 0.8 mm.
14. Screw in hexagon bolt (37) with circlip (36) and
washer (35) and tighten to the above-mentioned
torques.
(Fig. 17, 24, 25)
25

Cutterbar drive
15. When installing a new friction ring (30), place the

individual segments together in the numbered
sequence around the inner spring (32) and tape
together using adhesive tape.
16. Place friction rings (30) on the clutch hub and pull
off tape.
CAUTION!
The friction surface of the clutch hub and of the

drive pulley (24) must be absolutely free from
26 grease.
(Fig. 17, 26)
17. Insert six compression springs (31) into the bores

of the clutch hub and push on clutch disk (33).
(Fig. 17, 27)
27
18. Place V-belt pulley (38) in position and bolt down

with cheese-head screws (40) and new detent
edged rings.
(Fig. 17, 28)
28

Cutterbar drive
19. Bolt down hydraulic piston (41 or 51) to the V-belt

pulley (38) with cheese-head screws (44) and
new detent edged rings.
NOTE: Up to serial no. ... the hydraulic piston (41)
has a separate mounting ring (42).
(Fig. 17, 29)
29
20. Apply semi-fluid lubricant, e.g. Dealit EP 00, to

six Belleville springs (46) and push them on the
hydraulic piston (41 or 51) in the installation
position shown.
(Fig. 17, 30)
30
21. Push pre-assembled cylinder (2) on the hydraulic

piston (41 or 51) without jamming.
22. Screw down slotted nuts (9) with back-up ring (8)
one by one and tighten to 150 Nm using a special
tool.
Special tool:
(Fig. 17, 31)
31

Cutterbar drive
23. Bolt down rotary transmission leadthrough (10) to

the piston (7).
24. Install hydraulic line (A) at the rotary transmission
leadthrough (10).
(Fig. 17, 32)
32
25. Install jockey pulley (S).

(Fig. 33)
33
26. Install cutterbar drive belt (1) and adjust it.

27. Start diesel engine.
28. Engage threshing mechanism.
29. Engage and disengage cutterbar drive several
times.
30. Check hydraulic oil level at the fresh air filter
element (R) of the hydraulic oil tank (P) and fill up
if required.
CAUTION!
34
After the test run, check the setting of the belt
guide and the belt tension and correct if
necessary.
(Fig. 34)

Cutterbar drive
Removing the front cutterbar drive pulley

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Loosen clamping bolt of clamping hub.
Slightly open the clamping hub using a chisel and pull
off pulley.
(Fig. 35)
35
Installing the front cutterbar drive pulley

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
1. Push on pulley, install cutterbar drive belt (1)
and adjust it.
2. Align the pulley using a straightedge.
3. Manually rotate the belt and check if it is in
alignment.
4. Firmly tighten the clamping bolt in the clamping
hub.
36
5. Install guard.
(Fig. 36)
Removing the front cutterbar drive pulley

(DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX)
Remove the keys from pulley and remove it.
(Fig. 37)
37

Cutterbar drive
Installing the front cutterbar drive pulley

1. Push on pulley, install cutterbar drive belt (1) and
adjust it.
2. Align the pulley using a straightedge.
3. Manually rotate the belt and check if it is in
alignment.
4. Arrest the pulley using a gib head key.
5. Install guard.
38 (Fig. 38)
Removing the cutterbar drive deflection pulley

Unscrew hexagon bolt (5) and remove deflection
pulley.
(Fig. 39, 40)
39
Cutterbar drive deflection pulley, exploded view

1 Deflection pulley
2 Circlip
3 Deep groove ball bearing
6305-2RS-C3 DIN 625
4 Hollow pin
5 Hexagon bolt
M 16 x 100 DIN 931-8.8
(Fig. 40)
40

Cutterbar drive
Installing the cutterbar drive deflection pulley

1. Bolt down the deflection pulley (1, pre-assembled)
to the bracket using hexagon bolt (5).
2. Install and adjust cutterbar drive belt (1).
(Fig. 40, 41)
41
Removing the cutterbar drive slip clutch

Jack up machine at the front left-hand side and
support safely below the drive axle.
Remove left-hand drive wheel.
Unscrew hexagon bolt (A).
(Fig. 42)
42
Pull off slip clutch completely with pulley (E), using

a suitable puller.
(Fig. 43)
43
Dismantling the cutterbar drive slip clutch

Remove securing wire.
(Fig. 44)
44

Cutterbar drive
Unscrew hexagon bolts (7).

(Fig. 45, 50)
45
Remove cover (4) and brake lining (2).

(Fig. 46, 50)
46
Loosen six hexagon bolts (B).

(Fig. 47, 50)
47
Remove clutch plate (3) and brake lining (2).

Pull out clutch hub (1).
(Fig. 48, 50)
48

Cutterbar drive
The bearing sleeves (C) can be forced out of the

hub (D) using a special tool.
Special tool:
Tube, inside dia. 52 mm, outside dia. 62 mm,
(Fig. 49)
49
Cutterbar drive slip clutch, exploded view:

1 Clutch hub
2 Brake lining
3 Clutch plate
4 Cover
6 Washer
7 Hex. bolt
M 10 x 50 SK DIN 931-8.8
(Fig. 50)
50
Assembling the cutterbar drive slip clutch

1. Press the bearing sleeves (C) into the hub (D)
(Fig. 49, 51)
51
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Hex. flange nut M 16 DIN 6331-10
Part No. 244 059.0
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Puller shoe
Part No. 181 836.1
5 Washer 16.5 mm x 65 mm x 5 mm
6 Tube
Inside dia. 52 mm, outside dia. 62 mm,
52 150 mm long (self-manufactured)
(Fig. 52)

Cutterbar drive
2. Insert clutch hub (1) into pulley (E).

3. Place brake lining (2) and clutch plate (3) in
position and tighten hexagon bolts (B).
4. Place brake lining (2) and cover (4) in position.
5. Screw in hexagon bolts (7) with washers (6) and
compression springs (5) so that the spring length
is 19 mm.
CAUTION!
53 The friction surfaces of the clutch hub (1), of

the clutch plate (3) and of the brake linings (2)
must be absolutely free from grease.
(Fig. 50, 53)
6. Let the slip clutch slip by two turns.

7. Check the slip torque of the slip clutch using a
special tool and if required use hexagon bolts (7)
to obtain even adjustment.
Slip torque = 330 Nm
8. Secure the hexagon bolts (7) with wire.
(Fig. 50, 54)
54
Special tool:
Test mandrel, Part No. 181 835.1
(Fig. 55)
38191 55

Cutterbar drive
9. Seal brake linings (2) with paint at (X).

(Fig. 50, 56)
X
X
33394
56
Installing the cutterbar drive slip clutch

1. Place the slip clutch on the shaft completely with
the pulley (E) and install using a special tool.
(Fig. 57)
57
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Hex. flange nut M 16 DIN 6331-10
Part No. 244 059.0
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Washer
16.5 mm x 65 mm x 5 mm
5 4 3 2 1 5 Tube
33443 150 mm long (self-manufactured)
58
(Fig. 58)
2. Screw in hexagon bolt (A) with washer and

contact washer and tighten.
4. Install left-hand drive wheel.
(Fig. 59)
59

Cutterbar drive
Removing the cutterbar drive jockey pulley

Unscrew the jockey pulley (1).
(Fig. 60)
60
Cutterbar drive jockey pulley, exploded view

1 Jockey pulley
3 Spacer ring
4 Deep groove ball bearing 6303-2RS-C3
5 Spacer washer
6 Dowel screw M 16 x 85 DIN 7968
7 Spacer washer
(Fig. 61)
61
Installing the cutterbar drive jockey pulley

1. Bolt down the jockey pulley (1, pre-assembled)
with dowel screw (6), spacer washers (5 and 7)
and hexagon nut (9) with contact washer (8) to
the bracket.
(Fig. 61, 62)
62

Drive axle
Drive axle
DRIVE AXLE
Removing the drive axle

Remove the gearbox.
Unlock the bolt (A) and remove.
Remove the shift tube (B).
Remove the angle joints (C) from the machine chassis.
(Fig. 1)
Left- and right-hand side of the machine:

Jack up the machine securely behind the drive axle
under the machine chassis.
(Fig. 2)
Disconnect the connector (R) of the ground pressure

sensor (D).
(Fig. 3)
Unbolt the fixing clamps (S).

Disconnect the connector for the potentiometer (E).
(Fig. 4)

Drive axle
Hang the trunking on a suitable lifting device.

(Fig. 5)

Disconnect the hydraulic line (F) and seal both ends
with bungs.
Remove the hex. bolts (G) from both sides of the
cutterbar rams, and remove the bushes mounted
behind.
(Fig. 6)

Unlock the bolts (H) and remove.
On the left-hand side of the machine, remove the ram
stop (K).
Remove the cutterbar rams.
(Fig. 7)
Unbolt the fixing clamps (L) from the drive axle.

(Fig. 8)

Drive axle

Unbolt the fixing clamps (M) from the drive axle.
(Fig. 9)

Remove the hex. bolts (N) from front of the drive axle.
(Fig. 10)
10
Remove the cover (O).

(Fig. 11)
11
Carefully hook both ends of the drive axle into a

suitable lifting device.
(Fig. 12)
12

Drive axle
Remove the hex. bolts (P).

(Fig. 13)
13
Lower the drive axle onto a pallet.

(Fig. 14)
14
Move the drive axle away from the machine sideways.

(Fig. 15)
15

Drive axle
Installing the drive axle

Using a suitable lifting device, raise the axle up under
the machine.
Insert the hex. bolts (P) and lightly tighten.
Insert the hex. bolts (N) and tighten.
Tighten the bolts (P).
Torque settings for the hex. bolts (P):

DOMINATOR 108 VX
16 Hex. bolts M 20 x 130 DIN 931-8.8
Lock nuts VM 20
= 370 Nm
Hex. bolts M 20 x 1.5 x 50 DIN 961-8.8
Lock nuts VM 20 x 1.5
= 415 Nm
Torque settings for the hex. bolts (N):
DOMINATOR 108 VX
Hex. bolts M 20 x 1.5 x 100 DIN 960-8.8
= 415 Nm
17 DOMINATOR 98 VX
Hex. bolts M 20 x 130 DIN 931-8.8
Lock nuts VM 20
= 370 Nm
DOMINATOR 88 VX
Hex. bolts M 20 x 1.5 x 140 DIN 960-8.8
= 415 Nm
(Fig. 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17)

Drive axle

Fix the hydraulic lines to the drive axle using the fixing
clamps (M).
(Fig. 18)
18
Fix the hydraulic lines, cables as well as the parking

brake cable to the axle with the clamps (L).
(Fig. 19)
19

Fit the cutterbar rams back to the trunking using the
bolts (H) and on the left-hand side the ram stop (K)
must be included.
Bolt the cutterbar rams to the axle using the hex.
bolts (G) and including the bushes placed behind.
The hex. bolts (G) must have liquid sealing compound
such as DELO-ML-5349 applied.
Connect the hydraulic lines (F).
20 (Fig. 20, 21)
21

Drive axle
Bolt back the cover (O).

(Fig. 22)
22
Reconnect the wiring loom to the potentiometer (E),

and secure the wiring loom to the axle using the
clamp (S).
Reconnect the cable connector (R) for the ground
pressure sensor (D).
(Fig. 23, 24)
23
24
Refit the angle joints (C) to the machine chassis and

secure.
Connect the shift tube (B) to the angle joints (C) using
the bolts (A) and secure.
Refit the gearbox.
(Fig. 25)
25

Drive axle

Drive belts
Drive belts
DRIVE BELTS
General instructions
CAUTION!
Protect the grooves and/or the contact faces of

the drive belts at the pulley against corrosion,
with the belts removed and when the machine
will not be operated for a longer period of time.
Prior to re-installing the belts, clean the grooves and/or

the contact faces of the pulleys.
A special tool is required for removing and installing
the variable-speed drive belts.
In case of smooth running variable-speed pulleys,
these can best be forced apart and/or be secured
by a special bolt BM 12 x 180 DIN 564-8.8
(Part. No. 236 302.0)
This special bolt is designated as (B) in the following
text.
In case of stiff running blades it is advised to use two
bolts. If possible, always open the variable-speed pul-
leys first, with the drives running, and then stop the
engine and the drives.

Drive belts
15
13 16
4 2 6 12
3
5 7 14
9
1
11
8
10
38728
1
Drive diagram, left-hand side
1 Cutterbar drive
2 Compressor drive
3 Hydrostatic ground drive
4 Pump drive – working hydraulics
5 Threshing mechanism drive
6 Grain tank discharge drive
7 Sieve pan / fan intermediate drive
8 Fan drive
9 Sieve pan intermediate drive
10 Sieve pan drive
11 Straw walker drive
12 Intensive separation system
13 Lateral auger drive
DOMINATOR 98 cVX / 88 VX
14 Straw spreader drive
15 Chaff spreader drive
16 Chaff spreader drive
(Fig. 1)

Drive belts
30 26
32
31
27 25
20 21 33
22
23 24
38729
2
Drive diagram, right-hand side
20 Straw chopper drive
21 Straw chopper intermediate drive
22 Suction blower drive
23 Threshing drum variable-speed drive
24 Threshing drum drive
25 Threshing drum variable-speed drive
(excluding intermediate drive)
26 Rotary radiator screen drive
27 Rotary radiator screen intermediate drive
28 Not used
29 Not used
30 Grain elevator top drive
31 Grain tank discharge intermediate drive
32 Grain tank discharge intermediate drive
DOMINATOR 108 VX
33 Returns drive
(Fig. 2)

Drive belts

Drive belts on left-hand side
F K
R
38730
1
DRIVE BELTS ON LEFT-HAND SIDE
Removing the cutterbar drive belt (1)

Remove the guard (S).
(Fig. 2)
Remove the sieve pan / fan intermediate drive belt (7)

at the front of the cutterbar clutch.
Remove the guard (V) on DOMINATOR 108 VX.
(Fig. 3)

Remove the guard (T) on DOMINATOR 98 VX.

(Fig. 4)
Releasing the tension of cutterbar drive belt (1):
DANGER!
R F H S Use specific caution while removing the

K cylinder tube (R). Do not unscrew the
cylinder tube too far – Danger of injury!
X Follow the procedure as described below:

1. Measure the dimension (X).
38734 5 2. Loosen the lock nut (K).
3. Turn the cylinder tube (R) backwards, up to the
dimension (X). Simultaneously re-tension the
nut (1) until the washer (S) makes contact with the
bracket (H).
At that time the bolts (B) must be tensionless, if
R H S required, slightly re-tension the cylinder tube (R)
K and nut (K).
4. Unlock pin (B) and remove.
5. Remove the belt (1).
B
(Fig. 5, 6)
38735 6

Installing and adjusting the cutterbar drive

belt (1)
1. Screw on the jockey pulley (A).
DOMINATOR 108 VX
= 2. hole from the bottom
= 5. hole from the bottom
2. Install the belt (1).
3. Insert the pin (B) and secure.
4. With the lock nut (K) at the cylinder tube (R)
loosened, set the spring-loaded cylinder (F) so
that the dimension (X) is 74.5 mm with the lock
nut tightened.
5. Install and adjust the sieve pan / fan intermediate
drive belt (7).
6. Mount the guards (V) and (T).
7. Perform a test run and check the tension of the
belt.
(Fig. 1, 4, 5)

Removing the compressor drive belt (2)

Open the engine cover.
Loosen the clamping bolt (S).
Push the compressor backwards and remove the
belt (2).
CAUTION!
The air conditioning hoses (K) must not be bent.
7
(Fig. 7)
Installing and adjusting the compressor drive

belt (2)
1. Install the belt.
2. Push the compressor forwards until the belt is
tightened.
3. Tighten the clamping bolt (S).
belt.
(Fig. 7)

B 1 F X 6
4 32 5
C
S
E
K
K
38737
8
Removing the hydrostatic ground drive
belt (3)
Remove the compressor drive belt (2).
Insert the U-piece (U, self-manufactured) and secure
by means of spring clip.
(Fig. 9)
U-piece (self-manufactured):
A = 46 mm
D C B = 30 mm
B C = 38 mm
D = 30 mm
E = 7 mm
A F = dia. 4 mm
F E (Fig. 10)
38739 10

Loosen the bolts (K).

Loosen the adjusting screw (S) until the U-piece
makes full contact and the bolt (B) is free.
Fully loosen the bolt (C) at the rear side of the support.
(Fig. 8, 9, 11)
11
Remove the bolt (B).

Tie the spring clamp (F) and the jockey pulley (R) to a
high point.
(Fig. 8, 12)
12
Push the bracket upwards by means of a

key extractor, until the belt (3) can be removed.
CAUTION!
The elbow unions of the hydraulic tank must

not collide with the platform from below
(DO 108 VX).
If required, loosen the strap from the hydraulic tank

and tilt the oil tank.
13
(Fig. 13, 14)
Remove belt (3) at the top first.
Subsequently tilt at an angle of 90° and remove.
38743 14

Installing and adjusting the hydrostatic

ground drive belt (3)
1. Install belt (3) at the bottom first, then at the top.
Ensure that the belt is positioned in the correct
grooves.
2. Fully tighten the bolt (C) into the bracket.
3. Insert the bolt (B) and tighten the belt (3).
4. Tighten belt (3), with the clamping bolts (K)
loosened, by means of adjusting screw (S) so that
the jockey pulley (R) will push in the power band
belt by 30+10 mm at (Y).
5. Remove the U-piece.
6. Check the alignment of the belt. Turn the jockey
pulley manually, in order to enable the belt to
align. Check the alignment of the pulleys by
means of a ruler.
7. Adjust the alignment of the belts. Loosen the
clamping bolt (L) and align the hydraulic pump
drive to the engine output pulley by means of set
screws (E). Tighten the clamping bolt (L).
CAUTION!
Check the tension of the belt after the

adjustment.
(Fig. 8, 9, 11, 12, 15)

15

8. Adjusting spring-loaded cylinder (F):

After loosening the lock nut (1), adjust the cylinder
tube (2) by means of a punch so that the
dimension (X) between the thrust washer (3) and
the slide ring (4) is 30 +5
–3 mm, with the lock nut (1)
tightened. Ensure that the plastic piece (5) makes
contact at the stop (6) without play. Adjust the
spring-loaded cylinder accordingly.
After tensioning the power band belt ensure that
the hydraulic hoses are laid stress-free and do not
grind.
Install the hydraulic tank with a strap.
belt.
(Fig. 8)

Removing the drive belt (4) for the working

hydraulics pump
Remove the hydrostatic ground drive belt (3).
Loosen the hexagon nut (M).
(Fig. 16)
16
Loosen the hexagon bolt (S).

Loosen the nuts (E and K).
Push the hydraulic pump backwards and remove the
belt (4).
(Fig. 16, 17)
17
Installing and adjusting the drive belt (4) for

the working hydraulics pump
2. Tension the belt (4) by means of a nut (E) and lock
by lock nut (K).
3. Tighten the hexagon bolt (S).
4. Tighten the hexagon nut (M).
(Fig. 16, 17)
5. Install the hydrostatic ground drive belt (3) and

adjust.
6. Install the compressor drive belt (2) and adjust.
belt.

Z
F
D
S
C
K R
A
B
Y
38747
18
Removing the threshing mechanism drive
belt (5)
at the front.
Remove the cutterbar drive belt (1) at the rear.
Remove the pump drive - working hydraulics belt (4).
Unscrew the jockey pulley (G).
(Fig. 18, 19)
19

Unscrew and remove the belt guide at (F).

Loosen the belt guide at (E) and fold down.
Unscrew the hexagon bolt (S).
Loosen and remove the belt guard at (A, B and C).
Remove the belt (5).
(Fig. 18, 20)
20

Installing and adjusting the threshing

mechanism drive belt (5)
1. Install the belt (5) on the engine output pulley.
Subsequently position below.
2. Insert the hexagon bolt (S).
3. Adjust the belt guide.
Fasten the belt guide at the positions (A, B,
C and D) so that when the belt is tensioned, the
dimension (Y), in between the belt guides and
around the entire perimeter, is 5 up to 7 mm.
21
Adjust the belt guide at (E) so that when the belt is
tensioned, the dimension between the rear side of
the belt and the guide is 7 ± 2 mm.
4. Install the jockey pulley (G).
(Fig. 18, 21)
5. Install and adjust the pump drive – working
hydraulics belt (4).
6. Install and adjust the hydrostatic ground drive
belt (3).
7. Install and adjust the compressor drive belt (2).
8. Install and adjust the cutterbar drive belt (1).
9. Install and adjust the sieve pan / fan intermediate
drive belt (7).
10. After the test run, check the tension of the belts
and the adjustment of the belt guide.

T Y
O Y
S Q B
Y
Z
C
R
P
K
38751
22
Removing the grain tank discharge drive
E belt (6)
N F Remove the hydrostatic ground drive belt (3) at the
L D
M
top.
C
Remove the pump drive – working hydraulics belt (4).
Remove the belt guide for the threshing mechanism
drive belt (5) at (F), subsequently loosen at (E) and
fold down.
38752 Loosen the hexagon bolt (M). Loosen the bolt (L) and
23
remove the jockey pulley (N).

Loosen the bolt (P) and fold down the belt guide (C).
Unscrew the bolts (O) and remove the belt guard (A).
Loosen the bolts (Q) until the belt guide (B) sags.
Remove the jockey pulley (S) completely.
(Fig. 22, 23)
The belt (6) can now be pulled below the belt (7).
(Fig. 24)
24

Installing and adjusting the grain tank

E discharge drive belt (6)
Z
1. Pull the belt (6) below belt (5) and install on the
F
pulley.
N
D
L M
2. Screw on the jockey pulley (S).
C
3. Attach the belt guide (A, B and C) at the
positions (O, T and P) so that when the belt is
A
B
tightened the dimension (Y), between the belt
Y
guides and around the entire perimeter, is
38754 25 5 up to 7 mm (Fig. 22).
4. Install the jockey pulley (N) and tighten the
bolts (L and M) (Fig. 25).
5. Adjust the belt guide for the threshing mechanism
drive belt (5):
Fasten the belt guide at the positions (A, B,
C and D) so that when the belt is tensioned, the
dimension (Y), between the belt guides and
around the entire perimeter, is 5 up to 7 mm.
Adjust the belt guide at (E) so that when the belt is
tensioned, the dimension between the rear side of
the belt and the guide is 7 ± 2 mm (Fig. 25).
6. Install and adjust the pump drive – working
hydraulics belt (4).
Install and adjust the hydrostatic ground drive
belt (3).
Install and adjust the compressor drive belt (2).
7. After each adjustment and after each test run,
check all dimensions and correct if necessary.

Removing the sieve pan / fan intermediate

drive belt (7)
Remove the fan drive belt (8).
Loosen the hexagon nut until the belt tension is
released.
Remove the belt (7) from the rear V-belt pulley.
(Fig. 26)
26
Remove the hydraulic line from the rotary transmission

leadthrough and plug the connections.
Remove the belt (7) from the front V-belt pulley.
(Fig. 27)
27
Installing and adjusting the sieve pan / fan

intermediate drive belt (7)
2. Attach the hydraulic line to the rotary transmission
leadthrough.
3. Tension the belt (7) by means of a hexagon bolt.
Secure the adjustment by means of a lock nut.
4. Install and adjust the fan drive belt (8).
belt.
(Fig. 26, 27)

Removing the fan drive belt (8)

Set the fan to the lowest possible r.p.m. while the
engine is running.
Swing the grain tank unloading tube halfway out.
(Fig. 28)
DANGER!
Make adjustments only with the engine

stopped and the ignition key removed.
28
Remove the cable plug (K) from the

direct-current (DC) motor.
Remove four bolts at (S).
(Fig. 29)
29
Manually tension belt (8) until the spring-loaded

variable-speed pulley is fully spread apart.
Move the guard (B) upwards and remove belt (8).
(Fig. 30)
30

Installing the fan drive belt (8)

1. Clean the surfaces of the variable-speed pulley.
2. Insert belt (8) into the spring-loaded
variable-speed pulley.
3. Pull belt (8) as far into the variable-speed pulley
assembly until it is completely spread apart. Install
the belt (8) at the top.
4. Screw on guard (B) and connect cable plug (K).
(Fig. 29, 30)

Removing the sieve pan intermediate drive

belt (9)
Remove fan drive belt (8).
at the rear.
Remove guard (S).
(Fig. 31)
31
Loosen the jockey pulley and remove belt (9).

(Fig. 32)
32
Installing and adjusting sieve pan inter-

mediate drive belt (9)
1. Install belt (9) on the front pulley.
2. Install the top part of the belt at the bottom on the
rear pulley. The belt is on the outer side.
3. Tension the belt by pressing the jockey pulley
down. Tighten the jockey pulley.
4. Attach guard (S).
5. Install and adjust sieve pan / fan intermediate
drive belt (7).
33
6. Install fan drive belt (8).
belt.
(Fig. 31, 32, 33)

Removing the sieve pan drive belt (10)

Loosen hexagon nut at (B) from the jockey pulley.
Loosen hexagon nuts at (M) and remove belt (10).
(Fig. 34, 35)
34
35
With unfavourable mounting positions, the gib head

keys of the grain and returns augers may protrude too
far. In this case fold guard (C) down.
Remove plate (B).
Unscrew bolts (S) and slightly push the guard (D)
outwards. Remove belt (10).
(Fig. 36)
36

Installing and adjusting the sieve pan drive

belt (10)
1. Install belt (10).
2. Tension the belt (10) with the hexagon nuts (M)
with nut (B) loosened. Secure the adjustment by
the lock nut.
3. Tighten hexagon nut (B).
4. Mount all plates and guards.
5. Install straw walker drive belt (11).
belt.
(Fig. 34, 35, 36)
Removing the straw walker drive belt (11)

Swing out grain tank unloading tube.
Remove guard (V).
(Fig. 37)
37
Loosen jockey pulley (S) and remove sieve pan inter-

mediate drive belt (9).
(Fig. 38)
38

Loosen the hexagon nut from the jockey pulley at (B).

Loosen hexagon nuts (M) and remove belt (11).
(Fig. 39)
39
Installing and adjusting the straw walker drive

belt (11)
2. Tension belt (11) by means of hexagon nuts (M)
while nut (B) is loosened. Secure the adjustment
by means of a lock nut.
3. Tighten hexagon nut at (B).
4. Install and adjust sieve pan intermediate drive
belt (9).
5. Install guard (V).
belt.
(Fig. 37, 38, 39)

Removing the intensive separation system

drive belt (12)
Extend discharge pipe.
Remove guard (V).
(Fig. 40)
40
Loosen hexagon nut from the jockey pulley at (B).

Loosen hexagon nuts (M) and remove belt (11).
(Fig. 41)
41
Loosen bolts (C) slightly.

Loosen hexagon nuts (E and F).
Remove drive belt (12).
(Fig. 42)
42

Installing and adjusting intensive separation

drive belt (12)
1. First install the belt (12) on the front intensive
separation system shaft (W).
(Fig. 43)
43
2. Install belt (12) at the rear.

3. Tense the spring by means of nuts (E and F) up to
the marking while the bolt (C) is loosened. Lock
the nuts (E and F) by means of a lock nut and
tighten bolt (C).
4. Install and adjust the straw walker drive belt (11).
5. Attach the guard (V).
belt.
(Fig. 40, 41, 42, 43, 44)
44

Removing the lateral auger drive belt (13)

DOMINATOR 88 VX
Remove the intensive separation system drive
belt (12).
Remove the air suction filter.
(Fig. 45)
45
Slightly loosen the clamping bolt of the bearing

plate (L). Move the plate to the left-hand side and
remove the belt (13).
(Fig. 46)
46
Removing the straw spreader drive belt (14)

Open the cover (K) and unscrew the guard (S).
belt (12).
(Fig. 47)
47
Pull the lower part of the belt (14) downwards and

push the jockey pulley upwards.
(Fig. 48)
48

Installing and adjusting the straw spreader

drive belt (14)
1. Install belt (14) on the outer V-belt pulleys.
2. Push the jockey pulley upwards and install the
belt.
3. Install and adjust the straw walker drive belt (11).
drive belt (12).
5. Attach the guard (S) and close the cover (K).
belt.
(Fig. 47, 48)
Removing the chaff spreader drive belt (15)

belt (12).
Remove the straw walker drive belt (11).
Remove the chaff spreader drive belt (16).
(Fig. 49)
49
Slightly loosen jockey pulley (A) and push upwards.

(Fig. 50)
50

Installing and adjusting the chaff spreader

drive belt (15)
2. Tighten the belt by means of jockey pulley (A).
Tighten the jockey pulley.
3. Install and adjust straw walker drive belt (11).
drive belt (12).
belt.
(Fig. 49, 50)
Removing the chaff spreader drive belt (16)

Pull the jockey pulley backwards and remove belt (16).
(Fig. 51)
51
Installing and adjusting the chaff spreader

drive belt (16)
1. Pull the jockey pulley backwards and install
belt (16).
belt.
(Fig. 51)


Drive belts on right-hand side
21
20
U B
D
A
1
X
H S
2
C
2 X
1 F
38853
1
DRIVE BELTS ON RIGHT-HAND SIDE
Removing the straw chopper drive belt (20)

Remove straw chopper intermediate drive belt (21).
Release tension of drive belt (20) by means of a
tension lever (H).
Remove the deflection pulley (U) and remove
belt (20).
(Fig. 1, 2)

Installing and adjusting the straw chopper

drive belt (20)
2. Attach the deflection pulley (U).
3. Reverse the tension lever (H).
4. Install and adjust straw chopper intermediate
drive belt (21).
5. Install spring-loaded cylinder (C).
Make adjustment while the tension lever (H) is
released and the lock nut (1) at the cylinder
tube (2) is loosened.
Set the jockey pulley (B) at such height that
dimension (A) is as long as possible, but not
more than 130 ± 10 mm.
Adjust spring-loaded cylinder (C) so that the
dimension (X) is 30+5 mm with the lever (H)
tensioned.
Tighten the lock nut again after the adjustment.
6. Perform a test run and check the tension of
the belt.
(Fig. 1, 2)

Removing the straw chopper intermediate

drive belt (21)
Remove suction blower drive belt (22).
Release tension of belt (21) at spring-loaded
cylinder (F).
Pull jockey pulley (S) downwards and remove
belt (21).
(Fig. 1, 3)
Installing and adjusting the straw chopper

intermediate drive belt (21)
1. Pull jockey pulley (S) downwards and install
belt (21).
2. Adjust spring-loaded cylinder (F).
After loosening the lock nut (1), adjust cylinder
tube (2) so that the dimension (X) will be 30+5 mm
when the lock nut is tightened.
3. Install and adjust suction blower drive belt (22).
belt.
(Fig. 1, 3)

K
21 M N
22
38855
4
Removing the suction blower drive belt (22)

Unscrew the hydraulic line from the rotary trans-
mission leadthrough. Plug the connections.
Slightly loosen the clamping bolt (K).
Loosen nut (N) and turn nut (M) backwards.
Remove belt (22).
(Fig. 4, 5)

Installing and adjusting suction blower drive

belt (22)
2. Tension belt (22) using nut (M) with nut (N)
loosened.
Tighten nut (N) and clamping bolt (K).
3. Attach the hydraulic line to the rotary transmission
leadthrough.
belt.
(Fig. 4, 5)

Removing the threshing drum speed control

belt (23)
DANGER!
Be cautious while working on the

variable-speed drives. Never enter the hands
between the pulley halves – Danger of injury!
☞ Block the variable-speed pulley by means
of a special tool.
6
DANGER!
Set the variable-speed drive to the lowest

r.p.m. while the engine is running and the
threshing mechanism is activated.
De-activate the threshing mechanism.
☞ Stop engine and remove the ignition key.
Remove guards (S and T).

Remove suction blower drive belt (22).
(Fig. 6)

Turn the two hexagon bolts (3) BM 12 x 180

DIN 564-8.8 (Part No. 236 302.0) through the tapped
hole of the front pulley halve and push the rear pulley
backwards.
This blocks the variable-speed pulley in a spread-out
position.
Subsequently unscrew the hydraulic hose from the
hydraulic cylinder (Z).
Remove the belt (R) from both pulleys.
(Fig. 7)
7

Installing and adjusting the threshing drum

speed control belt (23)
1. If the speed control belt is no longer sufficiently
tensioned at the lowest threshing drum r.p.m.,
as a result of belt elongation or belt wear,
this will be compensated by means of discs
– see detail (E) –.
Unscrew the three countersunk bolts (F) and
remove hydraulic cylinder (Z).
Position one disc (G) 26 x 42 x 3 each on the
spacing tubes (X) underneath the flange of the
8
hydraulic cylinder (Z) and screw on the hydraulic
cylinder (Z).
CAUTION!
It is essential that at this point all three discs are

positioned on the spacing tubes and are not
jammed between the tube ends and the cylinder
flange.
When a new speed control belt is to be
installed, these discs (G) must be taken off.
(Fig. 8)

2. Pull the belt (23) firmly between the pulley halves

and unscrew the hexagon bolts (3) from the
tapped hole.
3. Attach the hydraulic hose to the hydraulic
cylinder (Z). Lost hydraulic oil is to be replaced by
new oil.
4. Install and adjust the straw chopper intermediate
drive belt (21).
Install and adjust the suction blower drive
belt (22).
5. Fit the guards (T and S).
belt.
(Fig. 6, 7)

Removing the threshing drum drive belt (24)

Remove the suction blower drive belt (22).
Remove the straw chopper intermediate drive
belt (21).
Remove the threshing drum speed control belt (23).
Remove the guard (S) at the drum speed reduction kit.
(Fig. 10)
10
DANGER!
Be extra cautious when removing the

cylinder tube (2). Do not turn out the cylinder
tube too far – Danger of injury!

Loosen the lock nut (1) and turn the cylinder tube (2)
backwards, by the dimension (X).
Turn the lock nut (1) backwards until bolt (B) is
stress-relieved.
Unlock the bolt and remove.
(Fig. 9, 11)
11
Loosen the set collar and remove the bracket including

the jockey pulley.
(Fig. 12)
12
Applicable for drum variable-speed drive only,

n = 500 – 1250 r.p.m.
Remove the right-hand side traction wheel.
Unscrew the hexagon bolt and remove the pulley
including the belt.
(Fig. 13, 14)
13
14

Installing and adjusting the threshing drum

drive belt (24)
Applicable for drum variable-speed drive only,
n = 500 – 1250 r.p.m.
Install the belt on the V-belt pulley. Attach V-belt
pulley.
2. Push on the bracket including the jockey pulley
and secure by means of a set collar.
3. Insert pin (B) and secure by means of a cotter pin.
4. Turn the lock nut (1) fully backwards.
Screw the cylinder tube (2) on until the
dimension (X) is 30 mm.
Secure the setting by means of the lock nut (1).
5. Fit the guard (S) on the drum speed reduction kit.
CAUTION!
First screw in the countersunk head

15 bolts (A and B) and subsequently screw
the guard (S) onto the machine frame.
A = 650 up to 1500 r.p.m.

B = 280 up to 650 r.p.m.
6. Install the right-hand side traction wheel.
7. Install and tension the threshing drum speed
control belt (23).
Install and adjust straw chopper intermediate drive
belt (21).
Install and adjust suction blower drive belt (22).
belt.
(Fig. 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15)

Removing the threshing drum speed control

belt (25)
DANGER!
Be cautious while working on the

variable-speed drives. Never enter the hands
between the pulley halves – Danger of injury!
☞ Block the variable-speed pulleys by
means of a special tool.
16
DANGER!
Set the variable-speed drive to the lowest

r.p.m. while the engine is running and the
threshing mechanism is activated.
De-activate the threshing mechanism.
☞ Stop engine and remove the ignition key.
Remove the right-hand side traction wheel.

Remove the straw chopper intermediate drive
belt (21).
(Fig. 16)
Turn two hexagon bolts (3) BM 12 x 180 DIN 564-8.8

(Part No. 236 302.0) through the tapped holes of the
front pulley halve and push the rear pulley backwards.
This blocks the variable-speed pulley in a spread-out
position.
Subsequently unscrew the hydraulic hose from the
hydraulic cylinder (Z).
Remove the belt (R) from both pulleys.
(Fig. 17)
17

Installing and tensioning the threshing drum

speed control belt (25)
1. If the speed control belt is no longer sufficiently
tensioned at the lowest threshing drum r.p.m.
as a result of belt elongation or belt wear, this
will be compensated by means of discs
– see detail (E) –.
Unscrew the three countersunk bolts (F) and
remove hydraulic cylinder (Z).
Position one disc (G) 26 x 42 x 3 each on the
18
spacing tubes (X) underneath the flange of the
hydraulic cylinder (Z) and screw on the hydraulic
cylinder (Z).
CAUTION!
It is essential that at this point all three discs are

positioned on the spacing tubes and are not
jammed between the tube ends and the cylinder
flange.
When a new speed control belt is to be
installed, these discs (G) must be taken off.
(Fig. 18)
2. Pull the belt (25) firmly between the pulley halves

and unscrew the hexagon bolts (3) from the
tapped hole.
3. Attach the hydraulic hose to the hydraulic
cylinder (Z). Lost hydraulic oil is to be replaced by
new oil.
4. Install and adjust the straw chopper intermediate
drive belt (21).
5. Attach guard (S). Install the right-hand side
traction wheel.
belt.
(Fig. 16, 17)

Removing the radiator chaff screen drive

belt (26)
Unscrew the sealing plate (B).
(Fig. 19)
19
Push the jockey pulley (S) backwards until the locking

plate (A) snaps on.
Remove belt (26).
(Fig. 20, 21)
20
Installing the radiator chaff screen drive

belt (26)
2. Loosen the jockey pulley (S) including the bracket
from the locking plate (A).
belt. Replace the tension spring if the tension of
the belt is insufficient.
4. Attach the sealing plate (B).
(Fig. 19, 20, 21)
21

Removing the radiator chaff screen inter-

mediate drive belt (27)
Dismantle the cover (K) from the grain tank.
(Fig. 22)
22
Pull the jockey pulley backwards and remove

the belt (27).
Guide the belt over the fan wheel and remove.
(Fig. 23)
23
Installing and adjusting the radiator chaff

screen intermediate drive belt (27)
1. Guide the belt (27) over the fan wheel.
2. Pull the jockey pulley backwards and install
belt (27).
3. Adjusting the tension of the belt:
Adjust the double springs at the nuts (M) so that
the dimension (X) is 45 mm. After the adjustment
is finished, lock the nuts.
24
belt.
(Fig. 24)

Removing the grain elevator top drive

chain (30)
DOMINATOR 108 VX
Open the side covers.
Push the steel roller chain (30) downwards at the
jockey sprocket.
by means of spring clips.
Remove the chain.
(Fig. 25)
25
A = 46 mm
D C B = 30 mm
B C = 38 mm
D = 35 mm
E = 7 mm
A F = dia.4 mm
F E (Fig. 26)
38739 26
Installing the grain elevator top drive

chain (30)
DOMINATOR 108 VX
1. Install the drive chain (30). When installing, take
the direction of running (L) into consideration.
3. Perform a test run and check the chain tension.
Exchange the compression spring if the chain
tension is insufficient.
(Fig. 27)
27

Removing the grain elevator top drive

chain (30)
Open the grain tank cover.
Unscrew the cover (A and B).
(Fig. 28, 29)
28
29
Push the steel roller chain (30) downwards at the

jockey sprocket.
by means of spring clips.
Remove the chain.
(Fig. 30)
30
A = 46 mm
D C B = 30 mm
B C = 38 mm
D = 35 mm
E = 7 mm
A F = dia.4 mm
F E (Fig. 31)
38739 31

Installing the grain elevator top drive

chain (30)
1. Install the drive chain (30). When installing, take
the direction of running (L) into consideration.
3. Perform a test run and check the chain tension.
Exchange the compression spring if the chain
tension is insufficient.
4. Re-install the cover (A and B).
(Fig. 28, 29, 30, 31)
Removing the grain tank unloading inter-

mediate drive chain (31)
Loosen the block tightener.
Open the chain lock and remove the chain.
(Fig. 32)
32

unloading intermediate drive chain (31)
Install the chain (31) and close by means of the chain
lock.
CAUTION!
When installing the chain lock, take the direction

of the movement into consideration.
Tension the chain by means of the block tightener.

(Fig. 32)

Removing the grain tank unloading inter-

mediate drive chain (32)
DOMINATOR 108 VX
(Fig. 33)
33

unloading intermediate drive chain (32)
DOMINATOR 108 VX
Install the chain (32) and close by means of the chain
lock.
CAUTION!
When installing the chain lock, take the direction

of the movement into consideration.

(Fig. 33)

Removing the returns drive chain (33)

(Fig. 34)
34
Installing and adjusting the returns drive

chain (33)
Install the chain (33) and close by means of the
chain lock.
CAUTION!
When installing the chain lock, watch the

direction of the movement.

(Fig. 34)


Engine – electric system
ENGINE – ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Removing the electric starting motor

DOMINATOR 98 VX – PERKINS 1006-60TW,
DOMINATOR 88 VX
Shut off battery isolating switch (A).
(Fig. 1)
Remove door (B) provided in the grain tank.

(Fig. 2)
Remove rubber cap (C).

Disconnect battery cable (D) and cable (E)
from the electric starting motor.
Remove electric starting motor at the flange at (F)
from the engine block.
(Fig. 3)

Installing the electric starting motor

DOMINATOR 98 VX – PERKINS 1006-60TW,
DOMINATOR 88 VX
1. Mount electric starting motor at the flange at (F)
of the engine block.
2. Connect battery cable (D) and cable (E)
to the electric starting motor.
3. Push on rubber cap (C).
4. Install door (B) in grain tank.
(Fig. 1, 2, 3)
Removing the electric starting motor

DOMINATOR 98 VX – MERCEDES OM 366 LA,
DOMINATOR 108 VX
Shut off battery isolating switch (P).
(Fig. 4)

Remove the cab door.

To do this, proceed as follows:
– Pull the driver's seat fully to the front.
– Unscrew the cover (A) on the left-hand side.
– Unscrew the panels (B and C).
– Remove passenger seat. To do this, unscrew
cover (D).
– Unscrew cover (L) and remove it.
(Fig. 5, 6)
5
– Loosen the two locks (V) and rotate by 90°.

– Slightly swing the door (K) to the front and
remove.
(Fig. 7)
Remove rubber cap (K).

Disconnect battery cable (E) and cable (F) from
the electric starting motor.
Remove electric starting motor at the flange at (G)
from the engine block.
(Fig. 8)

Installing the electric starting motor

DOMINATOR 98 VX – MERCEDES OM 366 LA,
DOMINATOR 108 VX
1. Mount electric starting motor at the flange at (G)
of the engine block.
2. Connect battery cable (E) and cable (F) to the
electric starting motor.
3. Push on rubber cap (K).
(Fig. 8)
4. Install cab door.

– Insert door (K) and fasten using the locks (V).
– Insert cover (L) and screw down.
– Install passenger seat (if provided).
– Screw down cover (D).
– Screw down panels (B and C).
– Screw down cover (A) at the left-hand side.
(Fig. 5, 6, 7)

Alternator
DANGER!
Absolutely follow the instructions below when working

on the alternator:
– The lines between the alternator and the battery
must never be disconnected while the engine is
running.
– Make sure to have the correct polarity when
connecting the battery as otherwise the diodes
will be destroyed.
– Work on live parts may only be carried out after
disconnecting the battery with the engine at
standstill.
– The usual test procedure if a line is live, using
a brief contact to earth, must absolutely be
avoided with three-phase alternators. This will
damage the semiconductors.
– Disconnect all lines to the alternator when
performing electric welding work on the machine.
– The alternator is pre-excited by the battery
via the alternator charging light. Defective bulbs
must therefore be replaced for safe excitation.

Removing the alternator

Shut off battery isolating switch (A).
(Fig. 9)
Remove door (B) provided in the grain tank.

(Fig. 10)
10
Slightly loosen the alternator mounting (C).

Loosen the hexagon nut (D).
DOMINATOR 108 VX:
Remove one V-belt (E) from the V-belt pulley.
DOMINATOR 98 VX – 88 VX:
Remove two V-belts (E) from the V-belt pulley.
Disconnect cable (G) from the alternator.
Remove alternator mounting (C) and eyebolt (H).
Remove alternator.
11 (Fig. 11)

Installing the alternator

1. Loosely bolt down the alternator at the alternator
mounting (C) and with the eyebolt (H) at the block
tightener.
2. Connect cable (G) to the alternator.
3. DOMINATOR 108 VX
Install one V-belt (E) on the V-belt pulley.
DOMINATOR 98 VX – 88 VX
Install two V-belts (E) on the V-belt pulley.
4. Tension V-belt (E) at the block tightener using
hexagon nut (D). Secure setting with the lock nut.
5. Tighten alternator mounting (C).
6. Install door (B) in grain tank.
(Fig. 10, 11)


Engine accessories
Engine accessories
ENGINE ACCESSORIES
Removing the rotary screen

Remove the rotary screen drive belt (26).
Release the quick release bolt (26) and raise the
rotary screen.
(Fig. 1, 5)
With air conditioning fitted:

Remove the hex. bolt (A).
Release the bracket for the air conditioning condenser
at (B), and using a piece of string, hang up on the
machine.
ATTENTION!
The air condition pipes must not get kinked.
2 (Fig. 2, 3, 4, 5)
Drive out the expansion pin (15) at (C), then remove

the rotor (14) complete with the shaft (18) from the
rear wall (1) using a suitable puller.
Remove the rotor (14).
(Fig. 4, 5)

Engine accessories
Engine accessories
5
Rotary screen, exploded view 24 Mushroom headed bolt M 10 x 20 x 12 DIN 603
1 Rear wall
Contact washer A 10
25 Support washer
3 Hex. bolt M 6 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
26 Quick release bolt
4 Lock nut VM 8
33 Edge seal
5 Sealing washer
34 Sealing plate (not with rotary screen suction
6 Strap
system)
7 Mushroom headed bolt M 8 x 35
35 Mushroom headed bolt M 8 x 16
Contact washer A 8
Contact washer A 8
8 Gas spring
36 Seal
9 Hex. bolt M 8 x 40 DIN 933-8.8
37 Seal
38 Seal
Contact washer B 8
39 Quick release bolt
10 Hex. bolt M 8 x 40 DIN 933-8.8
40 Support washer
41 Sealing plate
42 Seal
13 Sealing brush
14 Rotor (Fig. 5)
15 Expansion pin 6 x 45-n DIN 8752
17 Support washer S 30 x 42 DIN 988
18 Shaft
19 Flanged bearing Pea 206
20 Flange plate
21 Tension ring bearing
22 Tension ring
23 Stud M 8 x 10 DIN 916

Engine accessories
Engine accessories
Installing the rotary screen

Lift the rotor (14) complete with the shaft (18) onto the
rear wall (1) and secure with the expansion pin (15)
at (C).
(Fig. 5, 6, 7)
With machine with air conditioning:

Fix the condenser at (B) with the brackets onto the
rear wall (1).
Screw in the hex. bolt (A).
(Fig. 5, 8, 9)

Engine accessories
Lower the rotary screen and lock with the quick

release bolts (26).
Refit the rotary screen drive belt (26).
(Fig. 5, 10)
10
Removing the water cooler

Remove the cab guards.
Push the driver’s seat fully forwards.
Unbolt the guard (A) from the left-hand side.
(Fig. 11)
11
Unbolt panels (B and C).

Remove the passenger seat. For this purpose unbolt
the guard (D).
Unbolt and remove the guard (L).
(Fig. 11, 12)
12
Slacken the two catches (V) and twist them by 90°

Tilt the cover (K) slightly forward, then remove.
(Fig. 13)
13

Engine accessories
Drain the coolant:

Extent the coolant drain pipes (14) on the right-hand
side of the machine with additional pipes and place
their ends into a suitable container.
Open the taps (12).
MERCEDES OM 366 LA:
2 coolant taps (12)
PERKINS 1006.6 T / 1060-60 TW:
1 coolant tap (12)
(Fig. 14, 15, 38)
14
15
Remove the cover (B) in the grain tank.

(Fig. 16)
16
Release the cover (E) by unlocking the quick release

bolt (F), then pull cover up from machine.
(Fig. 17)
17

Engine accessories
With machines fitted with rotary screen suction:

Unbolt the suction pipe (G) as well as the seal
plate (H).
(Fig. 18, 19)
18
19

Unbolt the quick release bolts (K) and hinge the rotary
screen up.
(Fig. 20)
20
Unbolt the straps (L) and remove the complete

cover (M).
(Fig. 21)
21

Engine accessories
Remove the gas spring (N).

(Fig. 22)
22
Using the special tool, create a vacuum in the

hydraulic tank (P) for the hydrostatic.
Special tool:
Vacuum valve combination Part No. 181 619.0
(Fig. 23)
23
Mark the pipes (W) and disconnect. Close the ends

with bungs. Contain any oil that may leak.
(Fig. 24)
24
Unbolt the pipe clamps (Q).

(Fig. 25)
25

Engine accessories
Unbolt the hinges (R) from the rear wall, then remove
the complete rotary screen.
DANGER!
With machines fitted with air conditioning, lay

the rotary screen on the machine and secure
with a piece of string.
The air conditioning lines (S) must not get
kinked.
Do not open the air conditioning lines (S)
26 – hazardous –.
(Fig. 26, 27)
27
Remove the hydrostatic cooler from the hydrostatic

ground drive.
Remove the seal plate (A) and the rear line (B)
completely.
Remove the cover (C) on the left- and right-hand side
and completely remove.
(Fig. 28, 29)
28
29

Engine accessories
Unbolt the air box (D) from the left- and right-hand side
and completely remove.
(Fig. 30, 31)
30
31
Remove the buffer (9) from under the water cooler.

(Fig. 32, 38)
32
DOMINATOR 98 VX with MERCEDES OM 366 LA:

Unbolt the air deflector plate (E).
(Fig. 33)
33

Engine accessories
Unbolt the hollow screws (F).

Slacken off the pipe from under the expansion
tank (G).
Unbolt the hex. bolts (H) and remove the expansion
tank (G) complete with the bracket (K).
(Fig. 34)
34
Secure the water cooler (4) against falling using a

piece of string.
Remove all the pipes (L) from the water cooler and
make water tight.
(Fig. 35, 38)
35
Unbolt the air guide plate (8) from the water cooler (4).
(Fig. 36, 38)
36
Remove the water cooler (4).

(Fig. 37, 38)
37

Engine accessories
Engine accessories
38
Cooling system, exploded view 24 Pipe clamp
25 Spacer tube
1 Hex. bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
26 Angle bracket
27 Coolant tube
Contact washer A 8
2 Strap (Fig. 38)
3 Washer
4 Water cooler (radiator)
5 Seal
6 Bung Am 18 x 1.5 DIN 7604
7 Adaptor stop
8 Air guide plate
9 Buffer
12 Tap
13 Clamp
14 PVC pipe
17 Pipe clamp
18 Rubber pipe
19 Coolant tube
20 Rubber angle
21 Coolant tube
22 Rubber angle

Engine accessories
Engine accessories
Installing the water cooler

Raise the water cooler (4) into the machine and bolt on
the air guide plate (8).
Reconnect all the pipes (L) back to the water
cooler (4).
ATTENTION!
Check the coolant pipes for any damage and

if necessary renew.
39
(Fig. 38, 39)
Bolt back the expansion tank (G) complete with the

bracket (K) and the hex. bolts (H).
Bolt the pipes back with hollow screws (F) and new
seals.
Re-connect the pipe under the expansion tank (G).
(Fig. 40)
40
DOMINATOR 98 VX with MERCEDES OM 366 LA:

Refit the air deflector plate (E).
(Fig. 41)
41

Engine accessories
Bolt back the buffers (9) under the water cooler (4).
Refit the air box (D) and bolt it up tightly to the left-
and right-hand side.
(Fig. 38, 42)
42
Refit the cover (C) and bolt it up to the left- and

right-hand side.
Bolt back the seal (A) and the rear line (B).
(Fig. 43)
43
Refit the hydraulic cooler for the hydrostatic ground

drive.
ATTENTION!
Do not bleed the hydrostatic unit yet.
Bolt the complete rotary screen including the rear wall

back to the hinges (R).
Bolt back the pipe clamps (Q).
44 (Fig. 44)
Reconnect the pipes (W) back according to the

marking. Observe the correct torque settings.
(Fig. 45)
45

Engine accessories
Refit the gas spring (N) as well as the straps (L) and
the cover (M).
(Fig. 22, 46)
46
Lower the rotary screen and lock with the quick

release bolts (K).
(Fig. 47)
47
Machines fitted with rotary screen suction:

Bolt back the suction pipe (G) as well as the seal
plate (H).
(Fig. 48)
48
Insert the cover (E) and secure with the quick release
bolt (F).
(Fig. 49)
49

Engine accessories
Refit the cover (B) in the grain tank.

(Fig. 50)
50
Refit the cab cover.

Insert the cover (K) and fix with the catches (V).
Insert the guard (L) and bolt it on.
Install the passenger seat (if available).
Bolt back the guard (D).
(Fig. 51, 52)
51
52
Bolt on the panels (B and C).

Bolt on the guard (A) to the left-hand side.
(Fig. 52, 53)
53

Engine accessories
Fill the system via the filler (E) up to the edge.

K = Water level display
Bleed the hydrostatic system.
Check the coolant level and if necessary top up.
(Fig. 54)
54
Removing the fuel tank

Drain the fuel:
Unbolt the screw plug (20) and drain the fuel into a
suitably large container.
Refit the screw plug (20).
NOTE: The fuel runs out quicker when the cap (1) is
opened.
(Fig. 55, 61)
55
Mark the fuel lines and unbolt the hollow screws (3).
Seal the open fuel lines with suitable bungs. Remove
the earth wire (11).
ATTENTION!
Whenever working with the fuel system,

always ensure that maximum cleanliness
is maintained.
(Fig. 56, 61)

56
Remove the connector (11) from the sensor (14).

(Fig. 57, 61)
57

Engine accessories
DOMINATOR 108 VX:

Unbolt the angle (A) from the rear steps.
(Fig. 58)
58
Unbolt the two support bands (B) from the tank

bracket (C).
(Fig. 59)
59
Using a suitable lifting device, tilt the fuel tank (17) to

one side and remove.
(Fig. 60, 61)
60

Engine accessories
61
Fuel tank, exploded view
1 Filler cap
2 Tank filter
3 Hollow screw 10 DIN 7643
4 Seal D 14 x 20 DIN 7603
5 Union
6 Up pipe
7 Seal
8 Up pipe
9 Bung M 10 x 1 DIN 908
10 Seal
11 Main wiring loom
12 Chassis clamp
13 Seal
14 Sensor
15 Clamp
16 PVC pipe
17 Fuel tank
18 Seal
19 Drain plug
20 Hex. bolt M 8 x 17
(Fig. 61)

Engine accessories
Installing the fuel tank

Using a suitable lifting device, lift the fuel tank (17) at
an angle up to the machine and onto the fuel tank
brackets. Bolt on by using two support bands (B).
(Fig. 61, 62)
62
DOMINATOR 108 VX:

Bolt back the angle (A) onto the rear steps.
(Fig. 63)
63
Reconnect the connector (11) to the sensor (14).

(Fig. 61, 64)
64
Bolt on the fuel lines to the fuel tank (17) according to

the marking, using the hollow screws (3) and new
seals (4).
Bolt on the earth cable (11).
Bleed the fuel system.
(Fig. 61, 65)
65

Engine accessories
Bleeding the fuel system

PERKINS 1006.6 T / 1060-60 TW:
1. Switch on the ignition – do not start the engine.
With the ignition switched on, the fuel pump (F)
will run.
2. Slacken off the bleed screws (2 and 3) on the fuel
double filter and on the injection pump.
When the fuel comes out without any air bubbles,
then close both bleed screws.
66 (Fig. 66, 67)
67
MERCEDES OM 366 LA:

The fuel pump (F) sucks the fuel from the fuel tank
via the fuel pre-cleaner (V) e.g. water trap and fuel
pre-filter.
1. Slacken off the knurled nut on the hand pump (1).
2. Slacken off the bleed screw(s) (E) on the filter
and bleed srew(s) (3) on the injection pump.
3. Use the hand pump (1) firmly and evenly. When
the fuel comes out without any air bubbles, then
tighten the bleed screws again.
68 4. Screw down the knurled nut on the fuel pump.
(Fig. 68, 69)
69

Engine DOMINATOR 88 VX
ENGINE DOMINATOR 88 VX
Removing the engine

DOMINATOR 88 VX
PERKINS 1006-60 TW
Remove the cabin hood.
Proceed as follows:
– Pull the driver's seat completely forwards.
– Remove the guard (A) at the left-hand side.
– Remove the panels (B and C).
– Remove the passenger's seat. To do this, remove
1 the guard (D).
– Remove guard (L).
(Fig. 1, 2)
– Loosen both locks (V) and turn by 90°.

– Swing the cover (K) a little forwards and take out.
(Fig. 3)
Drain the cooling water.

In order to drain the cooling water, guide hoses
into a reservoir at the outside.
Open the cooling water taps (A).
Remove the rotary radiator screen intermediate drive
belt (27).
(Fig. 4, 5)

Loosen all clamps from the engine oil hose (M) and
push it under the engine.
(Fig. 5)
Remove the cover between engine compartment and

grain tank.
(Fig. 6)
Unlock the cover (K) and move upwards while

removing.
(Fig. 7)
Remove the gas struts (G) completely and fold

cover (P) over.
Remove the hose clamp from the hose of the air
conditioning.
Screw off the floor plate (B) and remove completely.
(Fig. 8)

Loosen the hoses at the compensating tank (A).

Screw off the compensating tank (A) and suspend at
the right-hand side.
Plug the connections tightly.
(Fig. 9)
Screw off the cooling water pipes (W).

(Fig. 10)
10
Screw off the water conduit (T).

(Fig. 11)
11
Screw off the blower wheel (L) and move upwards

while removing.
(Fig. 12)
12

Screw off the exhaust gas pipe (W) and remove.

(Fig. 13)
13
Screw off the air intake pipes (G) and remove.

Plug all connections.
(Fig. 14)
14
Disconnect the cable from the engine at the

cabin side.
(Fig. 15)
15
Disconnect the cable from the engine at the grain tank

side.
Screw off the diesel lines.
(Fig. 16)
Remove the engine output shaft.
16

Unhinge the throttle linkage.

Safely hang the engine into the available lifting eyes.
Screw off the engine from the engine mounting frame
at the corresponding area.
(Fig. 17)
17
The engine can now be removed by means of lifting.
CAUTION!
The oil discharge tube is to be guided.
(Fig. 18)
18
Installing the engine

DOMINATOR 88 VX
PERKINS 1006-60 TW
Lift the engine into the machine.
Screw the engine onto the engine mounting frame at
the corresponding area.
(Fig. 17)
Install the engine output shaft.

19
Connect the cables to the engine.
1 Temperature sensor
2 Oil-pressure switch
3 Maintenance switch (air intake pipe)
4 Alternator
5 Starter
(Fig. 19)
Screw on the diesel lines.
Mount the air intake pipe (G) and connect the cable
plug of the maintenance switch.
(Fig. 20)
20

Install the exhaust gas pipe (W).

(Fig. 21)
21
Screw on the blower wheel (L) with the hexagon

bolts M 8 DIN 933-8.8, by means of liquid sealing
compound, e.g. DELO ML 5349.
Torque setting M 8 - 8.8 = 23 Nm
(Fig. 22)
22
Install the cooling water pipe (T).

(Fig. 23)
23
Install the cooling water pipes (W).

(Fig. 24)
24

Install the compensating tank (A).

Connect the hoses to the compensating tank.
Install the air conduction plate (L).
(Fig. 25)
25
Fit the floor plate (B).

Fold over panel (P) and screw down the gas struts (G).
Screw down the hose clamp of the hose of the air
conditioning.
(Fig. 26)
26
Insert and lock panel (K).

(Fig. 27)
27
Install the panel between engine compartment and

grain tank.
(Fig. 28)
Screw on all clamps of the engine oil hose.

Install and adjust the rotary radiator screen inter-
Install the cabin hood.
Fill in cooling water.
28

Removing the engine

DOMINATOR 98 VX
MERCEDES OM 366 LA
Proceed as follows:
– Remove the passenger's seat. To do this,
1 remove the guard (D).
– Remove guard (L).
(Fig. 1, 2)

(Fig. 3)

In order to drain the cooling water, guide hoses
into a reservoir at the outside.
Remove the rotary radiator screen intermediate
drive belt (27).
(Fig. 4, 5)

(Fig. 5)

grain tank.
(Fig. 6)

removing.
(Fig. 7)

cover (P) over.
conditioning.
(Fig. 8)


Remove air conduction plate (L).
(Fig. 9)

(Fig. 10)
10
Screw off the water conduit (T).

(Fig. 11)
11

while removing.
(Fig. 12)
12

Screw off the air intake pipe (W) and remove.

(Fig. 13)
13
Screw off the air intake pipes (G and F) and remove.

(Fig. 14)
14
Disconnect the cable from the engine at the cabin side.

(Fig. 15)
15
Disconnect the cable from the engine at the grain

tank side.
(Fig. 16)
16

Unhinge the throttle linkage (S).

Screw off the engine from the engine mounting frame
(Fig. 17)
17
CAUTION!
(Fig. 18)
18

DOMINATOR 98 VX
MERCEDES OM 366 LA
Screw the engine onto the engine mounting frame at
the corresponding area.
(Fig. 17)

19
4 Alternator
5 Starter
(Fig. 19)
Fit the air intake pipes (G and F) and renew the seals.
(Fig. 20)
20

Mount the air intake pipe (W) and connect the cable
(Fig. 21)
21
Screw on the blower wheel (L) with the hexagon

bolts M 8 DIN 933-10.9 by means of liquid sealing
compound, e.g. DELO ML 5349.
(Fig. 22)
22

(Fig. 23)
23
Install the cooling water pipe (T).

(Fig. 24)
24


Install the air conduction plate (L).
(Fig. 25)
25

Fold over cover (P) and screw down the gas struts (G).
Screw down the hose clamp of the hose of the air
conditioning.
(Fig. 26)
26
Insert and lock cover (K).

(Fig. 27)
27
Install the cover between engine compartment and

grain tank.
(Fig. 28)

Install and adjust the rotary radiator screen
intermediate drive belt (27).
Install the cabin hood.
28

Removing the engine

DOMINATOR 108 VX
MERCEDES OM 366 LA
Proceed as follows:
– Remove the passenger's seat. To do this,
1 remove the guard (D).
– Remove cover (L).
(Fig. 1, 2)

(Fig. 3)

In order to drain the cooling water, guide hoses into a
reservoir at the outside.
Remove the rotary radiator screen intermediate drive
belt (27).
(Fig. 4, 5)

(Fig. 5)

grain tank.
(Fig. 6)

removing.
(Fig. 7)

cover (P) over.
conditioning.
(Fig. 8)


(Fig. 9)

Remove the hoses (S and T).
(Fig. 10)
10

while removing.
(Fig. 11)
11
Screw off the air intake pipe (W) and remove.

(Fig. 12)
12

Remove the air intake pipes (G and F) and take out.

(Fig. 13)
13
Disconnect the cable from the engine at the cabin side.

(Fig. 14)
14
Disconnect the cable from the engine at the grain tank

side.
(Fig. 15)
15

Unhinge the throttle linkage.

Screw off the engine from the engine mounting
frame (M) at the corresponding area.
(Fig. 16)
16
CAUTION!
(Fig. 17)
17

DOMINATOR 108 VX
MERCEDES OM 366 LA
Screw the engine onto the engine mounting frame (M)
(Fig. 18)

18

19
4 Alternator
5 Starter
(Fig. 19)
Fit the air intake pipes (G and F) and renew the seals.
(Fig. 20)
20

Mount the air intake pipe (W) and connect the cable
(Fig. 21)
21
Screw on the blower wheel (L) with the hexagon bolts

M 8 DIN 933-10.9 by means of liquid sealing com-
pound, e.g. DELO ML 5349.
(Fig. 22)
22

Install the hoses (S and T).
(Fig. 23)
23

(Fig. 24)
24


Fold over cover (P) and screw down the gas struts (G).
Screw down the hose clamp of the air conditioning
hose.
(Fig. 25)
25
Insert and lock cover (K).

(Fig. 26)
26
Install the cover between engine compartment and

grain tank.
(Fig. 27)
27

Install and adjust the rotary radiator screen inter-
Mount the cabin hood.

Engine P.T.O.
Engine P.T.O.
ENGINE P.T.O.
Removing the engine output shaft

Remove exhaust gas pipe (A) and ribbed floor
plate (R).
(Fig. 1)

Separate the cable plug from the compressor.
Loosen the protective tube from the engine.
Unscrew the clips from the air conditioning hoses.
Loosen the set collar and pull the compressor off.
Take levelling washers into consideration.
(Fig. 2)
2 CAUTION!
The hoses must not be loosened and / or bent.
Open the cabin roof and put down the compressor.

(Fig. 3)

To do this, insert an U-piece (U, self-manufactured)
and secure by means of spring clips.
(Fig. 4)

Engine P.T.O.
A = 46 mm
D C B = 30 mm
B C = 38 mm
D = 6 mm
A (Fig. 5)
F E
38739 5
Loosen bolts (K).

Loosen the adjusting screw (S) until the U-piece
makes full contact and the pin of the spring-loaded
cylinder (F) is released.
(Fig. 4, 5, 6, 7)
Pull out pin and unhinge the spring-loaded cylinder (F)

at the bracket (H).
(Fig. 7)
Mark the mounting position of the set collars on the

shaft. Mark the mounting position of the shaft on the
engine unit.
Pull the shaft including the bracket and the jockey
pulley from the engine unit.
Remove the set collars.
(Fig. 8)

Engine P.T.O.
Remove the hydrostatic ground drive belt (3) from the

engine output pulley.
Push the adjusting plate of the swash plate pump to
the back wall of the cabin.
(Fig. 9)
Remove the pin (B).

Unscrew the bracket at (A) and put down.
CAUTION!
The actuating link (Z) must not be bent.
(Fig. 10)
10
Remove the pulley from the air conditioning

compressor.
(Fig. 11)
11

Engine P.T.O.
Remove the pump drive – working hydraulics belt (4).

Unscrew the belt guard (A, B, C and D).
A (Fig. 12)
M
B
D
C
38778 12
Pull the cotter pin out and unscrew the castellated nut.
(Fig. 13)
13
Extract the engine output pulley by means of a special

tool.
(Fig. 14)
14

Engine P.T.O.
Special tool:
1 Extractor plate Part No. 181 617.0
2 Washer Part No. 236 951.0
Part No. 235 535.0
4 Extractor Part No. 181 800.0
Part No. 235 590.0
6 Spindle Part No. 181 801.1
(Fig. 15)
38779 15
Unscrew the hexagon bolt (B) from the lock-up valve

unit.
Unscrew the bracket (S) and lower by approximately
90 mm.
Strap the hydraulic cylinder and the bracket (S) by
means of cable binder (K).
(Fig. 16)
16
Remove the special tool.

Remove the engine output pulley.
(Fig. 17)
17
Remove the hexagon nut from the hydraulic pump

at (S). Swing the hydraulic pump sideways and strap
on.
(Fig. 18)
18

Engine P.T.O.
Unhinge the hydraulic cylinder (H) at the clutch lever.

Fully unscrew the bearing rod (L) from the engine unit
and remove including the belts.
(Fig. 19)
19
Unscrew the hydraulic cylinder (Z) at (A).

Take the cotter pin (S) out, remove the hydraulic
cylinder and put down below.
(Fig. 18, 20)
20
Unscrew the hexagon bolt (B), remove the clutch

lever (K) completely and put down below.
Take the number and position of washers into account.
(Fig. 21)
21
Mark the position of the engine unit at the engine.

Unscrew all bolts and pull off the engine unit.
(Fig. 22)
22

Engine P.T.O.
The bearing of the engine output shaft can now be

exchanged.
(Fig. 23)
23
Unscrew the clutch support from the flywheel.
(Fig. 24, 25)
24
DOMINATOR 88 VX
25
DOMINATOR 88 VX
DOMINATOR 88 VX
Unscrew two bolts and insert two spacer studs
instead.
Unscrew the remaining bolts and remove the adapter
and the flywheel.
(Fig. 26)
26

Engine P.T.O.
Unscrew the engine output shaft from the flexible disc.
The bolts are tightened fast (Verbus-Plus locking
bolts).
(Fig. 27, 28)
27
DOMINATOR 88 VX
28
Drive the plastic bush from the supporting pulley by
means of a suitable pipe (R).
(Fig. 29, 30)
29
DOMINATOR 88 VX
30

Engine P.T.O.
Engine P.T.O.
24792
31
Engine output, exploded view 21 Dented edged ring Vskz 10
DOMINATOR 108 VX (applicable for air conditioning only)
MERCEDES OM 366 LA 22 Cheese head screw M 10 x 70
(applicable for air conditioning only)
1 Flexible disc
2 – (Fig. 31)
3 Hexagon bolt M 18 x 65 DIN 931 VP
4 Drive shaft
5 Flat key
6 Groove ball bearing
7 Power output housing
9 Hexagon bolt M 10 x 30 DIN 933
11 Engine pulley
12 Cover plate
13 Washer 37 DIN 125
14 Castellated nut M 36 x 1.5 DIN 935
15 Cotter pin 6.3 x 56 DIN 94
16 Clutch support
19 Bush
20 Pulley

Engine P.T.O.
Engine P.T.O.
24793
32
Installing the engine output shaft
DOMINATOR 108 VX
MERCEDES OM 366 LA
1. Push the bush (19) into the flexible disc (1) by
means of a special tool (1).
(Fig. 31, 32, 33)
33
Special tool:
1 Hexagon bolt M 16 x 300 SP
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Extractor
Part No. 181 836.1
3 Deep groove ball thrust bearing
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Hexagon nut
Part No. 244 059.0
(Fig. 34)
38799 34

Engine P.T.O.
2. Heat the groove ball bearing (6) to approximately

80 °C and push onto the bearing seat up to
2.5 mm (dimension X) before the shaft shoulder.
3. Screw down the flexible disc (1) with the three
hexagon bolts (3) by using liquid sealing
compound, e.g. DELO ML 5349, to the flange
of the engine output shaft.
4. Screw down the clutch support (16) with the
bush (19) onto the ball of the output shaft and the
clutch support, via the flexible disc (1), by means
35 of three hexagon bolts (3) with liquid sealing
compound, e.g. DELO ML 5349, to the engine
output shaft.
(Fig. 31, 32, 35)
5. Screw the engine output shaft in a mounted

condition to the flywheel, using the hexagon
bolts (18).
(Fig. 31, 32, 36)
36
6. Push the power output housing (7) on and screw

down around the engine. Take the mounting
position into consideration! Insert circlip (10).
There is some clearance between the circlip and
the bearing.
(Fig. 31, 32, 37)
37

Engine P.T.O.
Engine P.T.O.
24794
38
Engine output, exploded view 22 Dented edged ring Vskz 10
DOMINATOR 98 VX (applicable for air conditioning only)
MERCEDES OM 366 LA 23 Cheese head screw M 10 x 70
1 Flexible disc
2 Washer 18.5 x 37 x 4 (Fig. 38)
3 Hexagon bolt M 18 x 65 DIN 931 VP
4 Drive shaft
5 Flat key
6 Groove ball bearing
8 Contact washer S10
11 Engine pulley
12 Cover plate
16 Clutch support
17 Contact washer S 8
19 Bush
21 Pulley

Engine P.T.O.
Engine P.T.O.
24795
39
DOMINATOR 98 VX
MERCEDES OM 366 LA
1. Push the bush (19) into the flexible disc (1) by
means of a special tool.
(Fig. 38, 39, 40)
40
Special tool:
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Extractor
Part No. 181 836.1
Part No. 177 899.0
Part No. 244 059.0
(Fig. 41)
38799 41

Engine P.T.O.

80 °C and push onto the bearing seat up to
3. Screw down the flexible disc (1) with the three
hexagon bolts (3) by using liquid sealing
compound, e.g. DELO ML 5349, to the flange
of the engine output shaft.
4. Screw down the clutch support (16) with the
bush (19) onto the ball of the output shaft and the
clutch support, via the flexible disc (1), by means
42 of three hexagon bolts (3) with liquid sealing
compound, e.g. DELO ML 5349, to the engine
output shaft.
(Fig. 38, 39, 42)
5. Screw the engine output shaft in a mounted

condition to the flywheel, using the hexagon
bolts (18).
(Fig. 38, 39, 43)
43
6. Push the power output housing (7) on and screw

down around the engine. Take the mounting
position into consideration! Insert circlip (10).
There is some clearance between the circlip and
the bearing.
(Fig. 38, 39, 44)
44

Engine P.T.O.
Engine P.T.O.
24796
45
Engine output, exploded view 21 Cotter pin 6.3 x 56 DIN 94
DOMINATOR 88 VX 22 Pulley
PERKINS 1006.6 T (applicable for air conditioning only)
23 Dented edged ring Vskz
1 Flexible disc
2 Washer 17 DIN 433
24 Cheese head screw M 10 x 70
3 Hexagon bolt M 16 x 55 DIN 931-8.8 VP
4 Drive shaft
5 Flat key A 13 x 9 x 65 (Fig. 45)
6 Groove ball bearing 6310 2RS/C4 DIN 625
7 Cheese head screw M 10 x 70 DIN 912.8.8
Hexagon nut M 10 x 70 DIN 934
Contact washer A 10
8 Dented edged ring Vskz 10
9 Cheese head screw M 10 x 55 DIN 912-8.8
Contact washer A 10
11 Adapter
12 Bush
Contact washer A 10
17 Engine pulley
18 Cover plate

Engine P.T.O.
Engine P.T.O.
24797
46
DOMINATOR 88 VX
PERKINS 1006.6 T
1. Push the bush (12) into the adapter (11) by means
of a special tool.
(Fig. 45, 46, 47)
47
Special tool:
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Extractor
Part No. 181 836.1
Part No. 177 899.0
Part No. 244 059.0
(Fig. 41)
38799 48

Engine P.T.O.
2. Screw down the adapter (11) by means of

hexagon bolts 1/2"-20 UNF and washers together
with the flywheel to the engine crankshaft.
(Fig. 49)
49

80 °C and push onto the seat of the bearing up to
4. Screw down the flexible disc (1) by means of three
hexagon bolts (3) with liquid sealing compound,
e.g. DELO ML 5349, to the flange of the engine
output shaft.
Screw the hexagon nuts (13) on and tighten at
210 Nm as well.
50
CAUTION!
When tightening the hexagon nuts, the hexagon

bolts are to be firmly held in position.
(Fig. 45, 46, 50)

Engine P.T.O.
5. Position the engine output shaft (4) in the

adapter (11).
Screw down the engine output shaft to the
adapter (11) via the flexible disc (1) by means of
three hexagon bolts (3) with liquid sealing com-
pound, e.g. DELO ML 5349.
(Fig. 45, 46, 51)
51
6. Push the power output housing (14) forwards and

fasten around the engine. Take the mounting
position into consideration!
Insert the circlip (16). Some clearance is present
in between the circlip and the bearing.
(Fig. 45, 46, 52)
52
Installing the engine output pulley

DOMINATOR 108 VX / 98 VX / 88 VX
Move the clutch lever (K) including the washers
forwards.
Screw in the hexagon bolt (B) and tighten. Check
the alignment of the jockey pulley and, if required,
correct the position by means of the washers.
(Fig. 53)
53
Push the hydraulic cylinder (Z) forwards and screw

down at (A). Insert the cotter pin (S).
(Fig. 54)
54

Engine P.T.O.
Screw the bearing rod (L) into the engine unit by

means of liquid sealing compound.
Move the clutch lever forwards and fit and secure
the hydraulic cylinder (H).
(Fig. 55)
55
Fit the hydraulic pump completely and screw on the

lock nut (S), but do not tighten.
(Fig. 56)
56
The shaft cone and pulley cone must be free from

grease and clean.
Insert the flat key and move the pulley forwards.
Install the drive belt loosely into the corresponding
grooves.
(Fig. 57)
57
Place the cover plate and the pulley onto the shaft
and tighten the castellated nut.
Tighten the nut up to the position where it can be
secured by means of the cotter pin.
(Fig. 58)
58

Engine P.T.O.
Install the belt guard (A, B, C and D) and adjust.

Y Y = 5 – 7 mm
Z = 7 ± 2 mm
A
(Fig. 59)
B
M
Z
Y D
C
Y
38804 59
Install and adjust the belt (4) for the pump drive
working hydraulics.
For machines provided with air conditioning, the pulley
is to be screwed on.
(Fig. 60)
60
Screw down the bracket at (A).

Fit the actuating link (Z) by means of pin (B) and
secure.
(Fig. 61)
61

Engine P.T.O.
Install the hydrostatic ground drive belt (3).

Install the shaft including the bracket and jockey pulley
into the engine unit.
Take the positions of the set collars and of the shaft in
relation to the engine unit into consideration.
Tighten the shaft.
(Fig. 62, 63)
62
63
Fit the spring-loaded cylinder (F) to the bracket (H)

and secure.
Install and adjust the hydrostatic ground drive belt (3).
(Fig. 64)
64
Screw the hexagon bolt (B) into the lock-up valve unit.
Remove the cable binder (K) and screw on the
bracket (S).
(Fig. 65)
65

Engine P.T.O.
Install the compressor by using the levelling washers

and tighten by means of a set collar.
Position the clips of the air conditioning hoses.
Connect the compressor's cable plug.
Install and adjust the compressor drive belt (2).
(Fig. 66)
66
Mount the exhaust gas pipe (A) and the ribbed floor
plate (R).
(Fig. 67)
67

Fan drive
Fan drive
FAN DRIVE
NOTE: There are 2 fan adjustment versions
(electrical):
Version (A) – see fig. 9
Version (B) – see fig. 30
Compare the version with the one used on the
machine. Observe installation position of item (19).
Removing the fan adjustment (electrical)

(Version A)
Disconnect cable plug from DC motor (23).
Loosen hose clamp (26) and remove rubber cap (27).
(Fig. 1, 8)
Unscrew cheese-head screws and/or hexagon

bolts (19) and remove DC motor (23) completely with
spacer tube (6).
(Fig. 2, 8)
Loosen supporting ring (5) and lock nut (3) using a

special tool and unscrew them from the shaft.
NOTE: Lock nut (3) =
up to serial no. ...: Hexagon nut M 16 x 1 DIN 934
from serial no. ...: Capstan nut
Special tool:
Pin hole wrench, Part No. 181 624.0
(Fig. 3, 8)

Fan drive
Dismantling the fan adjustment (electrical)

(Version A)
Extend thrust piece (7) using the electric motor.
(Fig. 4, 8)
Pull off clamping piece (8) and remove adjustment

nut (14) along with needle bearing (13) and axial
washer (12).
Pull off right-hand and left-hand thrust bearing from the
adjustment nut (14).
(Fig. 5, 8)
Remove ring (15), quick-release fastener (20) and

catch (21).
(Fig. 6, 8)
Unscrew cheese-head screws (16) and remove

flange (22) along with hexagon bolts and / or
cheese-head screws (19).
(Fig. 7, 8)

Fan drive
Fan drive
8
Fan adjustment (electrical), exploded view 21 Catch
(Version A): 22 Flange
23 DC motor
1 Tight-fitting washer 20 x 28 x 0.5 DIN 988
26 Hose clamp As 80-100 / 12-c7 DIN 3017
Supporting ring S 20 x 28 DIN 988
27 Rubber cap
2 Thrust sleeve
3 Hex. nut M 16 x 1 DIN 934 (Fig. 8)
Capstan nut
4 Bushing
5 Supporting ring
6 Spacer tube
7 Thrust piece
8 Clamping piece
9 Hex. bolt M 6 x 60 DIN 931-8.8
10 Spring washer 6
11 Bushing
12 Axial washer
13 Needle bearing
14 Adjustment nut
15 Ring
16 Cheese-head screw
19 Hex. bolt M 6 x 120 DIN 931-8.8
Cheese-head screw M 6 x 110 DIN 4762-8.8
20 Quick-release fastener

Fan drive
Fan drive
9
Assembling the fan adjustment (electrical)
(Version A)
NOTE:
Prior to assembly, apply multipurpose grease,

e.g. CLAAS multipurpose grease EP 2 to all
moving parts and sliding surfaces.
1. Push hexagon bolts and / or cheese-head

screws (19) through the flange (22) and bolt
down to the DC motor (23) with cheese-head
screws (16) and detent edged rings (17).
(Fig. 8, 9, 10)
10

Fan drive
2. Push on catch (21) and drive on the quick-release

fastener (20) using a tube.
(Fig. 8, 9, 11)
11
3. Push on ring (15).

4. Pre-assemble adjustment nut (14) with axial
washers (12) and needle bearings (13) and push
them on.
(Fig. 8, 9, 12)
12
5. Push on clamping piece (8) and bolt down to

flange (22) with hexagon bolts (9) and spring
washers (10).
(Fig. 8, 9, 13)
13

Fan drive
6. Install push-on receptacles to one end of two

cables. Fit a loop to the other cable end and con-
nect to the plus and minus pole of a 12 V battery.
7. Make the DC motor (23) run by connecting the
cables to the connectors on the DC motor
(observe correct sense of rotation, correct by
reversing the receptacles if required).
8. Apply multipurpose grease, e.g. CLAAS multi-
purpose grease EP 2 to thread of thrust piece (7).
CAUTION!
14
Observe angles (P and R) when screwing the
thrust piece (7) into the adjustment nut (14)
(detail W).
Fully screw in thrust piece (7).

Angle (R) = 15° + 10°
Angle (P) = 45° + 10°
(Fig. 8, 9, 14)

Fan drive
Installing the fan adjustment (electrical)

(Version A)
1. Determine the opening (X) between the outer end
of the variable speed pulleys (A and B) on the
inside using a calliper gauge and adjust with the
lock nut (3).
For capstan nut (3)
Opening (X) = 57 mm
For hexagon nut (3)
Opening (X) = 54 mm
15
CAUTION!
The stroke (K) is limited by the thrust sleeve (2).
Stroke (K) = 22-1 mm

2. Turn supporting ring (5) approximately until the
stop against the lock nut (3) and tighten using
special tool.
While doing so, observe angles (P and R)
(detail W).
Special tool:
16 Pin hole wrench, Part No. 181 624.0
(Fig. 8, 9, 15, 16)
3. Push on spacer tube (6) and install the

pre-assembled DC motor (23) with hexagon bolt
and/or cheese-head screw (19) and hexagon
nut (19) over the supporting ring (5).
(Fig. 8, 9, 17)
17

Fan drive
4. Push on rubber cap (27) and fasten with hose

clamp (26).
6. Connect cable plug to the DC motor (23).
(Fig. 9, 18)
18
Removing the fan adjustment (electrical)

(Version B)
Disconnect cable plug from DC motor (23).
Loosen hose clamp (26) and remove rubber cap (27).
(Fig. 19, 29)
19
Loosen lock nut (3).

NOTE: Lock nut (3) =
up to serial no. ...: Hexagon nut M 16 x 1 DIN 934
from serial no. …: Capstan nut
(Fig. 20, 29)
20
Loosen cheese-head screws (19). To do this, push the

front variable speed pulley (A) fully backwards.
(Fig. 21, 29)
21

Fan drive
Remove DC motor (23) completely with spacer

tube (6).
(Fig. 22, 29)
22
Unscrew supporting ring (5) together with

cheese-head screws (19).
(Fig. 23, 29)
23
Dismantling the fan adjustment (electrical)

(Version B)
Unscrew thrust piece (7) or extend it using the electric
motor.
(Fig. 24, 29)
24

(Fig. 25, 29)
25

Fan drive
Pull off clamping piece (8) and remove adjustment

nut (14) along with needle bearing (13) and axial
washer (12).
Pull off right-hand and left-hand thrust bearing from the
adjustment nut (14).
Remove ring (15).
(Fig. 26, 29)
26
Remove quick-release fastener (20) and catch (21).

(Fig. 27, 29)
27
Unscrew cheese-head screws (16) and remove

flange (22).
(Fig. 28, 29)
28

Fan drive
Fan drive
29
Fan adjustment (electrical), exploded view 23 DC motor
(Version B): 26 Hose clamp As 80-100 / 12-c7 DIN 3017
27 Rubber cap
Supporting ring S 20 x 28 DIN 988 (Fig. 29)
2 Thrust sleeve
3 Hex. nut M 16 x 1 DIN 934
Capstan nut
4 Bushing
5 Supporting ring
6 Spacer tube
7 Thrust piece
8 Clamping piece
9 Hex. bolt
M 6 x 60 DIN 931-8.8
10 Spring washer 6
11 Bushing
12 Axial washer
13 Needle bearing
14 Adjustment nut
15 Ring
M 6 x 110 DIN 4762-8.8
21 Catch
22 Flange

Fan drive
Fan drive
30
Assembling the fan adjustment (electrical)
(Version B)
NOTE:

1. Bolt down flange (22) to the DC motor (23) with

cheese-head screws (16) and detent edged
rings (17).
(Fig. 29, 30, 31)
31

Fan drive
2. Push on catch (21) and drive on the quick-release

fastener (20) using a tube.
(Fig. 29, 30, 32)
32
3. Push on ring (15).

4. Pre-assemble adjustment nut (14) with axial
washers (12) and needle bearings (13) and push
them on.
(Fig. 29, 30, 33)
33
5. Push on clamping piece (8) and bolt down to

flange (22) with hexagon bolts (9).
(Fig. 29, 30, 34)
34

Fan drive
6. Apply multipurpose grease, e.g. CLAAS

multipurpose grease EP 2 to thread of thrust
piece (7).
CAUTION!
Observe angles (P and R) when screwing the

thrust piece (7) into the adjustment nut (14)
(detail W).
Fully screw in thrust piece (7).

35
Angle (R) = 15° + 10°
Angle (P) = 45° + 10°
(Fig. 29, 30, 35)
Installing the fan adjustment (electrical)

(Version B)
1. Determine the opening (X) between the outer
ends of the variable speed pulleys (A and B)
on the inside using a calliper gauge and adjust
with the lock nut (3).
For capstan nut (3)
Opening (X) = 57 mm
For hexagon nut (3)
Opening (X) = 54 mm
36
CAUTION!
The stroke (K) is limited by the thrust sleeve (2).
Stroke (K) = 22-1 mm

2. Turn supporting ring (5) with cheese-head
screws (19) approximately until the stop against
the lock nut (3).
While doing so, observe angles (P and R)
(detail W).
3. Mark the setting of the supporting ring (5) at the
37 front variable speed pulley (A).
(Fig. 29, 30, 36, 37)

Fan drive
4. Push on spacer tube (6) and install the

pre-assembled DC motor (23) with cheese-head
screws (19) over the supporting ring (5).
5. Arrest supporting ring (5) with lock nut (3)
(Fig. 29, 30, 38)
38
6. Push on rubber cap (27) and fasten with hose

clamp (26).
8. Connect cable plug to the DC motor (23).
(Fig. 30, 39)
39
Removing the variable-speed fan drive

(electrical)
Remove fan adjustment (electrical).
Unscrew panel (B).
(Fig. 40)
40
Remove variable speed pulley (17).

Remove sieve pan intermediate drive belt (9).
(Fig. 41)
41

Fan drive
Remove circlip (15).

Loosen hexagon bolts (7) and unscrew approx. 5 mm.
Pull off variable speed pulley (13) a little and apply
suitable puller.
(Fig. 42, 49)
42
Remove variable speed pulley (13) and V-belt

pulley (11) from the shaft.
(Fig. 43, 49)
43
Dismantling the variable-speed fan drive

(electrical)
Unscrew variable speed pulley (13) from the V-belt
pulley (11).
(Fig. 44, 49)
44
Remove sliding bushing (16) from variable speed

pulley (17).
Separate guide clamps (18) from the variable speed
pulley (17), if necessary by drilling the rivet (19) out of
the variable speed pulley.
(Fig. 45, 49)
45

Fan drive
Drive thrust sleeve (C) out of the variable speed

pulley (17) together with deep groove ball bearing (42)
using a punch.
(Fig. 46, 49)
46
Drive deep groove ball bearing (14) out of the variable

speed pulley (13) using a tube of outside dia. 45 mm,
(Fig. 47, 49)
47
Drive deep groove ball bearing (6) out of the V-belt

pulley (11) using a punch.
(Fig. 48, 49)
48

Fan drive
Fan drive
49
Variable speed fan drive (electrical), exploded view: 39 Grease nipple As 6 x 1 DIN 71412
40 Wide-section V-belt
1 Bearing
2 Tight-fitting washer
42 Deep groove ball bearing 6304 - 2rs
3 Bushing
43 Hex. nut M 16 x 1 DIN 934
4 Jockey pulley arm
Capstan nut
7 Hex. bolt M 8 x 30 DIN 931-8.8
8 Contact washer A 8 (Fig. 49)
10 V-belt
11 V-belt pulley
12 V-belt
13 Variable speed pulley
16 Sliding bushing
17 Variable speed pulley, pre-assembled
18 Guide clamp
19 Rivet C 4 x 15 DIN 7338
20 Washer 10.5 DIN 9021
22 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
24 Eyebolt
26 Hex. bolt M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
28 Angle

Fan drive
Fan drive
50
Assembling the variable-speed fan drive
(electrical)
NOTE:

1. Drive deep groove ball bearing (6) into the V-belt

(Fig. 50, 51)
51

Fan drive
2. Drive deep groove ball bearing (14) into the

variable speed pulley (13) using a tube of
outside dia. 45 mm, inside dia. 37 mm and a
length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 50, 52)
52
3. Bolt down variable speed pulley (13) to V-belt

pulley (11) with hexagon bolts (7), contact
washers (8) and washers (9).
CAUTION!
The washers (9) keep the deep groove ball

bearing (6) in the bearing seat of the V-belt
pulley (11).
(Fig. 50, 53)

53
4. Drive thrust sleeve (C) together with deep

groove ball bearing (42) into the variable speed
pulley (17), using a punch.
(Fig. 50, 54)
54
5. Insert sliding bushing (16) into the variable speed

pulley (17).
(Fig. 50, 55)
55

Fan drive
6. Insert circlip (41) into the variable speed

pulley (17).
variable speed pulley (17) using a tube of
outside dia. 40 mm, inside dia. 30 mm and
a length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 50, 56)
56
Installing the variable-speed fan drive

(electrical)
1. Set the clearance (D) by loosening the hexagon
bolts (22) in the elongated holes of the
bearing (1).
DOMINATOR 108 VX:
Clearance (D) = 932 mm
Clearance (D) = 922 mm
(Fig. 49, 57)
57
2. Install the completely assembled V-belt

pulley (11) on the shaft along with the variable
speed pulley (13), using a special tool.
(Fig. 50, 58)
58

Fan drive
Special tool:
3 2 1
or capstan nut (43) – existing
2 Washer
Outside dia. 26 mm, inside dia. 16.5 mm,
15 mm thick
3 Tube
Outside dia. 26 mm, inside dia. 21 mm,
150 mm long
(Fig. 59)
33948
59
3. Install deep groove ball bearing (14) on the shaft

so it is flush, using a special tool.
(Fig. 50, 60)
60
Special tool:
3 2 1
or capstan nut (43) – existing
2 Washer
15 mm thick
3 Tube
150 mm long
(Fig. 61)
33948
61
4. Insert circlip (15) into variable speed pulley (13).

(Fig. 50, 62)
62

Fan drive
5. Push variable speed pulley (17, pre-assembled)

on the shaft and bolt on hexagon nut or capstan
nut (43).
6. Align variable fan speed pulleys.
7. Install fan adjustment (electrical).
8. Install and adjust sieve pan intermediate drive
belt (9).
9. Bolt down panel (B).
(Fig. 49, 50, 63)
63

Fan drive
64

Fan drive
Aligning the variable speed fan pulleys

1. Install variable-speed fan drive (electrical).
2. Install variable-speed fan drive (spring-loaded)
3. Align variable speed pulley (17) on the hub of
variable speed pulley (13) to the dimension (H)
and adjust with tight-fitting washers at (B)
– see detail (Y).
CAUTION!
The thrust sleeve (C) must make contact

without play at (A and B) – see detail (Y).
Opening (H, high fan speed):

DOMINATOR 108 VX = 40.0 mm
DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX = 39.5 mm
4. Install fan adjustment (electrical).
5. Press a straightedge (L) against the variable-
speed fan drive (spring-loaded) and align it to the
dimension (E) after loosening the threaded pins
M 10 x 8 on the fan shaft.
Setting dimension (E):
DOMINATOR 108 VX = 51.5 mm
DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX = 49.5 mm
6. Arrest variable-speed fan drive (spring-loaded)
with threaded pins M 10 x 8 DIN 916 on the fan
shaft.
(Fig. 64)

Fan drive
Removing the variable-speed fan drive

(spring-loaded)
Fold down door (A) and remove guard (B).
(Fig. 65)
65
Loosen threaded pins (11).

(Fig. 66, 76)
66
Pull the variable-speed drive off of the fan shaft using

a special tool.
(Fig. 67)
67
Special tool:
1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Hex. bolt
M 12 x 100 DIN 931-8.8
Part No. 242 379.0
3 Washer
Inside dia. 13 mm, outside dia. 40 mm, 6 mm thick
Part No. 233 031.0
1 3 2 (Fig. 68)
35508
68

Fan drive
Dismantling the variable-speed fan drive

(spring-loaded)
Block the compression spring (4) with a special tool
and unscrew the cheese-head screws (1) from the
thrust plate (3).
DANGER!
Never unscrew the cheese-head screws (1)

before the compression spring (4) has been
blocked with the special tool – danger of
69 accident!
(Fig. 69, 76)
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
Part No. 181 880.0
2 Spindle
1
Part No. 181 877.0
Part No. 235 983.0
4 Guide bushing
7 2 6 5 4 3 Part No. 181 807.1
5 Puller plate
Part No. 181 935.2
33966 6 Hex. bolt M 16 x 140 DIN 931-8.8
70 Part No. 242 795.0
7 Sleeve
Part No. 181 881.1
(Fig. 70)
Completely relieve the tension of compression

spring (4) by turning back the lever nut.
(Fig. 71, 76)
71

Fan drive
Remove compression spring (4) and thrust plate (3).

(Fig. 72, 76)
72
Pull off variable speed pulley (5) from variable speed

pulley (12).
(Fig. 73, 76)
73
Unscrew cheese-head bolts (8 and 10) and remove

key (9).
(Fig. 74, 76)
74
Remove bushing (6) from the variable speed

pulley (5).
(Fig. 75, 76)
75

Fan drive
Variable-speed fan drive (spring-loaded),

exploded view:
1 Cheese-head screw M 8 x 25 DIN 4762
3 Thrust plate
5 Variable speed pulley
6 Bushing
8 Cheese-head screw M 8 x 12
9 Key
76 12 Variable speed pulley
13 Grease nipple Cs 6 x 1 DIN 71412
14 Key A 8 x 5 x 75 DIN 6885
R8 = Fan drive belt (8)

(Fig. 76)

Fan drive
77
Assembling the variable-speed fan drive (spring-
loaded)
NOTE:

1. Insert bushing (6) into the variable speed

pulley (5). Observe installation position.
(Fig. 77, 78)
78

Fan drive
2. Install key (9) in the variable speed pulley (12)

using the cheese-head screws (8 and 10).
(Fig. 77, 79)
79
3. Join variable speed pulley (5) and variable speed

pulley (12).
4. Insert thrust plate (3) and compression spring (4)
and pre-tension using a special tool.
For guiding the thrust plate (3), turn in a hexagon
bolt (S) M 8 x 100 DIN 931-8.8.
(Fig. 77, 80)
80
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
Part No. 181 880.0
2 Spindle
1
Part No. 181 877.0
Part No. 235 983.0
4 Guide bushing
7 2 6 5 4 3 Part No. 181 807.1
5 Puller plate
Part No. 181 935.2
33966 6 Hex. bolt M 16 x 140 DIN 931-8.8
81 Part No. 242 795.0
7 Sleeve
Part No. 181 881.1
(Fig. 81)

Fan drive
5. Screw in cheese-head screws (1) with contact

washers (2) and remove special tool.
(Fig. 77, 82)
82
Installing the variable-speed fan drive (spring-

loaded)
1. Push variable-speed drive (pre-assembled) on
the fan shaft.
2. Align the variable speed pulleys of fan.
4. Bolt down guard (B).
5. Fold door (A) upward.
(Fig. 83)
83

Feeder housing
Feeder housing
FEEDER HOUSING
Removing the feeder housing

Move the feeder housing to the highest position and
support safely.
Remove the cutterbar drive belt (1).
Unhinge the feed plate (B) below the feeder housing.

For this purpose loosen bolts (S) on both sides. First
move the supporting rod (H) to the right-hand side and
then pull it out by moving it to the left-hand side.
(Fig. 1)
Lower the feeder housing and safely support it i. e. by

using an assembly cart (self-manufactured).
(Fig. 2)
The power supply is to be interrupted by the battery

isolating switch.
ATTENTION!
Do not activate the battery isolating switch

while the engine is running.
(Fig. 3)

Feeder housing
Unscrew the guard (L).

(Fig. 4)
Loosen the rubber protection (W) at the starter and

disconnect the cable. Loosen the cable clamps (G).
(Fig. 5)
Remove the cable clamps (H) and cable bracket (K)

completely.
(Fig. 6)
Disconnect the hydraulic lines (D and E) on machines

with cutterbar cross adaptation.
(Fig. 7)

Feeder housing
Remove the bolts (C) at the coupling forks and

unhinge the cutterbar cylinders.
Secure these against falling down. Additionally remove
the safety support at the left-hand side.
(Fig. 8)
Unscrew the potentiometer (P) with its support at the

right-hand side.
Unscrew the lock nut (M) and remove the bolts (Z).
Move the feeder housing forwards or move the
machine backwards.
(Fig. 9)

Feeder housing
Installing the feeder housing

1. Push the feeder housing towards the machine and
lock by means of pins (Z). Screw on lock nut (M)
and tighten.
2. Install the potentiometer (P) with its support at the
right-hand side.
3. Hang the cutterbar cylinder onto the coupling
forks by means of bolts (C). Additionally install the
safety support at the left-hand side.
4. For machines with a cutterbar cross adaptation,
the hydraulic lines (D and E) are to be connected.
5. Install the cable clamps (H) and cable bracket (K)
completely.
6. Connect the cables and install the rubber
protection (W) at the starter. Screw down the
cable clamps (G).
7. Re-fit guard (L).
8. Mount the feed plate (B). Move the supporting
rod (H) into position and secure by bolts (S).
9. Install and adjust cutterbar drive belt (1).
10. Adjust cutting height indicator (see operator's
manual).
(Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)

Feeder housing
Removing the upper feed rake shaft

Remove the feeder housing.
Unscrew wear plate (V).
(Fig. 10)
10
Turn pulley until the chain locks are at the top position.
(Fig. 11)
11
Unscrew the hexagon bolt frontally from the feed rake

shaft, at the left-hand side.
(Fig. 12)
12
Screw a hexagon bolt M 12 x 30 with head centering

into the shaft.
Remove the V-belt pulley including the slip clutch.
Unscrew the hexagon bolt.
(Fig. 13)
13

Feeder housing
Remove the bearing housings (L) on both sides.

(Fig. 14)
14
Unscrew the top from the guard and release the ten-
sion of the feeder chains.
To do this, loosen the clamping bolt at (A).
Turn the nuts (D and C) backwards.
(Fig. 15)
15
Separate the feeder chain at the chain locks and

secure against falling down.
(Fig. 16)
16
Unscrew the anti-wrapping guard (W).

(Fig. 17)
17

Feeder housing
Remove the filler blocks (F).

(Fig. 18)
18
Mark the chain wheels.

On the DOMINATOR 108 VX take the circlips out of
the grooves.
On the DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX pull out the gib
head key.
(Fig. 19)
19
Unscrew the bearing units at both sides.

Remove the flat key.
(Fig. 20)
20
Remove the clamping hub.

(Fig. 21)
21

Feeder housing
Loosen and remove the cam wheel at the right-hand

side.
(Fig. 22)
22
Loosen the set screw and knock the lock collar open.
Smoothen the area of impression of the set screw by
using abrasive paper.
(Fig. 23)
23
Use a special tool to push the shaft to the left-hand

side and out of the bearing unit.
(Fig. 24)
24
Pull the bearing housing off of the shaft on the

left-hand side by means of a special tool.
Remove the shaft by pulling to the left-hand side and
simultaneously pull the circlips and chain wheels from
the shaft.
(Fig. 25)
25

Feeder housing
Special tool:
1 Extractor
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Washer 12.5 x 45 x 10
3 Hexagon bolt M 12 x 220
Part No. 244 422.0
4 Hexagon nut M 12
Part No. 236 172.0
(Fig. 26)
38878 26

Feeder housing
Feeder housing
27
Upper feed rake shaft, exploded view
DOMINATOR 108 VX
1 Feed rake shaft
3 Chain wheel
4 Bearing unit
5 Lock collar
6 Cam wheel
7 Inductive transmitting device
Hexagon nut BM 18 x 1.5
8 Countersunk screw M 12 x 80 DIN 7991
Contact washer A 12
9 Pipe sleeve
10 Anti-wrapping guard
13 Mushroom head bolt M 8 x 85 DIN 603
Contact washer A 8
14 Filler block
(Fig. 27)

Feeder housing
28
Upper feed rake shaft, exploded view
1 Feed rake shaft
2 Gib head key
3 Chain wheel
4 Bearing unit
5 Lock collar
6 Cam wheel
7 Inductive transmitting device
Hexagon nut BM 18 x 1.5
8 Countersunk screw M 12 x 80 DIN 7991
Contact washer A 12
9 Pipe sleeve
12 None / free
Contact washer A 8
14 Filler block
(Fig. 28)

Feeder housing
Feeder housing
Installing the upper feed rake shaft

1. Loosely slide the marked chain wheels (3) and
circlips (2) on the shaft.
2. Insert the feed rake shaft (1) into the bearing
position without the bearing units. Push on the
pipe sleeve (9) on the left-hand and right-hand
side.
(Fig. 27, 28, 29)
29
3. At the left-hand side, push the bearing unit onto

the shaft by means of a special tool.
Push the pipe sleeve (9) against the bearing unit
from the inside.
(Fig. 27, 28, 30)
30
Special tools:
1 Pipe dia. 35 x dia. 50 x 200 length
2 Washer dia. 45 x dia. 12.5 x 10
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Hexagon nut M 12
Part No. 236 172.0
Part No. 244 422.0
(Fig. 31)
38881 31
4. At the right-hand side, push the bearing unit onto

the shaft by means of a special tool.
Push the pipe sleeve (9) against the bearing unit
from the inside.
(Fig. 27, 28, 32)
Special tool:
Hexagon bolt M 12 x 220 Part No. 244 422.0
Hexagon nut M 12 Part No. 236 172.0
Disk 13
32

Feeder housing
5. Screw down the bearing unit (4) on the right-hand

side.
6. Fasten the chain wheels (3) in correspondence
with the marking, using the circlips or gib head
keys.
7. Align the right-hand and the left-hand chain
wheels equally in relation to the bearing housing.
(Fig. 27, 28, 33)
33
8. Fasten the right-hand bearing by means of a lock

collar (5) and secure by means of a set screw.
9. Screw down the bearing unit on the left-hand side
and insert a flat key.
10. Insert a filler block (14) and take the mounting
position into consideration. Fit the anti-wrapping
guard (10, 11, 12).
11. Position the feed chain so that the feed rake slats
are in offset position. Use a new chain cotter pin.
(Fig. 27, 28, 34)
34
12. Tensioning the feeder chains:

Turn the lock nut (C) backwards and tension the
feeder chain by means of nut (D). Tension the
chains just enough that the feed slats only slightly
touch the slide rails on both sides.
Tighten the lock nut (C) and clamping bolt (A).
Re-fit the top to the guard.
(Fig. 27, 28, 35)
35

Feeder housing
13. Push on the bearing housing on the left-hand side

as well as on the right-hand side.
14. Push on the V-belt pulley with slip clutch by means
of a special tool.
(Fig. 36)
36
Special tool:
1 Pipe dia. 30 x dia. 40 x 150 length
2 Washer dia. 45 x dia. 12.5 x 10
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Hexagon nut M 12
Part No. 236 172.0
(Fig. 37)
38881 37
15. Screw the hexagon bolt in at the front side of the

shaft.
16. Fit the wear plate.
17. Install the feeder housing.
(Fig. 38)
38
Removing the lower feed rake roller

Raise the feeder housing and support safely. Insert the
safety support.
Unscrew the dust shield (T) and guide plates (E).
(Fig. 39)
39

Feeder housing
Turn the feeder chains until the chain locks are moved
to the bottom position.
(Fig. 40)
40
Remove the guard (N).

(Fig. 41)
41
To do this, loosen clamping bolt at (A).
(Fig. 42)
42
Unscrew the control covers (P).

(Fig. 43)
43

Feeder housing
Separate the feeder chain at the chain locks. Attach

the lower ends to the feeder housing and pull the
upper ends upwards by means of two tensioning belts.
(Fig. 44)
44
Align the pin (B) by means of the chain tensioner that

jamming within the guide (G) will not occur.
(Fig. 45)
45
Push the lower feed rake roller upwards by means of

a (loose) mounting lever.
Simultaneously block the bolts (B) on both sides by
means of a self-grip wrench.
CAUTION!
The pin must protrude out of the opening of the

supporting arm (Z).
(Fig. 46, 47)

46
47

Feeder housing
Unscrew the hexagon nut (M) on both sides and

remove the clamping bolt to the inner side of the
supporting arm.
(Fig. 48)
48
Remove the feed rake roller from the front side.

(Fig. 49)
49
Dismantling the lower feed rake roller

Remove circlip and dust cap.
(Fig. 50)
50
Remove circlip.
(Fig. 51)
51

Feeder housing
Pull the supporting arm including the bearing from

the roll.
Use a dia. 25 x 200 mm shaft as an auxiliary tool.
(Fig. 52)
52
Push the groove ball bearing from the supporting arm

by means of a special tool.
(Fig. 53)
53
Special tools:
1 Lever nut
Part No. 181 880.0
Part No. 177 899.0
3 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0
4 Pipe dia. 80 x dia.100 x 130 mm
5 Spindle
Part No. 181 877.0
6 Sleeve
Part No. 181 881.0
(Fig. 54)
38882 54

Feeder housing
Lower feed rake roller, exploded view:

1 Supporting arm, left-hand side
Supporting arm, right-hand side
2 Groove ball bearing 6306 2 RS DIN 625
3 Felt strip
4 Roll
6 Dust cap
9 Washer
55 11 Pin
12 Pin
13 Chain tensioner
14 Lock nut VM 16
15 Hexagon nut M 16 DIN 934-8
(Fig. 55)
Assembling the lower feed rake roller

1. Push the groove ball bearing (2) into the
supporting arm (1) by means of a special tool.
(Fig. 55, 56)
56

Feeder housing
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
Part No. 181 880.0
Part No. 177 899.0
3 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0
4 Spindle
Part No. 181 877.0
5 Sleeve
Part No. 181 881.0
(Fig. 57)
38883 57
2. Drive the supporting arm on the shaft completely.

Block-ended tube dia. 30 x dia. 40 x 150 mm
(self-manufactured)
3. Position circlip (5), dust cap (6) and circlip (7).
(Fig. 58)
58
Installing the lower feed rake roller

1. Lift the feed rake roller into the feeder housing.
2. Insert clamping pins into the supporting arm.
Mount the chain tensioner and install the lock
nut (M).
(Fig. 59)
59

Feeder housing
3. Align the feed rake roller so that the pin (B) is

positioned over the opening of the supporting
arm (Z). Remove the self-grip wrench.
(Fig. 60)
60
4. Screw the control covers onto the feeder housing.

5. Position the feeder chains so that the feed rake
slats (F) are in offset position.
Insert the chain locks and secure by means of
cotter pins.
(Fig. 61)
61
6. Tensioning the feeder chains:

feeder chain by means of nut (D). Tension the
chains just enough that the feed slats only slightly
touch the slide rails on both sides.
Fit the top to the guard.
(Fig. 62)
62
7. Screw on the dust shield (T) and guide plate (E).

(Fig. 63)
63

Feeder housing
Replacing the feeder chains

Raise the feeder housing and support safely.
Insert the safety support.
Unscrew the dust shield (T) and the guide plate (E).
(Fig. 64)
64
Unscrew the feed rake slats but leave two slats in

position.
(Fig. 65)
65

(Fig. 66)
66
To do this, loosen clamping bolt at (A).
(Fig. 67)
67

Feeder housing
Screw the feed rake slats onto the new chains.
CAUTION!
Exchange the chains in pairs only.
(Fig. 68)
68
Separate the chains at the chain locks.

Connect the new chains to the old chains by means of
the chain locks.
Secure the chain locks by means of the cotter pins.
(Fig. 69)
69
Turn the roller so that the new chains are pulled in.
CAUTION!
The feed rake slats must be in an offset position.
(Fig. 70)
70
Separate the old chain from the new chain. Install the
chain locks and secure by means of cotter pins.
Screw on the two remaining feed rake slats.
(Fig. 71)
71

Feeder housing
Tensioning the feeder chains:

feeder chain by means of nut (D). Tension the chains
just enough that the feed slats only slightly touch the
slide rails on both sides.
Tighten the lock nut (C) and clamping bolt (A). Fit the
top to the guard.
(Fig. 72)
72
Screw on the dust shield (T) and guide plates (E).

(Fig. 73)
73
Removing the wooden ledges

Insert the safety supports.
(Fig. 74)
74
(Fig. 75)
75

Feeder housing

(Fig. 76)
76
Unscrew the top from the guard and release the

tension of the feeder chains.
To do this loosen the clamping bolt at (A).
(Fig. 77)
77

(Fig. 78)
78
Separate the feed rake chain at the chain locks.

Fasten the lower ends at the feeder housing.
Pull the upper ends upwards by means of tension belts
and secure.
(Fig. 79)
79

Feeder housing
Unscrew the drum inspection cover (T) and the wear

plate (V).
(Fig. 80)
80
Unscrew the nut (1) through the opening of the wear

plate and the nuts (2) through the front opening of the
feeder housing.
(Fig. 81)
81
Support the feed rake chains by means of square

timber (G).
Slightly release the tension belt.
Remove the wooden ledges (P) by pulling forwards.
Take the mounting position into consideration.
(Fig. 82)
82
Installing the wooden ledges

Insert the mushroom head bolts M 8 x 35 (N) and
M 8 x 25 (U) into the wooden ledge (P). Secure the
bolts by means of tape.
Move the wooden ledge (P) into the feeder housing
and screw on. Take the mounting position into
consideration.
(Fig. 83)
83

Feeder housing
Insert the chain locks and secure by means of cotter

pins.
feeder chain by means of nut (D). Tension the chains
just enough that the feed slats only slightly touch the
slide rails on both sides.
Tighten the lock nut (C) and clamping bolt (A). Fit the
top to the guard.
(Fig. 84)
84
Screw on the drum inspection cover (T) and the

wear plate (V).
Screw on the control covers (P).
Install the guard (N).
(Fig. 74, 76, 78, 80)
Removing the intermediate floor

(Fig. 85)
85
into the bottom position.
(Fig. 86)
86

Feeder housing

(Fig. 87)
87
Unscrew the top from the guard and release the

tension of the feeder chain.
To do this, loosen the clamping bolt at (A).
(Fig. 88)
88

(Fig. 89)
89
Separate the feeder chains at the chain locks.

Attach the lower ends to the feeder housing and pull
the upper ends upwards by means of two tension
belts.
(Fig. 90)
90

Feeder housing
Unscrew the drum inspection cover (T) and the

wear plate (V).
(Fig. 91)
91
Unscrew the guard (L).

(Fig. 92)
92
Loosen the clips (H) and put the cable support (K)
aside.
Unscrew the guard (R) from the reverser drive.
(Fig. 93)
93
Unscrew the bolts (N) from the intermediate floor on

both sides.
For machines provided with a cutterbar cross adap-
tation, remove the bolt (S) from the lock-up valve unit.
(Fig. 94)
94

Feeder housing
Removing the intermediate floor:

Remove the rear bolts through the opening of the
wear plate and the front bolts through the front.
(Fig. 95)
95
Push the intermediate floor over the mushroom head

bolts on both sides, using a mounting lever.
(Fig. 96)
96
Take the intermediate floor out, by using equal force

and without jamming.
(Fig. 97)
97

Feeder housing
Installing the intermediate floor

Move the intermediate floor into the feeder housing.
In doing so, lift the intermediate floor over the rear
mounting plates (L) and over the weld nut (E) of the
feeder housing.
(Fig. 98)
98
Screw in the rear and side bolts of the floor plate.

Screw down the lock-up valve unit.
Screw on the guard (R) of the reverser drive.
Screw down the clips (H) and cable supports (K).
Screw on the guard (L).
(Fig. 92, 93, 94, 95)

Turn the lock nut (C) backwards and tension the feed
chain by means of nut (D). Tension the chains just
enough that the feed slats only slightly touch the slide
rails on both sides.
Fit the top to the guard.
(Fig. 99)
99
Screw on the drum inspection cover (T) and the

wear plate (V).
Screw on the control covers (P).
Install the guard (N).
(Fig. 87, 88, 89, 91)

Feeder housing
Replacing the slide rails

Lift the front roller by means of a mounting lever and
use wooden supports (H).
(Fig. 100)
100
Unscrew the slide rails and pull out while moving

forwards.
(Fig. 101)
101
Secure the mushroom head bolts to the slide rails by

means of insulating tape.
Insert the slide rails and tighten.
Remove wooden supports (H).
(Fig. 100, 101)

Feeder housing
Removing the intermediate drive shaft

Up to serial number ...:
Unscrew the V-belt pulley from the hub.
(Fig. 102)
102

Loosen the clamping bolt.
Remove the clamping hub.
(Fig. 103)
103
From serial number ...:

Unscrew the clamping bolt.
(Fig. 104)
104

Pull the V-belt pulley off by means of a special tool.
(Fig. 105)
105

Feeder housing
Special tool:
1 Extractor
Part No. 181 622.0
2 Hexagon screw
M 8 x 120 DIN 931-8.8
Part No. 244 237.0
(Fig. 106)
1 3 2
35508 106

Unlock lock collar and knock open in the direction
of movement.
Unscrew the flange bearing.
(Fig. 107)
107
Unscrew the guard (R) from the reverser drive.

(Fig. 108)
108
Unscrew the toothed wheel from the clamping hub.

(Fig. 109)
109

Feeder housing
Measure and note the distance from the end of the

shaft to the clamping hub.
(Fig. 110)
110
Loosen the clamping bolt and remove the

clamping hub.
(Fig. 111)
111

Unscrew the starter motor including the bracket.
(Fig. 112)
112
Unlock the flange bearing and knock open in the

direction of the movement.
(Fig. 113)
113

Feeder housing
Clean the end of the shaft at the left-hand side.

Drive the shaft to the right-hand side by using a plastic
tip hammer until, at the right-hand side, the bearing is
released.
(Fig. 114)
114
Remove the flange bearing at the right-hand side.

Remove the intermediate drive shaft at the left-hand
side.
(Fig. 115)
115
Installing the intermediate drive shaft

Push the intermediate drive shaft into the feeder
housing.
Drive the flange bearing at the right-hand side up to
the beginning of the shaft.
(Fig. 116)
116
Knock the lock collar bearing in the opposite direction

of movement and secure by means of a screw plug.
(Fig. 117)
117

Feeder housing
Drive the intermediate drive shaft to the left-hand side

while using a plastic tip hammer.
CAUTION!
The bearing is to be introduced exactly in the

centre of the flange plate.
(Fig. 118)
118
Mount the starter motor including the bracket.

Insert the flat key.
Drive the clamping hub onto the shaft at the measure-
ment as determined during removal.
Fasten the clamping hub by means of a clamping bolt.
(Fig. 119)
119
Screw the toothed wheel onto the hub.

(Fig. 120)
120
Measure the distance (X) from the starter flange plate

up to the toothed wheel.
X = 35 mm
Loosen the clamping bolt and correct the
measurement (X). Tighten the clamping bolt again.
Screw on the guard (R) of the reverser drive.
(Fig. 121)
121

Feeder housing
Mount the flange bearing on at the left-hand side.

Knock the lock collar tight in the opposite direction of
movement and secure by means of a set screw.
(Fig. 122)
122

Drive the clamping hub onto the shaft and tighten the
clamping bolt.
(Fig. 123)
123

Screw the V-belt pulley on the hub.
(Fig. 124)
124

Drive the V-belt pulley onto the shaft and tighten the
clamping bolt.
(Fig. 125)
125

Feeder housing
Check the alignment of the V-belt pulleys and correct,

if required.
(Fig. 126)
126
Install and adjust cutterbar drive belt (1).

Feeder housing

Final drives
Final drives
FINAL DRIVES
Removing the final drives

Jack up machine and safely support it below the axle
housing.
Remove drive wheel.
Drain transmission oil.
A = Oil drain plug
E = Oil filler cap
L = Transmission breather
(Fig. 1)
ENVIRONMENT:
Properly dispose of oils and greases!
Loosen the hexagon bolts and cheese-head

screws (B) at the axle flange.
On DOMINATOR 108 VX machines, unscrew the
cheese-head screw (S). Screw in a hexagon bolt
M 16 x 100 at this spot.
(Fig. 2)

Final drives
DOMINATOR 108 VX
Suspend final drive in a suitable lifting device.
Unscrew the bolts (B) fully and separate the final drive
from the axle flange using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 2, 3, 4)
Mark the installation position of the profiled

bushing (C).
Remove profiled bushing (C) and the washers (D)
located behind it from the intermediate drive shaft.
(Fig. 5)
Dismantling the final drives

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove the final drive.
Drive the cap out of the seat. The cap is destroyed in
this process.
(Fig. 6)

Final drives
Drive the double expansion pin out of the castellated

nut.
(Fig. 7)
Unscrew the castellated nut.

Here it is recommended to place the final drive in the
rim along with the wheel bolts.
(Fig. 8)
Suspend the final drive in a suitable lifting device using

the eyebolts so that the wheel shaft (D) does not make
contact.
Force the wheel shaft (D) out of the final drive housing
Remove upper tapered roller bearing (P), the
tight-fitting washers and supporting ring.
(Fig. 9)

Final drives
Special tool:
1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Spindle
Part No. 181 636.0
3 Hex. bolt M 16 x 80 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 242 468.0
4 Washer 17
5 Hex. bolt M 20 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 242 478.0
6 Washer 21
7 Flat bar
(self-manufactured)
A = FL 60 x 15 x 370 mm
B B = 28 mm
D H C = 275 mm
D = dia. 22 mm
G C E = 115 mm
F = 140 mm
E K G = M 16
H = 185 mm
K = dia. 30 mm
F (Fig. 10)
GD
40058
A
10
Pull off tapered roller bearing from the wheel shaft
using the special tool.
CAUTION!
Check the tapered roller bearing for damage

after pulling it off.
(Fig. 11)
11
Remove shaft seal.

(Fig. 12)
12

Final drives
Final drives
A
C F
D
B
E
M
N
G L
K
H
B
40062
13
Special tool: A = dia. 230 x 15 mm
B = dia. 180 mm
1 Puller bridge
C = dia. 13 mm
Part No. 181 621.0
D = dia. 140 mm
2 Spindle
E = M 16
Part No. 181 836.0
F = dia. 30 mm
3 Hex. bolt
G = dia. 230 x 15 mm
M 16 x 75 DIN 933-8.8
H = dia. 145 mm
Part No. 237 379.0
K = M 12
Washer 17
L = 1 mm
4 Hex. bolt
M = H 20 x B 20 x T 15 mm
M 12 x 330 DIN 931-8.8
N = dia. 11 mm
Part No. 216 182.0 – 4 pcs.
Washer 13 – 4 pcs. (Fig. 13)
5 Hex. bolt
M 10 x 45 DIN 931-8.8
Part No. 235 533.0 – 4 pcs.
Washer 11 – 4 pcs.
Hex. nut
M 10 DIN 934 – 4 pcs.
6 Puller device
(self-manufactured)
7 Puller device
(self-manufactured)

Final drives
Final drives
Remove intermediate ring.

(Fig. 14)
14
Pull out the outer ring of the tapered roller bearing.

Remove supporting rings and note down their number
and thickness.
(Fig. 15)
15
Remove circlip and spacer ring.

(Fig. 16)
16

Final drives
Remove circlip from the pinion shaft (K).

Unscrew the transmission half (L) and remove using
a suitable lifting device.
(Fig. 17, 18)
17
18
Pull outer ring of tapered roller bearing out of the

transmission half.
(Fig. 19)
19
Unscrew the lid (D).

Drive shaft seal out of lid (D).
(Fig. 20)
20

Final drives
Remove outer ring of tapered roller bearing along with

tight-fitting washers.
Note down the number and thickness of tight-fitting
washers.
(Fig. 21)
21
Remove pinion shaft (23), intermediate shaft (28) and

spur gear (43) from the transmission half.
(Fig. 22)
22
Pull out outer ring of tapered roller bearing (24).

(Fig. 23)
23
Drive outer ring of tapered roller bearing (46) out of the

transmission half together with supporting ring.
(Fig. 24)
24

Final drives
Remove circlip.
(Fig. 25)
25
Unscrew lid (32).

(Fig. 26)
26
Remove outer ring of tapered roller bearing (29) along

with associated tight-fitting washers.
(Fig. 27)
27
Pull off tapered roller bearings (22 and 24) from the
pinion shaft (23).
(Fig. 28)
28

Final drives
Pull tapered roller bearings (25 and 29) off of the

intermediate shaft (28).
(Fig. 29)
29
Remove circlip and pull off spur gear.

(Fig. 30)
30

Final drives
31
Final drive, exploded view:
DOMINATOR 108 VX
1 Circlip
2 Profiled bushing
3 Grease nipple
5 Final drive
6 Final drive, left-hand half
7 Final drive, right-hand half
8 Screw plug
9 Breather M 10 x 1
10 Cylinder pin 16 m 6 x 55 DIN 8734
12 Detent edged ring Vskz 12
13 Screw plug M 10 x 1 DIN 906
14 Detent edged ring Vskz 16
Cheese-head screw M 16 x 60 DIN 4762
16 Magnetic filter bolt
17 Shaft seal AS 45 x 72 x 8 DIN 3760
18 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
19 Spring washer 10
20 Lid
21 Tight-fitting washer 75 x 85 x 0.1; 0.3; 0.5
22 Tapered roller bearing 33209 DIN 720
23 Pinion shaft
27 Spur gear

Final drives
28 Intermediate shaft
29 Tapered roller bearing 30311A DIN 720
30 Tight-fitting washer 100 x 120 x 0.1; 0.3; 0.5;
DIN 988
31 O-ring 110 x 3.5-N DIN 3771
32 Lid
33 Cap
34 Castellated nut M 42 x 1.5
35 Expansion pin 5 x 60-A DIN 8752
36 Expansion pin 8 x 60-N DIN 8752
37 Spacer ring
38 Tapered roller bearing 32311B DIN 720
39 Tight-fitting washer 55 x 68 x 1 DIN 988
40 Supporting ring 100 x 120 x 3.6 DIN 988
42 Spacer ring
43 Spur gear
45 Supporting ring 150 x 180 x 3.5 DIN 988
47 Spacer ring
48 Shaft seal B2 140 x 180 x 15
49 Wheel shaft
50 Wheel bolt M 22 x 1.5 x 65
51 Thrust nut H 22
52 Washer 45 x 65 x 0.75
(Fig. 31)

Final drives
40082
32
Assembling the final drives
DOMINATOR 108 VX
1. Heat up tapered roller bearings (22 and 24) to
approx. 100 °C and press on pinion shaft (23).
(Fig. 31, 32, 33)
33
2. Push spur gear (27) on the intermediate shaft (28)

and insert circlip (26).
(Fig. 31, 32, 34)
34

Final drives
3. Heat up tapered roller bearing (25) to approx.

100 °C and press on intermediate shaft (28).
(Fig. 31, 32, 35)
35
4. Press shaft seal (48) 10 mm deep into the final

drive with liquid sealing compound.
(Fig. 31, 32, 36)
36
5. Place right-hand final drive half (7) on the wheel

shaft (49). Insert spacer ring (47).
(Fig. 31, 32, 37)
37

100 °C and press on wheel shaft. Check correct
seat of bearing by means of a blow.
(Fig. 31, 32, 38)
38

Final drives
7. Drive in outer ring of tapered roller bearing (46).

(Fig. 31, 32, 39)
39
8. Place two sheet metal stripes of t = 6 mm between

the wheel shaft and the transmission housing
at (N).
(Fig. 40)
40
9. Insert supporting ring (45) and circlip (44).

(Fig. 31, 32, 41)
41
10. Drive outer ring of tapered roller bearing (24) into

the transmission housing.
(Fig. 31, 32, 42)
42

Final drives
11. Place spur gear (43) on the wheel shaft.

(Fig. 31, 32, 43)
43
12. Heat up tapered roller bearings (22 and 24) to

approx. 100 °C and press on pinion shaft (23).
Insert pre-assembled intermediate shaft (28) and
pinion shaft (23) into the transmission.
(Fig. 31, 32, 44)
44
13. Press outer ring of tapered roller bearing (25) into

the transmission half.
(Fig. 31, 32, 45)
45
14. Place final drive half (6) on final drive half (7)
using liquid sealing compound.
(Fig. 31, 32, 46)
46

Final drives
15. Bolt the transmission halves together.

Torque settings of cheese-head screws:
M 16 x 60 DIN 912-8.8 = 195 Nm
M 16 x 50 DIN 912-8.8 = 195 Nm
M 12 x 40 DIN 912-10.9 = 110 Nm
(Fig. 31, 32, 47)
47
16. Place spacer ring (42) on the wheel shaft.

(Fig. 31, 32, 48)
48
17. Determine the dimension (D) from the bolting

surface (Z) to the spacer ring (42).
Dimension (D) = 62.25 mm – 63.25 mm
Compensate with tight-fitting washer (39) if
required.
(Fig. 31, 32, 49, 50)
49
42
40100 50

Final drives

(Fig. 31, 32, 51)
51
19. Insert supporting ring (40) and outer ring of

tapered roller bearing (38).
(Fig. 31, 32, 52)
52
20. Place tapered roller bearing (38) on the wheel

shaft. Slightly pre-tighten castellated nut (34) by
hand.
(Fig. 31, 32, 53)
53
21. Insert outer ring of tapered roller bearing (22)

along with existing tight-fitting washers (21).
(Fig. 31, 32, 54)
54

Final drives
22. Install lid (20) by hand-screwing without shaft

seal.
(Fig. 31, 32, 55)
55
23. Turn transmission over and make sure that wheel

shaft and pinion shaft are free to move.
100 °C and press on intermediate shaft. Check
correct seat of bearing by means of a blow.
(Fig. 31, 32, 56)
56
25. Insert outer ring of tapered roller bearing (29) and

insert existing tight-fitting washers (30).
Clean bolting surface and bores.
(Fig. 31, 32, 57)
57
26. Loosely bolt down lid (25) without O-ring.

Measure the breakaway torque at the pinion shaft.
Tighten the lid with the five hexagon bolts (18)
evenly until the breakaway torque starts rising.

Final drives
27. Measure the gap between the lid (25) and the
bolting surface.
Gap dimension = 0.2 – 0.3 mm
Compensate the dimension using tight-fitting
washers (30) if required.
The bearing pre-tension thus is 0.2 to 0.3 mm.
(Fig. 31, 32, 58)
58
28. Bolt down lid (25) with O-ring (31).

(Fig. 31, 32, 59)
59
29. Turn transmission over and make sure that wheel

shaft (49) is free to move.
30. Measure the breakaway torque at the pinion shaft.
Tighten the lid (20) with the five hexagon
bolts (18) evenly until the breakaway torque starts
rising.
31. Measure the gap between the lid (20) and the
bolting surface.
Gap dimension = 0.1 to 0.2 mm
Compensate the dimension using tight-fitting
60 washers (21) if required.
The bearing pre-tension thus is 0.1 to 0.2 mm.
(Fig. 31, 32, 60)

Final drives
32. Insert lid (20) with liquid sealing compound and

bolt it down.
33. Slightly oil the shaft seal and drive into the lid (20).
(Fig. 31, 32, 61)
61
34. Clamp the final drive in place (e.g. place in the rim
along with the wheel bolts).
Pre-tighten the castellated nut (34) with 600 Nm
while constantly rotating the bearing. Loosen the
castellated nut and tighten with 250 Nm.
(Fig. 31, 32, 62)
62
35. Rotate castellated nut (34) further until the

grooves match the bores in the wheel shaft.
The breakaway torque at the pinion shaft must
be 3 to 7 Nm.
(Fig. 31, 32, 63)
63
36. Secure the castellated nut (34) with expansion

pins (35 and 36).
(Fig. 31, 32, 64)
64

Final drives
37. Insert spacer ring (37).

38. Unscrew oil drain plug.
Press in cap (33) with liquid sealing compound,
e.g. Omni Fit FD10.
CAUTION!
Apply load to the cap on its edge only!
(Fig. 31, 32, 65)

65
39. Install final drive.
Dismantling the final drives

Remove the final drive.
Drive the cap (2) out of the seat.The cap is destroyed
in this process.
(Fig. 66, 83)
66
Drive the double expansion pin (3) out of the

castellated nut (4).
(Fig. 67, 83)
67

Final drives
Unscrew the castellated nut (4).

Here it is recommended to place the final drive in the
rim along with the wheel bolts.
(Fig. 68, 83)
68
Suspend the final drive in a suitable lifting device using

the eyebolts so that the wheel shaft (17) does not
make contact.
Force the wheel shaft (17) out of the final drive
housing using a special tool.
Remove upper tapered roller bearing (6).
(Fig. 69, 83)
69
Special tool:
1 Puller bridge, Part No. 181 621.0
2 Spindle, Part No. 181 636.0
3 Hex. bolt M 16 x 80 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 242 468.0
4 Washer 17
5 Hex. bolt M 20 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 242 478.0
6 Washer 21
7 Flat bar (self-manufactured)
A = FL 60 x 15 x 370 mm
B = 28 mm
C = 275 mm
D = dia. 22 mm
B E = 115 mm
D H F = 140 mm
G = M 16
G C H = 185 mm
K = dia. 30 mm
E K (Fig. 70)
F
GD
40058
A
70

Final drives
Remove shaft seal (15) from the wheel shaft (17)

using pliers. The shaft seal is destroyed in this
process.
(Fig. 71, 83)
71
Pull off inner ring of tapered roller bearing (13) from

the wheel shaft (17) using a special tool.
CAUTION!
Check the tapered roller bearing (13) for

damage after pulling it off.
(Fig. 72, 83)
72
Special tool:
1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Spindle
Part No. 181 836.0
3 Hex. bolt M 16 x 75 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 379.0
Washer 17 – 2 pcs.
4 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
5 Puller plate
Part No. 181 617.0
6 Puller device
(self-manufactured)
A = 110 mm
B = dia.165 mm
C = 110 mm
D = 3 x M 16
E = 12 mm
F = 25 mm
G = 210 mm
H = 160 mm
(Fig. 73)
73

Final drives
Remove intermediate ring (5).

(Fig. 74, 83)
74
Pull out the outer ring of the tapered roller bearing (6).
Remove tight-fitting washer (8) if required.
(Fig. 75, 83)
75
Remove circlip (7) and tapered ring (9).

(Fig. 76, 83)
76
Unscrew lid (20).

(Fig. 77, 83)
77

Final drives
Remove circlip (12) and outer ring of the tapered roller

bearing (13) from the lid (20).
(Fig. 78, 83)
78
Remove spur gear (10) from the axle housing (32).

(Fig. 79, 83)
79
Unscrew lid (26) and pull it off.

(Fig. 80, 83)
80
Remove pinion shaft (29) and the outer rings of

tapered roller bearings (28 and 30).
Remove any existing tight-fitting washers (27) if
required.
(Fig. 81, 83)
81

Final drives
Pull inner rings of tapered roller bearings (28 and 30)

off of the pinion shaft (29).
(Fig. 82, 83)
82

Final drives
Final drives
83
Final drive, exploded view: 28 Tapered roller bearing 330 10 DIN 720
DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX 29 Pinion shaft
30 Tapered roller bearing 322 08 DIN 720
1 Final drive, assembled
31 Spacer ring
2 Cap
32 Axle housing
3 Expansion pin 8 x 60 -n DIN 8752
33 Screw plug
4 Castellated nut
34 Magnetic filter bolt
5 Intermediate ring
37 Profiled bushing
8 Tight-fitting washer 50 x 62 x 1 DIN 988
38 Washer
9 Tapered ring
39 Spring washer
10 Spur gear
11 Circlip 80 x 4 DIN 471 (Fig. 83)
14 Intermediate ring
15 Shaft seal B 1 110 x 150 x 15
16 Wheel bolt
17 Wheel shaft
18 Wheel nut
19 Breather
20 Lid
21 Spring washer 12
22 Hex. bolt M 12 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
23 Shaft seal As 50 x 65 x 8 DIN 3760
24 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
25 Spring washer 10
26 Lid

Final drives
Final drives
84
Assembling the final drives
NOTE:
Oil all moving parts, especially the bearings,

with multipurpose transmission oil prior to
assembly.
1. Heat up inner rings of tapered roller bearings

(28 and 30) to approx. 100 °C and install on pinion
85 shaft (29).
2. Check correct seat of bearing by means of a blow.
(Fig. 84, 85)

Final drives
3. Insert shaft seal (15) into the lid (20) using liquid
sealing compound, e.g. Omni Fit FD10, and drive
in 10 mm deep.
4. Slightly oil shaft seal (15).
(Fig. 84, 86)
86
5. Place lid (20) on wheel shaft (17).

6. Insert intermediate ring (14) into the lid (20).
(Fig. 84, 87)
87
7. Heat up inner ring of tapered roller bearing (13) to

approx. 100 °C and install on wheel shaft (17).
8. Check correct seat of bearing by means of a blow.
(Fig. 84, 88)
88

the lid (20) using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 84, 89)
89

Final drives
10. Insert several 6 mm spacers, e.g. washers,

between the wheel shaft (17) and the lid (20)
at (Q).
(Fig. 84, 90)
90
11. Drive circlip (12) into the ring groove of the

lid (20). During this process, the outer ring of the
tapered roller bearing (13) and the shaft seal (15)
are forced to correct position.
12. Insert spacer ring (31) into lid (20).
(Fig. 84, 91)
91
13. Push spur gear (10) and tapered ring (9) on the
wheel shaft (17).
14. Support the spur gear (10) with a 150 mm high
piece of timber.
(Fig. 84, 92)
92
15. Drive outer ring of tapered roller bearing (30)

into the axle housing (32) so it is flush, using a
plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 84, 93)
93

Final drives
16. Place axle housing (32) over the spur gear (10) on
the lid (20).
(Fig. 84, 94)
94
17. Suspend axle housing (32) in a suitable lifting

device.
18. Remove piece of timber (S).
19. Apply liquid sealing compound, e.g. Omni Fit
FD 10, to sealing face (T).
20. Slightly tilt the axle housing (32) and insert
pre-assembled pinion shaft (29).
(Fig. 84, 95)
95
21. Bolt lid (20) down to axle housing (32). Insert

hexagon bolts (22) with liquid sealing compound,
e.g. Omni fit FD10.
(Fig. 84, 96)
96

Final drives
22. Determine the dimension (D) from the bolting

surface (Z) to the tapered ring (9).
Target value (D) = 46.025 mm – 46.9 mm
Compensate with tight-fitting washer (8) if
necessary.
CAUTION!
During the measurement, the wheel shaft (17)

must be pressed axially to the inside without
play.
97
(Fig. 84, 97, 98)
98

the axle housing (32), using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 84, 99)
99
24. Insert circlip (7) into the ring groove in the axle
housing (32).
(Fig. 84, 100)
100

Final drives

the axle housing (32), using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 84, 101)
101
26. Drive inner ring of tapered roller bearing (6) on the

wheel shaft (17), using a block-ended tube of
inside dia. 50 mm, outside dia. 70 mm and a
length of 200 mm.
(Fig. 84, 102)
102
27. Screw castellated nut (4) on wheel shaft (17) and

slightly pre-tension by hand.
28. Cut the threads free at (W) and clean the bolting
surface.
29. Push the existing tight-fitting washers (27) on the
pinion shaft (29).
(Fig. 84, 103)
103

Final drives
30. Support the final drive with blocks of wood so that

the wheel shaft (17) rotates freely.
31. Tighten the lid (26) evenly by hand without sealing
compound, using the four hexagon bolts (24) until
a rise of the breakaway torque is noticeable when
rotating the pinion shaft (29).
CAUTION!
The gap between the lid (26) and the bolting

surface (W) must be 0.1 to 0.2 mm in order
104 to guarantee axial pre-stress of the bearing.
Compensate with tight-fitting washers (27) if
necessary.
32. Screw lid (26) to the axle housing (32), using

liquid sealing compound, e.g. Omni fit FD10.
(Fig. 84, 104, 105)
105
33. Slightly oil the shaft seal (23) and drive it into the
lid (26) so it is flush.
(Fig. 84, 106)
106
34. Clamp the final drive in place (e.g. place in the rim
along with the wheel bolts).
35. Pre-tighten the castellated nut (4) with 500 Nm
while constantly rotating the bearing. Loosen the
castellated nut (4) and tighten with 300 Nm.
(Fig. 84, 107)
107

Final drives
36. Support the final drive with blocks of wood. Rotate

castellated nut (4) further until the grooves match
the bores in the wheel shaft. The breakaway
torque at the pinion shaft must be 2.5 to 5 Nm.
(Fig. 84, 108)
108
37. Secure castellated nut (4) with new expansion

pins (3).
(Fig. 84, 109)
109
38. Insert intermediate ring (5).

(Fig. 84, 110)
110
39. Unscrew oil drain plug. Drive in cap (2) using

liquid sealing compound, e.g. Omni fit FD10.
CAUTION!
Apply load to the cap (2) on its edge only!
(Fig. 84, 111)

Install final drive.
111

Final drives
Installing the final drives

1. Secure machine so it will not roll away.
2. Move shift lever to neutral.
3. Loosen parking brake.
4. Clean bolting surface at the final drive and on the
drive axle and drive out expansion pins there.
5. Lift final drive to the drive axle using a suitable
lifting device.
6. Push profiled bushing (C) on the intermediate
112 shaft with existing washers (D) and bolt down final
drives without sealing compound to the drive axle,
using four hexagon bolts.
(Fig. 112)
For machines equipped with disk brake

(DOMINATOR 98 VX):
7. Determine the axial play of the intermediate shaft
at the brake disk using a measuring device. To do
this, move the intermediate shaft in both directions
with a mounting lever.
Axial play = 0.5 – 0.8 mm
Correct with washers (D) at the profiled
bushing (C) if necessary.
(Fig. 112, 113)
113
For machines equipped with drum brake

(DOMINATOR 108 VX / 88 VX):
8. Using a feeler gauge, determine the axial play of
the intermediate shaft at the profiled bushing (C).
To do this, move the intermediate shaft in both
directions with a mounting lever.
Correct with washers (D) at the profiled
bushing (C) if necessary.
(Fig. 112, 114)
114

Final drives
9. Apply liquid sealing compound, e.g.

Omni fit FD10, to the bolting surface.
10. Push on the counted number of washers (D) and
the profiled bushing (C) on the intermediate drive
shaft at the marked installation position.
11. Bolt final drives down to the drive axle.
Hexagon bolts (B) M 20 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
(9 pcs. on each side)
Cheese-head screws (B) M 20 x 50 DIN 4762-8.8
(9 pcs. on each side)
115 12. Check if intermediate drive shaft runs smoothly
by rotating the brake disk or the brake drum and
correct if necessary by loosening the bolts (B) and
slightly twisting the final drive.
CAUTION!
If the two final drives have been removed

simultaneously, the intermediate drive shaft
must always be held fast on the other side at
the same time for checking if it runs smoothly.
13. Arrest the final drives and the drive axle with new
expansion pins.
CAUTION!
If the existing bores do not match, new bores

for the expansion pins must possibly be drilled.
(Fig. 112, 115)

Final drives
14. Tighten hexagon bolts and cheese-head

screws (B) with a tightening torque of 370 Nm.
15. Install drive wheel.
(Fig. 115, 116)
116
Filling up final drive oil:

A = Oil drain plug
E = Oil filler cap
L = Transmission breather
K = Oil level check plug
Fill in multi-grade transmission oil up to the bottom
edge of the oil level check plug (K).
DOMINATOR 108 VX = 4.5 litres
DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX = 3.0 litres
117 CAUTION!
Clean the magnetic plug in the oil drain plug (A)

with every oil change.
(Fig. 117, 118)
118

Final drives

Foot brake
Foot brake
FOOT BRAKE
Bleeding the brake system

1. Fill up the brake fluid container (A) on the
operator's platform to maximum level.
(Fig. 1)
2. Connect bleeding hose (B) with collecting

container to the bleed valve (C).
For drum brake (wheel brake cylinder)
(Fig. 2)
For disk brake (brake calliper)

(Fig. 3)

Foot brake
3. Loosen bleed valve (C) and push the corres-

ponding foot brake lever downwards.
4. Keep foot brake lever in the bottom position and
close bleed valve (C). Release foot brake lever.
Repeat this procedure as often as required to
make brake liquid leave the bleed hose without
any bubbles.
CAUTION!
Make sure there is enough brake liquid in the

brake liquid container (A) on the operator's
platform and in the collecting container.
Use only ATE brake fluid according to
SAE specification J 1703.
5. Perform a brake test.

(Fig. 1, 2, 3)

Foot brake
Removing the main brake cylinder

Drain the brake liquid and collect it in a collecting
container.
Unscrew brake lines (A) from the main brake
cylinder and plug them at both ends using plugs.
Remove the safety of pin (B) and pull out pin.
Unscrew hexagon bolts (C) and remove main
brake cylinder.
(Fig. 4)
Installing the main brake cylinder

Insert main brake cylinder and bolt down using
two hexagon bolts (C).
Adjust yoke (D) so that pin (B) can be easily
pushed in with the brake pedals at rest.
Maximum play = 0.5 mm
Secure pin (B).
Bleed brake system.
(Fig. 4, 5)
5

Foot brake

Foot brake
Foot brake
FOOT BRAKE
Bleeding the brake units

1. Fill the brake fluid reservoir (A) which is mounted
on the driver’s platform to maximum.
(Fig. 1)
2. Connect the bleed pipe (B) to the bleed screw (C)

and in a suitable collection container.
With drum brakes (wheel brake ram)
(Fig. 2)
With disc brakes (brake cradle)

(Fig. 3)

Foot brake
3. Slacken off the bleed screw (C), and press the

relevant brake pedal right to the bottom.
4. Hold the brake pedal in the bottom position, and
close the bleed screw (C). Release the brake
pedal. Continue the procedure until the oil flows
without air bubbles in the bleed pipe.
CAUTION!
Please ensure that there is always sufficient oil

in the brake fluid reservoir (A) mounted on the
driver’s platform and that oil does not spill out of
the collecting container.
Only use ATE-brake fluid to specification
SAE J 1703.
5. Test the brakes.

(Fig. 1, 2, 3)
Removing the brake shoes from the foot brake

with drum brakes (DOMINATOR 108 VX / 88 VX)
CAUTION!
The brake shoes must always be fitted in pairs

an on both sides.
Chock the machine against rolling.

Unscrew the hex. bolt (A) by turning it several times.
(Fig. 4)

Foot brake
Using the plastic-tip hammer, tap in the hex. bolt (A),

and using the adjuster, move the brake shoes back.
If necessary operate the foot brake.
(Fig. 5)
Release the key from the foot brake drum.

(Fig. 6)
Lightly oil the intermediate shaft (B) and using a plas-

tic-tip hammer, tap off the foot brake drum towards the
right.
(Fig. 7)
Remove the springs (C).

(Fig. 8)

Foot brake
Remove the brake shoes complete with the tension

springs (D) from the brake adjuster.
CAUTION!
The brake shoes must not come into contact

with either oil or grease.
(Fig. 9)
Installing the brake shoes from the foot brake

Press the brake shoes along with the tension
springs (D) back into position.
Fit the springs (C).
CAUTION!

(Fig. 8, 9)
Slide the foot brake drum onto the intermediate drive

shaft (B) so that the brake shoes are flush with the
outer edge on the foot brake drum.
Key the foot brake drum.
(Fig. 10)
10

Foot brake
Screw in the hex. bolt (A) until the brake shoes touch
the foot brake drum.
Press the right-hand brake pedal so that the brake
shoes are centralised in the foot brake drum.
Jack up and chock the front right-hand side of the
machine.
Slacken off the hex. bolt (A) approx. ¾ of a turn so that
the foot brake drum is free from the brake shoes in
order not to cause premature wear.
Carry out a brake test. For this, ensure that both
11 brakes have the same resistance at the same pedal
height, and the brakes are fully activated within the
first third of the brake pedal travel.
If necessary correct using the hex. bolt (A).
(Fig. 11)
Removing the wheel brake ram

Remove the brake shoes from the foot brake.
Press both brake pedals, and chock them under
the driver’s platform with a piece of wood.
This ensures that when the brake pipe is slackened,
not all the oil escapes.
(Fig. 12)
12
Remove the brake pipe (A) from the wheel brake ram
and seal both ends with bungs.
Remove the hex. bolts (B) and then the wheel brake
ram.
(Fig. 13)
13

Foot brake
Installing the wheel brake ram

Bolt the wheel brake ram to the brake adjuster (C)
using hex. bolts (B).
Connect the brake pipe (A) back on the wheel brake
ram.
Refit the brake shoes of the foot brake.
Bleed the braking system.
(Fig. 14)
14
Removing the brake cradle

with disc brakes (DOMINATOR 98 VX)
Press both brake pedals, and chock them under
the driver’s platform with a piece of wood.
This ensures that when the brake pipe is slackened,
not all the oil escapes.
(Fig. 15)
15
Disconnect the cable connection (A).

(Fig. 16)
16

Foot brake
Disconnect the brake pipe (B) and seal both ends

with bungs.
(Fig. 17)
17
Remove the hex. bolts (C) and then the brake cradle.
(Fig. 18)
18
Remove the cover plate (D).

(Fig. 19)
19
Tap out the holding pin (E).

Remove the expander spring (F), the brake pads (G)
as well as the separating plates (H).
(Fig. 20)
20

Foot brake
Installing the brake cradle

Pre-assemble the brake cradle by using brake
pads (G), separating plates (H), expander spring (F)
and holding pins (E).
CAUTION!
The separating plates (H) must be inserted in

a way so that the segment-formed cut out (K)
is against the rotation (P) of the brake disc.
21 (The rotation direction (P) is against the
direction of the wheels.)
(Fig. 20, 21)
Bolt the brake cradle onto the flange using the hex.
bolts (C). Fit the cover plate (D).
Apply a thread sealer such as DELO-ML-5328 to the
hex. bolt and fit bolt. Additionally apply fitting lubricant
to the shaft of the fit bolt.
Reconnect the wiring loom (A).
Bleed the brake system.
(Fig. 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22)
22

Foot brake
Removing the brake pads

CAUTION!
The brake pads should only be replaced in pairs

and on both sides.
Disconnect the cable connector (A).

Remove the cover plate (B).
23 (Fig. 23)
Tap out the holding pins (C).

Remove the expander springs (D).
(Fig. 24)
24
Remove the brake pads (E) along with the separating

plates (F).
If necessary the brake pistons need to be pressed
back.
Take note of the mounting position of the separating
plates (F).
CAUTION!
The brake pads must not come into contact with

any oil or grease.
25
(Fig. 25)

Foot brake
Installing the brake pads

Before fitting new brake pads, push the brake
pistons (G) back completely.
CAUTION!
The seals (H) must not be damaged.

When pushing the brake pistons back,
ensure that the brake fluid reservoir (L) on
the right-hand side of the driver’s platform
26 does not overflow.
(Fig. 26, 27)
27
Insert the brake pads (E).

Take note of the mounting position of the separating
plates (F). The segment-formed cut out (M) must be
against the rotation of the brake disc.
(The rotation direction of the brake disc is against the
direction of the wheels.)
CAUTION!
The brake pads must not come into contact

with oil or grease.
28
Fit the expander spring (D) and the holding pins (C).
Bleed the brake system.
(Fig. 28)

Grain elevator
Grain elevator
GRAIN ELEVATOR
Removing the grain elevator chain

Unscrew plate (A).
DOMINATOR 98 VX
(Fig. 1)
Unscrew guard (B).

(Fig. 2)
Relieve the tension of the grain elevator chain.

To do this, loosen hexagon bolt (C) and turn the
chain tensioner (D) fully backwards.
Remove cover (E).
(Fig. 3)
Unlock door (F) and remove.

(Fig. 4)

Grain elevator
Relieve the tension of sieve pan drive belt (10).

To this end, loosen the hexagon bolt from the jockey
pulley at (B).
Loosen hexagon bolts at (M) and remove belt (10)
from the V-belt pulley.
(Fig. 5)
Move grain elevator chain so that the chain-connect

link is in the bottom position and separate the link.
(Fig. 6)
Pull out the grain elevator chain to the top.

Observe correct installation position.
(Fig. 7)

Grain elevator
Installing the grain elevator chain

1. Introduce the grain elevator chain into the
grain elevator shaft from the top.
Observe correct installation position!
(The transport side is at the front)
(Fig. 7)
2. Join the grain elevator chain at the bottom using
the chain-connect link and secure by means of
new cotter pins.
(Fig. 6)
3. Close the door (F).
(Fig. 4)
4. Tension the grain elevator chain by means of the
chain tensioner (D) so that the conveyor plates
will not touch the grain elevator shaft.
Tighten hexagon bolt (C).
Fit cover (E) and guard (B).
(Fig. 2, 3)
5. Fit plate (A).
DOMINATOR 98 VX
(Fig. 1)
6. Install sieve pan drive belt (10) and adjust.
To this end, tension belt (10) by means of
hexagon nuts (B) with nut (M) loosened.
Secure setting with the lock nut.
Tighten hexagon nut (B).
(Fig. 5)
Removing the grain elevator chain

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Relieve the tension of the grain elevator chain.
To do this, loosen hexagon bolt (A) and turn the
chain tensioner (H) fully backwards.
Remove cover (C).
(Fig. 8)

Grain elevator
Unlock door (D) and remove.

(Fig. 9)

To do this, loosen hexagon nut at (B) from the jockey
pulley.
Loosen hexagon nuts at (M) and remove belt (10) from
the V-belt pulley.
(Fig. 10)
10
Move grain elevator chain so that the chain-connect

link is in the bottom position and separate the link.
(Fig. 11)
11
Unscrew the plate (G).

(Fig. 12)
12

Grain elevator
Pull out the grain elevator chain to the top.

(Fig. 13)
13
Installing the grain elevator chain

DOMINATOR 108 VX
1. Introduce the grain elevator chain into the
grain elevator shaft from the top.
Observe correct installation position!
(The transport side is at the front)
(Fig. 13)
2. Join the grain elevator chain at the bottom using
the chain-connect link and secure by means of
new cotter pins.
(Fig. 11)
3. Close the door (D).
(Fig. 9)
4. Tension the grain elevator chain by means of the
chain tensioner (H) so that the conveyor plates
will not touch the grain elevator shaft.
Tighten hexagon bolt (A).
Fit cover (C).
(Fig. 8)
5. Fit plate (G).
(Fig. 12)
6. Install sieve pan drive belt (10) and adjust.
To this end, tension belt (10) by means of
hexagon nuts (B) with nut (M) loosened.
(Fig. 10)

Grain elevator
Removing the grain elevator top

Remove the grain elevator chain.
Put down the grain elevator top drive chain (30).
Disconnect cable (A) from the magnetic pick-up
and unscrew the cable clamp from the bracket.
(Fig. 14)
14
Unscrew the lubricating line from the angle drive

housing (L).
(Fig. 15)
15
Unscrew the grain elevator top from the flange (B).

(Fig. 16)
16
Take the grain elevator top off of the grain elevator

shaft and lift out of the grain tank using a suitable lifting
device.
(Fig. 17)
17

Grain elevator
Removing the grain elevator top

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove grain tank filler auger.
Disconnect cable (A) from the magnetic pick-up.
(Fig. 18)
18
Unscrew the grain elevator top from the flange (B).

(Fig. 19)
19
Take the grain elevator top off of the grain elevator

shaft using a suitable lifting device.
(Fig. 20)
20
Dismantling the grain elevator top

Drive out the expansion pin of the chain wheel and
remove chain wheel using a puller.
(Fig. 21)
21

Grain elevator
Unlock the lock collar or and cam wheel of the lock

collar bearings and knock off.
(Fig. 22)
22
Unscrew the sheet metal flanges of the lock collar

bearings and the magnetic pick-up including its
bracket.
(Fig. 23)
23
Remove the lock collar bearings together with the

sheet metal flanges located behind them.
(Fig. 24)
24
Loosen the set collars (9).

Emery and oil the shaft (6).
(Fig. 25)
25

Grain elevator
Support the chain wheel (10) laterally using a squared

timber (B) and drive the shaft (6) through by means of
a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 26)
26
Take out the key (11) as well as the shaft (6), the chain
wheel (10) and the set collars (9).
(Fig. 25, 27)
27
Remove the lateral sealing plates (7).

(Fig. 28)
28
Unscrew the angle drive housing (E).
(Fig. 29)
29

Grain elevator
Unscrew the hexagon bolt on the face side.
(Fig. 30)
30
Remove the flange (F). To this end, use a
head-centered hexagon bolt M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8.
(Fig. 31)
31
Mark the filler tube to the grain elevator top.
Unscrew the filler tube from the flange and take off
together with the filler auger.
(Fig. 32, 33)
32
33

Grain elevator
Grain elevator
34
Grain elevator top, exploded view: 27 Contact washer A 8
1 Flange ball bearing Pea 205
29 Mushroom head bolt M 6 x 16 x 10 DIN 603
2 Set screw M 6 x 6 DIN 916
3 Lock collar
Contact washer A 6
31 Lock nut VM 10
6 Shaft
7 Sealing plate (Fig. 34)
8 Set screw M 10 x 8 DIN 916
9 Set collar
10 Chain wheel
11 Key A 8 x 7 x 30 DIN 6885
14 Set screw M 6 x 0.75 x 6 DIN 916
15 Cam wheel
16 Cover
Contact washer B 8
22 Tensioner
23 Tensioning plate, left-hand
24 Grain elevator top
25 Tensioning plate, right-hand

Grain elevator
Grain elevator
Assembling the grain elevator top

Bolt down pre-assembled filler tube to the flange
(Fig. 32, 33)
Mount flange (F) onto the shaft using a special tool.
(Fig. 35)
35
Special tool:
1 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 100 DIN 933-8.8
2 Hexagon nut
M 10 DIN 934
Part No. 177 899.0
4 3 2 1 (Fig. 36)
33541 36
Screw in the hexagon bolt with the washer at the face
end using liquid screw fastener, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
(Fig. 37)
37

Grain elevator
Bolt down the transmission housing (E) to the elevator
top housing together with flange (F).
(Fig. 38)
38
Insert the two sealing plates (7).

(Fig. 28)
Insert key (11), chain wheel (10), set collars (9) and
shaft (6).
(Fig. 25, 27)
Push on the lock collar bearings including sheet metal
flanges and the magnetic pick-up with its bracket and
bolt down.
CAUTION!
Three washers DIN 125-8 each must be placed

underneath the rear sheet metal flange on both
sides.
(Fig. 23)
Compress the elevator top housing using a screw

clamp so that the lock collar bearings are flush at the
shaft shoulder.
Loosely push on the lock collar and/or the cam wheel.
Drive on chain wheel by means of plastic-tip hammer
and secure by means of an expansion pin.
(Fig. 39)
39

Grain elevator
Check with a straight edge if the chain wheels are
perfectly aligned.
Arrest lock collar and/or cam wheel and secure.
(Fig. 40)
40
Check if chain wheel (10) is in centre position in the

elevator top housing and correct if necessary.
Arrest the chain wheel (10) by means of set collars (9).
(Fig. 41)
41
Check magnetic pick-up settings and correct if

necessary.
Setting dimension (X) = 1 ± 0.5 mm
(Fig. 42)
42

Grain elevator
Installing the grain elevator top

1. Insert the grain elevator top into the grain tank
using a suitable lifting device and bolt it down on
the grain elevator shaft at flange (B).
(Fig. 16, 17)
2. Fit the lubricating line to the angle drive
housing (L).
(Fig. 15)
3. Connect cable (A) to the magnetic pick-up and
fit to the bracket using a cable clamp.
Install grain elevator top drive chain (30).
Install grain elevator chain.
(Fig. 14)
Installing the grain elevator top

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Lift the grain elevator top towards the machine using a
suitable lifting device and bolt down to the housing (D)
using two hexagon bolts (C).
(Fig. 20, 43)
43
Place the flanges (B) above each other using a tyre

mounting lever.
(Fig. 44)
44

Grain elevator
Push the grain elevator shaft slightly to the side using

a tyre mounting lever so the flange joint (B) can be
pushed together.
(Fig. 44, 45)
45
Bolt down the grain elevator top at flange (B).

Connect cable (A) from the magnetic pick-up.
(Fig. 18)
Install grain tank filler auger.
Removing the grain elevator shaft

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove grain elevator chain.
Remove cap (A).
(Fig. 46)
46
Unlock lock collar from lock collar bearing and knock

lock collar off.
(Fig. 47)
47

Grain elevator
Unscrew the sheet metal flange of the lock collar bear-

ing and remove the lock collar bearing together with
the rear sheet metal flange by means of a puller.
(Fig. 48)
48
Unscrew cover (D) and bracket (E).

(Fig. 49)
49
Unscrew the hexagon bolts (F) and push the rubber

connecting sleeve (G) to the side.
(Fig. 50)
50
If the additional fuel filter is provided, loosen the hose

clamps (H).
Loosen the threaded rods (I) and tie the filter to the
side.
(Fig. 51)
51

Grain elevator
Slightly lift cover (J) using a suitable lifting device and

unhinge the gas struts (K).
Unscrew the hinges (L) and remove cover (J).
(Fig. 52, 53)
52
53
Hang the grain elevator into a suitable lifting device.

(Fig. 54)
54
Slightly push the grain elevator shaft to the side and

loosen the hexagon bolts at the sectioning point (M).
Support the grain elevator boot with a squared timber.
(Fig. 55)
55

Grain elevator
Take off the grain elevator shaft using a suitable lifting

device. In doing so, disconnect cable connection (N).
(Fig. 56)
56
Installing the grain elevator shaft

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Put the grain elevator shaft on the grain elevator boot
using a suitable lifting device. In doing so, plug in cable
connection (N).
(Fig. 56)
Bolt down the grain elevator top to housing (D) using

two hexagon bolts (O).
(Fig. 57)
57
Tighten the hexagon bolts at the sectioning point (M)

and remove the squared timber.
(Fig. 55)
Install cover (J) and gas struts (K).
(Fig. 52, 53)

Grain elevator
If additional fuel filter is provided, fit it to the grain

elevator shaft and attach the hose clamps (H).
(Fig. 51)
Screw in the hexagon bolts (F) and position the
rubber connecting sleeves (G).
(Fig. 50)
Fit the bracket (E) and cover (D).
Install the lock collar bearing including sheet metal
flanges and bolt down.
(Fig. 48, 49)
Arrest the lock collar of the lock collar bearing and
secure.
Fit cap (A).
(Fig. 46, 47)
Install grain tank filler auger.
Removing the grain elevator boot

Remove grain elevator chain.
Remove cap (A).
(Fig. 58)
58
Unlock lock collar (B) from lock collar bearing and

knock lock collar off.
(Fig. 59)
59

Grain elevator
Unscrew the sheet metal flange of the lock collar

bearing and remove the lock collar bearing together
with the rear sheet metal flange by means of a puller.
(Fig. 60)
60
Loosen four hexagon bolts (C) at the returns tube (D).

(Fig. 61)
61
Unscrew two hexagon bolts (E) from brace (F).
CAUTION!
The rear side cover must be either supported or

locked in the lock.
(Fig. 62)
62
Unscrew two hexagon bolts (G) of bracket (H).

(Fig. 63)
63

Grain elevator
Unscrew the bracket (H) from the machine housing.

(Fig. 64)
64
Support brace (F) against the returns elevator by

means of a squared timber.
Slightly pull bracket (H) forwards.
(Fig. 65)
65
Unscrew the grain elevator boot at the grain

elevator shaft.
(Fig. 66)
66
Remove the grain elevator boot to the bottom.

(Fig. 67)
67

Grain elevator
Installing the grain elevator boot

1. Lift the grain elevator boot to the side of the
machine and bolt down to the grain elevator shaft.
Remove squared timber and fit bracket (H) to the
returns elevator, to the brace (F) and to the
machine frame.
(Fig. 62, 63, 64, 65, 66)
2. Bolt down the returns tube (D) to the grain
elevator boot.
(Fig. 61)
3. Install the lock collar bearing including sheet metal
flanges and bolt down.
Arrest the lock collar of the lock collar bearing and
secure.
Fit cap (A).
(Fig. 58, 59, 60)
4. Check if the chain wheel (K) is in centre position in

the grain elevator boot housing.
Loosen the two set collars (L) if required and align
chain wheel.
(Fig. 68)
5. Install grain elevator chain.
68
Removing the grain elevator boot

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove grain elevator shaft.
Unscrew the guard (H) and the brace (I).
(Fig. 69)
69

Grain elevator
Turn the grain elevator boot to the bottom.

(Fig. 70)
70
Unscrew the bracket (J) from the machine frame.

(Fig. 71)
71
Unscrew the hexagon bolts (K).
CAUTION!
The rear side cover must be either supported or

locked in the lock.
(Fig. 72)
72
Push the brace (M) to the side using a squared

timber (L).
Remove grain elevator boot. It may be necessary to
rotate the grain auger to a favourable angle.
(Fig. 73)
73

Grain elevator
Installing the grain elevator boot

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Place the grain elevator boot in position.
Remove squared timber (L).
Loosely screw in hexagon bolts (K).
Fit the bracket (J) to the machine frame.
(Fig. 71, 72, 73)
Rotate the grain elevator boot to a correct position.

Place the grain elevator shaft in position and push to
the side using a squared timber (N).
Loosely screw in the hexagon bolts at the sectioning
point (O).
(Fig. 70, 74)
74
Push the grain elevator boot to the top position using a

lifting device.
Tighten the hexagon bolts at the sectioning point (O).
Check if chain wheel (P) is in centre position in the
grain elevator boot housing. Loosen the two set
collars (R) if required and align chain wheel.
Tighten hexagon bolts (K).
Install grain elevator shaft.
(Fig. 75)
75

Grain elevator
Removing the grain auger

Unscrew plate (A), plate (R) and door (C).
(Fig. 76)
76
Determine clearance (X) between shaft end and V-belt

pulley by means of a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 77)
77
Remove the gib head key from the V-belt pulley.

Emery and oil the shaft end.
(Fig. 78)
78
Remove the V-belt pulley using a puller.

(Fig. 79)
79

Grain elevator
Loosen the auger trough (D) at the latches (E) and

fold down.
(Fig. 80)
80
Unlock lock collar (F) from lock collar bearing and

Unscrew filler bolt (G).
Unscrew sheet metal flange (H).
(Fig. 81)
81
Remove the lock collar bearing with the sheet metal

flange located behind it.
(Fig. 82)
82
Remove spacer ring (J).

(Fig. 83)
83

Grain elevator

Remove cap (K).
(Fig. 84)
84

lock collar off.
(Fig. 85)
85

bearing.
(Fig. 86)
86
Remove the lock collar bearing with the sheet metal

flange located behind it.
(Fig. 87)
87

Grain elevator
Loosen set collars (2).

Emery the shaft in the area of the chain wheel (4)
and oil.
(Fig. 88)
88
Support the chain wheel (4) on the elevator boot using

a squared timber.
Drive the shaft to the side and remove chain wheel (4),
the set collars (2) and the key (3). At the same time,
turn the grain auger (1) out of the installation opening.
(Fig. 89, 90, 91)
89
90
Installing the grain auger

Turn the grain auger (1) in through the installation
opening and loosely insert chain wheel (4), key (3) and
set collars (2).
(Fig. 90, 91)
91

Grain elevator
Push on spacer ring (J).

Install both lock collar bearings and bolt down using
the sheet metal flanges.
CAUTION!
The spacer ring (J) must make contact with the

lock collar bearing.
(Fig. 92)
92
Arrest both lock collar bearings by means of lock

collars and secure.
Fit filler bolt (G).
Fit cap (K).
(Fig. 81, 84, 85)
Push on the V-belt pulley and align according to the

determined clearance.
Arrest the V-belt pulley using a gib head key.
(Fig. 93)
93
Align the chain wheel (4) to be in centre position and

arrest using set collars (2).
Fit plate (A), plate (R) and door (C).
(Fig. 76, 94)
94

Grain elevator
Removing the grain tank filler auger

Unscrew plate (A).
DOMINATOR 98 VX
(Fig. 95)
95
Unscrew guard (B) and cover (E).

(Fig. 96)
96
Remove grain elevator top drive chain (30).

Loosen lubricating line (G).
Unscrew housing (18) from flange (17).
(Fig. 97)
97
Unscrew the hexagon bolt (25) from the face end of

the bevel wheel (10).
(Fig. 98)
98

Grain elevator
Remove bevel wheel (10) together with flange (17)

using a puller.
(Fig. 99)
99
Unscrew the filler tube (12) from the flange and

remove. Mark installation position while removing.
(Fig. 100)
100
Take out filler auger (6).

(Fig. 101)
101
Removing the grain tank filler auger

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove grain elevator drive chain (30).
DOMINATOR 108 VX
Unscrew housing (18) from flange (17).
(Fig. 102)
102

Grain elevator
Unscrew the hexagon bolt (25) from the face end of

the bevel wheel (10).
(Fig. 103)
103
Remove the bevel wheel (10) and the flange (17)

using a puller.
(Fig. 104)
104
Unscrew the filler tube (12) from the flange and

remove. Mark installation position while removing.
(Fig. 105)
105
Take out filler auger (6) from the housing (G).

(Fig. 106)
106

Grain elevator
Dismantling the angle drive for grain tank

filler auger
Drive out the expansion pin of chain wheel (A) and
remove chain wheel using a puller.
(Fig. 107)
107
Remove the circlip (11) from the shaft (21).

(Fig. 108, 113)
108
Drive out the shaft (21) together with the deep groove
ball bearing (20) from the housing (18).
(Fig. 109, 113)
109
Drive out the bevel wheel (10) together with the deep
groove ball bearing (7) from the housing (18).
(Fig. 110, 113)
110

Grain elevator
Drive out the bevel wheel (10) together with the deep
groove ball bearing (7) from the flange (17).
(Fig. 111, 113)
111
Separate the deep groove ball bearing (7) from the

bevel wheel (10) using a puller.
(Fig. 112, 113)
112
Special tool:
Washer
dia. 17 x dia. 30 DIN 125
Part No. 235 127.2
Hexagon bolt
Head-centered M 16 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 463.0

Grain elevator
Grain elevator
113
Grain tank filler auger, exploded view: 19 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472
1 Lubricating nipple
21 Shaft
22 Lubricating nipple
3 Adjusting bearing
24 Washer
5 Mushroom head bolt M 8 x 16 x 10 DIN 603
Hexagon nut M 8 DIN 934 (Fig. 113)
Contact washer A8
6 Filler auger
9 Key
10 Bevel wheel
12 Filler tube
Contact washer B 8
Contact washer A 10
15 Felt ring
17 Flange
18 Housing

Grain elevator
Grain elevator
40692
114
Assembling the angle drive for grain tank
filler auger
Push the deep groove ball bearing (7) on the bevel
wheel (10) using a special tool.
(Fig. 114, 115)
115
Push the pre-assembled bevel wheel (10) into the

flange (17) using a special tool and secure by means
of circlip (8).
Insert felt ring (15) into flange (17).
Fill the space (F) of flange (17) with multipurpose
grease CLAAS EP2.
(Fig. 114, 116)
116

Grain elevator
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
Part No. 181 880.0
Part No. 235 983.0
3 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0 – 2 pcs.
4 Spindle
Part No. 181 877.0
5 Sleeve
Part No. 181 881.1
40691 117 (Fig. 117)
Insert circlip (19) into housing (18).

Drive the shaft (21) with the deep groove ball
bearing (20) into the housing (18) using a block-ended
tube.
(Fig. 114, 118)
118
Drive the pre-assembled bevel wheel (10) on the

shaft (21) using a brass punch.
Fit circlip (11).
(Fig. 114, 119)
119
Push the chain wheel (A) on the shaft (21) and secure
using an expansion pin.
Fill the space (F) of housing (18) with multipurpose
grease CLAAS EP2.
(Fig. 107, 114, 120)
120

Grain elevator
Installing the grain tank filler auger

1. Insert the filler auger (6) into the grain elevator
top.
(Fig. 101)
2. Push on filler tube (12) and bolt down at the
flange. Observe correct installation position and
marking.
(Fig. 100)
3. Drive the pre-assembled flange (17) on the filler
auger (6) using a plastic-tip hammer and screw in
the hexagon bolt (25) at the face end, using liquid
screw fastener, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
(Fig. 98, 99, 101)
4. Bolt down housing (18) to flange (17).
Fit lubricating line (G).
(Fig. 97)
5. Install grain elevator top drive chain (30).
Fit guard (B) and cover (E).
Fit plate (A).
DOMINATOR 98 VX
(Fig. 95, 96)

Grain elevator
Installing the grain tank filler auger

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Insert filler auger (6) into housing (G).
Push on filler tube (12) and bolt down to the flange.
(Fig. 105, 106)
Drive the pre-assembled flange (17) on the filler

auger (6) using a special tool and screw in the hexa-
gon bolt (25) at the face end, using liquid screw fas-
tener, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
(Fig. 103, 106, 121)
121
Special tool:
1 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 100 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 235 223.1
2 Hexagon nut
M 10 DIN 934
Part No. 236 171.0
Part No. 177 899.0
4 3 2 1
4 Washer 10
Part No. 523 126.0 (existing)
33541 122 (Fig. 122)
Bolt down housing (18) to flange (17).

Install grain elevator top drive chain (30).
DOMINATOR 108 VX
(Fig. 102)

Grain tank unloading
GRAIN TANK UNLOADING
Removing the grain tank unloading auger

Remove grain tank unloading intermediate drive
chain (31).
Determine clearance (X) between shaft end and
chain wheel using a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 1)
Remove the gib head key of the chain wheel.

(Fig. 2)
Remove the chain wheel using a puller.

(Fig. 3)
Unscrew the rear cover (A).

(Fig. 4)


lock collar off.
(Fig. 5)
Unscrew the front flange of the lock collar bearing.

(Fig. 6)
Push out the grain tank unloading auger approx.

10 mm from the gearing.
(Fig. 7)
Remove the lock collar bearing together with the sheet

metal flanges located behind it.
(Fig. 8)

Unscrew the bearing plate (C) from the grain tank side
wall.
(Fig. 9)
Push the grain tank unloading auger with the external

spline out of the angle drive (E) and at the same time
turn out to the right-hand side through the installation
opening.
(Fig. 10, 11)
10
11

Installing the grain tank unloading auger

Apply plenty of multipurpose grease CLAAS EP2 to
the external spline of the grain tank unloading auger
before installing.
Turn in the grain tank unloading auger through the
installation opening from the right-hand side and at the
same time introduce it into the internal spline of the
angle drive (E).
(Fig. 10, 11)
Attach the bearing plate (C) to the grain tank side wall.
Install the lock collar bearing and bolt down to the
grain tank side wall with the flanges.
(Fig. 9, 12)
12
Align the grain tank unloading auger so that the shoul-

der at the shaft end makes contact with the lock collar
bearing.
Arrest the lock collar bearing using the lock collar and
secure.
(Fig. 5, 13)
13
Push on chain wheel and align according to the deter-

mined clearance (X).
Check with a straightedge if the chain wheel is
perfectly aligned and correct if necessary.
(Fig. 1, 14)
14

Arrest the chain wheel using a gib head key.

Install grain tank unloading intermediate drive
chain (31) and tension it.
(Fig. 15)
15
Removing the grain tank unloading tube

auger
Unscrew cover (A) and outlet spout (B) from the grain
tank unloading tube.
(Fig. 16)
16
Open the slide (K) in the grain tank unloading tube and
unscrew hexagon bolt (C).
(Fig. 17)
17
Pull the grain tank unloading auger slightly to the rear.

(Fig. 18)
18

Unscrew the sealing (D).

(Fig. 19)
19
Lift the grain tank unloading auger out of the grain tank
unloading tube to the rear, using a suitable lifting
device.
(Fig. 20)
20
Loosen the lock collar of the lock collar bearing and

remove cover (A).
(Fig. 21)
21

Installing the grain tank unloading tube auger

Using a suitable lifting device, lift the grain tank
unloading auger into the grain tank unloading tube
and bolt down to the angle drive using the hexagon
bolt (C).
(Fig. 17, 22)
22
Fit sealing (D).

Push cover (A) on the grain tank unloading auger
with lock collar and lock collar bearing and bolt down
together with the outlet spout (B).
Arrest lock collar of lock collar bearing.
(Fig. 16, 19)
Removing the grain tank unloading tube

Remove grain tank unloading auger.
Remove lower angle drive of grain tank unloading.
Unscrew pin (A) of swing cylinder.
(Fig. 23)
23
Retract the piston rod of the swing cylinder.

Tie down the swing cylinder.
(Fig. 24)
24

Take out the agitator shaft to the bottom.

(Fig. 25)
25
Suspend the grain tank unloading tube in a suitable

lifting device.
(Fig. 26)
26
Unscrew the upper bracket (B) of the flange joint and

loosen the hexagon bolts of the lower bracket (C) if
required.
(Fig. 27)
27
Push the grain tank unloading tube out of the flange

joint and remove to the side.
(Fig. 28)
28

Installing the grain tank unloading tube

Suspend the grain tank unloading tube into a suitable
lifting device while in installation position and introduce
into the lower bracket (C) from the side.
Bolt down bracket (B).
Screw in hexagon bolts M 10 x 40 DIM 931-10.9.
(Fig. 29)
29
Apply plenty of multipurpose grease CLAAS EP2 to

the gearing of the agitator shaft.
Insert the agitator shaft from the bottom and introduce
it into the gearing of the upper angle drive.
Extend the piston rod of the swing cylinder and bolt
it down to the connecting rod eye of the grain tank
unloading tube using the pin (A).
Install lower angle drive of grain tank unloading.
Install grain tank unloading auger.
(Fig. 30)
30

Removing the lateral augers

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Remove cap (S).
(Fig. 31)
31
Unlock lock collar from rear lock collar bearing and

(Fig. 32)
32
Unscrew the sheet metal flanges of the rear lock collar

bearing and remove lock collar bearing from the lateral
auger.
(Fig. 33)
33
Unscrew cover (D) from angle drive inside grain tank.

(Fig. 34)
34

Remove circlip in front of bevel wheel at point (1).

(Fig. 35)
35
Unlock lock collar from front lock collar bearing and

Unscrew bearing flange (E).
To remove the right-hand side lateral auger, the
cover (A) of the grain tank unloading auger must
additionally be dismounted.
(Fig. 36)
36
When the lateral auger is stiff, press it out of the

bevel wheel (K) using a special tool.
(Fig. 37)
37
Special tool:
1 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 75 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 238 151.0
2 Reducer
Part No. 181 933.0
(Fig. 37)

Slightly push the lateral auger to the rear through the

installation opening.
Remove the bearing (L) from the lateral auger using a
puller.
(Fig. 38)
38
Turn out the lateral auger to the rear through the

installation opening.
(Fig. 39)
39
Installing the lateral augers

DOMINATOR 108 VX
Insert the lateral auger together with the front lock
collar bearing, the flanges and the lock collar. At the
same time push on the bevel wheel (1) in the angle
drive and secure by means of a circlip.
Bolt down bearing flange (E).
(Fig. 36, 40)
40
Install the rear lock collar bearing on the lateral auger

and bolt down to the grain tank rear wall with the sheet
metal flanges.
(Fig. 41)
41

Move the lateral auger in longitudinal direction so that

the bevel wheels have some backlash.
Arrest the lateral auger on the lock collar bearings
using lock collars and secure.
Fill the angle drive with 250 g of multipurpose grease
CLAAS EP2. Fit cover (D) of angle drive.
When installing the right-hand lateral auger, the
cover (A) of the grain tank unloading auger must
additionally be installed.
Fit cap (S).
42 (Fig. 31, 36, 42)


Grain tank unloading drive
GRAIN TANK UNLOADING DRIVE
Removing the upper angle drive of grain tank

unloading
Remove grain tank unloading auger.
Unscrew the hexagon bolt (A) from the agitator shaft.
Loosen the hexagon nuts (D) on both sides.
Unscrew the spacer stud (C) from the grain tank front
wall.
Unscrew the hexagon bolts (B).
Slightly rotate the transmission to the side and take out
1 to the top.
CAUTION!
Pull out the spline shaft (1) as well when dis-

mounting the angle drive so it will not fall down
into the grain tank unloading tube.
(Fig. 1, 2)

Dismantling the upper angle drive of grain tank

unloading
Remove circlips (2) and washers (3) located behind
them.
Drive out the bevel wheels (4) using a bent punch.
Punch: dia. 8 mm, approx. 200 mm long,
radius = 200 mm
(Fig. 3, 5)
Remove taper roller bearings (5) and deep groove ball

bearings (6) from the bevel wheels (4) using a special
tool.
Special tool:
1 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8, head-centered
Part No. 237 382.0
2 Washer 10.5 x dia. 47 DIN 522
Part No. 236 835.0
Remove the spacer bushings (7).

4 (Fig. 4)

40805
5
Upper angle drive of grain tank unloading, assembled:
1 Spline shaft
2 Circlip 80 x 2.5
3 Washer 63 x 80 x 0.1 DIN 988
Washer 63 x 80 x 0.3 DIN 988
Washer 63 x 80 x 0.5 DIN 988
Washer 63 x 80 x 2 DIN 988
4 Bevel wheel
5 Taper roller bearing 320 10X DIN 720
6 Deep groove ball bearing 6010-RS-C3 DIN 625
7 Spacer bushing
8 Screw plug M 20 x 1.5 DIN 910
9 Sealing ring A 20 x 24 DIN 7603
10 Angle drive housing
(Fig. 5)

Assembling the upper angle drive of grain tank

unloading
1. Fill spacer bushings (7) with 20 g of
multipurpose grease CLAAS EP2 at point (E)
prior to installation.
2. Install taper roller bearings (5), spacer
bushings (7) and deep groove ball bearings (6)
on the bevel wheels (4) using a special tool.
(Fig. 5, 6)
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
1 Part No. 181 880.0
2 Spindle
Part No. 181 877.0
3
Part No. 235 983.0
4 4 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0 – 2 pcs.
5 Sleeve
6 Part No. 181 881.1
6 Tube dia. 51 x dia. 60 x 200 long
(Fig. 7)
4
33404 7
3. Cover the tooth profile of a bevel wheel (4) with

pattern identification paste.
4. Drive the pre-assembled bevel wheels (4) into the
angle drive housing (10) using a block-ended
tube.
5. Insert existing washers (3) and the circlips (2).
(Fig. 5, 8)

6. Drive the bevel wheels (4) backwards using the

bent punch until the deep groove ball bearings (6)
are located in front of the washers (3) without play.
7. When determining the torsional backlash, the
measuring point must be in the area of the
reference diameter of the bevel wheels (4).
The torsional backlash is 0.1 to 0.2 mm.
8. Adjust the torsional backlash by means of
washers (3).
NOTE: The spline shaft (1) can be used for deter-
9 mining the torsional backlash. To do this, wedge
the spline shaft without play in the gearing of the
bevel wheel (4).
(Fig. 5, 9)
9. Remove the bevel wheels (4) and check the

contact pattern using the impressions.
10. Adjust the contact pattern using the washers (3).
Example:
A = Initial setting
C = Correct setting
(Fig. 10)
10
11. Fill the angle drive housing (10) with approx.

200 g of multipurpose grease CLAAS EP2 at
point (F).
12. Mount the bevel wheels (4) with washers (3)
and circlips (2).
(Fig. 5)

Installing the upper angle drive of grain tank

unloading
1. Apply plenty of multipurpose grease CLAAS EP2
to the external splines of the spline shaft (1) and
of the grain tank unloading auger before installing.
2. Place the angle drive on the agitator shaft from
the top together with the spline shaft (1) and the
spacer stud (C) previously inserted.
3. Bolt the spacer stud (C) down to the grain tank
front wall.
11 (Fig. 11)
4. Insert the hexagon bolt (A) into the agitator shaft

with liquid screw fastener, e.g. DELO-ML-5349,
and tighten hexagon bolt.
CAUTION!
The hexagon bolt (A) must be installed

stress-free and without washers.
(Fig. 12)
12
5. Attach the angle drive using hexagon bolts (B).

(Fig. 13)
13

6. Install grain tank unloading auger.

7. Select the setting of the angle drive so at the
hexagon nuts (D) that with the grain tank
unloading tube extended or retracted, the hexa-
gon bolt (A) is stress-free.
8. The external splines of the spline shaft (1) and of
the grain tank unloading auger must have a little
play and must not jam.
(Fig. 14)
14
Removing the lower angle drive of grain tank

unloading
Unscrew the cover (A) and the outlet spout (B) from
the grain tank unloading tube.
(Fig. 15)
15
Open the slide (K) in the grain tank unloading tube and
unscrew hexagon bolt (C).
(Fig. 16)
16
Pull the grain tank unloading auger slightly to the rear.

(Fig. 17)
17

Unscrew four hexagon bolts (D).

(Fig. 18)
18
Unscrew the sealing trestle (E) and remove hexagon

bolts (F).
(Fig. 19)
19
Unscrew the dowel screw (G) and remove angle drive

along with sealing trestle (E).
CAUTION!
The agitator shaft (H) should be fastened by

wedges during this work step in order to prevent
its external spline from slipping out of the upper
angle drive.
(Fig. 20)
20
Dismantling the lower angle drive of grain tank

unloading
Unscrew transmission cover (1) and remove grease
filling from inside.
(Fig. 21)
21

Take out circlips (2 and 3) and the washers (4) located

behind them.
(Fig. 22, 32)
22
Push the auger shaft (5) out of the transmission

housing (11) using a puller.
Take out bevel wheel (6).
(Fig. 23, 32)
23
Remove key (15).

Remove the deep groove ball bearing (7) from the
auger shaft (5) using a puller.
(Fig. 24, 32)
24
Remove circlip (2) from stub (8).

Remove bevel wheel (9).
(Fig. 25, 32)
25

Remove key (10) from stub (8).

(Fig. 26, 32)
26
Push the stub (8) out of the transmission housing (11)

using a puller.
(Fig. 27, 32)
27
Take out the plastic bushing (12) by using a lever.

(Fig. 28, 32)
28
Remove circlip (3) and the washers (4) located

behind it.
(Fig. 29, 32)
29

Push the deep groove ball bearing (13) out of the

transmission housing (11) together with the spacer
bushing (14) using a special tool.
(Fig. 30, 32)
30
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
Part No. 181 880.0
Part No. 235 983.0
3 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0
4 Tube
dia. 65 x dia. 75 x 180 long
5 Spindle
Part No. 181 877.0
(Fig. 31)
40806 31

40807
32
Lower angle drive of grain tank unloading, assembled:
1 Transmission cover
4 Washer 50 x 62 x 0.1 DIN 988
Washer 50 x 62 x 0.3 DIN 988
Washer 50 x 62 x 0.5 DIN 988
5 Auger shaft
6 Bevel wheel
7 Deep groove ball bearing 6207-2RS1 DIN 625
8 Stub
9 Bevel wheel
10 Key
11 Transmission housing
12 Plastic bushing
13 Deep groove ball bearing 6206 2RS1 DIN 625
14 Bushing
15 Key
(Fig. 32)

Assembling the lower angle drive of grain tank

unloading
1. Heat up the deep groove ball bearing (13) to
approx. 100 °C and install on stub (8) together
with bushing (14).
2. Push on bevel wheel (9) and secure by means
of circlip (2).
(Fig. 32, 33)
33
3. Insert circlip (3) and existing washers (4) into

transmission housing (11).
4. Press pre-assembled stub (8) into the trans-
mission housing (11) using a puller.
(Fig. 32, 34)
34
5. Heat up the deep groove ball bearing (7) to

approx. 100 °C and install on auger shaft (5).
6. Insert key (15).
7. Insert deep groove ball bearing (13) into trans-
mission housing (11) together with existing
washers (4) and circlip (3).
8. Insert bevel wheel (6) into transmission
housing (11) and press in the pre-assembled
auger shaft (5) using a special tool.
(Fig. 32, 35)
35

Special tool:
1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 180 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 796.0 – 2 pcs.
3 Washer
dia. 10.5 x dia. 47 DIN 522
Part No. 236 835.0 – 2 pcs.
1 3 2 (Fig. 36)
35508 36
9. Screw one hexagon bolt M 12 x 80 with

a hexagon nut into the auger shaft (5).
10. When determining the torsional backlash,
the measuring point must be in the area of
the reference diameter of the bevel wheel (6).
The torsional backlash is 0.2 – 0.3 mm.
11. Adjust the torsional backlash by means of
washers (4).
(Fig. 32, 37)
37
12. Cover the tooth profile of the bevel wheel (6) with
pattern identification paste. Check the contact
pattern using the impressions. Adjust the contact
pattern using the washers (4).
Example:
A = Initial setting
C = Correct setting
(Fig. 38)
38

13. Press in the plastic bushing (12).

14. Fill transmission housing with approx. 200 g of
multipurpose grease CLAAS EP2 at point (F).
15. Bolt down the transmission cover (1).
(Fig. 32, 39)
39
Installing the lower angle drive of grain tank

unloading
1. Place sealing trestle (E) on angle drive.
2. Insert the dowel screw (G) into the agitator shaft
using liquid screw fastener, e.g. DELO-ML-5349,
and tighten hexagon bolt.
(Fig. 40)
40
3. Bolt down the sealing trestle (E) and the angle

drive to the grain tank unloading tube using the
hexagon bolts (D and F).
(Fig. 41, 42)
41
4. Push the grain tank unloading auger to the front

and bolt down to the angle drive using the
hexagon bolt (C).
(Fig. 42)
42

Removing the grain tank intermediate drive

shaft
Unscrew hexagon bolt (O) and push belt guide (A) to
the front.
(Fig. 43)
43
Determine clearance (X) between shaft end and V-belt

pulley.
(Fig. 44)
44
Loosen gib head key (C).

(Fig. 45)
45
Unlock the lock collar (S) of the lock collar bearing

inside the grain tank and knock off.
(Fig. 46)
46


chain (31).
DOMINATOR 108 VX
chain (32).
Unscrew the sheet metal flange (G) of the lock collar
bearing at the grain tank side wall.
(Fig. 47)
47
Push back the intermediate drive shaft using a tyre

mounting lever.
(Fig. 48)
48
Remove V-belt pulley.

(Fig. 49)
49
Push the intermediate drive shaft apart from the grain

tank side wall using a tyre mounting lever and pull out.
Determine dimension (Y) using a depth measuring
device.
Loosen the gib head key and remove chain wheel (I).
Unlock the lock collar of the lock collar bearing (H) and
knock off. Remove lock collar bearing.
(Fig. 50)
50

Installing the grain tank intermediate drive

shaft
1. Introduce the pre-assembled intermediate drive
shaft provided with lock collar bearing (H) and
chain wheel (I) into the grain tank side wall.
2. Loosely push the lock collar (S) and the V-belt
pulley on the intermediate drive shaft.
3. Bolt down the sheet metal flanges (G) of the lock
collar bearing to the grain tank side wall.
(Fig. 46, 47, 48, 49, 50)
4. Align the V-belt pulley to the determined

dimension (X) on the intermediate drive shaft and
loosely insert gib head key (C).
5. Unscrew hexagon bolt (K) and remove the caps.
(Fig. 51)
51
6. Arrest the intermediate drive shaft with the lock

collar (S) on the lock collar bearing and secure.
7. Knock in the gib head key (C) from the direction of
the grain tank.
8. Screw in hexagon bolt (K) with caps.
(Fig. 51, 52)
52

Y
L
O A
40808
53
9. Slide the belt guide (A) on guide (L) and bolt down
using hexagon bolt (O).
10. Press the jockey pulley (S) upwards with a tyre
mounting lever.
The clearance (Y) between the belt back and the
guides must be 5 to 7 mm over the entire length.
(Fig. 53, 54)
54
11. Check with a straightedge if the chain wheel is

perfectly aligned and correct if necessary.
12. DOMINATOR 108 VX
Install and tension grain tank unloading inter-
mediate drive chain (32).
Install and tension grain tank unloading inter-
(Fig. 55)
55

Removing the grain tank unloading drive

jockey pulley
(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Unscrew jockey pulley (1) from the lever (10).
(Fig. 56, 57)
56
Grain tank unloading drive jockey pulley,

exploded view
(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
2 Spacer washer
3 Jockey pulley
6 Spacer ring
7 Pin
57 10 Lever, assembled
11 Belt hook
(Fig. 57)
Installing the grain tank unloading drive

jockey pulley
(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Bolt jockey pulley (1, pre-assembled) and belt
hook (11) to the lever (10) with contact washer (9) and
hexagon nut (8).
(Fig. 57, 58)
58

Removing the grain tank unloading drive

jockey pulley
Unscrew jockey pulley (1) from the lever (23).
(Fig. 59, 60)
59
Grain tank unloading drive jockey pulley,

exploded view
2 Pin
5 Spacer ring
6 Spacer washer
7 Jockey pulley
8 Belt hook
9 Contact washer 16
60 10 Hex. nut M 16 DIN 934
23 Lever, assembled
(Fig. 60)
Installing the grain tank unloading drive

jockey pulley
Bolt jockey pulley (1, pre-assembled) and belt hook (8)
to the lever (23) with contact washer (9) and hexagon
nut (10).
(Fig. 60, 61)
61

Removing the grain tank unloading auger

safety clutch
chain (31).
Determine the dimension (X) from the shaft end to the
chain wheel (1) using a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 62, 67)
62
Remove the gib head key (7) of the chain wheel (1).
(Fig. 63, 67)
63
Pull off the chain wheel (1) using a puller.

(Fig. 64, 67)
64

Dismantling the grain tank unloading auger safety

clutch
Unscrew hexagon bolt (6) and remove hub (4) from
the chain wheel (1).
CAUTION!
On DOMINATOR 108 VX machines, the hub (4)

is possibly equipped with a second hexagon
bolt.
This hexagon bolt blocks the safety clutch and is
65 required if a safety clutch is also provided on the
pinion which drives the chain wheel (1) via the
chain (extra equipment).
(Fig. 65, 67)
Drive the bushing (3) out of the chain wheel (1) using
a tube of outside diameter 38 mm, inside diameter
30 mm and a length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 66, 67)
66
Grain tank unloading auger safety clutch,

exploded view:
1Chain wheel
2Shear pin bushing
3Bushing
4Hub
5Lock nut VM 10
6Hex. bolt M 10 x 50 DIN 931-8.8
7Gib head key
8Lock nut VM 10
(DOMINATOR 108 VX – extra equipment)
9 Hex. bolt M 10 x 55 DIN 931-8.8
67 (DOMINATOR 108 VX – extra equipment)
(Fig. 67)

Assembling the grain tank unloading auger safety

clutch
Drive the bushing (3) into the chain wheel (1), using
a tube of outside dia. 38 mm, inside dia. 30 mm and
a length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 67, 68)
68
Installing the grain tank unloading auger

safety clutch
1. Push chain wheel (1) and hub (4) on the shaft and
bolt down with hexagon bolt (6) and lock nut (5).
CAUTION!
On DOMINATOR 108 VX machines, block the

safety clutch with hexagon bolt (9) and lock
nut (8) if required (extra equipment).
69
(Fig. 67, 69)
2. Push on the chain wheel (1) and align it to the

determined dimension (X).
3. Check the alignment of the chain wheel (1) using
a straightedge and correct if necessary.
(Fig. 67, 70)
70

4. Arrest chain wheel (1) with gib head key (7).

5. Install and tension grain tank unloading inter-
(Fig. 67, 71)
71
Removing the lateral auger drive

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
For removing the lateral auger drive – see
page 5.3.10, Removing the lateral augers
DOMINATOR 108 VX.
Installing the lateral auger drive

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
For installing the lateral auger drive – see page 5.3.12,
Installing the lateral augers DOMINATOR 108 VX.


Ground hydraulics
Ground hydraulics
GROUND HYDRAULICS
Removing the hydrostatic pump

Remove the hand rail (A) and the side guard (B).
(Fig. 1)
Remove the hydraulic ram for swinging the unloading

tube.
Unbolt the side piece (C), the grill (E) and the
support (F).
(Fig. 2)
Drain the hydraulic oil:

Unbolt the oil drain plug (G) from the hydrostatic
motor. Contain any oil that may leak.
Re-insert the oil drain plug (G).
(Fig. 3)
Unlock the bolt (H) and remove.

Mark the bracket (K) to the tank bracket (L) and
remove.
(Fig. 4)

Ground hydraulics
Slacken the pipe clamps (M).

Remove the hydraulic pipes (N) from the hydrostatic
pump, closing the ends with bungs. Contain any oil
that may leak.
Unbolt the hex. bolt (L) and remove the complete tank,
along with the bracket (O).
(Fig. 5)
Slacken off the eight hex. bolts from the pulley (R).
Remove the drive belt (3) for the hydraulic ground
drive.
Remove the pulley (R).
(Fig. 6)
Remove the hydraulic pipes (P) from the hydrostatic

pump and close the ends with bungs.
Remove the hydraulic pipes (Q) from the hydrostatic
pump and seal the pump with sealing plate and rubber
seals (self-manufactured).
Contain any oil that may leak.
(Fig. 7, 8)

Ground hydraulics
Sealing plate (self-manufactured):

R = 12 mm
V = 13 mm
W = 82 mm
X = 58 mm
Y = 52 mm
Z = 28 mm
2 x sealing plates 8 mm thick
2 x rubber seals 2 mm thick
8 x hex. bolts M 10 x 45 DIN 931-8.8
8 x hex. nuts M 10 DIN 934
8 (Fig. 8)
Linde unit:
Remove the hex. bolts at (S) on the cover of the
hydrostatic pump and replace with the special tool.
Using a suitable lifting device, attach the hydrostatic
pump.
Special tool:
2 x adaptor pieces M 10 Part No. 181 609.0
2 x ring bolts M 16 DIN 580
Sauer unit:
9 Remove both pipe supports from the cover of the

hydrostatic pump and replace with the special tool.
Using a suitable lifting device, attach the hydrostatic
pump.
Special tool:
2 x eye bolts Part No. 181 618.0
Unbolt the hydrostatic pump from the pump flange (T)
and raise.
(Fig. 9)

Ground hydraulics
Installing the hydrostatic pump
ATTENTION!
Before fitting the hydrostatic pump it is

important to ensure that the hydrostatic
circuit as well as components have been
thoroughly cleaned out. This will prevent
any problems at a later date.
The whole system must be free from dirt
or foreign objects.
The hydrostatic filter must always be
replaced.
Using a suitable lifting device, lift the hydrostatic pump

up and bolt to the pump flange (T).
(Fig. 9)
Bolt loosely the pulley (R) to the hydrostatic pump.

Place on the hydraulic drive belt (3) and adjust.
Tighten the pulley (R) to 45 Nm.
(Fig. 10)
10
Connect the hydraulic pipes (P) to the hydrostatic

pump, observing the correct torque settings.
Connect the hydraulic pipes (Q) to the hydrostatic
pump with new O-rings and the spring washers.
Tighten the hex. bolts in the flange crossways.
(Fig. 11)
11

Ground hydraulics
Bolt the complete hydraulic tank along with the

bracket (O) to the machine using the hex. bolts (L).
Connect the hydraulic pipes (N) to the hydrostatic
motor using the pipe clamps (M).
(Fig. 12)
12
Fit the Bowden cable (U) to the hydrostatic pump

using the bolt (H). Secure the bolt (H) with the split pin.
With the Linde unit BPV 100 / HMF105:
Middle hole in the adjusting lever (W) for 20 km/h
Outer hole in the adjusting lever (W) for 25 km/h
(In certain countries)
Bolt on the bracket (K) according to the markings on
the tank bracket (L).
CAUTION!
13
The setting of the bracket (K) is only a basic
setting.
(Fig. 13)

Ground hydraulics
Refit the side piece (C), the grill (E) and the
support (F).
Bolt back the hand rail (A) and the guard (B).
Refit the grain tank unloading tube ram.
Measure the high pressure / charge pressure / purge
pressure.
Adjust the hydrostatic pump.
(Fig. 14, 15)
14
15

Ground hydraulics
Adjusting the hydrostatic pump

1. Chock the machine in order to prevent it from
rolling and apply the parking brake.
Jack up and block securely the front of the
machine, so that the drive wheels are free from
ground contact.
2. Unlock the bolt (H) and remove.
3. Put the gear lever in the neutral position.
4. Start the engine and immediately switch off.
16 5. The hole in the hydrostatic adjustment lever (W)

and the yoke (V) from the Bowden cable (U) must
be set in the correct position.
With Linde unit BPV 100 / HMF 105
Middle hole in the adjusting lever (W) for 20 km/h
Outer hole in the adjusting lever (W) for 25 km/h
(In certain countries)
6. If necessary, slacken the bracket (K) from the tank
bracket (L) and slide in the elongated holes.
7. Apply liquid sealing compound such as
DELO-ML-5349 to the hex. bolts, insert into the
bracket (K) of the tank bracket (L) and tighten.
17 8. Insert the bolt (H) and secure with the split pin.
9. Check the operation:
With the hydrostatic lever in the neutral position
and the machine in first gear, the drive wheels
must remain stationary.
10. Put the machine into neutral gear, then move the
hydrostatic lever forwards with the engine running
at max. Read the gearbox input speed from the
display and if necessary adjust on the adjusting
screw (Z).
ATTENTION!
The adjustment of the setting screw (Z) must

only be carried out by a qualified service
engineer.
☞ The adjustment screw (Z) is sealed with
a lead seal and requires to be re-sealed.

Ground hydraulics
Gearbox input speeds:

Linde unit BPV 100 / HMF 105
DOMINATOR 108 VX:
With 20 km/h: 1650 rpm
With 25 km/h (in certain countries): 2400 rpm
Sauer unit 90 PO 75 / 90 M 075
DOMINATOR 98 VX (10.7t), DOMINATOR 88 VX:
Sauer unit 90 PO 75 / 90 M 075
DOMINATOR 98 VX (12t)
CAUTION!
The gearbox input speed is only an average

value. The speed is also relative to the size
of the tyres.
(Fig. 16, 17)

Ground hydraulics
Removing the hydrostatic motor

Jack up the front left-hand side of the machine and
secure safely with axle stands.
Remove the front left-hand drive wheel.
Drain the hydraulic oil:
Remove the drain plug (G) from the hydrostatic motor.
Contain the drained oil. Refit the drain plug (G).
(Fig. 18)
18
Remove the hydraulic pipe (A) from the hydrostatic

motor and close both ends with bungs.
Remove the hydraulic pipes (B) from the hydrostatic
motor and seal the motor with a sealing plate and a
rubber seal at both ends (self-manufactured).
(Fig. 19, 20)
19
Sealing plate (self-manufactured):

R = 12 mm
V = 13 mm
W = 82 mm
X = 58 mm
Y = 52 mm
Z = 28 mm
2 x sealing plate 8 mm thick
2 x rubber seal 2 mm thick
8 x hex. bolt M 10 x 45 DIN 931-8.8
8 x hex. nut M 10 DIN 934
20 (Fig. 20)

Ground hydraulics
Unbolt the hydrostatic motor from the flange (C) and,

without tipping, pull from the gearbox. Contain any oil
spills.
(Fig. 21)
21
Pull the profile bush (D) from the gearbox input

shaft (E). Observe the correct positioning.
(Fig. 22)
22

Ground hydraulics
Installing the hydrostatic motor
ATTENTION!
Before fitting the hydrostatic motor back to

the machine, ensure that the high pressure
circuit and associated components have
been thoroughly flushed out.
The complete system must be free from dirt
or foreign objects.
The hydraulic oil filter must always be
23 checked and renewed.
Insert the profile bush (D) onto the gearbox input

shaft (E) using multipurpose grease such as
CLAAS EP2.
Check the positioning of the profile bush (D).
(The hole in the profile bush (D) is what gives the
speed sensor the impulses.)
CAUTION!
When fitting a new profile bush (D) always

check the length and type with the one
removed.
(Fig. 23)
Place a new seal, or in case of Sauer unit, a new

O-ring onto the hydrostatic motor.
Slide the hydrostatic motor without tipping it onto the
flange (C) and bolt into place.
(Fig. 24)
24

Ground hydraulics
Reconnect the hydraulic pipe (A) to the hydrostatic

motor, observing the correct torque.
Reconnect the hydraulic pipes (B) back onto the
hydrostatic motor using new O-rings and spring
washers.
Tighten the hex. bolts on the flanges crossways.
(Fig. 25)
25
Refit the left-hand front drive wheel.

Check the gearbox oil level and if necessary top up.
F = Filler plug
G = Oil level plug
H = Drain plug
Fill the gearbox to the lower edge of the level plug
hole (G) with multipurpose gearbox oil.
Measure the high pressure / charge pressure / purge
pressure.
26
(Fig. 26, 27)
27

Ground hydraulics
Bleeding the hydrostatic system

1. Release the quick release bolt (P) from the oil
cooler, then using the hook (H), swing up the oil
cooler and hang it on one of the support bars from
the rotary screen.
2. Attach a pressure gauge (0 – 600 bar) to ports
M 1 and M 2.
3. Fill the hydraulic tank (R).
4. Put the machine into third gear and apply the foot
brake.
28
Linde unit
CAUTION!
Do not switch on the 4-trac system.
5. Start the engine at slow idling speed and immedi-

ately switch off.
6. Check the hydraulic oil level and if necessary
top up. Continue the operation until one of the
pressure gauges reads a minimum of 15 bar.
Keep checking the hydraulic oil level in the
hydraulic tank (R).
29 7. Start the engine and run in idle.

Sauer unit 8. If a pressure is available, then load the hydrostatic
system in both directions as follows:
Push the hydrostatic lever forwards until a
pressure of 50 – 150 bar is achieved. Then hold
the pressure for approx. 1 minute.
Push the hydrostatic lever reverse until a pressure
of 50 – 150 bar is achieved. Then hold the pres-
sure for approx. 1 minute.
9. Stop the engine, check the oil in the hydraulic tank
and if necessary top up.
30
31

Ground hydraulics
10. Put the machine into neutral.

11. Start the engine and run in idle.
12. Move the hydrostatic lever in the forwards
position, and then in the reverse direction
leaving it for approx. 2 minutes in each.
13. Stop the engine, check the hydraulic oil level
14. Machines with CLAAS 4-trac system:
Bleed the system.
(Fig. 28, 29, 30, 31)
Bleeding the CLAAS 4-trac system

1. Bleed the hydrostatic system.
2. Jack up and secure the steering axle.
3. Put the machine into third gear and apply the
parking brake.
4. Start the engine and run at idle. Switch on the
4-trac system.
5. Hold the hydrostatic lever in the forwards position
for approx. 1 minute and then the same in
reverse.
32
This should cause both rear wheels to turn and
the pressure is allowed to go up to max. 150 bar.
6. Stop the engine. Check the oil level in the hydrau-
lic tank (R) and if necessary top up.
(Fig. 32)

Ground hydraulics
Linde unit
Measuring the high pressure / charge
pressure / purge pressure
High pressure measuring:
1. Connect the pressure gauge (0 – 600 bar) to the
test ports M 1 and M 2.
2. Start the engine.
3. Place the machine into third gear and apply the
foot brake.
4. Slowly move the hydrostatic lever first forwards
and then backwards checking the pressure on the
33
gauge.
Sauer unit
The pressures should be between 420 – 450 bar
when the oil is at approx. 50 °C.
ATTENTION!
Only carry out the test for a short period of

time, as overheating of the unit could result.
Charge pressure measuring:

test port M 3.
34
Linde unit
3. Put the machine into neutral and read off the
pressure.
Pressure should be 20 – 24 bar when the oil is
at 50 °C.
Purge pressure measuring:
test port M 3.
3. Put the machine into neutral gear and slowly
move the hydrostatic lever first forwards and then
35
backwards. Read off the pressure readings.
Sauer unit
The pressure reading should be 0 to max. 1 bar
lower than the charge pressure.
(Fig. 33, 34, 35, 36)
36

Ground hydraulics

Hand brake
Hand brake
HAND BRAKE
Removing the hand brake rope

Secure the machine so it will not roll away.
With the hand brake released, remove cotter pin
of pin (E) and remove it.
Unscrew Bowden cable retarder (F).
(Fig. 1)
Remove the cab door.

To do this, proceed as follows:
– Pull the driver's seat fully to the front.
– Unscrew the cover (A) on the left-hand side.
– Unscrew the panels (B and C).
– Remove passenger seat. To do this, unscrew
cover (D).
– Unscrew cover (L) and remove it.
(Fig. 2, 3)
2
3
– Loosen the two locks (V) and rotate by 90°.
– Slightly swing the door (K) to the front and
remove.
(Fig. 4)

Hand brake
Take out floor tray (M).

Unscrew lid (N).
(Fig. 5)
Remove insulation (O).

(Fig. 6)
Set concave adjusting lever (P) fully to the bottom.

Unscrew hexagon bolt (23). Watch out for
washers (12) and the Belleville spring (13)
which may fall out.
(Fig. 7, 12)
Unscrew yoke (4) together with the stop (3).

Take out wear strip (11).
Unscrew bracket (7).
(Fig. 8, 12)

Hand brake
Rear side of cab:

Push bracket (R) off of rope.
Pull end of rope (S) out of cab rear wall.
(Fig. 9)
Jack up machine at the front right-hand side.

Remove front right-hand drive wheel.
Unscrew clamps (T).
(Fig. 10)
10
Unscrew clamps (U).

Remove rope.
(Fig. 11)
11

Hand brake
12
Hand brake, exploded view
1 Brake light switch
2 Hexagon nut M 12 x 1.5 DIN 936
3 Stop
4 Yoke
5 Rope
6 Seal
7 Bracket
11 Wear strip
12 Washer
13 Belleville spring B 28 DIN 2093
14 Lock nut VM 12
15 Hand lever
16 Button
17 O-ring 12 x 2
19 Rod
20 Locking pawl
21 Ratchet
22 Expansion pin 5 x 12a DIN 8752
23 Pin
(Fig. 12)

Hand brake
Installing the hand brake rope

Screw the rope loosely to the machine frame
using the clamps (U and T).
(Fig. 13, 14)
13
14
Guide end of rope (S) through the cab rear wall and
clamp down with bracket (R).
Tighten clamps (U and T).
Install front right-hand drive wheel.
(Fig. 13, 14, 15)
15
Bolt the yoke (4) to the end of the rope together

with the stop (3).
Fasten yoke (4) along with the wear strip (11)
to the hand lever (15).
(Fig. 12, 16)
16

Hand brake
Bolt down hand lever (15) to the support (25) using

the hexagon bolt (23), washers (12) and Belleville
spring (13).
CAUTION!
Only slight pressure is allowed on the Belleville

spring (13) to allow easy movement of the
hand lever (15).
Bolt down the end of rope to the support (25) using the
17 bracket (7).
(Fig. 12, 17)
Functional check:
The indicator light (17) in the vehicle information unit
must light up after the hand lever has been moved
by one or two notches. This setting can be corrected
at the stop (3) if required.
(Fig. 12, 16, 17, 18)
18
Bolt down the lid (N) with the insulation (O) located
behind it.
Insert floor tray (M).
(Fig. 6, 19)
19

Hand brake
Install cab door.

– Insert door (K) and fasten using the locks (V).
(Fig. 20)
20
– Insert cover (L) and screw down.

– Install passenger seat (if provided).
– Screw down cover (D).
– Screw down panels (B and C).
– Screw down cover (A) at the left-hand side.
(Fig. 21, 22)
21
22
Bolt down the hand brake rope at the Bowden cable

retarder (F).
With the hand brake released, insert and secure
the pin (E).
Adjust the hand brake rope so at the yoke (G) that
the hand brake becomes effective after the first
3 to 4 teeth.
(Fig. 23)
23

Hand brake

Hydraulic oil cooler
HYDRAULIC OIL COOLER
Removing the hydraulic oil cooler for the

hydrostatic ground drive
Undo the quick release bolt (A) and swing the rotary
screen up.
(Fig. 1)

Special tool:
(Fig. 2)
Mark the connections (B) on the hydraulic pipes and

disconnect. Close the ends with bungs.
Lay the hydraulic pipes over the water radiator.
(Fig. 3)

Remove the securing rings (C) and remove the

bracket (D).
Unlock the quick release bolt (E), then remove the
complete hydraulic cooler complete with the hydraulic
pipes.
(Fig. 4)
Installing the hydraulic oil cooler for the

hydrostatic ground drive
Lift the hydraulic cooler complete with the hydraulic
pipes into the machine.
Fit the quick release bolt (E).
Fit the bracket (D) and secure with the securing
rings (C).
(Fig. 5)
Connect the hydraulic pipes back to the

connections (B). Observe the correct torque settings.
(Fig. 6)

Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic pump
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Removing the double pump with the hydraulic

tank
Lower the trunking to its lowest position.
Retract all the hydraulic rams.
Stop the engine.
Place a suitably large clean container under the
steering ram.
Undo the hydraulic pipe (A) from the steering ram
and hang in the container.
1 (Fig. 1)
By turning the steering wheel in the relative direction,

pump out the oil from the hydraulic tank (3).
Remove the drive belt (4) from the hydraulic pump.
If necessary remove the tension pulley (C, drive belt
for hydrostatic drive).
(Fig. 2)
Remove the hydraulic lines (D) from the filter heads (6)
as well as the hydraulic line (E) on the hydraulic
tank (3). Seal all the ends with bungs.
(Fig. 3)

Hydraulic pump
Remove the hydraulic lines (F) from the double

pump (20) and seal both ends with bungs.
Remove the bracket (G) from the hydraulic tank (3) as
well as the bracket on the engine on those machines
fitted with air conditioning.
(Fig. 4)
Unbolt the lock nut (H).

(Fig. 5)
Remove the double pump complete with the hydraulic

tank.
(Fig. 6)

Hydraulic pump
Dismantling the double pump and the hydraulic

tank
Remove the double pump along with the hydraulic
tank.
In order to remove the double pump (20), unbolt
the lower filter head (6) from the hydraulic tank (3).
CAUTION!
The filter heads (6) are always marked by

a drilling. This marks must always be at the
7 top towards the fresh air filter element (1).
(Fig. 7, 14)
Remove the four hex. bolts (28) via the opening in the
hydraulic tank (3).
Remove the double pump along with the bracket (N).
(Fig. 8, 14)
Unbolt the pulley (M) from the pump shaft.

(Fig. 9)

Hydraulic pump
Using a suitable puller, remove the pulley (M) from the

pump shaft.
(Fig. 10)
10
Unbolt the bracket (N) from the double pump (20).

(Fig. 11)
11
Mark the plates of the double pump (20) before dis-

mantling the pump.
CAUTION!
All the pump components are matched and

therefore must not be turned or replaced.
(Fig. 12)
12
Undo the retaining bolts and separate the pump com-

ponents.
CAUTION!
Separate the pump components without

exerting any force or setting them on edge.
(Fig. 13)
13

Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic pump
14
Double pump and hydraulic tank, exploded view: 29 Seal
30 Support plate
1 Fresh air filter element
31 Thrust plate
2 O-ring 19 x 3.5 -n DIN 3771
32 Filter unit
3 Hydraulic tank
4 Hex. bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8 (Fig. 14)
5 Seal
6 Filter head
7 Felt ring
8 Filter unit
9 Felt ring
11 Pressure spring
12 Lock washer 10 DIN 6799
13 Seal
14 Seal ring
15 Magnetic plug
16 Coupling
17 O-ring 25 x 3 -n DIN 3771
18 O-ring 9.3 x 2.4 -n DIN 3771
19 O-ring 19.2 x 3 -n DIN 3771
20 Double pump
Seal insert
22 Union
23 Union
25 Woodruff key 3 x 6.5 DIN 6888
26 Spring washer 12
27 Hex. nut M 12 x 1.5 DIN 936
28 Hex. bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8

Hydraulic pump
Hydraulic pump
Assembling the double pump and hydraulic tank

On the double pump, the individual pump units
(steering / working hydraulics) may have the glide
plate (31), the support plate (30) and the seal (29)
changed. The remaining parts can not be replaced
individually.
CAUTION!
When fitting the glide plate (31), please ensure

that the coated side (with the milled groove) is
15 facing the pump gears.
Lightly oil all moving parts when assembling.
(Fig. 14, 15)
Assemble all the pump parts in the order marked.

Apply liquid sealing compound such as
DELO-ML-5349 to the bolts, then insert the bolts
and hand-tighten across corners.
Tighten all the bolts across corners.
(Fig. 14, 16)
16
Fit the bracket (N) back to the double pump. Screw

the pulley (M) back onto the pump shaft and tighten.
(Fig. 17, 18)
17

Hydraulic pump
Insert the four hex. bolts (28) into the double pump
and tighten via the hole in the hydraulic tank (3).
For this use new O-rings (17, 18 and 19).
DELO-ML-5349 to the hex. bolts (28).
ATTENTION!
No liquid sealing compound must enter the

double pump or the hydraulic tank.
18
(Fig. 14, 18)
Pre-assemble the filter head (6) to the filter

housing (8), then bolt into the hydraulic tank (3)
using a new seal (13).
CAUTION!
The filter heads (6) are always marked by

drillings. This marks must always be at the
top towards the fresh air filter element (1).
This is due to the fact that it is possible that
when the cutterbar is lowered, in particular if
19 three cutterbar rams have been fitted, oil can
escape out of the filter element.
(Fig. 14, 19)

Hydraulic pump
Installing the double pump and hydraulic tank

Slide the double pump complete with the hydraulic
tank onto the threaded bolt and using a new lock
nut (H) tighten.
CAUTION!
Only tighten the lock nut (H) tight enough so that

the hydraulic tank tensions the hydraulic pump
drive belt with a little movement.
20
(Fig. 20)
Fit the bracket (G) back to the hydraulic tank (3) and
if necessary the additional brace to the engine on
machines fitted with air conditioning.
Connect the hydraulic lines (D) to the filter heads (6)
as well as the hydraulic lines (E) to the hydraulic
tank (3). Connect the hydraulic lines (F) onto the
double pump (20). Please observe the required torque
settings.
Fit the hydraulic pump drive belt (4) and adjust.
If necessary fit the jockey pulley (C, hydrostatic
drive belt).
21
Fill the hydraulic tank (3) to its maximum mark.
Start the engine and extend and retract all the rams.
Check the hydraulic oil level with the cutterbar lowered
Check the double pump.
(Fig. 2, 3, 21)

Hydraulic pump
Check the double pump

Working hydraulics:
1. Connect a pressure gauge (0 – 250 bar) to the
valve block test port (P).
3. Extend one of the rams (i.e cutterbar raise) to
maximum, and hold the button in that position.
4. The pressure can now be read on the gauge.
Required = 180 – 200 bar when the oil is at 50 °C
22 (Fig. 22)
Steering hydraulics:
connection (Q) on the steering unit.
7. Turn the steering to maximum steering lock and
hold in that position.
8. The pressure can now be read on the gauge.
Required = 145 – 165 bar when the oil is at 50 °C
23 CAUTION!
Only spend a short period of time checking the

pressures, otherwise overheating of the system
will occur.
(Fig. 23)

Hydraulic pump

Hydraulic pump drive
HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVE
Removing the hydrostatic ground drive jockey

pulley
(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Relieve the tension of hydraulic ground drive belt (3).
Lift jockey pulley (1) and unscrew it from the jockey
pulley arm (11).
CAUTION!
When loosening the jockey pulley (1), the jockey

pulley arm (11) must not be supported by the
1 V-belt.
(Fig. 1, 2)
Hydrostatic ground drive jockey pulley, exploded

view
(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
2 Hex. bolt
M 16 x 100 DIN 931-8.8
3 Spacer washer
4 Jockey pulley
5 Hollow pin
7 Deep groove ball bearing 6205-2rs-c3
8 Spacer tube
2 9 Spacer ring
10 Lock nut VM 16
11 Jockey pulley arm
(Fig. 2)

Installing the hydrostatic ground drive jockey

pulley
(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
1. Bolt the jockey pulley (1) down to the jockey pulley
arm (11) with hexagon bolt (2), spacer washer (3),
spacer ring (9) and lock nut (10).
CAUTION!
When tightening the jockey pulley (1), the

3 jockey pulley arm (11) must not be supported by
the V-belt.
2. Tension the hydraulic ground drive belt (3).

(Fig. 2, 3)

Removing the hydrostatic ground drive jockey

pulley
Unscrew the side cover (H).
(Fig. 4)
Relieve the tension of hydraulic ground drive belt (3).

Relieve the tension of compressor drive belt (2).
Loosen lock collar (A) and pull off air conditioning
compressor (B). Remove existing spacer washers (G).
Fasten the air conditioning compressor (B) at an
elevated spot.
ATTENTION!
Do not buckle air conditioning hoses!

5
(Fig. 5)
Mark the position of the lock collar (C) with respect to

the shaft (D) and the shaft position with respect to the
engine cover (E).
Loosen hexagon bolts (F) and lock collar (C).
(Fig. 6)

Pull shaft (D) out of engine cover (E) and jockey pulley
arm (11).
At the same time remove lock collar (C).
(Fig. 6, 7, 9)
Unscrew jockey pulley (1) from jockey pulley arm (11).

(Fig. 8, 9)
Hydrostatic ground drive jockey pulley, exploded

view
2 Hex. bolt M 16 x 100 DIN 931-8.8
3 Spacer washer
4 Jockey pulley
5 Hollow pin
8 Spacer tube
9 Spacer ring
9 10 Lock nut VM 16
(Fig. 9)

Installing the hydrostatic ground drive jockey

pulley
1. Bolt jockey pulley (1) down to jockey pulley
arm (11) with hexagon bolt (2), spacer washer (3),
spacer ring (9) and lock nut (10).
(Fig. 9, 10)
10
2. Install jockey pulley (1) and jockey pulley arm (11)

to the engine cover (E) with shaft (D) and lock
collar (C) according to the markings.
3. Tighten hexagon bolt (F) and lock collar (C).
4. Tension the hydraulic ground drive belt (3).
(Fig. 6, 9, 11)
11
5. Push existing spacer washers (G) on the

shaft (D).
6. Install air conditioning compressor (B) and
align V-belt pulleys. Compensate with spacer
washers (G) if necessary.
7. Push on lock collar (A) and secure it.
8. Tension the compressor drive belt (2).
(Fig. 12)
12
9. Screw down the side cover (H).

(Fig. 13)
13


Hydraulic ram – low-pressure hydraulics
HYDRAULIC RAM – LOW-PRESSURE

HYDRAULICS
Removing the threshing drum engagement

ram
Remove the hydraulic lines (A) from the hydraulic
ram (1) and seal both ends with bungs. Contain any
oil that may leak.
(Fig. 1)
Unlock the linkage (B) and open the side guard wide.
(Fig. 2)
Unbolt the support (C) from the machine chassis.

DOMINATOR 108 VX:
Remove the jockey pulley from the threshing drive.
(Fig. 3)

Remove the split pin (D) along with the pulley.

Remove the hydraulic ram (1) from the jockey pulley
bracket (E).
(Fig. 4)
Dismantling the threshing drum engagement ram

Unbolt the support (C) from the hydraulic ram (1).
For this remove the pressure spring (F) and the guide
tube (G).
Mark the position of the support (C) to the union (7).
(Fig. 5, 8)
Unbolt the cylinder head (5) from the hydraulic ram (1).
(Fig. 6, 8)
Pull the cylinder head (5) and the piston rod (3) from
the ram (1).
Remove the ram seal (2) from the ram rod (3).
(Fig. 7, 8)

8
Threshing engagement ram, exploded view:
1 Hydraulic ram
2 Ram seal
3 Piston rod
4 Seal 38 x 2.5 -n DIN 3771
5 Cylinder head
6 Double scraper
7 Union
(Fig. 8)

Assembling the threshing engagement ram

Insert the two piece double scraper (6) into the groove
of the cylinder head (5). Ensure that this is fitted with
the O-ring to the top side of the cylinder head (5).
(Fig. 8, 9)
Insert the two-piece ram seal (2) into the groove of the
ram rod (3).
Lightly oil all the components with hydraulic oil.
Insert the ram rod (3) into the hydraulic ram (1).
Fit the cylinder head (5) with the seal (4) onto the ram
rod (3) and screw into the hydraulic ram (1) tight.
(Fig. 10)
10
Bolt the support (C) along with the spring (F) and
the guide tube (G) onto the hydraulic ram (1).
Align the mark on the support (C) to the union (7).
(Fig. 11)
11

Installing the threshing engagement ram

Slide the hydraulic ram (1) onto the jockey pulley
bracket (E) and with the washer and the split pin (D)
secure.
(Fig. 12)
12
Bolt the support (C) to the chassis of the machine.

DOMINATOR 108 VX:
Fit the jockey pulley for the threshing drive back.
(Fig. 13)
13
Insert the linkage (B) into the side guard and secure
with the split pin.
(Fig. 14)
14
Connect the hydraulic lines (A) to the hydraulic

ram (1).
Observe the correct torque setting when doing this.
(Fig. 15)
15

Start the engine.

Engage and disengage the threshing system several
times.
Check the level of the hydraulic oil in the hydraulic
tank (P) via the fresh air filter element (R) and if
necessary top up.
(Fig. 16)
16
Removing the grain tank engagement ram

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Disconnect the hydraulic lines (A) and seal both ends
with a bung.
Contain any oil leakage.
(Fig. 17)
17
Unbolt the hydraulic ram (1) from the bracket (B).

(Fig. 18)
18
Mark the position of the belt guide (C), remove the

upper hex. bolt (D) and press the belt guide (C) to one
side.
(Fig. 19)
19

Remove the split pin (E) and the washer.

Remove the hydraulic ram (1) from the jockey pulley
bracket (F).
(Fig. 20)
20
Installing the grain tank engagement ram

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
1. Slide the hydraulic ram (1) onto the jockey pulley
bracket (F) and secure with the washer and split
pin (E).
2. Position the belt guide (C) to the mark and secure
with the hex. bolt (D).
If necessary adjust the threshing drive belt (5).
3. Bolt the hydraulic ram (1) to the bracket (B).
4. Connect the hydraulic lines (A) to the hydraulic
21
ram (1).
Observe the correct torque setting.
6. Engage and disengage the grain tank unloading
several times.
7. Check the level of the hydraulic oil in the hydraulic
necessary top up.
(Fig. 17, 18, 19, 20, 21)

Removing the grain tank engagement ram

Disconnect the hydraulic lines (A) and seal both ends
with a bung.
Contain any oil leakages.
(Fig. 22)
22
Remove the split pin (B) and the washer.

Remove the bolt (F) from the bracket (G).
(Fig. 23)
23
Slacken the lock ring (C) and slide the jockey

pulley bracket (D) along the axle towards the left.
(Fig. 24)
24
Remove the split pin (E).

Remove the hydraulic ram (1) from the jockey
pulley bracket (D).
(Fig. 25)
25

Installing the grain tank engagement ram

1. Slide the hydraulic ram (1) onto the jockey
pulley bracket (D) and secure with the split
pin (E).
2. Secure the jockey pulley bracket (D) on the axle
with the lock ring (C).
3. Fit the hydraulic ram (1) to the bracket (G) using
the bolt (F) and secure with washer and split
pin (B).
26 4. Connect the hydraulic lines (A) to the hydraulic
ram (1). Observe the torque settings.
6. Engage and disengage the grain tank unloading
several times.
7. Check the level of the hydraulic oil in the hydraulic
necessary top up.
(Fig. 22, 23, 24, 25, 26)

Dismantling the grain tank engagement ram

Remove the grain tank engagement hydraulic ram.
Twist the cylinder head (4) anticlockwise and remove
the securing cord (5).
(Fig. 27, 30)
27
Pull the cylinder head (4) together with the ram rod (7)
out of the ram casing (12).
Remove the ram seal (8) from the ram (9).
(Fig. 28, 30)
28
Unscrew the ram (9) from the ram rod (7).
CAUTION!
The ram has been fitted with liquid sealing

compound and will need to be warmed to
approx. 100 °C.
(Fig. 29, 30)
29

30
Grain tank engagement ram, exploded view
1 Hydraulic ram
2 Scraper
3 Guide ring
4 Cylinder head
5 Securing cord
6 Seal
7 Ram rod
8 Ram seal
9 Ram
11 Hex. bolt M 8 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
12 Ram casing
13 Union
(Fig. 30)

Assembling the grain tank engagement ram

Fit the scraper (2) and the guide ring (3) into the
grooves of the cylinder head (4) by observing the
order shown in the figure.
(Fig. 30, 31)
31
Screw the ram (9) along with the hex. bolt (11) and the
contact washer (10) to the ram rod (7).
CAUTION!
The hex. bolt (11) should be fitted with liquid

sealing compound such as DELO-ML-5349
added on assembly.
(Fig. 30, 32)
32
Assemble the ram seal (8) onto the ram (9).

Lightly oil all the components.
Insert the cylinder head (4) with the seal (6) and the
ram rod (7) into the ram casing (12).
Screw in the cylinder head (4) with a new securing
cord (5) into the ram casing (12).
Refit the grain tank engagement hydraulic ram.
(Fig. 27, 30, 33)
33

Removing the rotary coupling for the cutter-

bar engagement
Disconnect the hydraulic line (A) from the rotary
coupling (10) and close both ends with bungs.
Unscrew the rotary coupling (10) from the ram (7) and
close both ends with bungs.
Contain any oil leakage.
(Fig. 34)
34
Dismantling the rotary coupling for the cutterbar

engagement
Remove the circlip (19).
(Fig. 35, 53)
35
Separate the screw section (14) from the oil line (20)
using the special tool. Take care of components falling
out.
(Fig. 36, 53)
36

Special tool:
1 Draw bolt Part No. 181 606.0
2 Slide hammer Part No. 181 604.0
1 Up to machine number ...
3 Adaptor piece M 8 Part No. 181 608.0
4 Hex. nut M 8 DIN 934 – 2 pieces
5 Union nut 12s DIN 3870 Part No. 244 061.1
From machine number ...
2 3 Adaptor piece M 10 Part No. 181 609.0

5 Union nut 15 L DIN 3870 Part No. 633 589.1
(Fig. 37)
3
32276
37
Remove the circlip (16) from the oil line (20).

(Fig. 38, 53)
38

Pull the ball bearing (17) along with the two middle
spacers (18 and 28) as well as the Belleville
springs (27) from the oil line (20) using the special
tool and a puller.
NOTE: Parts (27 and 28) are available from
machine number ...
Special tool:
Tube (self-manufactured)
Inner dia. 6 mm, outer dia. 8 mm, 30 mm long
(Fig. 39, 53)
39
Remove the circlip (11), the step drive pulley (12) and
the seal (13) from the screw section (14).
(Fig. 40, 53)
40

41
Assembling the rotary coupling for the cutterbar
engagement
Fit the O-ring (25), the seal (13) and the step drive
pulley (12) into the screw section (14) and secure with
the circlip (11).
NOTE: O-ring (25) is only available from machine
number ...
(Fig. 41, 42)
42

Insert the thrust washer (15) and the support ring (26)
into the screw section (14).
CAUTION!
The support ring (26) is drilled slightly larger

on one side. The side with the larger hole
needs to be fitted in a way that it faces the
thrust washer (15).
NOTE: Support ring (26) is only available from

43 machine number ...
(Fig. 41, 43)
Fill the ball bearing (17) and the empty space (F) with
grease (Rhenus Norlith STM3).
Press the bearing (17) and the spacers (18 and 28) as
well as the Belleville springs (27) onto the oil line (20)
using the special tool and secure with the circlip (16).
NOTE: Components (27 and 28) are only available
from machine number…
Special tool:
Tube, inner dia. 10 mm, outer dia. 12 mm, 50 mm long
44
CAUTION!
The open side of the bearing (17) must be

towards the inside.
The oil line (20) must not be tensioned whilst
being pressed on.
(Fig. 41, 44)

Press the pre-assembled oil line (20) into the screw

section (14) and secure with the circlip (19).
(Fig. 41, 45)
45
Installing the rotary coupling for the cutterbar

engagement
Screw the rotary coupling (10) into the ram (7).
Connect the hydraulic line (A) to the rotary
coupling (10).
(Fig. 46)
46
Start the engine.

Engage threshing mechanism.
Engage and disengage the cutterbar drive several
times.
Check the hydraulic oil level in the hydraulic tank (P)
via the fresh air filter element (R) and if necessary
top up.
(Fig. 47)
47

Removing the cutterbar engagement ram

Remove the rotary coupling from the cutterbar
engagement.
Using the special tool, remove the slotted nuts (9).
While slackening the front slotted nut, hold the rear
with a C-spanner. Remove the support ring (8) directly
behind.
Special tool:
(Fig. 48, 53)
48
Carefully remove the casing (2) from the hydraulic

ram (29) and without tilting.
(Fig. 49, 53)
49
Remove the six Belleville springs (1) from the

ram (29). Observe the correct fitting position.
(Fig. 50, 53)
50

Unbolt the ram (29) from the pulley (D).

NOTE: Up to machine number... the ram (29) is bolted
separately.
(Fig. 51, 53)
51
Dismantling the cutterbar engagement ram

Tap the ram (7) out of the casing (2) using a punch.
ATTENTION!
Use a soft punch (wood or plastic) in order

not to damage the ram (7).
(Fig. 52, 53)
52

53
Rotary coupling and hydraulic ram for the cutterbar 29 Hydraulic ram (from machine number …)
engagement, exploded view: Hydraulic ram and bolts
(up to machine number …)
1 Belleville spring
2 Ram (Fig. 53)
3 Back-up ring
4 O-ring 40.2 x 3 -n DIN 3771
5 O-ring 120.25 x 3.53 -n DIN 3771
6 Scraper
7 Ram
8 Support ring
10 Rotary coupling
13 Seal
14 Screw section
15 Thrust washer
17 Bearing 6000z DIN 625
18 Spacer
20 Oil line
21 Socket head bolt M 8 x 35 DIN 4762-8.8
22 Lock washer
25 O-ring 19.3 x 2.2 -n DIN 6149
(from machine number …)
26 Support washer (from machine number …)
27 Belleville washer (from machine number …)
28 Spacer (from machine number …)

Assembling the cutterbar engagement ram

Insert the back-up ring (3) and the O-ring (4) into the
notch of the ram (7).
CAUTION!
Always fit the O-ring (4) on the pressure side

(oil side) of the ram (7).
(Fig. 53, 54)

54
notch of the ram (2).
CAUTION!
Always fit the O-ring (4) on the pressure side

(oil side) of the ram (2).
(Fig. 53, 55)
55
Fit the O-ring (5) and the scraper (6) into the ram (2) in
the order shown.
CAUTION!
All edges must be free from burrs.
(Fig. 53, 56)
56

Lightly oil all components.

Press the ram (7) into the casing (2) without exerting
any force or tilting.
(Fig. 53, 57)
57
Installing the cutterbar engagement ram

Bolt the hydraulic ram (29) to the pulley (D) using the
socket head bolts (21) and new lock washers (22).
NOTE: Up to machine number ... the ram (29) is
bolted separately.
(Fig. 53, 58)
58
Slide the six Belleville springs (1) onto the hydraulic

ram (29) using gearbox grease such as Dealit EP 00.
Observe the indicated fitting position.
(Fig. 53, 59)
59

Slide the pre-assembled casing (2) onto the ram (29)

without tilting.
Slide on the slotted nuts (9) with support ring (8) using
the special tool. Torque to 150 Nm.
Special tool:
Socket wrench, Part No. 181 809.0
Refit the rotary coupling.
(Fig. 53, 60)
60

Hydraulic ram – steering hydraulics
HYDRAULIC RAM – STEERING HYDRAULICS
Removing the steering ram

(with 2.05 m steering axle)
Apply the parking brake.
Jack up the rear of the machine and secure, then
remove the left-hand wheel (depending on tyres).
Remove the hydraulic lines (A) to the steering ram (1)
and seal both ends with a bung. Contain any oil that
may leak.
(Fig. 1)
With a castellated nut, remove the lock.

Remove the castellated nut or the lock nut from the
steering ram (1).
(Fig. 2)
Using a suitable puller, press the ball joints out of the

conical seats.
Remove the steering ram (1).
(Fig. 3)

Dismantling the steering ram

Unbolt the ball joint (2) from the ram rod (11). For this,
slacken off the clamp (B).
(Fig. 4, 8)

(Fig. 5, 8)
Pull the cylinder head (8) along with the ram rod (11)
Remove the ram guide ring (14) as well as the double
ram seals (12).
(Fig. 6, 8)

7
Steering ram, exploded view
(with 2.05 m steering axle):
1 Hydraulic ram
2 Ball joint
3 Cover
4 Lock nut VM 18 x 1.5 DIN 980
5 Scraper
6 Seal
7 Union
8 Cylinder head
9 Securing cord
10 Dual seal ring
11 Ram rod
12 Ram seal
14 Ram guide ring
15 Ram casing
16 Hex. nut M 22 x 1.5 DIN 936
17 Ball joint
(Fig. 7)

Assembling the steering ram

Fit the double ram seals (12) and the ram guide
ring (14) into the grooves of the ram by observing
the order shown in the figure.
(Fig. 7, 8)
Insert the dual seal ring (10) into the groove of the
cylinder head (8).
(Fig. 7, 9)
Insert the seal (6) and the scraper (5) in the order
shown into the cylinder head (8).
(Fig. 7, 10)
10

Insert the pre-assembled ram rod (11) and cylinder
head (8) into the ram casing (15).
Twist a new securing cord (9) with the cylinder
head (8) into the casing (15).
(Fig. 5, 7, 11)
11

Bolt the ball joint (2) to the ram rod (11).

With the ram rod (11) fully retracted, the
dimension between the ball joint (2) needs to
be set to X = 588 mm.
Tighten the clamp (B).
(Fig. 7, 12)
12
Installing the steering axle

Insert the conical connections of the steering ram (1)
into the stub axle and steering axle housing.
Screw on a new lock nut or castellated nut and tighten.
Secure the castellated nut with the split pin.
Connect the hydraulic lines (A) to the steering ram (1)
observing the correct torque setting.
13 Refit the left-hand wheel.
Tighten the wheel bolts to the correct torque setting.
Adjust the steering lock.
Bleed the steering ram.
(Fig. 1, 13)

Removing the steering ram

(with adjustable steering axle
and CLAAS 4-trac axle)
Jack up the rear of the machine and secure, then
remove the left-hand wheel.
Remove the hydraulic lines (A) to the steering ram (4)
and seal both ends with a bung. Contain any oil that
may leak.
(Fig. 14)
14
With a castellated nut, remove the lock.

Remove the castellated nut or the lock nut from the
steering ram (4).
(Fig. 15)
15
Using a suitable puller, press the ball joint out of the

conical seat.
(Fig. 16)
16

Unbolt the lock nut from the bolt (1). Remove the bolt.
Remove the steering ram (4).
(Fig. 17)
17
Dismantling the steering ram

Unbolt the ball joint (18) from the ram rod (11).
For this, slacken off the clamp (B).
(Fig. 18, 21)
18

(Fig. 19, 21)
19
Pull the cylinder head (15) along with the ram rod (11)
Remove the ram guide ring (22) as well as the double
ram seals (24).
(Fig. 20, 21)
20

21
Steering ram, exploded view:
1 Bolt
2 Lock nut VM 20 x 1.5
4 Hydraulic ram
5 Union
6 Ram casing
11 Ram rod
12 Round seal 57.2 x 3 -n DIN 3771
13 Dual seal ring
14 Securing cord
15 Cylinder head
16 Seal
17 Scraper
18 Ball joint
19 Seal cap
21 Split pin 5 x 45 DIN 1234
22 Ram guide ring
24 Ram seal
(Fig. 21)

Assembling the steering ram

Fit the double ram seals (24) and the ram guide
ring (22) in the order shown into the grooves of the
ram.
(Fig. 21, 22)
22
cylinder head (15).
(Fig. 21, 23)
23
Insert the seal (16) and the scraper (17) in the order
shown into the cylinder head (15).
(Fig. 21, 24)
24

Insert the pre-assembled ram rod (11) and cylinder
head (15) into the ram casing (6).
Twist a new securing cord (14) with the cylinder
(Fig. 19, 21, 25)
25

Bolt the ball joint (18) to the ram rod (11).

With the ram rod (11) fully retracted, the dimension
between the ball joints needs to be set to X = 605 mm.
Tighten the clamp (B).
(Fig. 21, 26)
26
Installing the steering ram

Insert the new bolt (1) into the steering ram (4) and fit
a new lock nut (2). Tighten to 250 Nm.
Insert the conical coupling on the steering ram (4) into
the stub axle.
Fit a new lock nut or castellated nut tightening
to 220 – 290 Nm.
Lock the castellated nut with the split pin.
27
Connect the hydraulic lines (A) to the steering ram (4)
observing the correct torque setting.
Refit the left-hand wheel.
Tighten the wheel bolts to the correct torque setting.
Adjust the steering locks.
Bleed the steering ram.
(Fig. 15, 21, 27, 28)
28

Bleed the steering ram

1. Stop the engine.
2. Jack up the steering axle and support securely in
the middle.
3. Find a suitable clean container for collecting the
oil and place under the steering ram.
4. One after the other, disconnect and hang the rela-
tive hydraulic line (A and B) into the container.
5. Turn the steering wheel in the relative direction
until the oil runs out of the line without any air
29 bubbles.
6. Reconnect the hydraulic lines (A and B) to the
steering ram, observing the relative torque setting.
7. Top up the oil in the hydraulic tank (P) via the
fresh air filter element (R).
(Fig. 29, 30)
30

Removing the 3-D sieve box hydraulic ram

Mark the hydraulic lines (A) on the hydraulic ram (1),
then remove and seal the ends with bungs. Contain
any oil that may leak.
Remove the cover (B).
(Fig. 31)
31
Unlock the bolts (15 and 16) and remove. Remove the
hydraulic ram (1).
(Fig. 31, 32)
32

Dismantling the 3-D sieve box hydraulic ram

(Fig. 33, 37)
33
Remove the cylinder head (11) along with the ram

rod (8) from the ram casing (3).
Unbolt the seal (6) from the ram (7).
Unbolt the yoke (13) from the ram rod (8).
(Fig. 34, 37)
34
Unbolt the ram (7) from the ram rod (8).
CAUTION!
The hex. nut (4) is fitted with liquid sealing

compound and when dismantling will need to
be heated to approx. 100 °C.
(Fig. 35, 37)
35
Using the special tool, remove the ram seal (12) from
the cylinder head (11).
Special tool:
(self-manufactured)
(Fig. 36, 37)
36

37
3-D sieve box hydraulic ram, exploded view:
1 Hydraulic ram complete
2 Union
3 Hydraulic ram
6 Seal
7 Ram
8 Ram rod
9 Seal 45 x 3 -n DIN 3771
10 Securing cord
11 Cylinder head
12 Ram seal
13 Yoke
15 Bolt
16 Bolt
(Fig. 37)

Assembling the 3-D sieve box hydraulic ram

Insert the seal (9) into the groove of the cylinder
head (11).
(Fig. 37, 38)
38
Using the special tool, press the ram seal (12) into the
cylinder head (11). Ensure that the top edge of the cyl-
inder head (11) is flush with the outer edge of the ram
seal (12).
Special tool:
(self-manufactured)
(Fig. 37, 39)
39
Lightly oil all components with hydraulic oil.

Slide the ram rod (8) into the cylinder head (11).
Screw the yoke (13), the ram (7) along with hex.
nut (4) and contact washer (5) onto the ram rod (8).
CAUTION!

DELO-ML-5349 to the hex. nut (4).
40 Fill the groove of the ram (7) with multi purpose grease
such as CLAAS EP2 and then insert the seal (6).
Screw the cylinder head (11) into the ram (3) using a
new securing cord (10).
(Fig. 33, 37, 40)

Installing the 3-D sieve box hydraulic ram

Fit the hydraulic ram (1) to the machine chassis using
the bolt (16) and the other end to the pendulum (O)
with bolt (15).
Refit the hydraulic lines (A) back to the ram (1) in the
same position as they were removed from. Observe
the correct torque setting.
Refit the cover (B).
Start the engine.
Bleed the hydraulic ram (1):
41
Remove the bolt (15), and by tilting the pendulum (O)
from side to side, the ram (1) will be bled.
Secure the bolt (15).
Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank (P) via the
fresh air filter element (R) and if necessary top up.
(Fig. 41, 42)
42
Removing the 3-D sieve box pendulum

Mark the hydraulic lines (A) on the cover (5), then
remove and seal the ends with bungs. Contain any oil
that may leak.
Release the bolt (B) and remove.
Unbolt the control rod (25) as well as the bracket (C)
on the reservoir (11).
(Fig. 43, 49)
43

Dismantling the 3-D sieve box pendulum

Drain the reservoir (11).
Remove the cover (5) from the reservoir (11).
(Fig. 44, 49)
44
Remove the stud (12) from the pendulum (9).

(Fig. 45, 49)
45
Remove the cylindrical pin (8) from the pendulum (9)

using a hex. bolt M 5 x 50 DIN 933-8.8.
(Fig. 46, 49)
46
Remove the control spool from the valve housing (6).

(Fig. 47, 49)
47

Unbolt the valve housing (6) from the cover (5).

(Fig. 48, 49)
48

49
3-D pendulum unit, exploded view:
1 Pendulum control
2 Union
5 Cover
6 Valve housing
7 Seal
8 Cylindrical pin 8 x 80 -a DIN 8735
9 Pendulum
10 Seal 85 x 5 -n DIN 3771
11 Reservoir
12 Stud M 6 x 8 DIN 7434
13 Union
14 Lock washer
20 Bush
21 Spacer
22 Washer
24 Hex. bolt M 10 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
25 Control rod
26 Hex. nut M 14 x 1.5 DIN 934
27 Angle joint
29 Plastic bush
(Fig. 49)

Assembling the 3-D pendulum

Lightly oil all the components with hydraulic oil.
Bolt the valve housing (6) onto the cover (5) and insert
the spool.
Push in the pendulum (9) and insert the cylindrical
pin (8) with the flat side facing towards the threaded
hole and secure with the stud (12).
Assemble the seal (10) onto the pendulum (9) and the
seal (7) onto the cover (5).
Bolt the cover (5) onto the reservoir (11).
50
(Fig. 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50)
Installing the 3-D sieve box pendulum

Fit the reservoir (11) onto the bracket (C) and fit to the
control rod (25).
Insert the bolt (B).
Refit the hydraulic lines (A) back to the cover (5) in the
same position as they were removed from. Observe
Start the engine.
Bleed the hydraulic ram (D):
51 Remove the bolt (B), and by tilting the pendulum from
side to side, the ram (1) will be bled.
Secure the bolt (B).
Adjust the 3-D sieve box control.
(Fig. 49, 52)
52

Impeller
Impeller
IMPELLER
Removing the left-hand impeller bearing

Remove the threshing mechanism drive package.
Unscrew hose clamp (H) from machine side wall.
(Fig. 1)
Unscrew lubricating line (L).

(Fig. 2)
Unscrew lid (30) at the outer ring of bolts.

(Fig. 3)
Unscrew two opposite hexagon bolts (32) from the

bearing unit.
(Fig. 4)

Impeller
Remove bearing completely including lid (30), using a

special tool.
Unscrew bearing unit from the lid (30).
(Fig. 5)
Special tool:
1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 621.0
Part No. 235 816.0 – 2 pcs.
3 Threaded bolt
Part No.181 889.0 – 2 pcs.
(Fig. 6)
40470 6
Installing the left-hand impeller bearing

Bolt the bearing unit (27) to the lid (30) using the exist-
ing compensating rings.
Push the bearing unit (27) on the impeller shaft (6)
completely including lid (30), drive on with block-ended
tube if necessary.
Bolt down the lid (30) to the machine side wall.
Mount lubricating line (L).
Attach hose clamp (H) to machine side wall.
Fit threshing mechanism drive package.
Lubricate impeller bearing.
(Fig. 1, 2, 3)

Impeller
Removing the right-hand impeller bearing

Dismount the threshing drum variable-speed
drive (hydraulic).
Unscrew the lubricating line (P).
(Fig. 7)
Unscrew the bearing housing (15) from the machine

side wall.
(Fig. 8)
Remove the bearing unit using a special tool.
DOMINATOR 108 VX
Unscrew bearing shell (18).
Remove bearing shell (22) using a puller.
(Fig. 9)
Special tool:
2 1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Head-centered bolt M 16 x 30
Part No. 236 302.0 – 2 pcs.
4 Washer 13 x 30 x 3
Part No. 236 844.0 – 2 pcs.
(Fig. 10)
1 4 3
31491 10

Impeller
Installing the right-hand impeller bearing

Mount the bearing unit (15) to the impeller shaft using
a special tool.
(Fig. 11)
11
Special tool:
Part No. 235 816.0
2 Hexagon nut M 16
Part No. 236 173.0
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Washer 16,5 x 60 x 3 DIN 522
Part No. 750 253.0
5 Tube, outside dia. 70, inside dia. 50, 150 long
5 4 3 2 1
(self-manufactured)
33443 12 (Fig. 12)
Bolt down the bearing housing (15) to the machine

side wall.
Mount the lubricating line.
Install threshing drum variable-speed drive (hydraulic).
(Fig. 13)
13

Impeller
Removing the impeller

Dismount right-hand impeller bearing.
Dismount left-hand impeller bearing.
On the right-hand side, pass a tube through the
machine side wall and push on the shaft end of the
impeller.
Take out impeller to the left-hand side using a suitable
lifting device.
CAUTION!
14
The tube must be carried along when lifting out
the impeller.
(Fig. 14, 15)
15
Dismantling the impeller

Mark and dismount two impeller plates (F) in the area
of the key groove.
Loosen the two hexagon bolts (S) from the filler plate.
(Fig. 16)
16
Emery and oil impeller shaft (6).

Partly pull out the impeller shaft (6) from the filler
plates (5) using a special tool.
(Fig. 17)
17

Impeller
Special tool:
5 4 3 2 1 1 Hexagon bolt 16 x 300
Part No. 239 247.0
2 Hexagon nut M 16
Part No. 244 059.0
6 3 Axial thrust bearing
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Washer dia. 17 x dia. 75 x 6
(self-manufactured)
5 Tube, inside dia. 65 x 400 long
(self-manufactured)
6 Extension pin
31507 18 Part No. 181 810.1
(Fig. 18)
Remove the key.

Emery exposed areas of the impeller shaft (6) and oil.
Then fully drive out impeller shaft (6) using a special
tool.
Special tool:
Tow bar 450 mm Part No. 181 605.0
Striking tool Part No. 181 604.0
(Fig. 19)
19

Impeller
Impeller
20
Impeller, exploded view: 33 Washer 10.5 DIN 125
1 Impeller
2 Hexagon bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933 - 8.8
4 Impeller plate
5 Filler plate
6 Impeller shaft
7 Hexagon bolt M 10 x 30 rs
9 Filler plate
10 Key A16 x 10 x 50 DIN 6885
15 Bearing, complete
16 Felt ring
17 Elbow union LI4m DIN 3903
18 Bearing shell
19 Tolerance ring
20 Intermediate ring
21 Self-aligning roller bearing 22211 e/c3 DIN 635
22 Bearing shell
23 Felt ring
26 Screw plug M 8 x 1 DIN 906
27 Bearing unit 50 x 110 x 33
28 Threaded bushing LI4m DIN 3900
29 Compensating ring
30 Lid, left-hand

Impeller
Impeller
Assembling the impeller

Assemble the impeller while considering the markings
in order to avoid unbalanced mass.
The impeller shaft (6) is not yet fastened in the centre
filler plate (5) and the two impeller plates (F) are not
yet bolted down.
When using new parts, the impeller must be balanced
before starting assembly.
(Fig. 16, 21)
21
Drive in the impeller shaft (6) using a plastic-tip

hammer.
(Fig. 16, 22)
22
The basic setting dimension of the right-hand shaft

end is (X) = 127 mm as measured from the front edge
of the shaft end up to the outer edge of the impeller
plates.
(Fig. 23)
23

Impeller
Installing the impeller

Lift the impeller into the left-hand side of the machine
using a suitable lifting device and pull to the right until it
reaches its stop by means of a special tool.
Bolt down the right-hand impeller bearing to the
machine side wall.
(Fig. 15, 24)
24
Pull the left-hand impeller bearing on the shaft until it

reaches its stop, using a special tool.
(Fig. 25)
25
Special tool:
1 Tube dia. 52 x 200
(self-manufactured)
2 Hexagon bolt
M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.0
3 Hexagon nut
M 16 DIN 934-8
Part No. 236 173.0
Part No. 177 899.0
21983 5 Puller shoe
26 Part No. 181 836.0
(Fig. 26)

Impeller
Bolt down the lid (30) to the machine side wall using
four hexagon bolts.
Determine the dimension (X) from the outer lid side
through a bore in the lid (30) down to the bearing
unit (27) by means of a depth measuring device.
Y = Sheet thickness of lid (30)
W = Thickness of compensating rings (29)
W = X–Y
(Fig. 27, 28)
27
The calculated dimension (W) must be compensated

using the compensating rings (29).
Bolt down the lid (30) to the bearing unit (27) and to
the machine side wall.
Mount the lubricating line.
(Fig. 27, 28)
28
Laterally align the impeller body on the impeller

shaft (6, same distance on both sides). Lock adjusting
screw (S).
Bolt down the two impeller plates (F) while considering
the marks.
(Fig. 16, 29)
29

Install right-hand impeller bearing and lubricating line
to the machine side wall.
Mount threshing drum variable-speed drive (hydraulic).
Install threshing mechanism drive package.

Intensive separation system
INTENSIVE SEPARATION SYSTEM
Removing the front intensive separation

system shaft
Extend grain tank unloading tube.
Unscrew the covers (A and B) as well as panel (C)
and brace (D).
(Fig. 1)
Loosen the hexagon bolts of the V-belt pulley (E),

but do not unscrew them.
(Fig. 2)

Unscrew V-belt pulley (E) from hub (F).
(Fig. 3, 4)
Determine the dimension (X) from the shaft end

to the hub (F) and note it down.
(Fig. 4)

Remove the key of hub (F) and remove.

(Fig. 5)

Release the safety of lock collar (G) of the lock collar
bearing and knock it off.
Unscrew the sheet metal flange (O) from the machine
side wall.
(Fig. 6)

Release the safety of cam wheel (R) of the lock collar
Unscrew the sheet metal flange (S) from the machine
side wall.
(Fig. 7)
Unscrew the grain tank door (K).

(Fig. 8)

Unscrew the control rods from the agitator tines.

(Fig. 9)

Push the pressure springs (L) out of the bearing
flanges (M).
(Fig. 10)
10

Drive the lock collar bearings (N) off of the intensive
separation system shaft.
(Fig. 11)
11
Take out the intensive separation system shaft through

the opening in the grain tank.
(Fig. 12)
12

Installing the front intensive separation

system shaft
Lift the intensive separation system shaft into
the machine from the grain tank in a completely
assembled condition including agitator tines.
(Fig. 12)

Push bearing flanges (M) and lock collar bearings (N)
including sheet metal flanges on the intensive
Bolt down the sheet metal flanges including
the bearing flanges (M) to the machine side wall.
CAUTION!
Do not yet bolt in the top mushroom head bolts.
13
(Fig. 13)

Insert the ends of the pressure springs (L)
into the bores (B) of the bearing flanges (M).
Install the spring supports (H) between the 1st and 2nd
spring winding and bolt down to the machine side walls
with the bearing flanges (M).
CAUTION!
On the right-hand machine side, additionally

bolt down the magnetic pick-up bracket.
14
(Fig. 14, 15)
32354 15


Arrest the lock collar bearing on both sides of the
machine with the lock collar (G, left-hand side) or
with the cam wheel (R, right-hand side) so that the
dimension (X) as measured from the deflector
assembly (P) to the machine side wall is the same
on both sides.
(Fig. 6, 7, 16)
16

Adjust the magnetic pick-up so that the clearance
to the cam wheel (R) is 1 ± 0.5 mm.
(Fig. 17)
17
Push the hub (F) on the intensive separation system

shaft at the previously determined dimension (X)
and fasten by a key.
Loosely bolt the V-belt pulley (E) on the hub (F).
Install intensive separation system drive belt (12)
and adjust it.
Tighten the V-belt pulley (E).
(Fig. 18)
18
Perform a test run.

The intensive separation system drive belt (12) must
not make contact with jockey pulley (Q) on its side.
Belt (12) must be aligned so that there is a minimum
clearance of 2 mm at (R). Align the V-belt pulley (E)
if necessary.
(Fig. 18, 19)
19

Attach the covers (A and B), panel (C) and brace (D).
(Fig. 20)
20
Removing the rear intensive separation

system shaft
Determinate the dimension (X) from the shaft end
to the V-belt pulley (A).
(Fig. 21)
21
Remove the key of V-belt pulley (A) and pull off pulley.
(Fig. 21, 22)
22

Release the safety of lock collar (B) of the lock collar
Unscrew the sheet metal flange (C) from the machine
side wall.
(Fig. 23)
23


Remove cap (D).
(Fig. 24)
24

Release the safety of lock collar (E) of the lock collar
Unscrew the sheet metal flange (F) from the machine
side wall.
(Fig. 25)
25
Unscrew the control rods from the agitator tines.

(Fig. 26)
26

Push the pressure springs (G) out of the bearing
flanges (M).
(Fig. 27)
27


Drive the lock collar bearings (N) off of the intensive
(Fig. 28)
28
Take out the intensive separation system shaft through

the door in the straw walker housing.
(Fig. 29)
29
Installing the rear intensive separation system

shaft
Lift the intensive separation system shaft into
the machine in a completely assembled condition
including agitator tines.
(Fig. 29)

Push bearing flanges (M) and lock collar bearings (N)
including sheet metal flanges on the intensive
Bolt down the sheet metal flanges including
the bearing flanges (M) to the machine side wall.
CAUTION!
Do not yet bolt in the top mushroom head bolts.
30
(Fig. 30)


Insert the ends of the pressure springs (G) into the
bores (B) of the bearing flanges (M).
Install the spring supports (H) between the 1st and 2nd
spring winding and bolt down to the machine side walls
with the bearing flanges (M).
(Fig. 31, 32)
31
32354 32

Arrest the lock collar bearings on both sides of the
machine with the lock collars so that the dimension (X)
as measured from the deflector assembly (K) to the
machine side wall is the same on both sides.
(Fig. 33)
33
Push the V-belt pulley (A) on the intensive separation

system shaft at the previously determined dimension
and fasten by a key.
Install intensive separation system drive belt (12) and
adjust.
(Fig. 34)
34

Perform a test run.

The intensive separation system drive belt (12) must
not make contact with jockey pulley (L) on its side.
clearance of 2 mm at (R). Align the V-belt pulley (A)
if necessary.
(Fig. 34)
Dismantling the intensive separation system shaft

Remove the front and / or rear intensive separation
system shaft.
Unscrew the deflector assembly (A).
(Fig. 35)
35
Unscrew the support plate (H).

(Fig. 36)
36
Remove agitator tines (C) and wooden bearing

shells (D). Observe correct installation position.
(Fig. 37)
37

Assembling the intensive separation system shaft

Slightly grease the wooden bearing shells (D) and
place on the intensive separation system shaft along
with the agitator tines (C).
(Fig. 37)
Bolt down support plates (H) so that they clamp the

spring retainer (E) in place at the sides of the wooden
bearings.
Insert the ends of the pressure springs (G) into the
bores (B) of the spring retainers (E).
Install front and / or rear intensive separation system
shaft.
(Fig. 38, 39)
38
32353 39

control shaft
Unscrew the control rods (A) from the agitator tines.
Unscrew the control shaft (B) at (C) at the machine
housing and take out completely with control rods (A).
(Fig. 40)
40

Installing the intensive separation system

control shaft
Lift the control shaft into the machine in a completely
assembled condition including control rods (A) and
bolt down at (C) to the machine housing.
Mount control rods (A) to the agitator tines.
(Fig. 40)
Replacing the agitator tines

Unscrew control rod (A) from agitator tine.
(Fig. 41)
41
Unscrew deflector assembly (B).

(Fig. 42)
42
Unscrew support plate (H).

Remove agitator tines including wooden bearing
shells (D). Observe correct installation position.
(Fig. 43, 44)
43

Slightly grease the wooden bearing shells (D) and

place on the intensive separation system shaft along
with agitator tines (E).
Bolt down support plate (H) so that it clamps the spring
retainer (F) in place at the sides of the wooden
bearings.
CAUTION!
The ends of the pressure springs must be

seated firmly in the bores (B) of the spring
44 retainers (F).
Mount deflector assembly (B) and control rod (A).

H
(Fig. 41, 42, 43, 44, 45)
32353 45


Left-hand threshing mechanism drive
LEFT-HAND THRESHING MECHANISM DRIVE

pulley
For removing the threshing mechanism drive
pulley (A) – see page 7.4.1, Removing the cutterbar
clutch.
(Fig. 1)
Installing the threshing mechanism drive

pulley
For installing the threshing mechanism drive pulley (A)
– see page 7.4.9, Installing the cutterbar clutch.
(Fig. 1)

jockey pulley
Remove cotter pin from linkage (B) and fold the side
cover wide open.
(Fig. 2)
Unscrew hexagon bolts (10 and 16) and remove

jockey pulley (4).
(Fig. 3, 4)

4
Threshing mechanism drive jockey pulley, 18 Cheese-head screw M 10 x 35 DIN 4762-8.8
exploded view 19 Expansion pin 4 x 14a DIN 8752
20 Washer
1 Hex. bolt M 8 x 25 rs DIN 933-8.8
23 Hex. bolt M 12 x 120 DIN 931-8.8
24 Washer
3 Supporting plate
25 Hex. bolt M 8 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer A 8
26 Connecting rod eye
27 Sleeve
8 Pin
9 Jockey pulley
29 Guide tube
10 Hex. bolt M 12 x 160 DIN 931-8.8
30 Hydraulic cylinder
31 Washer
Hex. bolt M 12 x 140 DIN 931-8.8
Hex. nut M 12 DIN 934 (Fig. 4)
Contact washer A 12
11 Coupling lever
12 Washer
13 Sleeve
15 Spacer tube
16 Hex. bolt M 10 x 140 DIN 931-8.8
Hex. bolt M 10 x 120 DIN 931-8.8
Contact washer A 10
17 Spacer pin

Installing the threshing mechanism drive

jockey pulley
Insert jockey pulley (4, pre-assembled) into the
coupling lever (11) and bolt down with hexagon
bolt (10).
If necessary, bend the plates (C) of coupling lever (11)
slightly apart using the hexagon bolt (16), hexagon
nut (16) and a self-grip wrench.
(Fig. 4, 5, 6)
5
Insert hexagon bolt (16) with spacer tube (15) into the
coupling lever (11) and bolt down.
(Fig. 4, 6)
Insert linkage (B) into the side cover and secure with a
cotter pin.
(Fig. 7)


Parking brake
Parking brake
PARKING BRAKE
Removing the brake units for the parking

brake
Unscrew the hex. bolt (A) by turning it several times.
(Fig. 1)
Using a plastic-tip hammer, tap in the hex. bolt (A) and

using the adjusting key, push back the brake shoes.
For this if necessary operate the foot brake.
(Fig. 2)
Release the key on the foot brake drum.

(Fig. 3)
Lightly oil the intermediate drive shaft (B), then tap

off the foot brake drum towards the right using a
plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 4)

Parking brake
Unbolt the brake adjuster (C) from the gearbox.
CAUTION!
The brake lines must not become kinked.
Unlock the bolts (D) and remove when the parking

brake has been released.
(Fig. 5)
Measure the distance between the end of the shaft

and the brake drum.
(Fig. 6)
Release the key from the brake drum.

Lightly oil the end of the shaft.
Pull the brake drum off, or if necessary use a puller.
(Fig. 7)
Remove the brake shoes.
CAUTION!

with either grease or oil.
(Fig. 8)

Parking brake
Installing the brake units for the parking brake

Slide on the brake units.
CAUTION!

(Fig. 8)
Slide on the brake drum to the dimension previously

set to, and lock with the key.
(Fig. 9)
Insert the bolt (D) with the parking brake released, and
secure.
Bolt the brake adjuster (C) back onto the gearbox.
For this use new M 12 lock nuts.
(Fig. 10)
10
Slide on the foot brake drum onto the intermediate

drive shaft (B), so that the brake units are aligned with
the outer edge of the drum.
Lock the foot brake drum with the key.
(Fig. 11)
11

Parking brake
Adjust the cable for the brakes on the fork (E) so

that the parking brake is fully engaged after the first
3 to 4 notches.
(Fig. 12)
12
Screw in the hex. bolt (A) until the brake shoes come
into light contact with the drum.
Press the right-hand brake pedal so that the brake
shoes centralise in the drum.
Jack up and chock the front right-hand side of the
machine.
Unscrew the hex. bolt (A) about ¾ of a turn so that
the shoes do not foul on the drum causing premature
wear.
Carry out a brake test. For this, ensure that both
13 brakes have the same resistance at the same pedal
height, and the brakes are fully activated within the
first third of the brake pedal travel.
If necessary correct using the hex. bolt (A).
(Fig. 13)

Parking brake
Removing the brake units for the parking

brake
With the parking brake applied, unlock the bolt (A) and
remove.
(Fig. 14)
14
Measure the distance between the end of the shaft

and the brake drum.
(Fig. 15)
15
Remove the key from the brake drum.

Lightly oil the end of the shaft.
Pull the brake drum off and if necessary use a puller.
(Fig. 16)
16
Remove the brake units.
CAUTION!
The brake units must not come into contact with

any grease or oil.
(Fig. 17)
17

Parking brake
Installing the brake units for the parking brake

Press on the brake units.
CAUTION!
The brake units must not come into contact

(Fig. 17)
Slide on the brake drum to the dimension previously

set to, and lock with the key.
(Fig. 18)
18
Insert the bolt (A), with the parking brake released

and secure.
Adjust the parking brake cable on the fork (B) so
that the parking brake is fully applied after about
3 to 4 notches.
(Fig. 19)
19

Preparation floor
Preparation floor
PREPARATION FLOOR
Removing the preparation floor

Loosen four hooks (A) beneath the preparation floor.
(Fig. 1)
Pull out the stepped preparation floor sections (B)

to the rear.
Unscrew sensor housing (C).
Remove under-walker return floor.
(Fig. 1, 2)
With 3-D cleaning system:

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Remove panel (E).
(Fig. 3)

Remove cover (F).
(Fig. 4)

Preparation floor

Dismount the left-hand side covers. To do this,
unscrew the hinges (G) from the machine frame.
(Fig. 5)

Turn off battery isolating switch (H).
Disconnect battery cable (S) from battery.
Remove battery.
Unscrew tool box (K) from the machine frame.
(Fig. 6)

Unscrew hexagon bolts of the front control arms (L).
Pull off control arms (L).
Unscrew connecting rods (W) and pull off if necessary.
Without and with 3-D cleaning system:
Mark the position of the driving rod (M) at the front
of the eccentric disk (N).
7
Unscrew driving rods (M) and pull off if necessary.
Mark the position of the wind boards on the left-hand
side at (P).
Unscrew bracket (O).
Unscrew the sieve pan drive rocker arms (Q).
(Fig. 7, 8)

Preparation floor

Force off the sieve pan drive rocker arms (Q)
using a mounting lever and pull off if necessary.
(Fig. 9)

Remove washer (R), seal (S) and sealing plate (T).
(Fig. 10)
10
Support the sieve pan from the bottom using a lifting

device.
(Fig. 11)
11
Support the rear of sieve pan with wooden wedges.

(Fig. 12)
12

Preparation floor

Unscrew the inside sieve pan rocker arms (U) from the
sieve pan and from the machine side wall and remove.
(Fig. 13)
13

Unscrew the front rocker arms (28) from the
preparation floor and from the machine side walls.
(Fig. 14, 17)
14

Unscrew bearing neck (V) from the preparation floor
and pull out.
(Fig. 15)
15
Lift the preparation floor out to the rear.

(Fig. 16)
16

Preparation floor
Preparation floor
17
Preparation floor, exploded view 29 Housing
30 Rubber bushing
1 Preparation floor
31 Washer 18.5 x 28 x 3
2 Sealing strip
32 Expansion pin 5 x 28b DIN 8752
3 Rail
4 Deflector assembly, right-hand (Fig. 17)
5 Clamping strip
6 Strip
7 Deflector assembly, right-hand
8 Deflector assembly, left-hand
9 Blind rivet
A 4.8 x 10 DIN 7337
10 Deflector assembly, left-hand
11 Blind rivet
A 4.8 x 12 DIN 7337
12 Clamping bar
13 Rubber seal
21 Nozzle plate
23 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
24 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 16 DIN 933-8.8
Hexagon nut
M 8 DIN 934
Contact washer A 8
25 Sealing strip
27 Rocker arm, complete
28 Rocker arm

Preparation floor
Preparation floor
Installing the preparation floor

Lift the preparation floor into the machine from
the rear.
CAUTION!
The sealing strips (2) must make contact with

the machine side wall and must not be bent
over.
(Fig. 16, 17, 18)

18

Bolt bearing neck (V) to the preparation floor.
(Fig. 19)
19

Install the front rocker arms (28) to the preparation
floor and to the machine side walls.
Bolt down the inside sieve pan rocker arms (U)
to the sieve pan and to the machine side walls.
CAUTION!
Loosen the hexagon bolts (B) of the

metal / rubber bearings.
20
(Fig. 17, 20, 21)
21

Preparation floor
Install washer (R), seal (S) and sealing plate (H)

Insert hexagon bolts (T) into the rocker arms (Q).
Drive the rocker arms (Q) on the pins using
Attach the driving rods (M) to the previously marked
positions at the eccentric disk (N).
CAUTION!
22
Loosely screw in the hexagon bolts of the
metal / rubber bearings with washers and
contact washers for axial clamping of the
metal /rubber bearings and do not yet tighten
them.
Install bracket (O).

Bolt down the wind board levers to the previously
marked position on the left-hand side of machine
at (P).
Loosely attach connecting rods (W) and control
23 arm (L).
(Fig. 22, 23)

To do this, loosen the hexagon nut (D) from the jockey
pulley.
Loosen hexagon nut at (E).
Position the rocker arms (Q) so by means of wooden
wedges that the sieve pan is exactly at the centre
position of the oscillating range.
Axially arrest the metal / rubber bearings of the rocker
arms (Q), the connecting rods (W) and of the control
24 arms (L) with the prescribed tightening torque.
(Fig. 24)

Preparation floor
Install the under-walker return floor.

Axially arrest the metal / rubber bearing of the inside
sieve pan rocker arms (U) with the prescribed
tightening torque.
Torque settings for metal / rubber bearings:
M 10 – 46 Nm
M 12 – 80 Nm
M 16 – 195 Nm
CAUTION!
25
Failing to observe the above will result
in premature wear of the metal / rubber
bearings.
Tension the sieve pan drive belt (10). To do this,

tension the belt using the hexagon nut (E).
Secure setting with the lock nut and tighten hexagon
nut (D).
(Fig. 24, 25)

Bolt tool box (K) to the machine frame.
Install battery.
Connect battery cable (S) to battery.
Install and align side covers on left-hand side.
(Fig. 26)
26

Preparation floor
Push the stepped preparation floor sections (B)

in from the rear.
Bolt down the sensor housing (C).
(Fig. 27)
27
Fasten the stepped preparation floor sections (B)

under the preparation floor with four hooks (A).
(Fig. 28)
28
DOMINATOR 108 VX:

Install panel (E).
Install cover (F).
(Fig. 29, 30)
29
30

Preparation floor
Let the machine run for a short time with the threshing
mechanism engaged.
Check the parallel position of the sieve pan. Correct
at the bearing units (S) if necessary by dislocating.
(Fig. 31)
31

Returns elevator
Returns elevator
RETURNS ELEVATOR
Removing the returns elevator chain

Open cap (A) on returns elevator.
(Fig. 1)
Relieve tension of sieve pan / fan intermediate drive

belt (7). To do this, loosen hexagon nuts until belt
tension is relieved.
(Fig. 2)
Turn V-belt pulley (B) until the chain-connect link has

reached the bottom position in the returns elevator
shaft.
(Fig. 3)
Loosen cover (C) at the lockings and remove.

(Fig. 4)

Returns elevator
Remove cover (E).

Relieve the tension of the returns elevator chain.
To this end, loosen the block tensioner (F) and the
hexagon bolts (G) and hexagon nuts (H) on both
sides. Turn the chain tensioner backwards along
with the hexagon nut (P).
(Fig. 5)
Separate the returns elevator chain at the

chain-connect link.
(Fig. 6)
Pull the returns elevator chain out to the top.

(Fig. 7)

Returns elevator
Installing the returns elevator chain

1. Introduce the returns elevator chain into the
returns elevator shaft from the top. Observe
correct installation position!
(Fig. 7)
2. Connect the returns elevator chain at the bottom,
using the chain-connect link and secure by means
of new chain cotter pins.
(Fig. 6)
3. Tension the returns elevator chain using the
hexagon nut (P) so that the conveyor plates will
not touch the returns elevator shaft. It must still be
possible to move the returns elevator chain at the
lower chain wheel.
Tension the drive chain using the block
tensioner (F). Tighten the hexagon bolts (G)
and the hexagon nuts (H) on both sides.
Mount cover (E) and guard (C).
(Fig. 3, 4, 5)
4. Fit cap (A).
(Fig. 1)
5. Tension sieve pan / fan intermediate drive belt (7)
using the hexagon nut. Secure setting with the
lock nut.
Perform test run and check belt tension.
(Fig. 2)
Removing the upper returns auger

Loosen block tensioner (H) and remove drive chain.
(Fig. 8)

Returns elevator
Drive out expansion pin of chain wheel (P) and remove

chain wheel using a puller.
(Fig. 9)

lock collar off.
Remove cover (A) and door (B).
(Fig. 10)
10
Remove returns elevator chain.

Unscrew the sheet metal flange (G) of the lock collar
bearing and the filler bolt (F).
(Fig. 11)
11
Remove the lock collar bearing and the sheet metal

flange together using a puller.
(Fig. 12)
12

Returns elevator

(Fig. 13)
13
Unlock lock collar from lock collar bearing (P) and

(Fig. 14)
14

Drive out the auger shaft using a plastic-tip hammer
and at the same time turn out the returns auger
through the installation opening.
(Fig. 15, 16)
15
16

Returns elevator
Installing the upper returns auger

1. Turn the returns auger in from the right-hand side
through the installation opening. While doing so,
introduce the shaft end into the lock collar
bearing.
(Fig. 15, 16)
2. Beat on lock collar bearing together with sheet
metal flange, using a block-ended tube. Install
outside sheet metal flange (G) and filling bolt (F).
Install returns elevator chain.
(Fig. 11, 12)
3. Push on lock collar. Drive on chain wheel (P) and
secure by means of expansion pin.
(Fig. 9, 10)
4. Align the chain wheels with each other. Drive in
lock collars and secure. Install drive chain and
tension using the block tensioner (H).
(Fig. 8, 14)
5. Install drum inspection cover (T).
(Fig. 13)

Returns elevator
Removing the returns elevator

Remove the returns elevator chain.
Unscrew side door (S) at the rear right-hand side from
the brace (K).
(Fig. 17)
17
Unscrew side door (T) completely with brace (K).

While doing so, unscrew the fuel filter (U) and the
cable clamp from the brace.
(Fig. 18)
18
Unscrew side door (V) completely with brace (Y).

(Fig. 19)
19
Remove cap (R) from the bearing.

(Fig. 20)
20

Returns elevator
Unlock lock collar and knock off.

(Fig. 21)
21
Unscrew lock collar bearing at the elevator boot and

remove by means of a puller.
(Fig. 22)
22
Unscrew the bolts (E) at the elevator boot and push

the rubber connecting sleeve (G) to the side.
(Fig. 23)
23
Loosen block tensioner (H) and remove drive chain.

(Fig. 24)
24

Returns elevator
Drive out expansion pin of chain wheel (P) and remove

(Fig. 25)
25

lock collar off.
(Fig. 26)
26

bearing.
(Fig. 27)
27
Remove the lock collar bearing and the sheet metal

flange together using a puller.
(Fig. 28)
28

Returns elevator
Unscrew the elevator head from the bracket (R).

To this end, unscrew the hexagon bolts (P).
Disconnect the cable plug from the magnetic pick-up.
Remove the returns elevator using a suitable lifting
device.
(Fig. 29)
29
Dismantling the returns elevator

Drive out expansion pin of the chain wheel and remove
(Fig. 30)
30
Unlock lock collar or cam wheel from lock collar

bearing and knock off.
(Fig. 31)
31
Unscrew the sheet metal flanges of the lock collar

bearings.
On the back side, also dismount the magnetic pick-up
including its bracket.
(Fig. 32)
32

Returns elevator
Remove the lock collar bearings and the sheet metal

flanges together using a puller.
(Fig. 33)
33
Unscrew the chain tensioner (W) on left-hand and

right-hand sides.
(Fig. 34)
34
Loosen the set collars (N).

(Fig. 35)
35
Support the chain wheel using two squared timbers.

Drive the shaft out of the chain wheel so far using a
plastic-tip hammer until the key is exposed.
(Fig. 36)
36

Returns elevator
Remove key.
Remove shaft along with set collars and chain wheel.
(Fig. 37)
37
Assembling the returns elevator

1. Emery and oil the shaft and insert it into the
returns elevator shaft along with the key, set
collars and the chain wheel
2. Loosely attach the chain tensioner (W) on
left-hand and right-hand side by means of bolts.
3. Push the lock collar bearings on together with the
sheet metal flanges and the magnetic pick-up and
bolt down.
CAUTION!
The rear sheet metal flange must be supported

by three DIN 125-8 washers on both sides.
(Fig. 32, 34, 37)
4. Slightly pre-tension the two chain tensioners (W)

using a screw clamp so that the lock collar
bearings are positioned in front of the shaft
shoulder. Only now arrest the lock collar or the
cam wheel on the shaft.
(Fig. 31, 38)
38

Returns elevator
5. Check the magnetic pick-up setting and correct if

necessary.
Setting dimension X = 1 ± 0.5 mm.
(Fig. 39)
39
6. Align the chain wheel to be in the centre of the

returns elevator shaft and arrest using set collars.
Push on chain wheel and secure by means of
expansion pin.
(Fig. 40)
40
Installing the returns elevator

Lift the returns elevator to the machine using a
suitable lifting device and bolt the elevator head to
the bracket (R) using hexagon bolts (P).
Connect the cable plug to the magnetic pick-up.
(Fig. 41)
41
Drive the lock collar bearing on the shaft along with the
inner sheet metal flange until the bearing is flush with
the returns elevator boot and bolt it down together with
the outer sheet metal flange.
(Fig. 42)
42

Returns elevator
Align the chain wheel to be in the centre of the returns

elevator shaft.
Bolt down the returns elevator boot using bolts (E) and
push on the rubber connecting sleeve (G).
Arrest the lock collar bearing by means of the lock col-
lar and secure.
Push on cap (R).
(Fig. 20, 21, 23)
Drive the upper lock collar bearing along with the inner
sheet metal flange on the shaft until the bearing is
flush with the returns elevator head and bolt down
together with the outer sheet metal flange.
Push on chain wheel and secure by means of an
expansion pin.
Install drive chain and tension using a block
tensioner (H).
(Fig. 24, 25, 43)
43
Install the side door (V) with the brace (Y) and align.
Install the side door (T) with the brace (K) and align.
Attach the fuel filter (U) together with the cable clamp
to the brace (K).
Bolt down the side door (S) and align.
(Fig. 17, 18, 19)

Returns elevator
Removing the lower returns auger

Relieve the tension of the sieve pan drive belt (10).
To this end, loosen the hexagon bolt at (B) from the
jockey pulley.
Loosen hexagon bolts at (M) and remove the belt (10)
from the V-belt pulley.
(Fig. 44)
44
Unscrew plate (R).

(Fig. 45)
45
Remove returns elevator chain.

Remove cap (A).
(Fig. 46)
46

lock collar off.
(Fig. 47)
47

Returns elevator
Loosen set collars (2).

(Fig. 48)
48
Measure the clearance (X) between shaft end and

V-belt pulley by means of a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 49)
49
Drive off the gib head key from the V-belt pulley.
(Fig. 50)
50
Pull the V-belt pulley up to just before the battery box

using a puller.
(Fig. 51)
51

Returns elevator
Loosen the auger trough (D) at the latches (E) and fold
down.
Loosen lock collar and unscrew sheet metal flange of
the lock collar bearing.
(Fig. 52)
52
Loosen the sheet metal flange of the right-hand lock

collar bearing.
Pull out the auger shaft for approx. 20 mm to the
right-hand side.
Take off the V-belt pulley on the left-hand side.
(Fig. 52, 53)
53
Unscrew the filler bolt (F).

(Fig. 54)
54

Returns elevator
Support the chain wheel with a squared timber, drive

the auger shaft to the left-hand side using a punch and
at the same time turn out the auger shaft to the
left-hand side through the installation opening.
CAUTION!
The returns elevator boot must not be deformed

during this work.
(Fig. 55, 56)

55
56
Take out chain wheel (4), set collars (2) and the
key (3).
(Fig. 57, 58)
57

Returns elevator
Installing the lower returns auger

Turn the returns auger into the machine from the
left-hand side through the installation opening.
At the same time, push on the chain wheel (4) and
the set collars (2) in the returns elevator boot.
(Fig. 56, 57, 58)
58
Screw in the filler bolt (F).

Push on the left-hand lock collar bearing and bolt
down together with the sheet metal flanges.
Push on the lock collar and the V-belt pulley.
Align the auger shaft so that the spacer ring (H) is
flush with the lock collar bearing.
Arrest lock collar and secure.
(Fig. 52, 54, 59)
59
Push on the right-hand side lock collar bearing and

bolt down.
Arrest the lock collar and secure.
Push on cap (A).
Align chain wheel (4) to be in centre and arrest using
set collars (2).
(Fig. 46, 53, 58, 60)
60

Returns elevator
Align the V-belt pulley according to the measured

clearance and fasten be means of keys.
(Fig. 61)
61
Install sieve pan drive belt (10) and adjust.

To this end, tension the belt (10) by means of the
hexagon nuts (B) with the nut (M) loosened.
Bolt down plate (R).
(Fig. 44, 45)

Right-hand threshing mechanism drive
RIGHT-HAND THRESHING MECHANISM

DRIVE
Removing the threshing drum variable-speed

drive (spring-loaded)
Without threshing drum speed reduction kit
(DOMINATOR 108 VX),
with threshing drum speed reduction kit
(DOMINATOR 108 VX – 88 VX):
Remove threshing drum speed control belt (23).
Remove threshing drum speed control belt (25)
(without intermediate drive).
Unscrew the hexagon bolts (P) used for forcing the

variable speed pulleys apart.
Unscrew cap (25).
(Fig. 1, 15)
Unscrew hexagon bolt (30) from face end of shaft and

remove together with washer (28).
(Fig. 2, 15)

Pull off the variable-speed drive from the shaft using

a special tool and a suitable lifting device.
Remove key and any existing tight-fitting washers.
(Fig. 3)
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt
M 16 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
(head-centred)
Part No. 235 586.0
2 Puller plate
Part No. 181 617.0
3 Hex. bolt
M 16 x 40 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 235 821.0
5 Puller bridge
4 Part No. 181 621.0
6 Hex. bolt
M 16 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 235 586.0
(Fig. 4)

Dismantling the threshing drum variable-speed

For DOMINATOR 108 VX
(without threshing drum speed reduction kit)
and DOMINATOR 108 VX – 88 VX
(with threshing drum speed reduction kit)
remove thrust (23).
Block compression spring using a special tool and
unscrew the countersunk head bolts (21) from the
mounting flange (14).
5
DANGER!
Never unscrew the countersunk head

bolts (21) before the compression spring
is blocked by means of the special tool
– danger of accident!
In case of DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX (without

threshing drum speed reduction kit), the mounting
flange (14) and the thrust (23) are one piece and
must also be blocked by means of the special tool.
(Fig. 5, 15)
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
Part No. 181 880.0
1 2 Spindle
Part No. 181 877.0
Part No. 235 983.0
4 Locator tool
2 5 4 3
Part No. 181 437.0
5 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0
33410
6 (Fig. 6)

Completely relieve the tension of compression spring

by rotating the lever nut backwards.
(Fig. 7)
Remove compression spring and mounting

flange (14).
(Fig. 8, 15)
Remove half of variable speed pulley.

Drive out expansion pins (18).
(Fig. 9, 15)
Unscrew screw plug (4) and cheese-head screws (6).

(Fig. 10, 15)
10

Remove key (7) together with notched dowel (8) using

a screwdriver.
(Fig. 11, 15)
11
Remove bearing sleeves (16).

(Fig. 12, 15)
12
Remove sliding bushing (9).

Force out runner (10) with a screwdriver. Observe and
mark installation position.
(Fig. 13, 15)
13
Drive out expansion pins (11) and remove slides (12).

(Fig. 14, 15)
14

15
Threshing drum variable-speed drive (spring-loaded), 27 Hex. bolt M 6 x 12 DIN 933
exploded view: 28 Washer
1 Drive package
30 Hex. bolt M 16 x 55 DIN 931-8.8
3 Cap R23 = Threshing drum speed control belt (23)
4 Screw plug M 12 x 1.5 DIN 906 R25 = Threshing drum speed control belt (25)
5 Felt strip (without intermediate drive)
6 Cheese-head screw
7 Key (Fig. 15)
8 Notched dowel 6 x 20 DIN 8745
9 Sliding bushing
10 Runner
11 Expansion pin 6 x 16 DIN 8752
12 Slide
14 Mounting flange
15 Thrust washer
16 Bearing sleeve
17 Snap ring
19 Cover
21 Countersunk head bolt M 10 x 30 DIN 7991
Tight-fitting washer 56 x 72 x 0.5 DIN 988
23 Thrust
24 Hex. bolt M 8 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
25 Cap

16
Assembling the threshing drum variable-speed
NOTE:

1. Insert sliding bushing (9) and observe installation

position while doing so (the rounded side must
17 face inwards).
(Fig. 16, 17)

2. Centre key (7) using an expansion pin 6 x 50.

3. Drive in key (7) and drive out expansion pin.
4. Slightly pre-tension key (7) using cheese-head
screws (6).
5. Apply glue, e.g. DELO-ML-5328, to new notched
dowel (8) and drive in.
6. Unscrew cheese-head screws (6), insert
them with liquid sealing compound, e.g.
DELO-ML-5349, and tighten.
18
(Fig. 16, 18, 19)
19
7. Thoroughly clean the variable speed pulleys.

8. Insert sliding bushing (9) and runner (10) and join
variable speed pulley halves together.
9. Determining the torsional backlash:
Rotate the variable speed pulley halves against
each other and measure the torsional backlash at
the outer pulley diameter. To do this, apply a mark
to the outer pulley edge.
The torsional backlash is to be as small as
possible while the pulley surfaces run smoothly
and must not exceed 1 mm. If necessary, the
20 next bigger runner (10) must be used.
NOTE: The next bigger runner (10) is 0.5 mm
wider than the previous one.
(Fig. 15, 16, 20)

10. Insert the expansion pins (18) only into those

grease bores of grease nipples marked with (2).
ATTENTION!
The slot of the expansion pins (18) must

always face towards the centre (M). This
guarantees that the grease reaches the
inside sliding surface while greasing the
grease nipples.
2 2 (Fig. 16, 21)
33424
21
11. Drive in expansion pin (20) for fixing the mounting

flange (14) and the cover (19).
12. Join variable speed pulley halves, place
cover (19) and compression spring with mounting
flange (14) in position and twist so that the
corresponding bore in the variable speed pulley
halves matches the expansion pin (20).
13. Screw hexagon bolts (6) of the special tool for
guiding the mounting flange (14) into the variable
speed pulley half.
14. Pre-tension the compression spring using a
22 special tool.
(Fig. 15, 16, 22)

Special tool:
1 Lever nut, Part No. 181 880.0
1 3 Axial grooved ball bearing, Part No. 235 983.0
4 Locator tool, Part No. 181 437.0
5 Locating disc Part No. 181 879.0
6 Hex. bolt M 10 x 200 DIN 931-8.8
Part No. 211 739.0
2 6 4 5 3
(Fig. 23)
33425
23
15. Loosely screw in countersunk head bolts (21) and

dismount special tool.
16. Tighten countersunk head bolts (21).
(Fig. 16, 24)
24
17. Insert cap (3) with expansion pin (2) into the
variable speed pulley half.
18. Screw in screw plug (4).
(Fig. 15, 16, 25)
25

Installing the threshing drum variable-speed

(DOMINATOR 108 VX),
1. Determine the dimension (X, length of shaft
shoulder).
(Fig. 26, 27)
26
2. Insert thrust (23) with existing tight-fitting

washers (22) and thrust washer (15) into the
variable-speed drive.
3. Determine the dimension (Y) between tight-fitting
washer (22) and top edge of variable speed
pulley.
W=X–Y
This dimension (W) must be 0.2 to 0.6 mm.
Correct with tight-fitting washers (22) if necessary.
(Fig. 15, 26, 27)
27

4. Place existing tight-fitting washers and thrust
washer on the thrust.
5. Determine dimension (P) from the thrust washer
to the shaft shoulder.
(Fig. 28, 29, 30)
28
6. Place the variable-speed drive along with the

mounting flange on an even surface.
7. Insert existing tight-fitting washers and thrust
washer.
8. Determine the dimension (G) from the front face
of the mounting flange to the top of the fixed
variable-speed pulley.
(Fig. 28, 29, 30)
29

9. Determine the dimension (O) from the top edge

of the fixed variable-speed pulley to the thrust
washer.
W=P–G+O
This dimension (W) must be 0.2 to 0.6 mm.
Correct with tight-fitting washers if necessary.
(Fig. 28, 29, 30)
30
10. Insert key into the shaft and grease shaft with
multipurpose grease, e.g. CLAAS multipurpose
grease EP 2.
11. Install the variable-speed drive on the shaft using
(Fig. 31)
31
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Washer
15 mm thick
5 Puller plate
Part No. 181 617.0
32 7 Hex. bolt M 16 x 40 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 235 821.0
(Fig. 32)

12. Bolt down hex. bolt (30) with washer (28) and
contact washer (29).
(Fig. 15, 33)
33
13. Using a feeler gauge, check the axial play

between mounting flange (14) and thrust (23).
Install cap (S).
14. Without threshing drum speed reduction kit
(DOMINATOR 108 VX),
Install and tension threshing drum speed control
belt (23).
34 Without threshing drum speed reduction kit
belt (25) (without intermediate drive).
15. Grease variable-speed drive with multipurpose
16. Start diesel engine and let variable-speed drive go
up and down through the speed range several
times to distribute the grease.
(Fig. 15, 34)

Removing the threshing drum variable-speed

drive (hydraulic)
(DOMINATOR 108 VX),
Remove threshing drum speed control belt (23).
Remove threshing drum speed control belt (25)
(without intermediate drive).
Unscrew grease nipple (18) and grease tube (16).

Unscrew hydraulic line from the variable speed drive
cylinder (28) and plug at both ends.
Unscrew and remove variable speed drive
cylinder (28).
For dismantling the rotary transmission
leadthrough (33) and the drum variable speed drive
hydraulic cylinder – see page 9.5.20, Dismantling the
rotary coupling for the drum variable-speed drive and
35 page 9.5.26, Dismantling the hydraulic ram for the
drum variable-speed drive.
(Fig. 35, 46)
Unscrew the head-centred hexagon bolt (24) from the

face end of shaft and remove together with attaching
element (22).
(Fig. 36, 46)
36

Loosen the conical joint of the variable speed pulleys

using a block-ended tube. In doing so, the inside
diameter of the block-ended tube must extend over the
front tapered ring (21).
Remove front tapered ring (21).
(Fig. 37, 46)
37
Pull the variable-speed drive off of the shaft using

Remove key (25) and rear tapered ring (21) from the
shaft.
NOTE: If components are stiff, a puller bridge should
be used additionally.
(Fig. 38, 46)
38
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt
M 16 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
(head-centred)
Part No. 235 586.0
2 Puller plate
Part No. 181 617.0
3 Hex. bolt
M 12 x 200 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 244 421.0
5 Puller bridge
39 Part No. 181 621.0
6 Hex. bolt
M 16 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 235 586.0
(Fig. 39)

Dismantling the threshing drum variable-speed

drive (hydraulic)
Remove cover plate (7) and / or V-belt pulley.
(Fig. 40, 46)
40
Remove lid (11) of front variable speed pulley half.

(Fig. 41, 46)
41
Remove cap (4).

(Fig. 42, 46)
42
Remove rear variable speed pulley half.

(Fig. 43, 46)
43

Pull sliding bushing (5) out of the rear variable speed

pulley half. Observe installation position and mark it.
(Fig. 44, 46)
44
Drive the sleeves (10) out of the front variable speed

pulley half using a punch.
(Fig. 45, 46)
45

46
Threshing drum variable-speed drive (hydraulic),
exploded view:
1 Drive package
2 Hex. bolt M 6 x 12 DIN 933-8.8
3 Spring washer 6
4 Cover
5 Sliding bushing
6 Felt strip
7 Cover plate
8 Spring washer 10
9 Hex. bolt M 10 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
10 Sleeve
11 Lid
13 Countersunk head bolt M 12 x 165
15 Sheet gasket
16 Grease tube
20 Hex. bolt M 8 x 16 DIN 933-8.8
21 Tapered ring
22 Attaching element
24 Head-centred bolt
25 Key A 14 x 9 x 90 DIN 6885
28 Variable speed drive cylinder, complete
29 Hydraulic piston
32 Thrust flange

33 Oil feed, complete

36 Seal
37 Back-up ring
38 Adapter
39 Thrust washer
41 Deep groove ball bearing 6000 z DIN 625
42 Spacer ring
44 Stub
45 Edge-type seal
46 Restrictor, mounted
47 Panel
48 Snap ring B 7 DIN 7993
49 Seal
50 O-ring 19.3 x 2.2 -n DIN 6149
52 Spacer ring
R 22 = Suction blower drive belt (22)

R 23 = Threshing drum speed control belt (23)
R 25 = Threshing drum speed control belt (25)
(without intermediate drive)
(Fig. 46)

47
Assembling the threshing drum variable-speed
drive (hydraulic)
NOTE:
Apply semi-fluid lubricant e.g. Dealit EP 00

to all tapered ring joints and hub bores prior to
assembly.
Apply multipurpose grease, e.g. CLAAS multipurpose

grease EP 2 to all moving parts and sliding surfaces.

1. Insert felt strips (6) and sleeves (10) into the front
variable speed pulley half.
(Fig. 47, 48)
48
2. Insert sliding bushing (5) into the rear variable

speed pulley half. Observe installation position.
(Fig. 47, 49)
49
3. Push on rear variable speed pulley half and check

smoothness of sliding bushing (5) on the sliding
hub.
(Fig. 49, 50)
50
4. Install cover (4).

5. Install lid (11) and cover plate (7) and/or V-belt
pulley.
(Fig. 46, 47, 51)
51

Installing the threshing drum variable-speed

drive (hydraulic)
into the shaft.
2. Push the variable-speed drive on the shaft using
(Fig. 46, 47, 52)
52
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Washer
Outside dia. 70 mm, inside dia.16.5 mm,
15 mm thick
5 Puller plate
Part No. 181 617.0
53 7 Hex. bolt M 12 x 200 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 244 421.0
(Fig. 53)
3. Push on front tapered ring (21), screw in

head-centred hexagon bolt (24) with attaching
element (22) and tighten it.
(Fig. 46, 47, 54)
54

4. Install variable speed drive cylinder (28) with

countersunk head bolts (13) to the variable-speed
drive. For setting of threshing drum speed control
belt (23 or 25) using tight-fitting washers (12) if
necessary – see page 7.3.8, Installing and adjust-
ing the threshing drum speed control belt (23).
5. Install hydraulic line to the variable speed drive
cylinder (28).
6. Install grease nipple (18) and grease tube (16).
55 (Fig. 46, 47, 55)
7. Without threshing drum speed reduction kit

(DOMINATOR 108 VX),
belt (23).
belt (25) (without intermediate drive).
8. Grease variable-speed drive with multipurpose
9. Start diesel engine and let variable-speed drive go
up and down through the speed range several
times to distribute the grease.

Removing the threshing drum drive jockey

pulley
without threshing drum speed reduction kit
(DOMINATOR 108 VX),
(DOMINATOR 108 VX – 88 VX)
Remove jockey pulley (1).
(Fig. 56)
56
Threshing drum drive jockey pulley, exploded view

2 Jockey pulley
3 Hex. bolt M 16 x 90 DIN 931-8.8
5 Deep groove ball bearing 6006-2RS7C3
7 Hollow pin
(Fig. 57)
57
Installing the threshing drum drive jockey

pulley
without threshing drum speed reduction kit
(DOMINATOR 108 VX),
1. Install the jockey pulley (1, pre-assembled) to the
jockey pulley bracket using hexagon bolt (3),
contact washer (8) and hexagon nut (9).
58 2. Install and adjust threshing drum drive belt (24).

(Fig. 57, 58)

Rocker arm drive
Rocker arm drive
ROCKER ARM DRIVE
Removing the rocker arm drive

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Remove panel (E).
Unscrew cover (F).
(Fig. 1, 2)
1

Remove left-hand side covers. To do this, unscrew
the hinges (G) from the machine frame.
(Fig. 3)

Turn off battery isolating switch (H).
Disconnect battery cable (S) from battery.
Remove battery.
Unscrew tool box (K) from the machine frame.
(Fig. 4)

Rocker arm drive

Unscrew hexagon bolts of front control arms (L).
Pull off control arms (L).
Unscrew connecting rods (W) and pull off if necessary.
Without and with 3-D cleaning system:
Mark position of the driving rod (7) at the front of
bearing unit (29).
5
Unscrew driving rods (7) and pull off if necessary.
Mark position of the wind boards on the left-hand side
at (P).
Unscrew bracket (O).
Unscrew the sieve pan drive rocker arms (5).
(Fig. 5, 6, 16)

Force off the sieve pan drive rocker arms (5) with
a mounting lever and pull off if necessary.
Relieve the tension of sieve pan drive belt (10)
by loosening the hexagon nut (D) from the jockey
pulley.
Loosen the hexagon nuts at (E).
(Fig. 7, 16)

Rocker arm drive

Remove washer (4), seal (39) and sealing plate (36).
(Fig. 8, 16)
Remove sieve pan drive belt (10) from the jockey

pulley.
Release the safety of the lock collar (31) of bearing
unit (29) and knock it off.
Pull off the bearing unit (29).
(Fig. 9, 16)
Remove V-belt pulley (K).

(Fig. 10)
10
Loosen the clamping bolt of the eccentric hub (27).

Remove the eccentric hub (27) or pull off if necessary.
(Fig. 11, 16)
11

Rocker arm drive
Release the safety of the lock collar (24) of bearing

unit (23) and knock it off.
Unscrew bearing unit (23) from the machine side wall.
(Fig. 12, 16)
12
Unscrew bearing unit (23) from the right-hand machine

side wall.
Push out the shaft (21) to the right-hand side using
a special tool and take it out.
(Fig. 13, 16)
13
14
Special tool:
3
1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 800.0
2 Threaded spindle
Part No. 181 801.0
3 Levelling piece
Part No. 181 849.0
4 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 150 DIN 931-8.8
Part No. 235 282.1
5 Washer 10 DIN 125
6 1 5 4 2
42453
15 Part No. 236 171.0
(Fig. 15)

Rocker arm drive
16
Rocker arm drive, exploded view
2 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 70 DIN 931-8.8
Contact washer A 12
3 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 120 DIN 931-8.8
Contact washer A 12
4 Washer
5 Rocker arm
7 Driving rod
8 Washer
10 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 35 DIN 933-8.8
12 Bearing
14 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
17 Bearing bracket

Rocker arm drive

20 Hexagon bolt
M 16 x 45 DIN 933-8.8
21 Shaft
22 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer A 10
23 Bearing unit
26 Key A 10 x 8 x 45 DIN 6885
27 Eccentric hub, left
Eccentric hub, right
28 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 45 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer A 10
29 Bearing unit Pea 206 b-25
34 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
35 Washer 12.2 x 30 x 5
36 Sealing plate
38 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
39 Seal
40 Sealing washer
41 Stub
42 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 75 DIN 931-8.8
Contact washer A 10
43 Washer
44 Seal
(Fig. 16)

Rocker arm drive
Installing the rocker arm drive

Push shaft (21) into the machine housing from
Push on bearing unit (23) on both sides and bolt down
to the machine side wall.
Align shaft (21) so in the bearing units (23) that the
dimension (Y) from the machine side wall to the shaft
end is 85 mm.
(Fig. 16, 17, 18)
17
X Y
32401 18

Mount eccentric hubs (27) on the shaft (21) using
keys (26) and hexagon bolts (28) on both sides of
the machine. The dimension (X) from the machine
side wall to the flange face is 73.4 mm.
(Fig. 16, 18, 19)
19
Bolt V-belt pulley (K) to the eccentric hub (27).

Mount the bearing units (29) on the eccentric
hubs (27) on the left-hand and right-hand side of
machine and arrest by means of lock collars (31).
(Fig. 16, 20)
20

Rocker arm drive
21

Rocker arm drive
Press metal / rubber bearings into the driving rods (7)

and into the rocker arms (5). The outer metal ring
of the metal / rubber bearing must be flush with the
housing.
(Fig. 21)

Install washer (4), seal (39) and sealing plate (36)
Insert hexagon bolts (T) into the rocker arms (5).
Drive the rocker arms (5) on the pins using a plastic-tip
hammer.
Install sieve pan drive belt (10) on the V-belt pulley (K),
but do not tension belt yet.
22 (Fig. 16, 20, 23)
23

Rocker arm drive

Bolt down the driving rods (7) to the bearing units (29)
at the previously marked positions.
CAUTION!
Loosely screw in the hexagon bolts of the

metal / rubber bearings with washers and
contact washers for axial clamping of the
metal /rubber bearings and do not yet tighten
them.
24
On the left-hand machine side, install bracket (O)
and bolt down the wind board levers to the previously
marked position at (P).
Loosely attach connecting rods (W) and control
arms (L).
(Fig. 16, 24)

Rotary radiator screen drive
ROTARY RADIATOR SCREEN DRIVE
Removing the rotary radiator screen drive

shaft
Remove rotary radiator screen drive belt (26).
Remove rotary radiator screen intermediate drive
belt (27).
Unscrew hexagon nut (4).
Drive V-belt pulley (6) off of the shaft (13).
Unscrew bracket (25).
Unscrew mounting plate (26) and remove spring
1 clamp (A).
Unscrew jockey pulley (21).
(Fig. 1, 16)

(Fig. 1, 2, 16)
Take out bearing tube (14) completely along with the

shaft (13) to the right-hand side.
(Fig. 3, 16)

Dismantling the rotary radiator screen drive shaft

Pull the jockey pulley arm (10) off of the shaft (13).
Remove locking plate (34) and tension spring (33).
(Fig. 4, 16)
Unscrew hexagon nut (4) from the shaft (13).

(Fig. 5, 16)
Pull V-belt pulley (18) off of the shaft (13).

(Fig. 6, 16)
Pull jockey pulley arm (17) off of the shaft (13).

(Fig. 7, 16)

Drive drive shaft (13) out of the bearing tube (14).

Take deep groove ball bearing (12) out of the bearing
tube (14).
(Fig. 8, 16)
Pull deep groove ball bearing (12) off of the shaft (13).
(Fig. 9, 16)
Remove circlips (8) from the jockey pulley

arms (10 and 17).
Drive angular contact bearing (9) out of the jockey
pulley arms (10 and 17) using a tube of inside dia.
32 mm, outside dia. 40 mm and a length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 10, 16)
10
Unscrew jockey pulley (44) from jockey pulley

arm (17).
(Fig. 11, 16)
11

Remove circlip (41) from jockey pulley (44).

Pull pin (40) out of the jockey pulley (44) completely
with deep groove ball bearing (42), using a special
tool.
(Fig. 12, 16)
12
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Hex. flange nut M 16
Part No. 244 059.0
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Reducing section
Part No. 181 933.0
5 Washer
16.5 mm x 65 mm x 5 mm
6 Tube
13 Inside dia. 50 mm, outside dia. 58 mm,
(Fig. 13)
(Fig. 14, 16)
14

Drive pin (2) out of jockey pulley.

Drive deep groove ball bearing (22) out of the jockey
pulley (21) using a tube of inside dia. 28 mm, outside
dia. 35 mm and a length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 15, 16)
15

16
Rotary radiator screen drive, exploded view: 29 Bushing
30 Washer
1 Cover disk
2 Pin 12g6 x 30 x 50 DIN 1445
3 Curved washer 5 x 7.5 DIN 6888
33 Tension spring
34 Locking plate
5 Washer 17 DIN 125
35 Pin
6 V-belt pulley
7 Washer
9 Angular contact bearing 3004.2rs
39 Jockey pulley, pre-assembled
40 Pin
11 Bushing
41 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472
12 Deep groove ball bearing 6004-2rs/c3
42 Deep groove ball bearing 6204-rs
13 Shaft
14 Bearing tube
44 Jockey pulley
16 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8 R26 = Rotary radiator screen drive belt (26)
17 Jockey pulley arm R27 = Rotary radiator screen intermediate
18 V-belt pulley drive belt (27)
20 Circlip 37 x 1.5 DIN 472 (Fig. 16)
21 Jockey pulley
25 Bracket
26 Mounting plate
28 Yoke

Assembling the rotary radiator screen drive shaft

jockey pulley (21) using a tube of inside
dia. 28 mm, outside dia. 35 mm and a length
of 150 mm and insert circlips (20).
(Fig. 16, 17)
17
2. Drive pin (40) into the deep groove ball

bearing (42) and secure with a circlip (43).
3. Drive pre-assembled deep groove ball
bearing (42) into the jockey pulley (44)
using a tube of inside dia. 38 mm, outside
dia. 45 mm and a length of 150 mm and
secure with a circlip (41).
(Fig. 16, 18)
18
4. Bolt the jockey pulley (44) down to the jockey

pulley arm (17).
(Fig. 16, 19)
19

left-hand side of shaft (13) using a tube of inside
dia. 22 mm, outside dia. 30 mm and a length of
150 mm.
(Fig. 16, 20)
20

6. Push pre-assembled shaft (13) into the bearing

tube (14).
right-hand shaft end using a tube of inside
of 150 mm.
(Fig. 16, 21)
21
8. Drive spacer rings (11) and jockey pulley arms

(17 and 10) on the shaft ends, using a tube of
inside dia. 22 mm, outside dia. 30 mm and a
length of 150 mm.
9. Install tensioning device.
(Fig. 16, 22)
22
10. Drive washer (7) and V-belt pulley (18) together

with curved washer (3) on the right-hand shaft
end, using a tube of inside dia. 22 mm, outside
dia. 30 mm and a length of 150 mm and tighten
with washer (5) and lock nut (4).
11. Install locking plate (34) and tension spring (33).
(Fig. 16, 23)
23

Installing the rotary radiator screen drive

shaft
1. Place bearing tube (14) below the water cooler
from the right-hand side completely with the
shaft (13).
(Fig. 16, 24)
24
2. Screw in hexagon bolts (16).

3. Install jockey pulley (21), mounting plate (26)
and spring clamp (A).
4. Drive washer (7) and V-belt pulley (6) on the
right-hand shaft end together with curved
washer (3), using a tube of inside dia. 22 mm,
outside dia. 30 mm and a length of 150 mm and
tighten with washer (5) and lock nut (4).
5. Install rotary radiator screen drive belt (26).
25 6. Install and adjust rotary radiator screen
intermediate drive belt (27).
(Fig. 25, 26)
26


Rotary radiator screen suction blower
ROTARY RADIATOR SCREEN SUCTION

BLOWER
Removing the rotary radiator screen suction

blower
Relieve the tension of suction blower drive belt (22).
Loosen hose clamp (A) and pull off inlet manifold (B).
(Fig. 1)
Unscrew tensioner (E).

Unscrew hexagon bolt (F). Observe the bushing
located in the centre at (C).
Remove suction blower completely.
(Fig. 2, 12)
Dismantling the rotary radiator screen suction

blower
Unscrew blower hood (8).
(Fig. 3, 12)

Unscrew V-belt pulley (4).
CAUTION!
The fan (20) must absolutely not be bent when

backing it up.
(Fig. 4, 12)
Pull off V-belt pulley (4) from shaft (11).

(Fig. 5, 12)
Loosen the threaded pin (21).

(Fig. 6, 12)
Pull off fan (20) from the shaft (11).

(Fig. 7, 12)

Remove the key (13), the circlip (19) and the support-
ing ring (18) located behind it from the shaft (11).
(Fig. 8, 12)

Remove curved washer (12) and supporting ring (14).
Unscrew the eyebolt (D).
(Fig. 9, 12)
Push the shaft (11) out of the bearing housing (17)

using a puller.
(Fig. 10, 12)
10
Pull deep groove ball bearing (15) off of the shaft (11).
(Fig. 11, 12)
11

12
Rotary radiator screen suction blower, exploded view:
1 Suction blower
2 Hex. bolt Bm 16 x 1.5 DIN 439
4 V-belt pulley
5 Support plate
6 Bracket
7 Back plate
8 Blower hood
9 Hex. bolt M 6 x 16 DIN 933-8.8
Lock nut VM 6
Contact washer A 6
10 Hex. bolt M 6 x 45 DIN 931-8.8
Contact washer A 6
11 Shaft
12 Curved washer 5 x 7.5 DIN 6888
13 Key A 6 x 6 x 32 DIN 6885
14 Supporting ring S17 x 24 DIN 988
15 Deep groove ball bearing 6004-2rs/c3 DIN 625
16 Circlip 42 x 1.75 DIN 472
17 Bearing housing
20 Blower
(Fig. 12)

Assembling the rotary radiator screen suction

blower
shaft (11), using a tube of inside dia. 21 mm,
(Fig. 12, 13)
13
2. Insert circlips (16) into bearing housing (17) and

drive in deep groove ball bearing (15) using a
plastic-tip hammer.
3. Drive pre-assembled shaft (11) into the bearing
housing (17), using a tube of inside dia. 21 mm,
(Fig. 12, 14)
14
4. Bolt the pre-assembled bracket (6), the support

plate (5) and the bearing housing (17) to the back
plate (7) using hexagon bolts (10).
5. Insert supporting ring (14) and curved washer (12)
into the shaft (11).
6. Loosely bolt down eyebolt (D).
(Fig. 12, 15)
15
7. Insert supporting ring (18), circlip (19) and

key (13) into the shaft (11).
(Fig. 12, 16)
16

8. Drive blower (20) on the shaft (11) using a punch

and secure with a threaded pin (21).
(Fig. 12, 17)
17
9. Drive V-belt pulley (4) on the shaft (11) using

a tube of inside dia. 21 mm, outside dia. 25 mm
and a length of 60 mm.
(Fig. 12, 18)
18
10. Bolt down hexagon nut (2) with contact washer (3)
and tighten it.
CAUTION!
The fan (20) must absolutely not be bent when

backing it up.
(Fig. 12, 19)

19
11. Bolt down blower hood (8).

(Fig. 12, 20)
20

Installing the rotary radiator screen suction

blower
1. Bolt down the pre-assembled suction blower using
hexagon bolts (F). Observe the bushing located in
the centre at (C).
2. Bolt down the tensioner (E).
3. Bolt in eyebolt (D) at the bracket (6).
(Fig. 2, 21)
21
4. Push inlet manifold (B) on the blower hood (8) and

fasten with a hose clamp (A).
5. Tension the suction blower drive belt (22).
(Fig. 22)
22


Sieve pan
Sieve pan
SIEVE PAN
Removing the upper sieves

With 3-D cleaning system
Unscrew channel section (A) and baffle plates (B).
Loosen the side clamps (C).
Remove frogmouth sieves.
(Fig. 1)
Installing the upper sieves

Insert frogmouth sieves.
Bolt down channel section (A) and baffle plates (B).
This arrests the frogmouth sieves axially.
Arrest the frogmouth sieves laterally by means
of clamps (C).
(Fig. 1)
Removing the upper sieves

Without 3-D cleaning system
Loosen the side clamps (A and B) and the clamps (C)
for axial mounting on both sides.
Remove frogmouth sieves.
(Fig. 2)
Installing the upper sieves

Tighten the clamps (C) for axial mounting.
Arrest the frogmouth sieves laterally by means of side
clamps (A and B).
(Fig. 2)

Sieve pan
Removing the lower sieves

Remove upper sieves.
Unscrew hexagon bolts (D and E).
Remove chaff plates (F) and rubber blanket (G).
Loosen the sieve clamps (H) for axial mounting
of the frogmouth sieves.
Unhinge adjusting linkage.
Pull out frogmouth sieves.
3
(Fig. 3)
Installing the lower sieves

Install adjusting linkage.
Axially arrest the frogmouth sieves using the sieve
clamps (H).
Bolt down chaff plates (F) and rubber blanket (G),
using hexagon bolts (D and E).
Install upper sieves.
(Fig. 3)

Sieve pan
Removing the lower sieves

Completely unscrew the sieve clamps (A) for axial
mounting.
Unscrew chaff plates (B) and rubber blanket (C).
Unhinge adjusting linkage.
Pull out frogmouth sieves.
(Fig. 4)
4
Installing the lower sieves

Install adjusting linkage.
Bolt down chaff plates (B) and rubber blanket (C).
Axially arrest the frogmouth sieves using the sieve
clamps (A).
(Fig. 4)

Sieve pan
Removing the 3-D cleaning system frame

Remove lower sieves.
DOMINATOR 108 VX:
Remove panel (A).
(Fig. 5)
Unscrew cover (B).
(Fig. 6)
Remove left-hand side covers. To do this, unscrew the

hinges (C) from the machine frame.
(Fig. 7)
Turn off battery isolating switch (D).

Disconnect battery cable (E) from battery.
Remove battery.
Unscrew tool box (G) from the machine frame.
(Fig. 8)

Sieve pan
Unscrew the bearing bracket (H) of the control

arm (R).
(Fig. 9)

Unscrew hexagon bolts of the control arms (25).
(Fig. 10, 21)
10

Pull off control arms (25) from the bottom pins.
Unscrew left-hand control rod (22) and right-hand
connecting rod (39) and pull off if necessary.
(Fig. 11, 21)
11
Unscrew the sensor housing (L).

(Fig. 12)
12

Sieve pan
Unscrew the centre longitudinal sieve member (2)

from the transverse bar (6).
Unscrew crossmember (3) from left-hand longitudinal
sieve member (10) and right-hand longitudinal sieve
member (1).
(Fig. 13, 17)
13
Take out the centre longitudinal sieve member (2)

along with the crossmember (3).
(Fig. 14, 17)
14
Unscrew left-hand longitudinal sieve member (10)

and right-hand longitudinal sieve member (1)
from the transverse bar (6).
(Fig. 15, 17)
15
Take out left-hand longitudinal sieve member (10) and

right-hand longitudinal sieve member (1) as well as
transverse bar (6).
(Fig. 16, 17)
16

Sieve pan
Sieve pan
17
Cleaning system frame, exploded view
1 Right-hand longitudinal sieve member
2 Centre longitudinal sieve member
3 Crossmember
6 Transverse bar
7 Clamp
Contact washer A 10
Hexagon nut M 8
Contact washer A 8
10 Left-hand longitudinal sieve member
11 Channel section
12 Spacer tube
13 Contact washer
15 Baffle plate
(Fig. 17)

Sieve pan
Sieve pan
Installing the 3-D cleaning system frame

Push the left-hand longitudinal sieve member (10)
and right-hand longitudinal sieve member (1) below
the lateral rubber seals and bolt to the transverse
bar (6).
Pre-assemble the centre longitudinal sieve
member (2) with the crossmember (3), lift it into
the machine and bolt it to left-hand longitudinal sieve
member (10), right-hand longitudinal sieve member (1)
and transverse bar (6).
(Fig. 17, 18)
18
Bolt down the sensor housing (L).

(Fig. 19)
19
Bolt the bearing bracket (H) of the control arm (R)

to the right-hand longitudinal sieve member (1).
(Fig. 18, 20)
20

Sieve pan
12023
21
V = Drive connecting rods and cleaning system
frame suspension for front upper sieves
H = Cleaning system frame suspension for rear
upper sieves
Press metal / rubber bearing into the control arms (25),
the left-hand connecting rod (22) and the right-hand
connecting rod (39). The outer metal ring of the metal /
rubber bearing must be flush with the housing.
(Fig. 21, 22)

Sieve pan

Place left-hand connecting rod (22), right-hand
connecting rod (39) and washers (24) in position.
Install control arms (25) at the front with the long
leg (L) facing upwards and at the rear with the long
leg (L) facing downwards.
Install washers (27) and loosely screw in all bolts (X)
with contact washers for axial tensioning of the metal /
rubber bearings.
Loosely screw in hexagon bolts together with contact
22 washers and hexagon nuts.
CAUTION!
After the brackets (34) have been mounted

to the machine frame, pay attention to their
dimension (G) facing upwards.
(Fig. 21, 22)

Sieve pan
Place the sieve pan exactly in centre position

of the oscillating range.
Axially arrest the metal / rubber bearings in this
position by tightening the hexagon bolts and/or
nuts (X) to the prescribed tightening torque.
M 10 – 46 Nm
M 12 – 80 Nm
M 16 – 195 Nm
23 CAUTION!

Failing to observe the above will result in
premature wear of the metal / rubber bearings.
(Fig. 21, 23)

Sieve pan
Bolt tool box (G) to the machine frame.

Install battery and connect battery cable (E) to battery.
(Fig. 24)
24
Install left-hand side covers. To do this, bolt the

hinges (C) down to the machine frame.
(Fig. 25)
25
DOMINATOR 108 VX:

Install panel (A).
(Fig. 26)
26
Install lower sieves.

Adjust 3-D cleaning system.
Adjust pivot arm using the «3-D gauge».

Sieve pan
Bolt down cover (B).
(Fig. 27)
27
Removing the sieve pan

Remove the sensor housing (A).
Remove the under-walker return floor (W).
Remove the upper sieves.
Remove the lower sieves.
Remove the 3-D cleaning system frame.
(Fig. 28)
28

Mark the position of driving rods (C) at the front
of eccentric disk (S).
Unscrew the driving rods (C) and pull off if necessary.
Mark the position of the wind boards on the left-hand
side of machine at (E). Remove bracket (H).
Unscrew the sieve pan drive rocker arms (F).
(Fig. 29)
29

Force off the sieve pan drive rocker arms (F) using
a mounting lever.
(Fig. 30)
30

Sieve pan

Unscrew the bearing brackets (G) on the right-hand
and left-hand side.
(Fig. 31)
31

Drive the bearing brackets (G) on the right-hand and
left-hand side to the inside using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 32)
32
Without 3-D cleaning system:

Unscrew the hexagon bolts (D) on the right-hand
and left-hand side.
(Fig. 33)
33

Pull out the pin (R) on the right-hand and left-hand side
(Fig. 34)
34

Sieve pan
Special tool:
1 Tie rod
Part No. 181 605.0
2 Striking tool
Part No. 181 604.0
3 Adapter
Part No. 181 610.0
(Fig. 35)
1 2 3
42452 35
Support the sieve pan from below using a lifting

device.
(Fig. 36)
36

Unscrew the hexagon bolts (S) of the inside sieve pan
rocker arms (K).
Lower the sieve pan using the lifting device.
(Fig. 37)
37

Unscrew the inside sieve pan rocker arms (K) from
the machine side walls.
(Fig. 38)
38

Sieve pan

Unscrew the lighting brackets (L).
DOMINATOR 88 VX:
Remove the straw chopper (M) completely.
(Fig. 39)
39

Unscrew the brackets (N) from the machine side walls.
(Fig. 40)
40
Raise the sieve pan using a suitable lifting device and

pull to the rear.
(Fig. 41)
41
Lift the sieve pan out of the machine.

(Fig. 42)
42

Sieve pan
Installing the sieve pan

Fix the seals (O) to the machine side walls using
grease.
(Fig. 43)
43
Lift the sieve pan into the machine using a suitable

lifting device.
CAUTION!
The sealing strips (Q) provided at the sides

must not be bent downwards when installing
the floor.
(Fig. 44)
44

Bolt the brackets (N) down to the machine side walls.
(Fig. 45)
45

Sieve pan
46

Sieve pan
Press metal / rubber bearings into the driving rods (C),

the rocker arms (F) and into the inside sieve pan
rocker arms (K). In this process, the outer metal ring
of the metal / rubber bearing must be flush with the
housing.
(Fig. 46)
Raise the sieve pan from the bottom, using a lifting

device.
(Fig. 47)
47

Install the inside sieve pan rocker arms (K) to the sieve
pan using hexagon bolts (S).
CAUTION!
Loosen the hexagon bolts (X) of the metal /

rubber bearings and do not yet tighten.
(Fig. 46, 48)

48

Bolt down the bearing brackets (G) to the sieve pan
on the right-hand and left-hand side.
(Fig. 46, 49)
49

Sieve pan

Drive in pin (R) on the right-hand and left-hand side,
using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 46, 50)
50

Bolt down pin (R) to the sieve pan on the right-hand
and left-hand side, using hexagon bolts (D).
(Fig. 46, 51)
51
Slightly raise the sieve pan by means of a suitable

lifting device.
(Fig. 52)
52

Sieve pan

Insert hexagon bolts (V) into the rocker arms (F).
Drive the rocker arms (F) on the pins, using a plas-
tic-tip hammer.
Bolt down the driving rods (C) at the previously
determined position at the eccentric disk (S).
CAUTION!
53 Loosely screw in the hexagon bolts (X) along

with washers (9) and contact washers for axial
clamping of the metal / rubber bearings.
Install bracket (H).

On the left-hand side of machine at (E), bolt down
the levers of the wind boards at the previously marked
position.
(Fig. 46, 53, 54)
54

Sieve pan
Relieve the tension of the sieve pan drive belt (10).

To do this, loosen the hexagon nut from the jockey
pulley at (B).
Loosen hexagon nuts at (M).
Position the control arms (F) so by means of wooden
wedges that the sieve pan is exactly in the centre
position of its oscillation range.
Axially arrest the metal / rubber bearing of the control
arms (F) to the prescribed tightening torque.
55
Install under-walker return floor (W).
Axially arrest the metal / rubber bearings of the inside
sieve pan rocker arms (K) to the prescribed tightening
torque.
M 10 – 46 Nm
M 12 – 80 Nm
M 16 – 195 Nm
CAUTION!

56 in all cases to ensure that the rubber bushings
of the metal / rubber bearings are subject to
the same torsional stress on both sides during
Failing to observe the above will result in
premature wear of the metal / rubber bearings.
Tension the sieve pan drive belt (10). To do this,

tension the belt using the hexagon nut (M). Secure
setting with the lock nut and tighten hexagon nut (B).
(Fig. 55, 56)

Sieve pan

Install 3-D cleaning system frame.
Install lower sieves.
Install sensor housing (A).
(Fig. 57)
57
Install the lighting brackets (L).

DOMINATOR 88 VX:
Install the complete straw chopper (M).
(Fig. 58)
58
Let the machine run for a short time with the threshing
mechanism engaged.
Check the parallel position of the sieve pan. Correct at
the bearing units (S) if necessary by dislocating.
(Fig. 59)
59

Sieve pan

Sieve pan drive
Sieve pan drive
SIEVE PAN DRIVE
Removing the straw walker / sieve pan

intermediate drive jockey pulley
Relieve the tension of sieve pan intermediate drive
belt (9).
Unscrew complete jockey pulley (23) from the
machine side wall.
(Fig. 1, 20)
Dismantling the straw walker / sieve pan inter-

mediate drive jockey pulley
Pull pin (24) along with deep groove ball bearing (26)
out of the jockey pulley (28) using a special tool.
(Fig. 2, 20)
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt
M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Hexagon flange nut M 16
Part No. 244 059.0
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Reducing section
Part No. 181 933.0
5 Washer
16.5 mm x 65 mm x 5 mm
3 6 Tube
(Fig. 3)

Sieve pan drive
(Fig. 4, 20)
Assembling the straw walker / sieve pan

pin (24) using a tube of inside dia. 22 mm,
2. Place circlip (27) in position.
(Fig. 5, 20)
3. Drive pre-assembled pin (24) into the jockey

pulley (28) using a tube of inside diameter 35 mm,
outside diameter 45 mm and a length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 6, 20)
Installing the straw walker / sieve pan

1. Install complete jockey pulley (23) to the machine
side wall.
2. Tension the sieve pan intermediate drive belt (9).
(Fig. 7, 20)

Sieve pan drive
Removing the straw walker / sieve pan

intermediate drive V-belt pulley package
Unscrew panel (A) and cover (B).
Remove sieve pan intermediate drive belt (9).
Remove sieve pan drive belt (10).
(Fig. 8, 20)
Unscrew V-belt pulley (31) from the mounting plate (4)

along with V-belt pulley (8).
(Fig. 9, 20)
Dismantling the straw walker / sieve pan

Unscrew V-belt pulley (8) from V-belt pulley (31).
(Fig. 10, 20)
10
Remove circlips (32) from the V-belt pulley (31).

(Fig. 11, 20)
11

Sieve pan drive
Drive the deep groove ball bearing (33) out of the

V-belt pulley (31) using a punch.
(Fig. 12, 20)
12
Assembling the straw walker / sieve pan

pulley (31) using a tube of inside diameter 50 mm,
outside diameter 60 mm and a length of 150 mm.
Insert sleeve (34).
(Fig. 13, 20)
13
2. Insert circlips (32) into the V-belt pulley (31).

(Fig. 14, 20)
14
3. Bolt V-belt pulley (8) down to V-belt pulley (31).

(Fig. 15, 20)
15

Sieve pan drive
Installing the straw walker / sieve pan

1. Push spacer ring (5) on mounting plate (4).
2. Bolt V-belt pulley (31) along with V-belt pulley (8)
down to mounting plate (4), using hexagon
bolt (37), contact washer (36) and washer (35).
(Fig. 16, 20)
16
3. Install sieve pan drive belt (10) and adjust it.

4. Install sieve pan intermediate drive belt (9) and
adjust it.
5. Bolt down panel (A) and cover (B).
(Fig. 17, 20)
17
Removing the sieve pan drive deflection

pulley
Unscrew panel (A) and cover (B).
Relieve the tension of sieve pan drive belt (10)
(Fig. 18, 20)
18
Remove deflection pulley (13) from the machine side

wall.
(Fig. 19, 20)
19

Sieve pan drive
Sieve pan drive
20
Straw walker / sieve pan intermediate drive, 31 V-belt pulley
exploded view 32 Circlip 62 x 2 DIN 472
34 Sleeve
35 Washer
3 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
4 Mounting plate
37 Hex. bolt M 12 x 35 DIN 933-8.8
5 Spacer ring
6 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8 R 9 = Sieve pan intermediate drive belt (9)
7 Contact washer A 10 R10 = Sieve pan drive belt (10)
8 V-belt pulley R11 = Straw walker drive belt (11)
12 Clamping ring
13 Deflection pulley, pre-assembled
15 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472
16 Spacer ring
17 Deflection pulley
21 Washer
22 Clamping washer
23 Jockey pulley, complete
24 Pin
25 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472
26 Deep groove ball bearing 6204z DIN 625
28 Jockey pulley

Sieve pan drive
Sieve pan drive
Installing the sieve pan drive deflection pulley

1. Bolt the deflection pulley (13, pre-assembled)
with contact washer (11), hexagon nut (10) and
hexagon bolt (18) down to machine side wall.
(Fig. 20, 21)
21
2. Tension the sieve pan drive belt (10).

3. Bolt down panel (A) and cover (B).
(Fig. 22)
22
Removing the sieve pan drive jockey pulley

Move sieve pan to bottommost position and block on
both sides using pieces of timber (A).
(Fig. 23, 26)
23
Unscrew hexagon nut (11) of jockey pulley (5) and the

hexagon nuts (1) of tensioning screw (2).
(Fig. 24, 26)
24

Sieve pan drive
Push the jockey pulley (5) along with the tensioning

screw (2) out of the thread guide to the bottom.
Turn tensioning screw (2) downwards.
Push jockey pulley (5) upwards and remove it together
with clamping piece (3).
(Fig. 25, 26)
25
Sieve pan drive jockey pulley, exploded view

2 Tensioning screw
3 Clamping piece
4 Clamping ring
8 Spacer ring
9 Jockey pulley
10 Washer
11 Lock nut VM 16
26
(Fig. 26)
Installing the sieve pan drive jockey pulley

1. Loosely assemble clamping piece (3), tensioning
screw (2) and jockey pulley (5) and insert
clamping piece into the mounting opening at the
machine side wall.
2. Guide jockey pulley (5) downwards and turn ten-
sioning screw (2) upwards.
(Fig. 26, 27)
27

Sieve pan drive
3. Tension the sieve pan drive belt (10).

4. Install lock nut (11) with washer (10) and tighten it.
(Fig. 26, 28)
28

Sieve pan drive

Sieve pan intermediate drive
SIEVE PAN INTERMEDIATE DRIVE
Removing the sieve pan / fan intermediate

drive jockey pulley
Relieve the tension of sieve pan / fan intermediate
drive belt (7).
Unscrew the jockey pulley (1) from the angle (11).
(Fig. 1, 2)
Sieve pan / fan intermediate drive jockey pulley,

exploded view
2 Jockey pulley
5 Spacer washer
6 Washer
9 Spacer bushing
10 Pin
2 11 Angle
13 Hex. bolt M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
14 Jockey pulley bracket
(Fig. 2)
Installing the sieve pan / fan intermediate

drive jockey pulley
Bolt the jockey pulley (1, pre-assembled) down to
angle (11) with contact washer (7) and hex. nut (8).
Install sieve pan / fan intermediate drive belt (7) and
tension it.
(Fig. 2, 3)


Steering
Steering
STEERING
Visible damage on the Orbitrol steering unit

External leaks
Such leaks may be identified by oil losses at the
contact faces of the valve block and of the steering
block, at the pressure control valve and at the shock
valve.
Reason:
1. O-rings at the flange leak.
2. O-rings at the set screw of the pressure control
valve leak.
3. O-rings at the plug of the shock valve leak.
Remedy:
Replace the O-rings in question.
Internal leaks
Such leaks may be identified by the steering wheels
failing to react quickly enough to steering action on soft
ground or by the absence of a hard steering stop at the
steering wheel when steering fully to one side.
Reason:
The internal O-rings of the shock valve leak.
Remedy:
1. In case of leaks at the contact face of the valve
block and/or the steering block, replace the
O-rings of the shock valve.
2. In case of leaks at the pressure control valve,
at the shock valve and in case of internal leaks,
replace the entire valve block.

Steering
Removing the steering column

Pull off cable plugs from the foot switches (L) and
unscrew them along with the brake pedals (S) and,
if provided, the autopilot foot switch.
Take out floor mat (N).
(Fig. 1)
Remove cap (1).

(Fig. 2, 16)
Unscrew hexagon nut (2).

(Fig. 3, 16)
Pull off steering wheel (7) using a special tool.

Special tool:
1 Puller bridge,
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 120 DIN 931-8.8
Part No. 242 380.0 – 2 pcs.
Washer 13 DIN 125 – 2 pcs.
3 Puller plate
(self-manufactured)
4 (Fig. 4, 16)

Steering
Puller plate (self-manufactured):

Y G = 2x thread M 10
W R = 4 mm
Z U = 15 mm
W = 94 mm
U X = 43 mm
Y = 110 mm
G R Z = 63 mm
X (Fig. 5)
42200 5
Push vehicle information unit (B) out of cover (M).

Mark cable plug (C) and pull it off.
(Fig. 6)
Remove panel (D).

Mark cable plug (E) and pull it off.
(Fig. 7)

Steering
Pull off cable plug (F) from windscreen wiper motor.

(Fig. 8)
Unscrew flasher switch (G) from the cover (M),

push out to the inside and pull off the cable plug (H).
(Fig. 9)
Push hazard warning switch (K) out of the cover (M)

and pull off the cable plug (L).
(Fig. 10)
10

Steering
Mark cable plug (O) and pull off of the ignition

switch (P).
Loosen clamp (U).
Unscrew cover (M) from the steering tube (18)
and pull off.
CAUTION!
Do not use force when pulling at the cables.
11 (Fig. 11, 16)
Unscrew clamping spindle (14) from the support (24).

Remove rocker (21) by turning.
Unhinge tension spring (22) at the support (24).
(Fig. 12, 16)
12
Take out clamping spindle (14) with washers (15).

Pull out steering tube (18).
With autopilot fitted:
Pull off cable plug (P) from the overrider switch (Q)
below the operator's platform.
(Fig. 13, 15, 16)
13

Steering
Dismantling the steering column

Remove circlip (35) and existing washers and
supporting rings (36) from the steering column (9).
(Fig. 14, 16)
14
Remove bellows (20).

Loosen set collar (5) and quick-release fastener (10)
and pull off the steering column (9).
Loosen set collar of overrider switch (Q).
Pull overrider switch (Q) off the steering column (9).
Pull steering column (9) out of the steering tube (18).
(Fig. 15, 16)
15

Steering
Steering
16
Steering, exploded view: 27 Hexagon bolt M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
1 Cap
29 Steering unit Ospb 125 s
Seal set
30 Screw fitting L10 b-g3/8 DIN 3901
31 Reducer Ri 1/2 x 3/8
5 Set collar
32 O-ring 23.47 x 2.62-n DIN 3771
6 Steering wheel spinner
33 Valve block Ovp 20
7 Steering wheel
Seal set
8 Parallel key A 5 x 8 x 30
34 Cheese-head screw M 10 x 1 x 45 DIN 912
9 Steering column
36 Washer 20 x 28 x 0.1 DIN 988
Washer
Washer 20 x 28 x 0.5 DIN 988
Washer 20 x 28 x 1 DIN 988
14 Clamping spindle
Supporting ring S 20 x 28 DIN 988
15 Washer
16 Sleeve (Fig. 16)
17 Sleeve
18 Steering tube, mounted
19 Washer
20 Bellows
21 Rocker
22 Tension spring
23 Mounting plate
24 Support
Lock nut VM 8
Contact washer A 8
26 Flange tube

Steering
Steering
Assembling the steering column

Push steering column (9) into steering tube (18).
Push set collar (5) and quick-release fastener (10)
loosely on the steering column (9).
Push overrider switch (Q) with a set collar upwards
onto the steering column (9).
CAUTION!
17 The cable output must face backwards.
Arrest the overrider switch (Q) so on the steering

column (9) that the dimension (Z) from the shaft end
to the overrider switch (Q) is 60 mm.
CAUTION!
The overrider switch (Q) must move freely

inside the steering tube (18) and must not jam.
Grind off some material on the side from the
plastic housing if necessary.
Push on bellows (20).

(Fig. 16, 17)

Steering
Installing the steering column

Bolt down support (24) and mounting plate (23)
to the operator's platform.
Insert steering tube (18) into the support (24).
Guide the cable of the overrider switch (Q) through
the floor plate and connect the cable plugs (P) below
the operator's platform.
Push in the clamping spindle (14) with washers (15)
and mount rocker (21) by rotating it.
18 Rotate clamping spindle (14) so that the steering
column can be easily arrested and released by foot
with the rocker (21) from a normal seated position.
Bolt clamping spindle (14) down to support (24).
Mount tension spring (22) to the rocker (21) and
to the mounting plate (23).
(Fig. 13, 16, 18)
Align steering tube (18) so that the steering column (9)

is in its closest position to the steering unit (29).
Determine the dimension (X) from the top edge of the
steering column (9) to the sleeve (17) using a depth
measuring device.
(Fig. 16, 19)
19
Push circlip (35) and existing washers and

supporting rings (36) on the steering column (9).
Determine the dimension (Y) from the top edge of the
steering column (9) to the bottommost washer (36)
using a calliper gauge.
The difference (Z) between the dimensions (X and Y)
must be 1 to 1.5 mm (Z = X – Y).
Correct the setting using washers (36) if required.
(Fig. 16, 19, 20)
20

Steering
Push set collar (5) up on the steering column (9)

to below the steering tube (18) and arrest it there.
Push the quick-release fastener (10) to below the
set collar (5).
Check the height play (Z) of the steering column
(1 to 1.5 mm) one more time in all positions of the
steering tube (18).
(Fig. 16, 20, 21)
21
Guide cable through the cover (M) and bolt down

cover to the steering tube (18).
Fasten cable with clamp (U).
Connect cable plug (O) to ignition switch (P).
(Fig. 16, 22)
22
Connect hazard warning switch (K) with cable plug (L)

and insert into the cover (M).
Connect cable plug (H) to the flasher switch (G) and
screw the switch to cover (M).
(Fig. 9, 23)
23

Steering
Connect the cable plugs (F) of the windscreen wiper

motor.
Connect the cable plugs (E) and attach panel (D)
to the cover (M).
(Fig. 23, 24, 25)
24
25
Connect cable plug (C) to the vehicle information

unit (B) and push the latter into the cover (M).
(Fig. 26)
26

Steering
Place steering wheel (7) on steering column (9) and

bolt down with hexagon nut (2).
CAUTION!
Do not tighten the hexagon nut (2) too much

to avoid damage to the steering wheel hub.
Put on cap (1).

27 (Fig. 16, 27)
Put floor mat (N) into place.

Bolt on foot switch (L), brake pedals (S) and, if
provided, the autopilot foot switch to the operator's
platform.
(Fig. 28)
28
Bleeding the steering hydraulic system

Jack up the steering axle at the centre to relieve
the load on the steering axle wheels.
Place a clean container below the steering cylinder
to collect the hydraulic oil.
Unscrew the hydraulic hoses (A and B) one after
the other and direct into the collecting container.
Turn steering wheel to the corresponding direction
until hydraulic oil leaves the hoses without any
bubbles.
29 Mount hydraulic hoses (A and B) to the steering
cylinder. Observe the proper tightening torques.
Fill up the hydraulic oil bleed filter (C) of the hydraulic
oil tank (D).
(Fig. 29, 30)
30

Steering
Checking the pressure control valve at the

steering valve block
Connect pressure gauge (0 – 250 bar) to the
measuring port (A) below the operator's platform.
Start diesel engine.
Fully steer to one side, keep steering wheel in this
position and read the pressure gauge reading.
Target value = 145 – 165 bar at an oil temperature
of 50 °C (Ospb 125 s steering unit).
Precondition:
31
no leaks or damaged hydraulic pumps.
CAUTION!
Carry out this measurement for a brief period

of time only in order to avoid system over-
heating.
(Fig. 31)
If the measured pressure deviates from the above
value, the pressure control valve can be set on the
machine:
Unscrew steering column (B) as well as the foot
switches (C), the brake pedals (D) and, if provided,
the autopilot foot switch, from the operator's platform.
Take out floor mat (E).
(Fig. 32)
32
Connect pressure gauge (0 – 250 bar) to the

measuring port (A) below the operator's platform
and place pressure gauge in the cab.
(Fig. 33)
33

Steering
Remove plug (4) along with O-ring by rotating it.

(Fig. 34, 48)
34
If pressure is too low, turn in set screw (5) by a

half-turn, if pressure is too high, turn out by a half-turn.
CAUTION!
The set screw (5) is secured with liquid screw

fastener and may only be re-secured after a full
cleaning of the valve block.
Re-mount plug (4).

Start diesel engine.
35
Keep the steering at the steering unit at its stop on one
side using a special tool (e.g. old steering column) and
read pressure gauge reading. Repeat adjustment
process if necessary.
Remove steering unit valve block.
Disassemble steering unit valve block.
(Fig. 33, 34, 35, 36, 48)
36

Steering
Removing the steering unit valve block

Unscrew the hydraulic hoses (A) from the valve
block (1) and plug at both ends.
(Fig. 37, 48)
37
Screw out two cheese-head screws (B) and remove

valve block (1). While doing this, observe the dowel
pin at the contact face of the valve block (1).
(Fig. 38, 48)
38
Dismantling the steering unit valve block

Pressure control valve:
Remove plug (4) along with O-ring from the valve
block (1) by rotating it.
(Fig. 39, 48)
39
Determine the dimension from the outer edge

of the valve block (1) to the set screw (5) using
a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 40, 48)
40

Steering
Turn set screw (5) out of the valve block (1).

Up to serial no. ... = Slotted screw (5)
From serial no. ... = Socket head bolt (5)
(Fig. 41, 48)
41
Pull compression spring (6) and piston (7) out of the

valve block (1) using a special tool.
Special tool:
Magnetic rod, Part No. 181 842.0
(Fig. 42, 43, 48)
42
43
Double shock valve:

Remove plug (8) along with O-ring by rotating it.
(Fig. 44, 49)
44

Steering
Determine the dimension from the outer edge of the

valve block (1) to the pressure setting unit (9) using
a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 45, 49)
45
Remove the pressure setting unit (9) from the valve

block (1) by rotating it.
Up to serial no. ... = Slotted screw (9)
From serial no. ... = Socket head bolt (9)
(Fig. 46, 49)
46
Remove valve inserts (11) and compression

spring (12) from the valve block (1).
(Fig. 47, 49)
47

Steering
Steering unit valve block, exploded view:

1 Valve block
2 O-rings
3 Screw fitting / reducer

4 Plug
5 Set screw
7 Piston
Double shock valve:

48
8 Plug
9 Pressure setting unit
10 O-ring
11 Valve inserts
(Fig. 48, 49)
49
Assembling the steering unit valve block
NOTE:
Thoroughly clean all parts before assembling

the valve block and, except the set screw (5)
and the pressure setting unit (9), lubricate them
with hydraulic oil.
(Fig. 48, 49)

Steering

Insert piston (7) and compression spring (6) into valve
block (1).
Screw set screw (5) into the valve block (1) with liquid
screw fastener, e.g. DELO-ML-5328, at the deter-
mined dimension.
(Fig. 48, 50)
50
Double shock valve:

Insert valve inserts (11) and compression spring (12)
into the valve block (1).
Screw pressure setting unit (9) into the valve block (1)
with a new O-ring (10) and liquid screw fastener,
e.g. DELO-ML-5328, at the determined dimension.
(Fig. 49, 51)
51
Screw plugs (4 and 8) with new O-rings into the valve

block (1).
Torque settings:
Plug (4) = 50 Nm
Plug (8) = 30 Nm
(Fig. 48, 49, 52)
52

Steering
Installing the steering unit valve block

Thoroughly clean the flange faces (C) on the
valve block (1) and on the steering block (D).
Insert dowel pin (E). This makes sure that the
valve block (1) will not be offset when installed.
Insert new O-rings (2) into the grooves of the valve
block (1).
(Fig. 48, 53)
53
Mount valve block (1) to the steering block (D) using

cheese-head screws (B).
Connect hydraulic lines (A). Observe the proper
tightening torques.
Bleed steering hydraulic system.
Check pressure control valve at the steering unit
valve block.
(Fig. 37, 38, 54)
54
Removing the steering unit

Remove hydraulic hoses (A) from steering unit and
plug at both ends.
(Fig. 55)
55

Steering
Unscrew foot switches (C) and brake pedals (D) and,

if provided, the autopilot foot switch, from the
operator's platform.
Take out floor mat (E).
(Fig. 56)
56
Unscrew steering column (B) on the operator's

platform and put aside.
When the autopilot is fitted, the overrider switch cable
must be disconnected.
(Fig. 57)
57
Unscrew the steering unit from the operator's platform.

(Fig. 58)
58
Remove steering unit along with flange tube (F).
ATTENTION!
Perform repairs on the steering unit

Ospb 125 s only according to Danfoss
repair manual!
(Fig. 59)
59

Steering
Installing the steering unit

Bolt down the steering unit along with the
flange tube (F) to the operator's platform.
Connect hydraulic hoses (A) to the valve block.
Observe proper tightening torques.
(Fig. 59, 60)
60
Bleed steering hydraulic system.

Check pressure control valve at the steering unit
valve block.
Bolt down steering column (B) to the operator's
platform.
When the autopilot is fitted, the overrider switch
cable must be connected underneath the operator's
platform.
Put floor mat (E) into place.
Bolt on foot switches (C) and brake pedals (D) and,
61 if provided, the autopilot foot switch to the operator's
platform.
(Fig. 59)

Steering axle
Steering axle
STEERING AXLE
Removing the wheel bearings

(2.05 m steering axle)
Engage the parking brake.
Slacken off the wheel nuts on the steering axle.
Support the underside of the steering axle with
suitable jacks and remove the wheel.
(Fig. 1)
Tap the cover (A) from the hub using a punch.

The cover (A) is now scrap.
(Fig. 2)
Tap the expansion pin (B) out of the castellated

nut (C).
(Fig. 3)
Remove the castellated nut (C) and the washer that

lay behind.
(Fig. 3, 4)

Steering axle
Pull the wheel hub (R) from the axle.

If necessary use a suitable puller for this job.
CAUTION!
If the unit is slippery, then the tapered roller

bearing inner ring (V) will come out of the hub.
(Fig. 5)
Remove the tapered roller bearing outer rings

(V and H) from the hub (R), and using a suitable
punch knock out the bearings.
(Fig. 6)
By using a chisel move the tapered roller bearing inner

ring (H) a little way forwards, then switch to a pulley
and remove the bearing from the axle.
CAUTION!
The seal retainer (E) must not be damaged.
(Fig. 7)

Steering axle
Tap the seal retainer (E) along with the inner rings
carefully from the hub using a plastic-tip hammer.
Ensure that the retainer is removed evenly and
without tilting as it comes out. Take note of the
layout of the retainer (E).
(Fig. 8)
Installing the wheel bearings

Pre-assemble the seal retainer (E) along with the seal
rings (F).
Whilst doing this, lightly grease the rings (F) with
CLAAS multipurpose grease EP2 and insert so that
the notches are separated from each other.
Mounting sequence: 1, 2, 3
(Fig. 9)
Using a tube, tap the pre assembled seal retainer (E)

onto the axle.
CAUTION!
When fitting the seal retainer (E), ensure that

it does not jam and thus damaging the seal
rings (F). Take note of the layout.
(Fig. 9, 10)
10

Steering axle
Heat the bearing (H) up to approx. 100 °C and then

slide onto the axle.
Tap the bearing using a tube in order to ensure it is
seated correctly.
Grease the tapered roller bearing inner ring (H) with
CLAAS multipurpose grease EP2.
(Fig. 11)
11
Pre-assemble the hub (R) with the bearing outer

rings (V and H) and the rear tapered roller bearing.
Fill the hub (R) with CLAAS multipurpose grease EP2
and slide onto the axle.
Check that both the seal retainer (E) and the seal
rings (F) are seated correctly.
(Fig. 6, 9, 12)
12
Grease the front bearing inner ring (V) with CLAAS

multipurpose grease EP2 and slide onto the axle.
Slide the washer (S) onto the axle along with
the castellated nut (C), and turn in.
Tighten the castellated nut (C) whilst turning the
bearings in both directions until there is no more play.
Check the torque using the special tool and
if necessary correct on the castellated nut (C).
Starting torque = 2.5 Nm
13

Steering axle
Special tool:
1 Test bridge Part No. 181 623.0
2 Hex. bolt M 10 x 180 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 796.0 – 2 pieces
(Fig. 13)
Secure the castellated nut (C) with the expansion

pin (B).
(Fig. 14)
14
Fill the cap (A) with CLAAS multipurpose grease EP2

and using a plastic-tip hammer, tap onto the hub (R).
For this, only tap on the edge of the cap (A).
Fit the wheel.
Tighten up the wheel nuts to the correct tightening
torque.
(Fig. 15)
15

Steering axle
Removing the stub axle

Remove the wheel bearings.
Unlock the castellated nut, if available.
Remove the castellated nut and / or the lock nut on the
ball joint of the steering ram (H).
(Fig. 16)
16
Press the ball joint out of the conical seat using

a suitable puller.
(Fig. 17)
17
Unlock the castellated nut (A), if available.

Unbolt the castellated nut and / or the lock nut (A) on
the stub axle.
(Fig. 18)
18

a suitable puller.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the track rod (G) to drop.
(Fig. 19)
19

Steering axle
Unbolt the cover washer (B) and pull out the stub axle
downwards.
(Fig. 20, 21)
20
21
Tap out the bearing bushes (C) from the steering axle
body using a punch.
(Fig. 22)
22
Remove the thrust washers (D) from the stub axle

using a screwdriver.
(Fig. 23)
23

Steering axle
Installing the stub axle

NOTE:
All moving parts need to have CLAAS multi-

purpose grease EP2 applied before assembly.
Slide the thrust washers (D) onto the stub axle.
24 CAUTION!
The ground sides of the thrust washers must sit

together.
(Fig. 24)
Press the bearing bushes (C) into the steering axle

housing using the special tool.
(Fig. 22, 25)
25
Special tool:
1 Washer,
outer dia. 50 mm, inner dia. 13 mm, 10 mm thick
2 Axial bearing
Part No. 177 899.0
3 Washer 13 DIN 125
Part No. 235 124.2
Part No. 236 172.0
5 Hex. bolt M 12 x 200 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 244 421.0
6 Washer,
42198 26 outer dia. 65 mm, inner dia. 13 mm, 15 mm thick
(Fig. 26)

Steering axle
Slide the stub axle into the steering axle housing and
secure with the hex. bolt and the cover washer (B).
(Fig. 27)
27
Insert the conical coupling of the track rod (G) into the
stub axle.
Fit a new lock nut (A) and if available castellated
nut (A) and tighten.
Torque setting = 90 – 110 Nm
Secure the castellated nut (A) with the split pin.
(Fig. 18, 28)
28
Insert the conical coupling of the steering ram (H) into

the stub axle.
Fit a new lock nut and if available castellated nut and
tighten.
Refit the wheel bearings.
(Fig. 29)
29

Steering axle
Removing the wheel bearings

(adjustable axle)
Engage the parking brake.
Slacken off the wheel bolts (A) on the steering axle.
Unbolt the cover (B).
Support the underside of the steering axle
with suitable jacks and remove the wheels.
(Fig. 30)
30
Tap the expansion pin (C) out of the castellated

nut (D).
(Fig. 31)
31
Remove the castellated nut (D) and the washer that

lay behind.
(Fig. 31, 32)
32
Pull the wheel hub (R) from the stub axle. If necessary
use a suitable puller for this job.
CAUTION!
If the unit is slippery, then the ball bearing inner

ring (V) will come out of the hub.
(Fig. 33)
33

Steering axle
Remove the bearing outer rings (V and H) from the

hub (R), and using a suitable punch knock out the front
and rear bearings.
(Fig. 34)
34
By using a chisel, move the tapered roller bearing

inner ring (H) a little way forwards, then switch to a
pulley and remove the bearing from the stub axle.
CAUTION!
The seal retainer (F) must not be damaged.
(Fig. 35)
35
Tap the seal retainer (F) along with the inner rings
carefully from the hub using a plastic-tip hammer.
Ensure that the retainer is removed evenly and
without tilting as it comes out. Take note of the
layout of the retainer (F).
(Fig. 36)
36

Steering axle
Installing the wheel bearings

(adjustable steering axle)
Pre-assemble the seal retainer (F) along with the seal
rings (G). Whilst doing this, lightly grease the rings (G)
with CLAAS multipurpose grease EP2 and insert so
that the notches are separated from each other.
Mounting sequence: 1, 2, 3
(Fig. 37)
37
Using a tube, tap the pre assembled seal retainer (F)

onto the axle.
CAUTION!
When fitting the seal retainer (F), ensure that it

does not jam and thus damaging the seals (G).
Take note of the layout.
(Fig. 37, 38)
38
Heat the bearing (H) up to approx. 100 °C and then

slide onto the stub axle.
Tap the bearing using a tube in order to ensure it is
seated correctly.
Grease the inner bearing ring (H) with CLAAS multi-
purpose grease EP2.
(Fig. 39)
39

Steering axle
Pre-assemble the hub (R) with the bearing outer

rings (V and H) of the front and rear taper roller
bearing.
Fill the hub (R) with CLAAS multipurpose grease EP2
and slide onto the axle.
Check the correct positioning of the seal retainer (F)
and the rings (G).
(Fig. 34, 37, 40)
40
Grease the front bearing inner ring (V) with CLAAS

multipurpose grease EP2 and slide onto the axle.
Slide the washer onto the axle along with the
castellated nut (D), then tighten the nut.
Tighten the castellated nut (D) whilst turning the
bearings in both directions until there is no more play.
Check the torque using the special tool and
if necessary correct on the castellated nut (D).
Starting torque = 2.5 Nm
Special tool:
41
1 Test bridge, Part No. 181 623.1
2 Hex. bolt M 10 x 180 DIN 933-8.8
(Fig. 41)

Steering axle
Secure the castellated nut (D) with the expansion

pin (C).
(Fig. 42)
42
Fit the wheel.

Tighten up the wheel bolts (A) to the correct torque.
Fill the cover (B) with CLAAS multipurpose
grease EP2 and apply a liquid sealer such as
Omni FIT FD 10 and insert into the wheel hub (R).
(Fig. 43)
43
Removing the stub axle

Remove the wheel bearings.
If fitted, unlock the castellated nut.
Remove the castellated nut and / or the lock nut on the
ball joint of the steering ram (A).
(Fig. 44)
44

a puller.
(Fig. 45)
45

Steering axle
If fitted, unlock the castellated nut on the control

rod (B).
Unbolt the castellated nut and / or the lock nut on the
control rod (B).
(Fig. 46)
46

a puller.
(Fig. 47)
47
Unbolt the cover washer (C) and lower the stub axle.
(Fig. 48, 49)
48
49

Steering axle
Tap out the bearing bushes (D) from the steering axle
frame using a punch.
(Fig. 50)
50
Remove the thrust washers (E) from the stub axle

using a screwdriver.
(Fig. 51)
51
Installing the stub axle

NOTE:
All moving parts need to have CLAAS multi-

purpose grease EP2 applied before assembly.
Slide the thrust washers (E) onto the stub axle.
52 CAUTION!
The ground sides of the thrust washer must sit

together.
(Fig. 52)

Steering axle
Press the bearing bushes (D) into the steering axle

housing using the special tool.
(Fig. 50, 53)
53
Special tool:
2 Winding lever, Part No. 181 880.0
3 Centralising washer, Part No. 181 879.0
4 Axial bearing, Part No. 235 983.0
(Fig. 54)
42194
54
Slide the stub axle into the steering axle housing and
secure with the hex. bolt and the cover washer (C).
(Fig. 55)
55
Insert the conical coupling of the track rod (B) into the
stub axle.
Fit a new lock nut and / or castellated nut and tighten.
(Fig. 56)
56

Steering axle
Insert the conical coupling of the steering ram (A) into

the stub axle.
Fit a new lock nut and / or castellated nut and tighten.
Refit the wheel bearings.
(Fig. 57)
57
Adjusting the steering axle end stops

(2.05 m steering axle, adjustable steering axle)
Jack the rear of the machine up in its centre, just under
the support (A) so that the axle pivots.
(Fig. 58)
58
Left- and right-hand side:

Screw in the steering end stop bolt (B).
Turn the steering completely one way.
Adjust the steering end stop bolt (B) so that it lightly
touches the stub axle lever (C).
Turn the steering stop bolt (B) another turn so that the
steering ram still has got some reserve in its stroke.
Steering ram reserve
with the 2.05 m steering axle = 1 – 2 mm
59 Steering ram reserve

with the adjustable steering axle = 2 mm
Carry out the same procedure in the other direction.
(Fig. 59)

Steering axle

In order to see if the wheels touch the chassis of the
machine, it is necessary to raise the rear of that side
of the machine and turn full lock.
Should the wheels touch the chassis, then adjust the
steering end stop bolt (B) until the wheel is free once
more.
Secure the steering end stop bolt (B) with the lock nut.
(Fig. 59, 60)
60
Adjusting the steering axle end stops

(CLAAS 4-trac axle)
Jack the rear of the machine up in its centre, so that
the 4-trac axle pivots.
(Fig. 61)
61

Screw in the steering end stop bolt (B).
Turn the steering completely one way.
Adjust the steering end stop bolt (B) so that it lightly
touches the stub axle lever (F).
Turn the steering stop bolt (B) another turn so that the
steering ram still has got some reserve in its stroke.
Steering ram reserve
with the CLAAS-4-trac-axle = 2 mm
62 Carry out the same procedure in the other direction.

(Fig. 62)
In order to see if the wheels touch the chassis of the
machine, it is necessary to raise the rear of that side of
the machine and turn full lock.
Should the wheels touch the chassis, then adjust the
steering end stop bolt (B) until the wheel is free once
more.
Secure the steering end stop bolt (B) with the lock nut.
(Fig. 62, 63)
63

Steering axle
Wheel track adjustment

The wheel track is measured in the middle of the
wheel rims.
Mark the wheel rims and measure at point (Y).
Drive the machine forwards and measure at the
marks at point (X).
Set the track to 0 – 15 mm.
The dimension of (Y) should be greater than that at (X)
by 0 – 15 mm.
64
CAUTION!
Each time the track has been changed then it

is necessary to check the steering lock and
re-adjust it if required.
(Fig. 64, 65, 66, 67)
65

Steering axle
With adjustable steering axle / CLAAS-4-trac axle:

The adjustment of the track is done by adjusting the
track rod (A).
For this, unlock the castellated nut or lock nut (B) and
unscrew.
Press the ball joint (C) from the conical seat using a
suitable puller.
Slacken off the clamp (D) and adjust the ball joint (C).
After adjusting the ball joint, tighten the clamp (D) and
insert the conical coupling of the track rod (A) back into
66 the stub axle.
Screw on a new lock nut (B) and / or castellated
nut (B) and tighten.
With adjustable steering axle:
With CLAAS 4-trac axle:
(Fig. 66)

Steering axle
With 2.05 m steering axle:

The adjustment of the track is done by adjusting the
track rod (E).
For this, unlock the castellated nut (F) and unscrew.
Undo the lock nut (F).
Press the ball joint (G) from the conical seat using a
puller.
Slacken off the lock nut (H) and adjust the relevant
ball joint (G).
After adjusting the ball joint, tighten the lock nut (H)
67 and insert the conical coupling of the track rod (E)
back into the stub axle.
Screw on a new lock nut (F) and / or castellated nut (F)
and tighten.
(Fig. 67)
Removing the steering axle

Slack the wheel bolts on both sides.
Securely support the rear of the machine with suitable
blocks.
Remove the wheels.
(Fig. 68)
68

Steering axle
Unlock the castellated nuts (A) or lock nuts (A) and

unscrew.
(Fig. 69)
69
Using a suitable puller, press the ball joints of the

steering ram (B) from the conical seats.
(Fig. 70)
70
With adjustable steering axle:

Unbolt the steering ram support bracket (F) on the
steering axle.
(Fig. 71)
71
Hang the steering ram (B) up along the side of the

machine.
(Fig. 72)
72

Steering axle
Unbolt the bracket (C).

(Fig. 73)
73
Should a hitch be fitted to the rear of the machine

then remove it and / or unbolt the bolts (E) in the
steering axle support (P).
(Fig. 74)
74
Lightly support the steering axle with a suitable lifting

device and push the bolt (E) back.
(Fig. 75)
75
Remove the fitted washers (F).

(Fig. 76)
76

Steering axle
Remove the bolts (E).

Lower the steering axle and remove towards the rear.
(Fig. 75, 77)
77
Installing the steering axle

Using a suitable lifting device, position the steering
axle under the steering axle support (P).
Apply multipurpose grease such as CLAAS EP2 to the
bolt (E) and avoiding tilting the pin, tap into position
using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 78)
78
Correct the play by inserting washers (F).

The steering axle must have no sideways play within
the support (P).
(Fig. 79)
79
Insert the bolts (E), and if a hitch has been fitted to the
machine, then refit it.
(Fig. 80)
80

Steering axle
Bolt back the bracket (C).

(Fig. 81)
81
Insert the conical connection of the steering ram (B)

into the stub axle with the adjustable steering axle and
with the 2.05 axle into the steering axle housing.
Fit a new lock nut (A) and / or castellated nut (A), and
tighten to the correct torque settings.
With the adjustable steering axle:
With the 2.05 m steering axle:
Secure the castellated nut (A) with the split pin.
82 For the adjustable steering axle:
Bolt the ram bracket (F) to the steering axle housing.
Refit the wheels and torque the wheel bolts up to the
correct setting.
Adjust the steering lock of the machine.
Adjust the wheel track.
(Fig. 69, 82, 83)
83

Steering axle
Removing the CLAAS 4-trac axle

Slacken off the wheel bolts from both sides of the
machine.
Jack up and secure the back of the machine.
Remove the wheels.
(Fig. 84)
84
Unbolt the pivot block (A) from the stub axle

housing (B).
(Fig. 85)
85
Unbolt the hex. nut (C) of the bolt (D). Remove the
bolt (D).
Remove the steering ram (E).
(Fig. 86)
86
Strap up the steering ram (E) to one side of the

machine.
(Fig. 87)
87

Steering axle
Remove the split pin (F) from the castellated nut (G).
Unbolt the castellated nut (G), then remove it along
with the washer (N) and the spacer (O).
(Fig. 88)
88
Remove the hydraulic pipes (H) from the valve

block (S) and bung both ends. Contain any oil that
may leak.
Disconnect the connector (K) from the valve block.
(Fig. 89)
89
Should a hitch be fitted to the machine, then remove it.

Unbolt the bolts (L) from the steering axle support (M).
(Fig. 90)
90
Raise the 4-trac axle lightly by using a suitable lifting

device and press the bolt (L) back.
(Fig. 91)
91

Steering axle
Remove the available washers (P).

(Fig. 92)
92
Remove the bolt (L).

Lower the 4-trac axle and remove towards the rear.
(Fig. 91, 93)
93
Using a suitable punch, remove the bushes (R) from

the axle housing.
(Fig. 94)
94
Unbolt the valve block (S) from the axle housing.

(Fig. 95)
95

Steering axle
Remove the bracket (T) from the left and the right.
(Fig. 96)
96
Installing the CLAAS 4-trac axle

Press the bushes (R) back into the axle housing using
the special tool.
(Fig. 97)
97
Special tool:
2 Lever nut, Part No. 181 880.0
3 Centralising washer, Part No. 181 879.0
4 Axial bearing, Part No. 235 983.0
(Fig. 98)
42194 98
Bolt the bracket (T) and the valve block (S) back onto
the axle housing.
(Fig. 99)
99

Steering axle
Using a suitable lifting device, raise the 4-trac axle up

under the support (M).
Lightly grease the bolt (L) with CLAAS multipurpose
grease EP2 and without tipping, tap it into place using
(Fig. 100)
100
Correct the play by inserting the washers (P).

The axle should not have any play whilst in the
support (M).
(Fig. 101)
101
Insert the bolt (L) and if necessary the hitch into the
axle support (M).
(Fig. 102)
102
Position the spacer (O) and the washer (N).

Tighten the castellated nut (G) safely and secure
with a split pin (F).
Insert the bolt (D) into the steering ram (E).
(Fig. 103)
103

Steering axle
Tighten the bolt (D) using a new lock nut.

(Fig. 103, 104)
104
Bolt back the pivot block (A) onto the stub axle
housing (B). The hex. bolts should have an adhesive
such as DELO-ML-5328 applied.
(Fig. 105)
105
Reconnect the hydraulic lines (H) as well as the cable

connector (K) onto the valve block (S). Take care of
the relevant torque settings.
(Fig. 106)
106

Steering axle
Check the oil level in the planetary gearbox:
CAUTION!
For this ensure that the 4-trac axle is level.
K = Level plug
L = Filler
Each planetary gearbox holds 0.8 litres of oil.
Refit the wheels and tighten the wheel bolts up to the
107 correct torque settings.
Bleed the hydraulic motors.
Adjust the wheel track.
(Fig. 107)
Bleeding the hydraulic motors

(CLAAS 4-trac axle)
1. Unlock the quick couplings (P) of the oil
cooler (K), then swing up and using the hook (H)
attach it to one of the bars in the rotary screen.
2. Connect a pressure gauge (0 – 600 bar) to
connections M1 and M2.
3. Fill the hydraulic tank (R) with hydraulic oil.
4. Put the machine in third gear and apply the foot
brake.
108
CAUTION!
Do not engage the 4-trac system.
5. Start the engine in idle and immediately switch off.

Steering axle
Linde unit
6. Check the oil level in the tank and if necessary top

up. Carry out this procedure until in one of the
pressure lines 15 bar has been achieved and the
oil level in the hydraulic tank (R) remains constant.
7. Start the engine and allow to run at idle speed.
8. If the pressure is rising, then bleed the hydrostatic
unit in both directions:
Push the hydrostatic lever forwards until a
pressure of between 50 – 150 bar is achieved.
Then hold the pressure for approx. 1 minute.
109 Push the hydrostatic lever backwards until a
Sauer unit pressure of between 50 – 150 bar is achieved.
Then hold the pressure for approx. 1 minute.
9. Stop the engine, check the oil level in the tank
10. Put the machine into neutral gear.
11. Raise the steering axle and secure on jacks.
12. Put the machine into third gear and apply the
foot brake.
13. Start the engine and run at idle speed. Switch on
the 4-trac system.
110 14. Push the hydrostatic lever forwards for 1 minute

and then the same in reverse. Both rear wheels
must turn and the pressure must not exceed
150 bar.
15. Stop the engine and check the oil level in the tank,
topping up if necessary.
(Fig. 108, 109, 110, 111)
111

Steering axle
Removing the planetary gearbox / hydraulic

motor
(CLAAS 4-trac axle)
Slacken the wheel bolts.
Jack up the rear of the machine and support securely
on jacks.
Remove the wheel.
(Fig. 112)
112
Remove the pivot block (24) from the stub axle

housing (15).
(Fig. 113, 127)
113
Remove the pivot block (18) from the stub axle

housing (15).
(Fig. 114, 127)
114

hydraulic tank (D).
Special tool:
Vacuum valve combination
Part No. 181 619.0
(Fig. 115)
115

Steering axle
Remove both hydraulic lines (E and F) from the

hydraulic motor (23) and secure the ends with bungs.
(Fig. 116, 127)
116
Unbolt the hydraulic motor (23) from the stub axle

housing (15). For this do not completely remove the
top socket head bolt (22).
(Fig. 117, 127)
117
Support the hydraulic motor (23) using a suitable lifting

device.
Remove the top socket head bolt (22) completely.
(Fig. 117, 118, 127)
118
Rotate the hydraulic motor (23) by 90°. For this screw

in a hex. bolt (32) into the hub and use a lever and
(Fig. 119, 127)
119

Steering axle
Slide the hydraulic motor (23) out of the stub axle

housing (15).
(Fig. 120, 127)
120
Removing the stub axle housing

(CLAAS 4-trac axle)
Remove the planetary drive / hydraulic motor.
Remove the slotted nuts (14) from the stub axle
bolts (10).
(Fig. 121, 127)
121
Remove the angle piece (1) from the frame (6).

Remove the stub axle bolts (10).
(Fig. 122, 127)
122
Remove the stub axle housing (15) along with the axial
washers (13) and the centralising ring (12) from the
frame (6).
(Fig. 123, 127)
123

Steering axle
Measure the distance between the top edge of the

frame (6) to the steering bearing outer ring (11).
(Only to the top bearing.)
(Fig. 124, 127)
124
Using the special tool, remove the steering

bearing (11) from the frame (6).
(Fig. 125, 127)
125
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
Part No. 181 880.0
2 Spindle
Part No. 181 877.0
3 Axial bearing
Part No. 235 983.0
4 Centralising washer
Part No. 181 879.0
5 Tube, outer dia. 100 mm, inner dia. 90 mm,
140 mm long
6 Tube, outer dia. 58 mm, inner dia. 50 mm,
140 mm long
(Fig. 126)
42196
126

Steering axle
Steering axle
127
CLAAS 4-trac system, exploded view 27 Adaptor plate
1 Angle piece
29 Lock washer Vskz 10
30 Round seal 23 x 3.55-n
3 Hex. bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
31 Spring washer
4 Circlip 16
32 Hex. bolt M 22 x 1.5 x 45 DIN 961-8.8
5 Hex. bolt M 16 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
6 Frame (Fig. 127)
7 Circlip 20
8 Hex. bolt M 20 x 60 DIN 933-8.8
10 Stub axle bolts
11 Steering bearing Ge 50 do-2rs DIN 648
12 Centralising ring
13 Axial washer
15 Stub axle housing
16 Hex. bolt M 16 x 60 DIN 931-8.8
18 Pivot block left
Pivot block right
19 Circlip 16
20 Hex. bolt M 16 x 1.5 x 45 DIN 961-8.8
21 Lock washer Vskz 16
23 Wheel hub unit
24 Hydraulic motor
25 Planetary gearbox
Seal
26 Pivot block

Steering axle
Steering axle
Installing the stub axle housing

(CLAAS 4-trac axle)
Press the top steering bearing (11) back into the
frame (6) to the original position (should be 3 mm)
Press the lower steering bearing (11) along with the
bearing inner ring into the frame (6) flush with the inner
flange, using the special tool.
(Fig. 125, 126, 127, 128)
128
Fit the stub axle housing (15) with the axial

washers (13) and the centralising ring (12) into
the frame (6).
(Fig. 127, 129)
129
Lightly oil the stub axle bolts (10) with CLAAS multi-
purpose grease EP2, then use them to bolt the stub
axle (15) to the frame (6).
(Fig. 127, 130)
130
Secure the stub axle bolts (10) with the slotted

nuts (14).
Bolt the angle piece (1) to the frame (6).
Fit the planetary gearbox / hydraulic motor.
(Fig. 122, 127, 131)
131

Steering axle
Installing planetary gearbox / hydraulic motor

(CLAAS 4-trac axle)
Using a suitable lifting device, lift the hydraulic
motor (23) into the stub axle housing (15) and rotate
by 90°.
For this screw in a hex. bolt (32) into the hub and use
a lever and a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 127, 132)
132
Bolt the hydraulic motor (23) back onto the stub axle
housing (15) using the socket head bolts (22).
(Fig. 127, 133)
133
Connect the hydraulic lines (E and F) to the hydraulic

motor (23). For this ensure they are torqued up to the
correct setting.
(Fig. 127, 134)
134
Bolt the pivot block (18) back onto the stub axle
housing (15). Use liquid sealing compound such as
DELO-ML-5328 on the hex. head bolts (20) and then
insert.
(Fig. 127, 135)
135

Steering axle
Bolt the pivot block (24) back onto the stub axle
housing (15). Use liquid sealing compound such as
DELO-ML-5328 on the hex. head bolts and then insert.
(Fig. 127, 136)
136
Check the oil level in the planetary gearboxes:
CAUTION!
For this the 4-trac axle must be level.
K = Level plug
L = Filler
Each planetary gearbox holds 0.8 litres of oil.
Refit the wheels and tighten the wheel bolts up to the
137 correct torque settings.
Bleed the hydraulic motors.
Adjust the tracking.
(Fig. 137)

Straw chopper
Straw chopper
STRAW CHOPPER
Removing the right-hand straw chopper

bearing
Open the side cover at the rear right-hand side.
Unscrew the hexagon bolt from the front of the cutting
cylinder (17).
Relieve the tension of straw chopper drive belt (20).
(Fig. 1, 37)
Pull off front V-belt pulley using a suitable puller.

Remove back-up ring located behind it.
(Fig. 2)
Loosen the bevel joint of the rear V-belt pulley using

a block-ended tube. In doing so, the inside diameter of
the block-ended tube must extend over the bevel ring.
Pull off rear V-belt pulley using a suitable puller.
Remove key and rear bevel ring.
(Fig. 3)
Arrest the cutting cylinder (17) using a piece of square

timber.
(Fig. 4, 37)

Straw chopper
Bend tab washer (12) of face-end slotted nut (11).

Loosen face-end slotted nut (11) using a special tool.
(Fig. 5, 37)
Special tool:
1 Tube, Part No. 181 611.0
2 Special socket spanner, Part No. 180 142.0
(Fig. 6)
1
2
32030
6
Loosen the lock collar (14) of the self-aligning ball

bearing (13) using a block-ended tube of inside
diameter 50 mm and outside diameter 60 mm,
200 mm long.
(Fig. 7, 37)
Unscrew hexagon bolts (8) one by one.

Emery the shaft and oil it.
Remove right-hand straw chopper bearing completely,
pull off if necessary.
NOTE: To make installation easier, replace the hexa-
gon bolts (8) by threaded bolts M 12, 100 mm long.
(Fig. 8, 37)

Straw chopper
Removing the left-hand straw chopper bearing

Unscrew the guard (26).
(Fig. 9, 37)
Unscrew magnetic pick-up (28) and bracket (30).

Release the safety of cam wheel (32) and remove it.
(Fig. 10, 37)
10
Arrest the cutting cylinder (17) using a piece of square

timber.
(Fig. 11, 37)
11
Bend tab washer (12) of face-end slotted nut (11).

Loosen face-end slotted nut (11) using a special tool.
(Fig. 12, 37)
12

Straw chopper
Special tool:
1 Tube, Part No. 181 611.0
2 Special socket spanner, Part No. 180 142.0
(Fig. 13)
1
2
32030
13
Loosen the lock collar (14) of the self-aligning ball

bearing (13) using a block-ended tube of inside
diameter 50 mm and outside diameter 60 mm,
200 mm long.
(Fig. 14, 37)
14
Unscrew hexagon bolts (8) one by one.

Emery the shaft and oil it.
Remove left-hand straw chopper bearing completely,
pull off if necessary.
NOTE: To make installation easier, replace the hexa-
gon bolts (8) by threaded bolts M 12, 100 mm long.
(Fig. 15, 37)
15

Straw chopper
Dismantling the left-hand / right-hand straw

chopper bearing
Remove face-end slotted nut (11), tab washer (12)
and lock collar (14) from the straw chopper bearing.
Force the bearing shells (10 and 15) apart using
two hexagon bolts M 12 x 60 DIN 933-8.8.
(Fig. 16, 37)
16
Push the self-aligning ball bearing (13) out of the

bearing shell (10) using a puller.
(Fig. 17, 37)
17
Assembling the left-hand / right-hand straw

chopper bearing
1. Apply multipurpose grease, e.g. CLAAS
multipurpose grease EP 2 to self-aligning ball
bearing (13) and drive into the bearing shell
using a plastic-tip hammer (10).
ATTENTION!
The self-aligning ball bearing (13) has

a conical bore. Observe the installation
18 position with regard to the lock collar (14).
(Fig. 18, 37)

Straw chopper
2. Put on bearing shell (15) and drive on using

3. Loosely pre-assemble the straw chopper bearing
with face-end slotted nut (11), tab washer (12)
and lock collar (14).
(Fig. 19, 37)
19
Installing the right-hand straw chopper

bearing
1. To make installation easier, screw in three
threaded bolts M 12, 100 mm long, into the
straw chopper side wall.
2. Place straw chopper bearing (pre-assembled)
on the shaft.
3. Bolt down straw chopper bearing to straw
chopper side wall with hexagon bolts (8) and
contact washers (9).
20 The hexagon bolts (8) are installed using liquid
sealing compound, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
(Fig. 20, 37)
4. Arrest the cutting cylinder (17) using a piece of

square timber.
5. Pre-tension the face-end slotted nut (11) with a
tightening torque of 35 Nm, using a special tool.
6. Rotate the face-end slotted nut (11) further by 76°.
(Fig. 21, 37)
21

Straw chopper
Special tool:
1 Tube,
Part No. 181 611.0
2 Special socket spanner,
Part No. 180 142.0
3 Angular-position measuring disc,
Part No. 174 358.0
(Fig. 22)
40506 22
7. Rotate the face-end slotted nut (11) further until

the tab washer (12) fits the slot and secure
face-end slotted nut (11).
purpose grease EP 2 to straw chopper bearings.
(Fig. 23, 37)
23
9. Apply semi-fluid lubricant, e.g. Dealit EP 00,

to bevel ring joint and hub bore.
10. Push on rear bevel ring and insert key into the
shaft.
11. Push on rear V-belt pulley and front bevel ring.
12. Install back-up ring and push on front V-belt
pulley.
13. Bolt hexagon bolt with contact washer into
the shaft at the front.
24
Tension straw chopper drive belt (20).
(Fig. 24)

Straw chopper
Installing the left-hand straw chopper bearing

1. To make installation easier, screw in three
threaded bolts M 12, 100 mm long, into the
straw chopper side wall.
2. Place straw chopper bearing (pre-assembled) on
the shaft.
3. Bolt down straw chopper bearing to straw chopper
side wall with hexagon bolts (8) and contact
washers (9).
The hexagon bolts (8) are installed using liquid
25 sealing compound, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
(Fig. 25, 37)
4. Arrest the cutting cylinder (17) using a piece of

square timber.
5. Pre-tension the face-end slotted nut (11) with a
tightening torque of 35 Nm, using a special tool.
6. Rotate the face-end slotted nut (11) further by 76°.
(Fig. 26, 37)
26
Special tool:
1 Tube,
Part No. 181 611.0
2 Special socket spanner,
Part No. 180 142.0
3 Angular-position measuring disc,
Part No. 174 358.0
(Fig. 27)
40506 27

Straw chopper
7. Rotate the face-end slotted nut (11) further until

the tab washer (12) fits the slot and secure
face-end slotted nut (11).
purpose grease EP 2 to straw chopper bearings.
(Fig. 28, 37)
28
9. Push on cam wheel (32) and secure.

10. Install magnetic pick-up (28) with bracket (30).
11. Check magnetic pick-up setting.
Check dimension = 1 ± 0.5 mm
(Fig. 29, 37)
29

Straw chopper
Removing the cutting cylinder

Remove right-hand straw chopper bearing.
Remove left-hand straw chopper bearing.
Left-hand and right-hand side:
Unscrew turn locks of straw guide plate adjustment.
Unscrew socket head bolts (A) from the straw guide
plate adjustment.
Remove straw guide plate (C).
(Fig. 30)
30
Unscrew three hexagon bolts (S) from the shear bar.

(Fig. 31)
31
Unscrew six hexagon bolts (B) from the shear bar from
the inside.
(Fig. 32)
32
Remove shear bar to the rear.

Remove lighting brackets on both sides.
(Fig. 33)
33

Straw chopper

Unscrew the filler plates (F) above the shaft ends.
Slightly raise the straw chopper using a suitable lifting
device.
Slightly loosen the hexagon bolts (L).
Unscrew the straw chopper at the post at (K) and
lower it.
(Fig. 34, 35)
34
35
Take out the cutting cylinder (17) to the top through the
side slots.
DANGER!
Absolutely wear safety gloves

– danger of injury!
(Fig. 36, 37)
36

Straw chopper
Straw chopper
37
Cutting cylinder, exploded view 28 Magnetic pick-up
29 Hexagon nut
30 Bracket
3 Spring clip
32 Cam wheel
4 Round bar
5 Shear bar (Fig. 37)
6 Knife carrier
10 Bearing shell
11 Face-end slotted nut
12 Circlip
13 Self-aligning ball bearing 1309k c3 DIN 630
14 Taper lock adapter sleeve H2309 DIN 5415
15 Bearing shell
16 Cover
17 Cutting cylinder
18 Lock nut
19 Outside bushing
Bushing (maize version)
20 Free-swinging knives
21 Inside bushing
22 Hexagon bolt / cheese-head screw
23 Key A 10 x 8 x 30 DIN 6885
24 Hexagon nut M 12 x 1.5 DIN 936
25 Brake light switch
26 Fender
27 Cable set

Straw chopper
Straw chopper
Pre-assembling the cutting cylinder

Maize version:
NOTE: Heavier free-swinging knives (20) are provided
for chopping maize straw.
1. Install only one free-swinging knife (20) with
cheese-head screw (22), outside bushing (19),
inside bushings (21) and lock nut (18) to each
mounting plate (H) of the cutting cylinder (17).
The free-swinging knives (20) must move freely.
ATTENTION!
Use only bolts and nuts prescribed by

CLAAS.
☞ Torque setting
M 10-10.9 = 65 Nm
For bolts and nuts with Dacromet coating
(silvery-grey), the tightening torque is
reduced.
☞ Torque setting
(Bolts and nuts with Dacromet coating)
M 10-10.9 = 55 Nm
(Fig. 37, 38)

38

Straw chopper
Grain version:
NOTE: More lightweight free-swinging knives (20) are
provided for chopping grain straw.
2. Install two free-swinging knives (20) with
hexagon bolt (22), outside bushings (19), inside
bushings (21) and lock nut (18) to each mounting
plate (H) of the cutting cylinder (17). The
free-swinging knives (20) must move freely.
ATTENTION!
Use only bolts and nuts prescribed by

CLAAS.
☞ Torque setting
M 10-10.9 = 65 Nm
For bolts and nuts with Dacromet coating
(silvery-grey), the tightening torque is
reduced.
☞ Torque setting
(Bolts and nuts with Dacromet coating)
M 10-10.9 = 55 Nm
(Fig. 37, 39)
39
Installing the cutting cylinder

1. Insert the pre-assembled cutting cylinder (17)
into the straw chopper housing from the top.
DANGER!

(Fig. 37, 40)

40

Straw chopper

2. Raise straw chopper and bolt down to post at (K).
3. Bolt down the filler plates (F) above the shaft
ends.
4. Tighten hexagon bolts (L).
(Fig. 41, 42)
41
42
5. Bolt down lighting brackets on both sides.

6. Insert the shear bar from the rear.
(Fig. 43)
43
7. Bolt down the shear bar from the inside by means

of six hexagon bolts (B).
(Fig. 44)
44

Straw chopper
8. Screw three hexagon bolts (S) into the shear bar.

(Fig. 45)
45
9. Align the cutting cylinder (17) with the

free-swinging knives (20) centrically to the
shear bar (5).
DANGER!

10. Install right-hand straw chopper bearing.

11. Install left-hand straw chopper bearing.
46
12. Check centre position of cutting cylinder (17).
(Fig. 37, 38, 39, 46)

13. Insert straw guide plate (C) and bolt down to the
straw guide plate adjustment using socket head
bolts (A).
14. Install turn locks of the straw guide plate
adjustment.
(Fig. 47)
47

Straw chopper drive
Straw chopper drive
STRAW CHOPPER DRIVE

drive jockey pulley
Relieve the tension of straw chopper intermediate
drive belt (21).
Unscrew the jockey pulley (5) from the jockey pulley
arm (A).
NOTE: On DOMINATOR 108 VX machines (from
serial no. …), the straw chopper intermediate drive
belt (21) can only be removed after removing the
jockey pulley (5). To do this, also remove bracket (3).
1 (Fig. 1, 2)
Straw chopper intermediate drive jockey pulley,

exploded view
3 Bracket
4 Clamping ring
6 Jockey pulley
9 Spacer ring
10 Hexagon dowel screw M 16 x 85 DIN 7968
2
(Fig. 2)
Installing the straw chopper intermediate

drive jockey pulley
1. Bolt the jockey pulley (5) down to jockey pulley
arm (A).
2. Tension the straw chopper intermediate drive
belt (21).
3. On DOMINATOR 108 VX machines (from
serial no. …) additionally bolt down bracket (3)
along with jockey pulley (5).
3
(Fig. 2, 3)

Straw chopper drive

drive
Remove straw chopper drive belt (20).
Block tensioning device (A) with a U-piece
(U, self-manufactured) and secure the U-piece
with a spring clip.
Remove straw chopper intermediate drive jockey
pulley.
Unscrew the support (19) completely with jockey
4
pulley (21).
(Fig. 4, 23)
U-piece (self-manufactured)
A = 46 mm
D C B = 30 mm
B C = 38 mm
D = 70 mm
E = 7 mm
A F = dia. 4 mm
F E (Fig. 5)
38739 5
Suspend V-belt pulley (8) in a suitable lifting device.

Unscrew the bracket (3) completely with the V-belt
pulley (8) and the tensioning device (A) from the
machine side wall.
(Fig. 6, 23)

Straw chopper drive
Dismantling the straw chopper intermediate drive

Release the safety of pin (B) and pull out pin.
Unscrew hexagon bolts (C) and remove tensioning
device (A) completely.
(Fig. 7)
Unscrew hexagon bolt (15).

(Fig. 8, 23)
Unscrew V-belt pulley (30).

(Fig. 9, 23)
Pull V-belt pulley (8) off of bracket (3) using a special

tool.
(Fig. 10, 23)
10

Straw chopper drive
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 376.0 (head-centred)
2 Puller plate, Part No. 181 617.0
3 Hex. bolt M 16 x 70 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 242 467.0
4 Washer, inside dia. 16.5 mm, outside dia. 45 mm,
5 mm thick
5 Puller bridge, Part No. 181 621.0
6 Hex. bolt M 16 x 60 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 242 466.0
11 (Fig. 11)
Remove circlip (34) from V-belt pulley (8).

(Fig. 12, 23)
12
Drive deep groove ball bearings (10 and 12) out of

V-belt pulley (8) using a tube of inside dia. 60 mm,
(Fig. 13, 23)
13

Straw chopper drive
Assembling the straw chopper intermediate drive

1. Insert circlips (9) and / or (33) in V-belt pulley (8).
pulley (8), using a tube of inside dia. 60 mm,
3. Insert spacer tube (11) and drive in deep groove
ball bearing (12) or angular contact bearing (12)
and secure with a circlip (34).
(Fig. 12, 13, 23)
4. Push round plate (4) and thrust ring (5) on the

bracket (3).
purpose grease EP 2 to bracket (3) at (E).
(Fig. 14, 23)
14
6. Install pre-assembled V-belt pulley (8) on

bracket (3) using a special tool.
(Fig. 15, 23)
15

Straw chopper drive
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 12 x 170 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 238 014.0
Part No. 177 899.0
(Fig. 16)
4 3 2 1
35427 16
7. Bolt down V-belt pulley (30) to V-belt pulley (8)

with hexagon bolts (32) and contact washers (31).
(Fig. 17, 23)
17
8. Screw in hexagon bolt (15) with contact

washer (14) and washer (13).
(Fig. 18, 23)
18
9. Place tensioning device (A) on bracket (3) and

bolt down with hexagon bolts (C).
10. Insert pin (B) and secure.
(Fig. 19, 23)
19

Straw chopper drive
Installing the straw chopper intermediate

drive
1. Lift the pre-assembled bracket (3) to the machine
side wall using a suitable lifting device and bolt it
down.
(Fig. 20, 23)
20
2. Bolt down support (19) completely along with

jockey pulley (21).
3. Install straw chopper intermediate drive jockey
pulley.
4. Install and adjust straw chopper intermediate drive
belt (21).
5. Install and adjust straw chopper drive belt (20).
(Fig. 21, 23)
21
Removing the straw chopper drive jockey

pulley
Remove straw chopper drive belt (20).
Unscrew the jockey pulley (21) from the support (19).
(Fig. 22, 23)
22

Straw chopper drive
Straw chopper drive
23
Straw chopper intermediate drive, exploded view 24 Spacer ring
25 Circlip 40 x 1.75 DIN 472
2 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
27 Hex. bolt M 10 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
3 Bracket
28 Spacer washer
4 Round plate
5 Thrust ring (from serial no. …)
30 V-belt pulley
Spacer ring (up to serial no. …)
8 V-belt pulley
32 Hex. bolt M 16 x 35 DIN 933-8.8
10 Deep groove ball bearing 6308 rs/c3
Deep groove ball bearing 6206 2rs/c3
Circlip 62 x 3 DIN 472
11 Spacer tube
12 Deep groove ball bearing 6308 rs/c3 R 20 = Straw chopper drive belt (20)
(from serial no. …) R 21 = Straw chopper intermediate drive belt (21)
Angular contact bearing 3206 2rs/c3 DIN 628
(up to serial no. …) (Fig. 23)
13 Washer
15 Hex. bolt M 12 x 35 DIN 933-8.8
17 Contact washer A16
18 Washer
19 Support
20 Washer
22 Jockey pulley
23 Deep groove ball bearing 6203 2rs/

Straw chopper drive
Straw chopper drive
Installing the straw chopper drive jockey

pulley
1. Loosely bolt down jockey pulley (21) to the
support (19) with dowel screw (29), washer (20)
and washer (18), contact washer (17) and
hexagon nut (16).
2. Install and adjust straw chopper drive belt (20).
3. Tighten jockey pulley (21).
(Fig. 23, 24)
24

Straw chopper drive

Straw spreader
Straw spreader
STRAW SPREADER
Removing the straw spreader

Remove straw spreader drive belt (14).
Remove the keys of V-belt pulley (36) on shaft (25)
and remove V-belt pulley.
(Fig. 1, 16)
Unscrew cover plate (A) and cover plate (29) from

trough (38).
(Fig. 2, 16)
Unscrew bearing housings (1).

(Fig. 3, 16)
Unscrew flange ball bearing (30) on the left-hand

machine side as well as angle (26) from the
trough (38).
(Fig. 4, 16)

Straw spreader
Take out shaft (25) completely from the trough (38).

(Fig. 5, 16)
Dismantling the straw spreader

Loosen the lock collars (32) and pull off lock collar
bearings (34) from the shaft (25) along with sheet
metal flanges (33).
(Fig. 6, 16)
Remove the keys from bevel gears (12) on the

shaft (25) and remove bevel gears.
(Fig. 7, 16)
Unscrew angle (26) from the flange ball bearings (30)

and pull off flange ball bearings from the shaft (25).
(Fig. 8, 16)

Straw spreader
Loosen bracket (10) from the shaft (18) and pull off.
(Fig. 9, 16)
Unscrew guard (8) along with washer (5).

(Fig. 10, 16)
10
Drive expansion pin (4) out of the hub (3).

(Fig. 11, 16)
11
Pull off hub (3) from the shaft (18).

(Fig. 12, 16)
12

Straw spreader
Drive expansion pins (13 and 14) out of the bevel

gear (12).
Pull off bevel gear (12) from the shaft (18).
(Fig. 13, 16)
13
Drive shaft (18) out of bearing housing (1) towards

the bearing housing flange.
(Fig. 14, 16)
14
Pull off deep groove ball bearing (15) from the

shaft (18).
(Fig. 15, 16)
15

Straw spreader
16
Straw spreader, exploded view:
1 Bearing housing
Contact washer A 10
3 Hub
5 Washer
8 Guard
10 Bracket
11 Plate
12 Bevel gear
13 Expansion pin 3.5 x 45-n DIN 8752
16 Spacer tube
18 Shaft
19 Shim plate
20 Linch pin
21 Hexagon nut VM 6
23 Spreader blade
25 Shaft

Straw spreader
26 Angle
Contact washer A 8
Contact washer A 8
29 Cover plate
30 Flange ball bearing
32 Lock collar
34 Lock collar bearing
38 Trough
Contact washer A 8
41 Mounting plate
Contact washer A 8
R 14 = Straw spreader drive belt (14)

(Fig. 16)

Straw spreader
17
Assembling the straw spreader
1. Loosely pre-assemble the shaft (25) with flange
ball bearings (30), angles (26) and bevel
gears (12).
2. Loosely pre-assemble left-hand flange ball
bearing (30) on the shaft (25).
(Fig. 17)

shaft (18) using a tube of inside diameter 25 mm
and outside diameter 33 mm, 200 mm long.
(Fig. 16, 18)
18

Straw spreader
4. Insert circlip (17) into the bearing housing (1).

5. Drive the shaft (18, pre-assembled) into the
bearing housing (1) from the flange side, using
a tube of inside diameter 40 mm and outside
diameter 50 mm, 200 mm long.
(Fig. 16, 17, 19)
19
6. Push spacer tube (16) into the bearing

housing (1).
7. Drive the deep groove ball bearing (15) on the
shaft (18) and into the bearing housing (1) using
a tube of inside diameter 25 mm and outside
diameter 33 mm, 200 mm long.
(Fig. 16, 20)
20
8. Push bevel gear (12) on the shaft (18) and secure

with expansion pins (13 and 14).
(Fig. 16, 17, 21)
21
9. Push hub (3) on the shaft (18) and secure with

an expansion pin (4).
(Fig. 16, 17, 22)
22

Straw spreader
10. Bolt down guard (8) to hub (3) with washer (5).
(Fig. 16, 17, 23)
23
Installing the straw spreader

1. Insert shaft (25, pre-assembled) into the
trough (38).
2. Bolt down bearing housing (1, pre-assembled)
to trough (38) using angles (26).
3. Bolt down flange ball bearing (30) to the
trough (38) and to the angles (26).
(Fig. 17, 24, 25)
24
25

Straw spreader
4. Adjust the spacing (Z) from the shaft (25) to the

trough (38) by dislocating the shaft (25).
Spacing (Z) = 81 ± 2 mm
5. Align bevel gears (12) on the shaft (25) to the
spacing (X).
Spacing (X) = 676-0.3 mm
6. When measuring the torsional backlash
gear (12).
26 If necessary, loosen the flange ball bearing (30)
from the angles (26) and the trough (38) and set
the shaft (25) higher or lower in the bores.
with pattern identification paste and check
the pattern by means of the imprint.
Example:
A = Initial setting
C = Correct setting
If necessary, dislocate the bevel gears (12)
slightly on the shaft (25).
27
8. Arrest the bevel gears (12) on the shaft (25) using
the gib head key (24).
10. Bolt down cover plate (A) and cover plate (29)
to the trough (38).
purpose grease EP 2 to the external spline
of shaft (18).
12. Install straw spreader blades with brackets (10)
28 and linch pins (20) on the shaft (18).
13. Align straw spreader blades by (Y) = 60° ± 6° to
the centre axis and arrest bracket (10) on the
shaft (18).
14. Arrest V-belt pulley (36) on the shaft (25) with
gib head key (37).
15. Install straw spreader drive belt (14) and adjust.
(Fig. 16, 17, 26, 27, 28, 29)
29

Straw spreader drive
STRAW SPREADER DRIVE
Removing the straw spreader tensioning

device
Remove straw spreader drive belt (14).
Unscrew hexagon bolt (30).
(Fig. 1, 5)
Pull off V-belt pulley (24) from the plate (11) using a
suitable puller.
Pull off rear deep groove ball bearing (26) from the
plate (11) if necessary.
Unscrew jockey pulley (15) from jockey pulley
arm (13).
(Fig. 2, 5)
Dismantling the straw spreader tensioning device

Drive deep groove ball bearing (26) out of the V-belt
Remove circlips (27) and spacer bushing (28).
(Fig. 3, 5)
Drive deep groove ball bearing (18) out of the jockey

pulley (15), using a tube of inside dia. 37 mm, outside
dia. 45 mm and a length of 150 mm.
(Fig. 4, 5)

5
Straw spreader tensioning device, exploded view: 28 Spacer bushing
29 Washer
1 Angle
30 Hex. bolt M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
2 Spring guide
3 Compression spring R 14 = Straw spreader drive belt (14)
4 Bushing
5 Hex. nut M 12 DIN 934 (Fig. 5)
6 Yoke
7 V-belt pulley
10 Hex. bolt M 10 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer B 10
11 Plate
14 Hex. bolt M 10 x 70 DIN 931-8.8
15 Jockey pulley
16 Centring pin
17 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472
21 Bushing
22 Pin
24 V-belt pulley
25 Spacer washer
27 Circlip 40 x 1.75 DIN 472

Assembling the straw spreader tensioning device

1. Insert circlip (27) and spacer bushing (28) into the
V-belt pulley (24).
pulley (24) using a tube of inside dia. 30 mm,
(Fig. 5, 6)

jockey pulley (15) using a tube of inside
of 150 mm.
4. Insert circlips (17) into the jockey pulley (15).
(Fig. 5, 7)
Installing the straw spreader tensioning

device
1. Bolt V-belt pulley (24) down to plate (11) with
washer (29), contact washer (19) and hexagon
bolt (30).
2. Bolt down jockey pulley (15) to the jockey pulley
arm (13) with centring pin (16), hexagon bolt (14),
3. Install and adjust straw spreader drive belt (14).
(Fig. 5, 8)
8


Straw walker
Straw walker
STRAW WALKER
Removing the straw walker racks

With straw chopper fitted:
Relieve the tension of the straw chopper drive belt (20)
using the tensioning lever (H) and install on the outer
groove of the V-belt pulley (A).
Fold straw chopper downwards.
(Fig. 1, 2)
1
Unlock the rear hood (B) and fold up.

Fold door (D) to the front.
(Fig. 3)
Unscrew the cable protection (E) on the right-hand

machine side.
Disconnect the cable connection to the sensor
housing (F) and dismount sensor housing.
(Fig. 4)

Straw walker
For straw walker shafts with wooden bearings:

Unscrew the straw walker bearings and remove the
bottom bearing shell (G). Pay attention to the number
of intermediate plates (H). Mark the position of the
bearing shells.
Completely remove the wooden bearing and bolt
together loosely.
CAUTION!
Mount the wooden bearing at the same location

5 when re-installing.
(Fig. 5)
For straw walker shafts with ball bearings:

Unscrew the straw walker racks at the bearings
of the straw walker shafts at the front and at the rear.
(Fig. 6)
Pull out the straw walker racks to the rear.

(Fig. 7)

Straw walker
Installing the straw walker racks

Insert the straw walker racks into the straw walker
housing from the rear.
(Fig. 7)

Install the wooden bearings (G) with as many
intermediate plates (H) as necessary to provide
as little play as possible and still make the bearings
run smoothly.
CAUTION!
Easy lateral shifting of the wooden bearings

must be possible, but the straw walker racks
must not tilt.
8 Tighten wooden bearings only manually. Use
new VM 10 lock nuts for this.
Rotate the straw walker shafts a few times and place

both straw walker shafts at their rear dead centre.
Tighten the wooden bearings crosswise with
a tightening torque of 26 Nm.
CAUTION!
After tightening each wooden bearing, rotate

the straw walker shafts one more time.
The bearings must run evenly and smoothly.
9
Repeat adjustment if necessary.
Make sure the straw walker racks are
free-wheeling.
(Fig. 8, 9)

Straw walker

Loosely install the straw walker racks to the bearings
of the straw walker shafts at the front and the rear.
Tighten the ball bearings.
CAUTION!
After tightening each ball bearing, rotate the

10 straw walker shafts one more time.
free-wheeling.
(Fig. 10)
Install under-walker return floor.

Bolt down the sensor housing (F) and connect
the cables.
Install the cable protection (E) on the right-hand
machine side.
(Fig. 11)
11

Tension the straw chopper drive belt (20) using
the tensioning lever (H).
(Fig. 12)
12

Straw walker
Fold down the rear hood (B) and lock it.

Install intensive separation system drive belt (12)
and adjust.
Install straw walker drive belt (11) and adjust.
(Fig. 13)
13
Removing the front straw walker shaft

Remove the straw walker racks.
On the left-hand machine side, release the safety
of lock collar (A) of the lock collar bearing and knock
it off.
Unscrew the sheet metal flange (B) from the machine
housing.
(Fig. 14)
14
Drive the lock collar bearing off of the straw walker

shaft from the inside.
(Fig. 15)
15
On the right-hand machine side, release the safety

of lock collar (C) of the lock collar bearing and knock
it off.
Unscrew the sheet metal flange (D) from the machine
housing.
Drive the lock collar bearing off of the straw walker
shaft from the inside.
(Fig. 16)
16

Straw walker

Remove the straw walker shaft from the machine
to the right-hand side.
(Fig. 17)
17

Push the straw walker shaft slightly to the outside and
remove from the inside.
Disassemble the straw walker shafts
(see page 4.2.14).
(Fig. 18)
18

Straw walker
Installing the front straw walker shaft

Insert the straw walker shaft from the right-hand
machine side.
Install the lock collar bearings on the straw walker
shaft on both sides and bolt down to the machine
side walls using the sheet metal flanges (B and D).
Arrest the lock collar bearings using the lock collars
(A and C) so that the dimension (X) from the outer
bearing collar of the straw walker shaft to the machine
19 side wall is the same on both sides.
Install straw walker racks.
(Fig. 14, 16, 19)

(see page 4.2.14).
Lift the straw walker shaft, completely assembled
including straw walker bearings, into the machine.
shaft on both sides and bolt down to the machine side
walls using the sheet metal flanges (B and D).
(A and C) so that the dimension (X) from the centre
20 of the outermost straw walker bearing to the machine
side wall is the same on both sides.
Install straw walker racks.
(Fig. 14, 16, 20)

Straw walker
Removing the rear straw walker shaft

With spreading unit fitted:
Remove spreading unit drive belt (14).
With chaff spreader fitted:
21 Relieve the tension of the straw chopper drive belt (20)
using the tensioning lever (H) and remove belt from
the jockey pulley.
(Fig. 21)

Unscrew the straw walker bearings and remove the
bottom bearing shell (A). Pay attention to the number
of intermediate plates (B). Mark the position of the
bearing shells.
Completely remove the wooden bearing and bolt
together loosely.
CAUTION!
Mount the wooden bearing at the same location

22 when re-installing.
(Fig. 22)

Unscrew the straw walker racks at the bearings
of the straw walker shafts at the front and at the rear.
(Fig. 23)
23

Straw walker
Unlock the rear hood (C) and fold up.

Raise the straw walker racks at the rear using
a suitable lifting device.
(Fig. 24)
24
Remove key of straw walker drive pulley (D) and

remove pulley.
(Fig. 25)
25
Release the safety of lock collar (E) of the lock collar

Unscrew the sheet metal flange (F) from the machine
housing.
(Fig. 26)
26
DOMINATOR 108 VX:

Unscrew jacket sheet (G) and bracket (H).
(Fig. 27)
27

Straw walker

Unscrew and remove the straw chopper deflection
pulley (R) and the jockey pulley (S).
(Fig. 28)
28
Release the safety of lock collar (K) of the lock collar

Unscrew the sheet metal flange (L) from the machine
housing.
(Fig. 29)
29

Drive the right-hand lock collar bearing off of the straw
walker shaft from the inside.
Lift the straw walker shaft out of the machine
to the left-hand side.
(Fig. 30, 31)
30
31

Straw walker

Drive the right-hand and left-hand lock collar bearing
from the straw walker shaft from the inside.
Push the straw walker shaft slightly to the outside
and remove from the inside.
(see page 4.2.14).
(Fig. 32, 33)
32
33
Installing the rear straw walker shaft

Insert the straw walker shaft from the left-hand
machine side.
walls using the sheet metal flanges (L and F).
(K and E) so that the dimension (X) from the outer
bearing collar of the straw walker shaft to the machine
(Fig. 26, 29, 34)

Straw walker

Slightly grease the wooden bearings (A) and install
with as many intermediate plates (B) as necessary
to provide as little play as possible and still make
the bearings run smoothly.
CAUTION!
Easy lateral shifting of the wooden bearings

must be possible, but the straw walker racks
must not tilt.
35 Tighten wooden bearings only manually.
Use new VM 10 lock nuts for this.

Tighten the wooden bearings crosswise with
a tightening torque of 26 Nm.
CAUTION!
After tightening each wooden bearing, rotate

36
free-wheeling.
(Fig. 35, 36)

Assemble straw walker shaft (see page 4.2.14).
Lift the straw walker shaft, completely assembled
including straw walker bearings, into the machine.
walls using the sheet metal flanges (L and F).
(K and E) so that the dimension (X) from the centre
of the outermost straw walker bearing to the machine
(Fig. 26, 29, 37)

Straw walker

Loosely bolt down the straw walker racks at the
bearings of the straw walker shafts at the front and
at the rear.
Tighten the ball bearings.
CAUTION!
38 After tightening each ball bearing, rotate

Make sure the straw walker racks
are free-wheeling.
(Fig. 38)

Install the straw chopper deflection pulley (R)
and the jockey pulley (S).
DOMINATOR 108 VX:
Bolt down jacket sheet (G) and bracket (H).
(Fig. 39)
39
Slightly tension the jockey pulley (M), align it to the

straw walker drive pulley (D) using a straightedge and
fasten it by keys.
(Fig. 40)
40

Straw walker
Installing the rear straw walker shaft.

Install and adjust straw walker drive belt (11).
Install and adjust intensive separation system drive
belt (12).
With spreading unit fitted:
Install and adjust spreading unit drive belt (14).
With chaff spreader fitted:
Install and adjust chaff spreader drive belt (15).
Tension the straw chopper drive belt (20) using
41 the tensioning lever (H).
(Fig. 41)
Perform a test run.

The straw walker drive belt (11) must not make contact
with jockey pulley (M) on its side.
clearance of 2 mm at (N). Align the straw walker drive
pulley (D) if necessary.
(Fig. 42)
42
Dismantling the straw walker shafts

(for straw walker shafts with ball bearings)
Remove front and / or rear straw walker shaft.
Remove cotter pin from face-end slotted nut (6)
and loosen using a special tool.
Special tool:
Tool holder, Part No. 181 627.0
Adjustment tool for straw walker bearing,
Part No. 181 620.0.
(Fig. 43, 45)
43

Straw walker
Drive the deep groove ball bearing (4) off of the taper
lock adapter sleeve (1) together with the bearing
flanges (2), using a plastic-tip hammer.
CAUTION!
Do not drive back the taper lock adapter

sleeve (1) as it is split and may jam.
(Fig. 44, 45)

44
Straw walker bearing, exploded view:

1 Taper lock adapter sleeve H 208, split type
2 Bearing flange
3 Ring
4 Deep groove ball bearing 6208-k-2rs-c3
5 Circlip
7 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 35 DIN 931-8.8
Lock nut VM 8
(Fig. 45)
45
Assembling the straw walker shafts

(for straw walker shafts with ball bearings)
Pre-assemble deep groove ball bearing (4)
with the ring (3) and the bearing flanges (2).
CAUTION!
Always install the lock nuts (7) in the opposed

sense of the face-end slotted nut (6).
Pay attention to the installation position of the
deep groove ball bearing (4) as the inside ring
is conical.
(Fig. 45)

Straw walker
DOMINATOR 108 VX
V P S X X X X X S Q
L N R
N
H
T W X X X X X W U
L N R
N
40981
46
DOMINATOR 98 - 88 VX
V Z Y X X X X Y O
L N R
H
V Y X X X X Y Z
L N R
N
40980
47

Straw walker
All bearings must be free of grease and paint.

Push the pre-assembled straw walker bearing
on the straw walker shaft.
Place taper lock adapter sleeve (1) on the shaft using
glue, e.g. DELO-ML-5328.
Loosely turn on the face-end slotted nut (6) with
the circlip (5) on the taper lock adapter sleeve (1).
CAUTION!
48 The outside straw walker bearings are installed

with the face-end slotted nuts (N) to the inside.
(Fig. 45, 46, 47, 48)
Aligning the straw walker bearings on the straw walker

shaft:
V = Front straw walker shaft
H = Rear straw walker shaft
L = Left-hand machine side
R = Right-hand machine side
O = 80 mm
P = 55 mm
Q = 75 mm
S = 120 mm
T = 172-4 mm
V = 181 mm
W = 125 mm
X = 262 mm
Y = 175 mm
Z = 60 mm
(Fig. 46, 47)
Pre-tension the face-end slotted nut (6) to 40 Nm

Turn the face-end slotted nut (6) further by 2 slots and
then enough to allow it being secured by the circlip (5).
Special tool:
Torque wrench, Part No. 181 626.0
Straw walker bearing adjusting tool,
Part No. 181 620.0
Install front and rear straw walker shafts.
(Fig. 45, 49)
49

Straw walker

Straw walker drive
Straw walker drive
STRAW WALKER DRIVE
Removing the straw walker drive jockey pulley

Relieve the tension of straw walker drive belt (11).
Unscrew jockey pulley (3) from tensioning screw (18).
(Fig. 1, 2, 7)
Installing the straw walker drive jockey pulley

1. Loosely bolt the jockey pulley (3) to the
bracket (17) with tensioning screw (18),
2. Tension the straw walker drive belt (11).
3. Tighten the jockey pulley (3).
(Fig. 1, 2, 7)

drive deflection pulley
Relieve the tension of intensive separation system
drive belt (12).
Unscrew deflection pulley (28) from the angle (24).
(Fig. 3, 7)

Straw walker drive

drive deflection pulley
1. Bolt the deflection pulley (28) with contact
washer (23) and hexagon nut (22) to the
angle (24) and tighten.
2. Tension intensive separation system drive
belt (12).
(Fig. 3, 4, 7)

drive jockey pulley
Relieve the tension of intensive separation system
drive belt (12).
Unscrew jockey pulley (38) from tensioning screw (1).
(Fig. 5, 7)

drive jockey pulley
1. Loosely bolt the jockey pulley (38) with hexagon
bolt (45), contact washer (44) and washer (43)
to the tensioning screw (1).
2. Tension the intensive separation system drive
belt (12).
3. Tighten the jockey pulley (38).
(Fig. 5, 6, 7)
6

Straw walker drive
Straw walker drive
7
Straw walker drive, exploded view 32 Circlip 20 x 1.2 DIN 471
33 Jockey pulley
1 Tensioning screw
34 V-belt pulley
36 Spring
37 Washer
39 Bearing pin
6 Pin
40 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472
42 Jockey pulley
43 Washer
10 Jockey pulley
12 Hub
45 Hex. bolt M 12 x 60 DIN 931-8.8
13 V-belt pulley
14 Contact washer A 8 R 11 = Straw walker drive belt (11)
15 Hex. bolt M 8 x 20 DIN 933-8.8 R 12 = Intensive separation system drive belt (12)
17 Bracket (Fig. 7)
18 Tensioning screw
20 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
24 Angle
26 Double V-belt pulley
29 Pin
30 Circlip 47 x 1.75 DIN 472

Straw walker drive

Threshing drum
Threshing drum
THRESHING DRUM
Removing the left-hand threshing drum
bearing
Dismount the left-hand drive wheel.
Remove the threshing drum drive belt (24).
Remove guard (U).

Unscrew safety frame (W).
(Fig. 1)
Unscrew spring-loaded cylinder (F) completely with

bracket.
Loosen set collar (G) and remove jockey pulley arm.
(Fig. 2)
Unscrew the hexagon bolt from the face of the

flange shaft.
(Fig. 3)

Threshing drum
Remove the V-belt pulley completely including slip

clutch from the flange shaft by means of a puller.
For this purpose use a head-centered hexagon bolt
M 12 x 30 DIN 933 Part No. 237 461.0.
(Fig. 4)
Measure the clearance between the end of shaft and

the drum turning disc using a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 5)
Loosen the gib head key of the drum turning disc from
the flange shaft.
(Fig. 6)
Remove the drum turning disc from the flange shaft by

means of a puller.
(Fig. 7)

Threshing drum
Unscrew door (P).

(Fig. 8)
Unscrew the magnetic pick-up together with the

angle (H) and the lubricating line (N).
(Fig. 9)
Support the threshing drum with wooden wedges

and fasten.
(Fig. 10)
10
Bend the tab washer of the face-end slotted nut.

Loosen the face-end slotted nut using a special tool.
(Fig. 11)
11

Threshing drum
Special tool:
1 Tube
Part No. 181 611.0
Part No. 180 142.0
1
(Fig. 12)
2
32030 12
Loosen the expansion pin of the adapter sleeve

bearing by means of a block-ended tube.
(Fig. 13)
13
Unscrew the bearing unit from the machine frame.

(Fig. 14)
14
Emery the flange shaft (1) and oil.

Loosen the bearing unit from the flange shaft (1) using
a screwdriver. While doing so, slightly lift the threshing
drum with a tyre mounting lever.
(Fig. 15)
15

Threshing drum
Remove the bearing unit from the flange shaft using

a puller.
(Fig. 16)
16
Dismantling the left-hand threshing drum bearing

Separate the bearing shell (6) from the locating
disc (3) using a screwdriver.
(Fig. 17)
17
Push out the self-aligning ball bearing from the bearing

shell (6) using a puller.
Special tool:
1 Head-centered hexagon bolt
M 12 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 458.0
2 Washer
Outside dia. 55, thickness 5 DIN 522
Part No. 238 013.0
(Fig. 18)
18

Threshing drum
Left-hand threshing drum bearing, exploded view:

1 Flange shaft
2 Felt strip
3 Locating disc
4 Expansion pin H 210 DIN 5415
5 Self-aligning ball bearing 1210 k/c3
6 Bearing shell
7 Tab washer 50
8 Face-end slotted nut M 50 x 1,5
Spring washer 12
24715
19 (Fig. 19)
Assembling the left-hand threshing drum bearing

Push the self-aligning ball bearing (5) into the bearing
shell (6) using a puller.
Special tool:
1 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0
2 Head-centered hexagon bolt
M 16 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 463.0
20 CAUTION!
The self-aligning ball bearing (5) has a conical

bore. Observe correct assembly position
relating to the expansion pin.
(Fig. 20)
Insert expansion pin (4), tab washer (7) and face-end

slotted nut (8) loosely into the bearing sleeve (6).
(Fig. 21)
21

Threshing drum
Drive the pre-assembled bearing shell (6) on the

locating disc (3) using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 22)
22
Installing the left-hand threshing drum

bearing
Mount the bearing unit on the flange shaft (1) with
two hexagon bolts and two hexagon nuts until it makes
contact with the machine housing.
Special tools
1 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 140 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 233 011.0 – 2 pcs.
2 Hexagon nut
M 12 DIN 934
23
Part No. 236 172.0 – 2 pcs.
(Fig. 23)
Bolt down the bearing unit to the machine housing by

means of four socket head bolts.
(Fig. 24)
24

Threshing drum
Pre-tighten the face-end slotted nut with a tightening

torque of 35 Nm, using a special tool.
(Fig. 25)
25
Turn the face-end slotted nut for another 60°.

(Fig. 26)
26
Special tool:
1 Tube
Part No. 181 611.0
Part No. 180 142.0
Part No. 174 358.0
(Fig. 27)
40506 27
Turn the face-end slotted nut (8) further until the tab
washer (7) corresponds with the groove.
Secure face-end slotted nut.
(Fig. 28)
28

Threshing drum
Bolt down the magnetic pick-up along with the

angle (H) and the lubricating line (N).
Fit door (P).
(Fig. 8, 9)
Push the drum turning disc on the flange shaft (1).

Arrest the gib head key using the dimension previously
determined.
(Fig. 29)
29
Check the setting of the magnetic pick-up.

Checking dimension (X) = 1 ± 0.5 mm
(Fig. 30)
30
Mount the slip clutch completely including V-belt pulley

on the flange shaft by means of a special tool.
(Fig. 31)
31

Threshing drum
Special tool:
1 Socket head bolt
M 12 x 380 DIN 912-8.8
Part No. 215 373.0
2 Hexagon nut
M 12 DIN 934
Part No. 236 172.0
Part No. 177 899.0
4 Washer dia. 40 x dia. 13 DIN 522
5 4 3 2 1
Part No. 234 377.0
5 Tube
33443 32 Inside dia. 30, outside dia. 40, 150 long
(Fig. 32)
Turn the hexagon nut into the face of the flange shaft
and tighten.
(Fig. 33)
33
Mount spring-loaded cylinder (F) completely with

bracket.
Attach jockey pulley arm and secure by means of set
collar (G).
Bolt down safety frame (W).
Fit guard (U).
Install cutterbar drive belt (1) and adjust.
Mount left-hand drive wheel.
Lubricate threshing drum bearing.
(Fig. 1, 2)

Threshing drum
Removing the right-hand threshing drum

bearing
– For machines equipped with drum speed
reduction kit
Remove drum speed reduction kit.
– For machines equipped with drum variable
speed drive n = 650 – 1500 rpm
Without drum speed reduction kit
Remove threshing drum variable speed drive
(spring-loaded).
(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
For machines equipped with drum variable
speed drive n = 650 – 1250 rpm:
Dismount right-hand side drive wheel.
Measure the clearance between the shaft end and the

V-belt pulley or hub using a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 34)
34
Loosen the gib head key of the V-belt pulley or hub

from the flange shaft.
(Fig. 35)
35

Threshing drum
Remove the V-belt pulley or hub from the flange shaft

by means of a puller.
(Fig. 36)
36
Dismount lubricating line (N) and unscrew door (P).

(Fig. 37)
37
Support the threshing drum with wooden wedges and

fasten.
(Fig. 38)
38

(Fig. 39)
39

Threshing drum
Special tool:
1 Tube
Part No. 181 611.0
Part No. 180 142.0
1
(Fig. 40)
2
32030 40

(Fig. 41)
41

(Fig. 42)
42
If cover plates (L) are provided, unscrew one cover

plate.
(Fig. 43)
43

Threshing drum
Unscrew four hexagon bolts (11) from the bearing

unit (R).
(Fig. 44)
44
Emery the flange shaft (1) and oil.

Remove the bearing unit (R) from the flange shaft (1)
(Fig. 45)
45
Special tool:
1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Hexagon bolt
M 12 x 220 DIN 931-8.8
Part No. 242 380.0 – 2 pcs.
3 Washer
dia. 40 x dia. 13 DIN 522
Part No. 234 377.0 – 2 pcs.
1 3 2 (Fig. 46)
35508 46

Threshing drum
Dismantling the right-hand threshing drum bearing

Unscrew cheese-head screw (10).
Separate the bearing shell (6) from the bearing
shell (3).
(Fig. 47)
47
Fasten the bearing shell (6) to the workbench by

means of screw clamps.
Place puller on face-end slotted nut (9) and extract
spherical roller bearing (5) from bearing shell (6).
(Fig. 48)
48
Right-hand threshing drum bearing, exploded view:

1 Flange shaft
2 Felt ring
3 Bearing shell
4 Expansion pin H 211 o.m.u.s
5 Spherical roller bearing 20211 k tn9 c3 DIN 635
6 Bearing shell
7 Felt ring
8 Tab washer
9 Face-end slotted nut M 55 x 2
24717
Detent edged ring
49 11 Hexagon bolt M 12 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer A 12
(Fig. 49)

Threshing drum
Assembling the right-hand threshing drum bearing

Insert the expansion pin, the circlip and the face-end
slotted nut loosely into the spherical roller bearing.
Press spherical roller bearing into bearing shell (6)
CAUTION!
The spherical roller bearing has a conical bore.

Observe correct assembly position relating to
the expansion pin.
50
(Fig. 50)
Special tool:
1 Lever nut
1 Part No. 181 880.0
2 Spindle
Part No. 181 877.0
3
Part No.177 899.0
4 4 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0 – 2 pcs.
5 Sleeve
6 Part No. 181 881.0
6 Tube
(Fig. 51)
4
33404 51
Bolt bearing shell (6) and bearing shell (3) together by

means of cheese-head screw (10).
(Fig. 47)

Threshing drum
Installing the right-hand threshing drum

bearing
Slightly lift the threshing drum with a tyre mounting
lever and push bearing unit (R) on flange shaft (1).
Observe correct mounting position.
(Fig. 52)
52
Bolt down the bearing unit (R) to the machine housing

using hexagon bolts.
(Fig. 53)
53
If cover plates (L) are fitted, re-fit the dismounted cover

plate.
(Fig. 54)
54

(Fig. 55)
55

Threshing drum

(Fig. 56)
56
Special tool:
1 Tube
Part No. 181 611.0
Part No.181 615.0
Part No. 174 358.0
(Fig. 57)
40506 57
Turn the face-end slotted nut (9) further until the tab
washer (8) corresponds with the groove.
Secure face-end slotted nut (9).
(Fig. 58)
58
Fit lubricating line (N).

Fit door (P).
Lubricate threshing drum bearing.
(Fig. 37, 42)

Threshing drum

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
For machines equipped with drum variable
(DOMINATOR 108 VX):
Push V-belt pulley or hub on the flange shaft (1)
using the dimension previously determined and
fasten by means of the gib head key.
59 Install threshing drum drive belt (24) and adjust.

Mount right-hand side drive wheel.
(Fig. 59)
– For machines equipped with drum speed

reduction kit
Remove drum speed reduction kit.
Install existing pulleys and insert key.
Mount threshing drum variable speed drive
(spring-loaded).
Removing the threshing drum

Move the concave to its lowest position.
Remove left-hand drive wheel.
Dismount feeder housing.
Dismount drum inspection cover (T).
(Fig. 60)
60

Threshing drum
Remove guard (U).

(Fig. 61)
61
Tie up jockey pulley (S).

Unscrew safety frame (W).
(Fig. 62)
62
If cover plates are provided, mark and unscrew two

opposite cover plates.
(Fig. 63)
63
Determine the clearance between shaft end and drum

turning disc (16) using a depth measuring device.
(Fig. 64)
64

Threshing drum
Loosen the gib head key of the drum turning disc (16)
from the flange shaft.
(Fig. 65)
65
Remove the drum turning disc (16) from the flange

shaft by means of a puller.
(Fig. 66)
66
Unscrew the magnetic pick-up together with the

angle (13).
(Fig. 67)
67

To do this, fasten the threshing drum using a squared
timber.
(Fig. 68)
68

Threshing drum
Special tool:
1 Tube Part No. 181 611.0
2 Special socket spanner Part No. 180 142.0
(Fig. 69)
1
2
32030 69

(Fig. 70)
70
Support the threshing drum with wooden wedges.

(Fig. 71)
71
Unscrew the threshing drum on both sides at the

mounting flanges.
(Fig. 72)
72

Threshing drum
Hang up the threshing drum in a suitable lifting device.

(Fig. 73)
73
Press the flange shaft to the side using a tyre

mounting lever.
(Fig. 74)
74
Turn the threshing drum by means of a tyre mounting

lever so that the rasp bars (19) are guided past the
corner reinforcements (E) of the drum housing.
Take out threshing drum.
CAUTION!
The mounting flange can only be passed

through the rasp bars (19) with their flattened
sides.
75
(Fig. 75)

Threshing drum
Replacing the threshing drum rasp bars

Replace damaged or worn rasp bars when the
threshing drum has been removed.
A Worn rasp bar with pointed fins
B Rasp bar with flawless fins
(Fig. 76)
76
If cover plates (28) are provided, mark them and

unscrew.
(Fig. 77)
77
Unscrew the rasp bars (19) from the drum discs.

(Fig. 78)
78
Undo the weld seams (L) at the drum discs.

(Fig. 79)
79

Threshing drum
Break open the weld seams using a gas wrench.

Remove rasp bar (19).
(Fig. 80)
80
Grind the drum disc to a clean finish.

Fit new rasp bars.
Weld rasp bars to drum discs.
If cover plates (28) are provided, bolt them except for
two opposite cover plates.
(Fig. 78, 81)
81
NOTE:
Do not apply the weld seams over the entire

width of the drum discs, but leave approx.
5 mm clear on each side.
Balance the threshing drum after each
repair.
Turn off the threshing drum on the lathe if
the height difference of one or several rasp
bars is more than 1.5 mm.
Use new threshing drum in case of major
damage, e.g. damaged drum discs or shaft.
Re-tighten rasp bar bolts after 10 operating
hours.

Threshing drum
Replacing the threshing drum shaft

Dismount the threshing drum.
Measure the clearance between the shaft end and the
mounting flange of the outermost drum disc.
(Fig. 82)
82
Pull out the gib head keys by means of a key extractor.

(Fig. 83)
83
Clean the threshing drum shaft (26) thoroughly over its

entire length, emery it and push it out using a special
tool.
When installing the threshing drum shaft (26), push it
in according to the measured dimension and fasten
using the gib head keys.
(Fig. 82, 83, 84)
84
Special tool:
1 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 621.0
2 Washer 13 x 30 x 3
Part No. 236 844.0 – 2 pcs.
Part No. 236 302.0 – 2 pcs.
Part No. 236 172.0
(Fig. 85)
38878 85

Threshing drum
Threshing drum
86
Threshing drum, exploded view 26 Threshing drum shaft
27 Flange shaft
28 Cover plates
2 Tab washer 50
3 Threaded bushing LI4m DIN 3900
4 Bearing shell
Contact washer A 12
5 Felt strip
30 Stub, left-hand
6 Expansion pin H 210 o.m.u.s DIN 5415
7 –
9 Spring washer 12
Circlip 14
10 Locating disc
32 Drum disc
Felt strip
11 Self-aligning ball bearing 1210 k/c3 DIN 630 (Fig. 86)
Contact washer A 8
13 Angle
14 Magnetic pick-up
15 Hexagon nut Bm18 x 1.5
16 Drum turning disc
18 Threshing drum
19 Rasp bars L/r
21 Square washer 12.5 x 21 x 3
22 Lock nut VM 12
23 Drum disc
25 Drum disc

Threshing drum
Threshing drum
Installing the threshing drum

Lift the threshing drum into the drum housing using a
suitable lifting device.
Observe that the mounting flange are turned so that
the flattened sides may pass between the rasp bars.
(Fig. 87)
87
Bolt down the threshing drum to the mounting flange

on the left-hand and right-hand side.
(Fig. 88)
88
The threshing drum must be positioned in the centre of

the drum housing.
This shall be confirmed by measuring the clearance
between the rasp bars (19) and the drum housing side
wall.
If necessary, the right-hand threshing drum bearing
must be loosened and the mounting flange must be
moved inside the bearing.
(Fig. 89)
89
Fasten the threshing drum by means of wedges.

(Fig. 90)
90

Threshing drum

(Fig. 91)
91
Special tool:
1 Tube
Part No.181 611.0
Part No. 180 142.0
Part No. 174 358.0
(Fig. 92)
40506 92
Turn the face-end slotted nut further until the

tab washer corresponds with the groove.
Secure face-end slotted nut.
(Fig. 93)
93
Bolt down the magnetic pick-up along with the

angle (13).
(Fig. 67)

Threshing drum
Push the drum turning disc (16) on the mounting

flange (30).
Fasten the gib head key considering the previously
determined dimension.
Check the setting of the magnetic pick-up.
Checking dimension (X) = 1 ± 0.5 mm
(Fig. 94)
94
If cover plates (28) are provided, fit the missing plates.

(Fig. 95)
95
Bolt down safety frame (W).

Fit guard (U).
Install feeder housing.
Mount left-hand drive wheel.
(Fig. 60, 61, 62)

Threshing drum speed reduction kit
THRESHING DRUM SPEED REDUCTION KIT
Removing the threshing drum speed

reduction kit
Jack up machine at front right-hand side and safely
support it under the drive axle.
Remove right-hand drive wheel.
Drain transmission oil. To do this, place a container
of suitable size below the speed reduction kit and
unscrew oil drain plug (28).
Screw in oil drain plug (28) after draining the trans-
1
mission oil.
(Fig. 1)
Unscrew support (39). To do this, block the threshing

drum speed reduction kit.
(Fig. 2)
Unscrew hexagon bolt (37) and remove together with

washer (36). To do this, block the threshing drum
speed reduction kit at (C and D).
(Fig. 3)

Hang threshing drum speed reduction kit into a

suitable lifting device and force off of the flanged shaft
(Fig. 4)
Special tool:
1 Threaded spindle
Part No. 181 801.1
2 Hex. bolt M 16 x 50 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 235 586.0
3 Washer 17
4 Puller bridge
Part No. 181 800.0
5 Hex. bolt M 10 x 35 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 874.0
6 Washer 10.5
22065
7 Puller plate
5 Part No. 181 935.2
8 Levelling piece with ball
Part No. 181 849.0
(Fig. 5)
Dismantling the threshing drum speed reduction

kit
Mark speed reduction kit halves with regard to each
other.
Unscrew top speed reduction kit half (A).
(Fig. 6)

Force the two speed reduction kit halves apart by

screwing two hexagon bolts M 8 x 70 DIN 933-8.8
through the opposite threaded bores.
(Fig. 7)
Remove balance weight (32) with O-ring (45), as well

as stepped planet gear (19) and tapered ring (20).
(Fig. 8, 23)
Force out sun gear (31) from the bottom speed

reduction kit half (B) using a puller, a hexagon bolt
M 16 x 20 DIN 933-8.8 (head-centred) and a washer
of outside dia. 65 mm, inside dia. 16.5 mm and 15 mm
thickness.
(Fig. 9, 23)
Drive shaft seal (17) out of speed reduction kit half (B).
(Fig. 10, 23)
10

Pull out cylindrical roller bearing outer ring (18) from

the speed reduction kit half (B).
(Fig. 11, 23)
11
Pull off cylindrical roller bearing inner rings (18) from

the stepped planet gear (19).
(Fig. 12, 23)
12
Pull off deep groove ball bearing (26) from the sun
gear (31) using a puller, a hexagon bolt M 16 x 20
DIN 933-8.8 (head-centred) and a washer of outside
dia. 65 mm, inside dia. 16.5 mm and 15 mm thickness.
(Fig. 13, 23)
13
Remove cylindrical roller bearing inner ring (24) from

sun gear (25).
(Fig. 14, 23)
14

Force sun gear (25) out of the top speed reduction kit
half (A) using a puller, a hexagon bolt M 16 x 20
(Fig. 15, 23)
15
Drive shaft seal (17) out of speed reduction kit half (A).
(Fig. 16, 24)
16
Pull out cylindrical roller bearing outer ring (18) from

speed reduction kit half (A).
While doing so, remove front tight-fitting washer (44).
(Fig. 17, 24)
17
Pull off deep groove ball bearing (26) from sun

gear (25) using a puller, a hexagon bolt M 16 x 20
(Fig. 18, 23)
18

Force cylindrical roller bearing outer ring (24) out of

the sun gear (25) using a special tool.
(Fig. 19, 23)
19
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Locating disc, Part No. 181 879.0
3 Tube, outside dia. 90 mm, inside dia. 80 mm,
100 mm long
60 mm long
5 Washer 16
(Fig. 20)
20
Force cylindrical roller bearing outer ring (24) out of

the sun gear (25) using a special tool.
(Fig. 21, 23)
21
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Locating disc, Part No. 181 879.0
130 mm long
70 mm long
5 Washer 16
(Fig. 22)
22

23
Threshing drum speed reduction kit, exploded view: 44 Tight-fitting washer
45 O-ring 65 x 3 -n DIN 3771
16 Planetary gear
17 Shaft seal As 80 x 100 x 10 DIN 3760 R 24 = Threshing drum drive belt (24)
18 Cylindrical roller bearing Nj 2207 ecma/c3
19 Stepped planet gear (Fig. 23)
20 Tapered ring
21 Cylindrical roller bearing Nj 207 e. tvp2 DIN 5412
22 Stepped sleeve
23 Snap ring
24 Cylindrical roller bearing 28 x 45 x 17/20
25 Sun gear
26 Deep groove ball bearing 16016 c4 DIN 625
Tight-fitting washer
O-ring 65 x 3 -n DIN 3771
27 Seal
28 Oil drain plug M 16 x 1.5 DIN 906
29 Threaded pin
31 Sun gear
32 Balance weight
33 Cylinder pin 10 x 28 -a DIN 8735
35 Hex. bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
36 Washer
37 Hex. bolt M 16 x 45 DIN 933-8.8
38 O-ring 45 x 1.5 -n DIN 3771
39 Support
40 Conical seat bolt
41 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8

24
Assembling the threshing drum speed reduction
kit
NOTE:
Apply multipurpose transmission oil to all

moving parts, particularly the bearings, prior to
assembly.
(Fig. 24)

1. Insert snap ring (23) into sun gear (25) and press
in needle bearing outer ring (24) using a special
tool.
(Fig. 24, 25)
25
Special tool:
1 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
Part No. 237 375.1
2 Locating disc
Part No. 181 879.0
3 Tube
70 mm long
4 Washer 16
(Fig. 26)
26
2. Heat up sun gear (25) to approx. 100 °C.

3. Insert tapered ring (22) and cylindrical roller
bearing outer ring (21).
4. Check correct bearing seat by means of a blow.
(Fig. 24, 27)
27
5. Heat up deep groove ball bearing (26) to approx.

100 °C and install on sun gear (25).
(Fig. 24, 28)
28

7. Heat up deep groove ball bearing (26) to approx.

100 °C and install on sun gear (31).
(Fig. 24, 29)
29
9. Drive cylindrical roller bearing outer ring (18) with

existing tight-fitting washers (44) into the top
speed reduction kit half (A).
(Fig. 24, 30)
30
10. Drive the pre-assembled sun gear (25) into the

top speed reduction kit half (A) at the outer ring of
the deep groove ball bearing (26).
(Fig. 24, 31)
31
11. Fill the hollow spaces of sun gear (25) and of

cylindrical roller bearing outer ring (21) with
multipurpose grease, e.g. CLAAS multipurpose
grease EP 2 and insert cylindrical roller bearing
inner ring (21).
(Fig. 24, 32)
32

12. Drive cylindrical roller bearing outer ring (18) into

the bottom speed reduction kit half (B).
(Fig. 24, 33)
33
13. Drive pre-assembled sun gear (31) into the

bottom speed reduction kit half (B) using
(Fig. 24, 34)
34
14. Heat up cylindrical roller bearing inner rings (18)

to approx. 100 °C and install on the stepped
planet gear (19).
(Fig. 24, 35)
35
16. Insert balance weight (32) with O-ring (45) as well

as stepped planet gear (19) and tapered ring (20)
into the bottom speed reduction kit half (B).
(Fig. 24, 36)
36

17. Pull the cylinder pins (33) out of the bottom speed
reduction kit half (B) using a special tool.
(Fig. 23, 24, 37)
37
Special tool:
1 Striking tool, Part No. 181 604.0
2 Tie rod, Part No. 181 606.0
3 Adapter, Part No. 181 607.0
(Fig. 38)
38158 38
18. Clean sealing faces of speed reduction kit halves

and threads.
19. Bolt the top speed reduction kit half (A) to the
bottom speed reduction kit half (B) without a seal,
using four hexagon bolts (35) and slightly tension
them by hand.
20. Determine the dimension (X) at several spots
between the speed reduction kit halves as soon
as it becomes more difficult to rotate the sun
gear (25).
This dimension (X) should be 0 – 0.1 mm.
39
Required play of cylindrical roller bearings (18)
= 0.3 mm
Thickness of seal (27) = 0.3 mm
Compensate with tight-fitting washers (44)
if necessary.
(Fig. 23, 24, 39)

21. Apply liquid sealing compound, e.g. Omni FIT

FD 10 and place seal (27) in position.
22. Insert cylinder pins (33) and tapered ring (20).
(Fig. 23, 24, 40)
40
23. Install top speed reduction kit half (A) evenly on

the bottom speed reduction kit half (B) with two
hexagon bolts M 8 x 70 DIN 933-8.8 and two
hexagon nuts M 8 and then bolt down with
hexagon bolts (35).
24. Screw in threaded pins (29) with liquid sealing
compound, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
(Fig. 23, 24, 41)
41

purpose grease EP 2, to shaft seals (17) and drive
them into both speed reduction kit halves so they
are flush at the outside.
26. Fill in 1 litre of multipurpose transmission oil at the
oil drain plug (28).
(Fig. 23, 24, 42)
42

Installing the threshing drum speed reduction

kit
1. Hang threshing drum speed reduction kit into a
suitable lifting device and install on the flanged
shaft using a special tool.
(Fig. 43)
43
Special tool:
1 Washer
15 mm thick
Part No. 177 899.0
3 Washer 16
2
5 Hex. bolt M 16 x 300 DIN 933-8.8
1 3 4 5
Part No. 237 375.1
33389 (Fig. 44)

44

purpose grease EP 2, to needle bearing inner
ring (24) and insert it.
(Fig. 24, 45)
45
3. Screw the hexagon bolt (37) and washer (36) into

the face end of shaft using liquid sealing com-
pound, e.g. DELO-ML-5349, and tighten. To do
this, block the threshing drum speed reduction kit
at (C and D).
(Fig. 24, 46)
46

4. Fill the centring lid of the support (39) with multi-

purpose grease, e.g. CLAAS multipurpose grease
EP 2, bolt down with new O-ring (38) and hexagon
bolts (41) and tighten.
CAUTION!
The hexagon bolts (41) must be inserted with

liquid sealing compound, e.g. DELO-ML-5349.
47
(Fig. 23, 47)
5. Install and adjust threshing drum drive belt (24).
6. Install right-hand drive wheel.


Transmission gearbox
TRANSMISSION GEARBOX
Lowering the transmission gearbox

with drum brakes
NOTE: When the transmission gearbox has been
swung down, the following components can be
removed:
– Control rods
– Drive shaft
– Main shaft
– Intermediate axle
Raise the trunking, and secure with the trunking

support.
Jack up the front left-hand side of the machine
and secure safely with axle stands under the axle.
Secure the machine with wheel chocks in order to stop
the machine from rolling, then release the parking
brake.
Remove the left-hand drive wheel.
Drain the oil from the transmission gearbox.
G = oil level plug
1 H = drain plug
(Fig. 1)
Remove the pipe clamps (G) that support the hydraulic

pipes onto the machine chassis.
(Fig. 2)

Remove the four hex. bolts (H) from the hydrostatic

motor.
(Fig. 3)
Without tipping, remove the hydrostatic motor from

the gearbox. Ensure that any oil spills are contained.
Lay the hydrostatic motor on a suitable block.
(Fig. 4)
Remove the profiled plate (D) from the gearbox input

shaft (E). Take note of which way the plate was fitted.
(Fig. 5)
Move the gear selecting lever into the neutral position.

Unlock and remove the bolts (A) from the control rods.
(Fig. 6)

Unlock and remove the bolts (E) from the parking

brake cable.
Unbolt the cable retainer (F).
(Fig. 7)
Unscrew the hex. bolts (K) on the left- and right-hand

side, one turn.
(Fig. 8)
On the left- and right-hand sides, tap in the hex.

bolts (K) using a plastic-tip hammer, then using
the adjusting key move back the brake shoes.
For this if necessary apply the foot brake.
(Fig. 9)
Bend open the straps (M) mounted on the gearbox lid.

Remove the cable tie and disconnect the cable plug
from the speed sensor.
(Fig. 10)
10

Slacken off the brake drums from the left- and

right-hand side of the intermediate shaft.
Lightly grease and oil the intermediate shaft.
NOTE:
Should it be difficult to get access to the key,

then raise and secure the machine on the
right-hand side and turn the drive wheel.
(Fig. 11)
11
Using a plastic-tip hammer, tap the brake drums onto

the intermediate shaft on both the left- and right-hand
sides.
(Fig. 12)
12
Unbolt the brake units (L) complete from the gearbox

from both the left- and right-hand sides.
ATTENTION!
The brake shoes must not get damaged.

The brakes must not come into contact
(Fig. 13)
13

Determine the inner dimension from the end of the

shaft to the parking brake drum.
(Fig. 14)
14
Slacken off the parking brake drum.

Grease the end of the shaft and lightly oil.
Pull off the parking brake drum either by hand
or if necessary using a set of pullers.
(Fig. 15)
15
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 16)
16
Slacken off the left- and right-hand side support

plates (O) from the gearbox. The hex. bolts do not
need to be removed, only slackened.
(Fig. 17)
17

Raise slightly the rear of the gearbox using a suitable

jack.
Remove the already slackened bolts from the gearbox.
(Fig. 18)
18
Lower the jack.

Support the gearbox to the axle using a suitable key
drift (R). This is necessary in order to remove the gear-
box cover (N).
(Fig. 19)
19
Unbolt the gearbox cover (P).

– Control rods
– Drive shaft
– Main shaft
Removal see «Dismantling the gearbox».
(Fig. 19, 20)
20

Raising the transmission gearbox

with drum brakes
Bolt back the gearbox cover (N) with a new seal back
onto the gearbox.
Raise the gearbox into position using the jack.
Fit the support plates (O) back to the gearbox on the
left- and right-hand side.
(Fig. 21)
21
Press back the brake shoes.
ATTENTION!
Do not subject the brake shoes to either oil

or grease.
(Fig. 22)
22
Fit the parking brake drum back into position and back
to its original position, then key into position.
(Fig. 23)
23

On the left- and right-hand side, refit the brake units (L)
complete back onto the gearbox. Remember to ensure
that new M 12 lock nuts are used.
(Fig. 24)
24
On the left- and right-hand side, refit the brake drum

onto the intermediate shaft, then align so that the outer
edge of the brake assembly is in line with the brake
drum.
Secure the brake drum using the key.
(Fig. 25)
25
Reconnect the wiring loom to the speed sensor and

using the straps (M) secure the wiring loom to the
gearbox, and using cable ties, secure the loom to the
axle.
(Fig. 26)
26

Raise the machine on the right-hand side, and secure

with blocks under the axle.
On the left- and right-hand side, screw in the hex.
bolts (K) until the brake shoes come into contact with
the foot brake drum.
Press the left- and right-hand foot brakes, so that the
brake units centralise in the brake drums.
Slacken off the hex. bolts (K) about ¾ of a turn so that
the brake drum does not foul the brake shoes causing
premature wear.
27 Check the brakes. For this ensure that both brakes

have the same resistance at the same pedal height
and the brakes are fully activated within the first third
of the brake pedal travel.
If necessary adjust the hex. bolt (K).
(Fig. 27)
Fit the cable to the cable retainer (F).

Insert the bolt (E) and secure.
Adjust the yoke (T) so that the parking brake is fully
activated after the first 3 to 4 notches.
(Fig. 28)
28

Move the control rods (U) to the neutral position.
Insert the bolt (A) into the control rods (U) and secure
by inserting the split pin.
(Fig. 29)
29

Remove the gear lever gaiter.

The gear lever must be free to move forwards and
backwards within the gear gates (V) and must not
catch.
If necessary adjust the control rods (W) on the ball
ends (Q).
Operational control:
By switching into different gears, the detent ball must
fully locate in the control rods. The gear lever must
also not foul in the gates (V).
30 (Fig. 30, 31)
31
Apply suitable grease such as Shell Retinax EP2 to

the splines on the coupling (D), then slide the bush
onto the gearbox input shaft (E). Take care of the
positioning of the coupling (the hole in the coupling (D)
is what is used by the speed sensor for its signals).
ATTENTION!
When fitting a new coupling (D), check

the length and type with the one available
beforehand.
32
(Fig. 32)

Fit new seals to the hydrostatic motor, and without

tilting fit the motor to the gearbox. Secure the motor
to the housing using the four hex. bolts (H).
(Fig. 3, 33)
33
Fill the gearbox with oil:

F = filler plug
G = oil level plug
H = drain plug
Fill with general gearbox oil to the lower edge of the oil
level plug (G).
DOMINATOR 108 VX = 6 litres
ATTENTION!
34
The magnetic plug in the drain plug (H) must
always be cleaned after every oil change.
Refit the left- and right drive wheels.

(Fig. 34, 35)
35

Lowering the transmission gearbox

with disc brakes
(DOMINATOR 98 VX)
support.
secure safely with axle stands under the axle.
brake.
36 Remove the left-hand drive wheel.
G = oil level plug
H = drain plug
(Fig. 36)

(Fig. 37)
37

motor.
(Fig. 38)
38

Without tipping, remove the hydrostatic motor from

the gearbox. Ensure that any oil spills are contained.
(Fig. 39)
39

(Fig. 40)
40

Unlock and remove the bolts (A) from the control rods.
(Fig. 41)
41

brake cable.
(Fig. 42)
42

Press both brake pedals down, the secure by blocking

with a piece of wood under the driver’s platform.
This will ensure that when the brake lines are
slackened, the brake fluid reservoir is not drained.
(Fig. 43)
43
On the left- and right-hand side, remove the brake

lines (H) and seal with a bung.
Collect any spilled brake fluid in a suitable container.
Disconnect the wiring loom connections (K).
(Fig. 44)
44

(Fig. 45)
45

(Fig. 46)
46


(Fig. 47)
47
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 48)
48

(Fig. 49)
49
Raise slightly the rear of the gearbox using a suitable

jack.
Remove the already slackened bolts from the gearbox.
(Fig. 50)
50

Lower the jack.

Support the gearbox to the axle using a suitable key
drift (R). This is necessary in order to remove the gear-
box cover (N).
(Fig. 51)
51
Unbolt the gearbox cover (P).

– Control rods
– Drive shaft
– Main shaft
Removal see «Dismantling the gearbox».
(Fig. 52)
52
Raising the transmission gearbox

with disc brakes
(DOMINATOR 98 VX)
Bolt back the gearbox cover (N) with a new seal
back onto the gearbox.
Raise the gearbox into position using the jack.
Fit the support plates (O) back to the gearbox on
the left- and right-hand side.
(Fig. 53)
53

Press back the brake shoes.
ATTENTION!
Do not subject the brake shoes to either oil

or grease.
(Fig. 54)
54
Fit the parking brake drum back into position and back
to its original position, then key into position.
(Fig. 55)
55
Reconnect the wiring loom to the speed sensor and

using the straps (M) secure the wiring loom to the
gearbox, and using cable ties, secure the loom to
the axle.
(Fig. 56)
56
Reconnect the brake line (H) to the brake unit.

Reconnect the wiring loom (K).
Bleed the braking system.
(Fig. 57)
57

Fit the cable of the parking brake to the cable

retainer (F).
(Fig. 58)
58

Insert the bolt (A) into the control rods (U) and secure
(Fig. 59)
59

catch.
ends (Q).
fully locate in the control rods. The gear lever must
also not foul in the gates (V).
60 Push on the gearbox lever gaiter.
(Fig. 60, 61)
61

Apply suitable grease such as Shell Retinax EP2

to the splines on the coupling (D), then slide the bush
onto the gearbox input shaft (E). Take care of the posi-
tioning of the coupling (the hole in the coupling (D) is
what is used by the speed sensor for its signals).
ATTENTION!
When fitting a new coupling (D), check the

length and type with the one available
beforehand.
62
(Fig. 62)
(Fig. 38, 63)
63

F = filler plug
G = oil level plug
H = drain plug
Fill with general gearbox oil to the lower edge of the oil
level plug (G).
ATTENTION!
64 The magnetic plug in the drain plug (H) must

Refit the left- and right-hand drive wheels.

(Fig. 64)

Removing the transmission gearbox

support.
secure safely with axle stands under the axle.
brake.
Remove the left-hand drive wheel.
65
G = oil level plug
H = drain plug
(Fig. 65)
Move the gear lever into the neutral position.

Unlock the bolts (A) in the control rods and remove.
(Fig. 66)
66

brake cable.
(Fig. 67)
67


(Fig. 68)
68

motor.
(Fig. 69)
69
Without tipping, remove the hydrostatic motor from the

gearbox. Ensure that any oil spills are contained.
(Fig. 70)
70

(Fig. 71)
71

With drum brakes:

Unscrew the hex. bolts (K) on the left- and right-hand
side, one turn.
(Fig. 72)
72
With drum brakes:

On the left- and right-hand sides, tap in the hex.
bolts (K) using a soft headed hammer, then using
the adjusting key move back the brake shoes.
For this if necessary apply the foot brake.
(Fig. 73)
73
With drum brakes:

Pull the intermediate drive shaft together with the
brake drums from the left- and right-hand side out
of the gearbox.
ATTENTION!
Support the centre of the intermediate shaft,

so that is does not get damaged on the
gearbox on removal.
74
(Fig. 74)

With drum brakes:

On the left- and right-hand side, hang the intermediate
shafts on the preparation floor using a piece of rope.
(Fig. 75)
75
With drum brakes:

On the left- and right-hand side, unbolt the brake
unit (L) complete from the gearbox.
(Fig. 76)
76
With drum brakes:

On the left- and right-hand side, hang the complete
brake unit (L) along with the brake shoes and ram
onto the preparation floor.
ATTENTION!
The brake lines must not get kinked. The

brake shoes must not come into contact
77
(Fig. 77)

With disc brakes:

(DOMINATOR 98 VX)
Slacken off the brake discs from the intermediate shaft
on both the left- and right-hand side.
(Fig. 78)
78
With disc brakes:

Slide the intermediate drive shaft out from the left-
and right-hand sides and remove the brake discs
by lowering.
ATTENTION!

so that is does not get damaged on the
gearbox on removal.
79
(Fig. 79)
With disc brakes:

Unbolt the brake shield flanges (S) from the
flanges (R) on both the left- and right-hand sides.
(Fig. 80)
80

With disc brakes:

Hang the flanges (R) from the left- and right-hand side,
complete with the brake units onto the preparation
floor.
ATTENTION!
The brake lines must not get kinked.
(Fig. 81)
81

(Fig. 82)
82

(Fig. 83)
83
Using a suitable jack, lightly raise the gearbox.

(Fig. 84)
84

Knock out the four expansion pins from the support

plates (O).
(Fig. 85, 86)
85
Mark the position of the support plates (O).

Unbolt the hex. bolts (P) as well as the already
slackened hex. bolts from the gearbox.
Remove the support plates (O).
(Fig. 86)
86
Lower the gearbox using a suitable trolley jack, and

remove towards the front of the machine.
(Fig. 87)
87
Dismantling the gearbox

(DOMINATOR 108 VX)
Remove the gearbox.
Remove the control rods:
Unbolt the gearbox lid (22) taking note of the position
of the straps (A).
(Fig. 88, 118)
88

Remove the springs (28).

(Fig. 89, 118)
89
Remove the balls (27) using the special tool.

Special tool:
Magnetic probe Part No. 181 842.0
(Fig. 90, 118)
90
Remove the expansion pin (30) from the control

rod (26).
Twist the control rods (26) out of the side of the gear-
box housing (42) and remove the selecting fork (29).
Take note of their positions.
(Fig. 91, 118)
91
Remove the expansion pin (30) from the control

rod (36).
Twist the control rods (36) out of the side of the gear-
box housing (42) and remove the selecting fork (37).
Take note of their positions.
(Fig. 92, 118)
92

Remove the O-rings (24).

(Fig. 93, 118)
93
Removing the drive shaft:

Remove control rods.
(Fig. 94, 119)
94
Slackening the parking brake drum.

Grease and lightly oil the end of the shaft.
Pull off the drum, or if necessary use a set of pullers.
(Fig. 95, 119)
95
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 96, 119)
96

Unbolt the gearbox cover (12). Pay attention to the

washers.
(Fig. 97, 118)
97
Unbolt the flange housing (B). Pay attention to the

washers.
(Fig. 98, 119)
98
Tap the end of the drive shaft (33) to the right using
a plastic-tip hammer until the ball bearing (34) is free
of the right-hand side.
Remove the cylinder roller bearing outer ring (C).
(Fig. 99, 100, 119)
99
Remove the ball bearing (34) from the drive shaft (33)
using a suitable puller.
(Fig. 100, 118)
100

Remove the securing ring (53) from the drive

shaft (33).
(Fig. 101, 118)
101
Remove the drive shaft (33) out through the left-hand

side, and remove the double shifter gear (35).
(Fig. 102, 118)
102
Remove the cylinder roller bearing outer ring (C) from

the drive shaft (33) using a suitable puller, and then
remove the securing ring (32).
(Fig. 103, 118)
103
Removing the main shaft:

Remove the control rods.
Remove the parking brake drum.
(Fig. 104, 119)
104

Grease and oil the end of the shaft.

Pull off the parking brake drum, if necessary use
a puller.
(Fig. 105, 119)
105
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 106, 119)
106
Unbolt the gearbox cover (12).

(Fig. 107, 118)
107
Unbolt the flange housing (B). Observe and look after

the washers.
(Fig. 108, 119)
108

Tap out the main shaft (38) towards the left-hand side
using a plastic-tip hammer, then remove the cylinder
roller bearing outer ring (40).
(Fig. 109, 118)
109
Remove the cylinder roller bearing inner ring (40) from

the main shaft (38) using a puller and then remove the
support washer (39) directly behind.
(Fig. 110, 118)
110
Press out the circlips (46) from the groove on the main
shaft (38).
(Fig. 111, 118)
111
Pull the main shaft (38) out of the right-hand side, then
remove the shifter gear (47), double gear (45) and the
pinion (44). Take note of their positions.
Remove the cylinder roller bearing outer ring (43) from
the main shaft (38).
(Fig. 112, 118)
112

Pull the cylinder roller bearing (43) from the main

shaft (38). Remove the support washer (39) directly
behind.
(Fig. 113, 118)
113
Removing the differential:

Remove the main drive shaft.
Unbolt the brake shield flange from the left- and
right-hand side of the gearbox (42). Observe their
positions. Remove the right-hand brake shield flange.
(Fig. 114, 118)
114
Using a plastic-tip hammer, remove the left-hand

brake shield flange from the ball bearing of the differ-
ential.
(Fig. 115, 119)
115
Tilt the differential a little to the left, and remove the oil
splasher plate (D).
(Fig. 116, 119)
116

Support the differential in a suitable lifting device,

then with a plastic-tip hammer tap towards the left.
Remove the differential.
Dismantle the differential.
(Fig. 117, 119)
117

118
Gearbox, exploded view: 37 Selector fork
DOMINATOR 108 VX 38 Main shaft
39 Support washer S 40 x 50 DIN 988
7 Gearbox assembled
40 Cylinder roller bearing Nj 308 e. tvp2 DIN 5412
10 Threaded bolts
41 Magnetic bung
11 Spring washer 12
42 Gearbox housing
12 Right hand gearbox cover
43 Cylinder roller bearing Nj 2308 e. tvp2 DIN 5412
13 Sealing ring
44 Pinion
14 Breather
45 Double gear
15 Bung
46 Circlip 45 x 1.75 DIN 471
16 Shaft seal As 40 x 58 x 9
47 Shifter gear
17 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
53 Circlip 45 x 1.75 DIN 471
Hex. bolt M 10 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
18 Spring washer 10 (Fig. 118)
19 Bung M 10 x 1 DIN 906
20 Hex. bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
21 Spring washer 8
22 Top gearbox cover
23 Seal
24 Round seal 20 x 4 -n DIN 3771
26 Control rod
27 Ball 14 kl3 DIN 5401
28 Pressure spring
29 Selector fork
33 Drive shaft
34 Ball bearing 6308 DIN 625
35 Double gear
36 Control rod

119

Assembling the gearbox

DOMINATOR 108 VX
NOTE:
Before assembling any of the components

especially the bearings, please ensure that they
have been lightly oiled with general purpose oil.
Bolts that do not go into blind holes, please
ensure that a thread sealer is applied, such
as Omni FIT FD10.
Fitting the differential:

1. Lower the differential into the gearbox
housing (42) using a suitable lifting device,
and insert the right-hand ball bearing slightly
into the hole in the gearbox housing (42).
2. Fit the oil splasher (D) plate back onto the
differential, ensuring that new lock nuts have
been used and they have been torqued up to
100 Nm.
(Fig. 119, 120)
120
3. Tap the differential into its end position using

(Fig. 119, 121)
121
4. Fit new shaft seals (E) to the left- and right brake
shield flange and lightly oil.
(Fig. 119, 122)
122

5. Fit the left- and right-hand brake shield flanges

using the new seals back to the gearbox
housing (42). Observe the correct position.
Apply thread sealer such as DELO-ML-5349 to
the socket head bolts and insert. Tighten to
45 Nm.
(Fig. 119, 123)
123
6. Check the axle play of the differential using feeler

gauges. Using a suitable lever, load the
differential in either direction, pressing against
the bearings.
Axle play = 0.3 – 1.4 mm
(Fig. 119, 124)
Fit the main shaft.
124
Fitting the main shaft:

7. Slide on two support washers (39) onto the main
shaft (38).
8. Heat cylinder roller bearing inner ring (43) to a
temperature of approx. 100 °C, and fit onto the
main shaft (38).
9. Give the bearing a tap in order to ensure it is
seated correctly.
(Fig. 119, 125)
125
10. Feed the main shaft (38) into the gearbox

housing (42) from the right-hand side.
11. Slide the pinion (44) and the double gear (45)
onto the main shaft (38).
12. Slide the circlips (46) approx. 50 mm onto the
main shaft (38).
(Fig. 119, 126)
126

13. Slide the shifter gear (47) onto the main shaft (38)
and press the circlips (46) into the grooves.
(Fig. 119, 127)
127
14. Slide the support washer (39) from the left onto
the main shaft (38).
15. Heat the cylinder roller bearing inner ring (40) to
approx. 100 °C and fit to the main shaft (38).
seated correctly.
(Fig. 119, 128)
128
17. Fit the left (40) and right (43) hand cylinder roller
bearing outer rings onto the main shaft (38).
(Fig. 119, 129)
129
18. Insert the available washers into the flange

housing (B) and along with the seals bolt
to the gearbox housing (42).
Apply a thread seal such as DELO-ML- 5349 to
the hex. bolts, then bolt up and tighten to 45 Nm.
(Fig. 119, 130)
130

19. Bolt the gearbox cover (12) to the gearbox

housing (42) using new seals (13) and the
available washers.
(Fig. 118, 119, 131)
131
20. The axle play of the main shaft needs to be

checked.
If necessary correct with washers in the flange
housing (B) or in the gearbox cover (12).
ATTENTION!
Gears in gearbox need to mesh.
132 (Fig. 119, 132)
21. Press back to brake units.
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 119, 133)
133
22. Refit the parking brake drum back to the dimen-

sions previously set to, and lock with the key.
(Fig. 119, 134)
Refit the control rods.
134

Installing the drive shaft:

23. Fit the circlip (32) to the groove in the drive
shaft (33).
24. Warm the cylinder roller bearing (C) up to approx.
100 °C and place on the drive shaft (33).
seated correctly.
(Fig. 119, 135)
135
26. Feed the drive shaft (33) into the gearbox (42)
from the left-hand side, then slide on the double
gear (35).
(Fig. 119, 136)
136
27. Fit the circlip (53) to the groove in the drive

shaft (33).
28. Warm the ball bearing (34) up to approx. 100 °C
and place on the drive shaft (33).
seated correctly.
(Fig. 119, 137)
137
30. Using a plastic-tip hammer, tap the ball

bearing (34) onto the outer ring of the gearbox
housing (42).
31. Slide the cylinder roller bearing outer ring (C) left
onto the drive shaft (33).
(Fig. 119, 138)
138

32. Insert the available washers into the flange

housing (B) and along with the seals bolt to
the gearbox housing (42).
(Fig. 119, 139)
139
33. Bolt the gearbox cover (12) to the gearbox

housing (42) using new seals (13) and the
available washers.
Apply a thread seal such as DELO-ML-5349 to
(Fig. 119, 140)
140
34. The axle play of the main shaft needs to be

checked.
If necessary correct with washers in the flange
housing (B) or in the gearbox cover (12).
ATTENTION!
141 (Fig. 119, 141)

35. Press back the brake shoes.
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 119, 142)
142
36. Fit the parking brake drum back to its original

position.
(Fig. 119, 143)
Install the control rods.
143
Installing control rods:

37. Lightly oil the O-rings (24) and insert into the
gearbox housing (42).
(Fig. 119, 144)
144
38. Slide in the control rod (36) and fit the selector
fork (37). Observe the correct installation (the
flat side on the control rod (36) faces the front).
39. Secure the selector fork (37) onto the control
rod (36) using the expansion pin (30).
(Fig. 119, 145)
145

40.Slide in the control rod (26) and fit the selector

rod (26) using the expansion pin (30).
(Fig. 119, 146)
146
42. Insert the balls (27) and the springs (28) into the
(Fig. 119, 147)
147
43. Fit the gearbox cover (22) along with new

seals (23) back onto the gearbox (42).
Take note of the position of the straps (A).
(Fig. 119, 148)
Refit the gearbox.
148
Dismantling the gearbox

Remove the control rods:
Unbolt the gearbox cover (45).
(Fig. 149, 186)
149

Remove the spring (47).

(Fig. 150, 186)
150
Remove the balls (48) using the special tool.

Special tool:
(Fig. 151, 186)
151
Remove the expansion pin (22 and 23) from the con-
trol rod (28).
Twist the control rod (28) out of the side of the gearbox
housing (52) and remove the selecting fork (29). Take
note of their positions.
(Fig. 152, 186)
152
Remove the expansion pin (22 and 23) from the con-
trol rod (14).
Twist the control rods (14) out of the side of
the gearbox housing (52) and remove the selecting
fork (24). Take note of their positions.
(Fig. 153, 186)
153

Remove the shaft seals (13).

(Fig. 154, 186)
154
Remove the drive shaft:

Remove control rods.
(Fig. 155, 187)
155
Slacken the parking brake drum.

Grease and lightly oil the end of the shaft.
Pull off the drum, or if necessary use a set of pullers.
(Fig. 156, 187)
156
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 157, 187)
157


already existing washers (10).
(Fig. 158, 186)
158

(Fig. 159, 187)
159
Tap the end of the drive shaft (33) to the left out of the
Remove the cylinder roller bearing outer ring (C) using
a puller from the drive shaft (33).
(Fig. 160, 186)
160
Remove the circlip (26) from the groove on the drive

shaft (33).
(Fig. 161, 186)
161

Pull the drive shaft (33) out of the right-hand side of

the gearbox (52).
(Fig. 162, 186)
162
Push off the circlip (34) from the main shaft (30).
(Fig. 163, 186)
163
Slide the shifter gear (35) of the main shaft (30)

towards the left.
Slide the main shaft (30) slightly to the right and out of
the gearbox (52).
Remove the double gear (27) from the gearbox
housing (52).
(Fig. 164, 186)
164
Using a lever, move the cylinder roller bearing inner

ring (11) slightly off the drive shaft (33), then using a
puller remove the ring.
(Fig. 165, 186)
165

Remove main shaft:

Remove the control rods.
(Fig. 166, 187)
166

(Fig. 167, 187)
167
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 168, 187)
168

(Fig. 169, 186)
169


(Fig. 170, 187)
170
Push the circlip (34) out of the groove from the main
shaft (30) and slide inwards.
(Fig. 171, 186)
171
Pull the cylinder roller bearing inner ring (33) from the
main shaft (30).
(Fig. 172, 186)
172
Press the circlips (34) out of the groove from the main
shaft (30).
Remove the circlip (34) to the right.
(Fig. 173, 186)
173

Support the double gear (36) to the gearbox

housing (52) using a piece of wood.
Tap out the main shaft (30) to the left using a
plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 174, 186)
174
Remove the main shaft (30) from the left.

Remove the double gear (36) and the shifter gear (35).
(Fig. 175, 186)
175
Using a lever, move the cylinder roller bearing inner

ring (31) slightly off the main shaft (30), then using
a puller remove the ring.
(Fig. 176, 186)
176
Remove intermediate axle:

Remove main drive shaft.
Pull the intermediate axle (41) from the gearbox
housing (52) using the special tool.
Remove the intermediate gear (37).
(Fig. 177, 186)
177

Special tool:
1 Slide hammer
Part No. 181 604.0
2 Bolt
Part No. 181 606.0
3 Adaptor
Part No. 181 610.0
(Fig. 178)
38158 178
Using a puller, remove the cylinder roller bearing inner

ring (38) from the intermediate axle (41).
(Fig. 179, 186)
179
Remove the bush (54) from the gearbox housing (52)

(Fig. 180, 186)
180
Special tool:
1 Slide hammer
Part No. 181 604.0
2 Bolt
Part No. 181 606.0
3 Washer 16
(Fig. 181)
181

Remove the differential:

Remove the main drive shaft.
Unbolt the top plate (49) from the gearbox
housing (52).
(Fig. 182, 186)
182
Unbolt the brake shield flange from the left- and

right-hand side of the gearbox housing (52). Observe
the layout.
Remove the left-hand brake shield flange.
(Fig. 183, 187)
183
Remove the right-hand brake shield flange from the

ball bearing in the differential using a plastic-tip
hammer.
(Fig. 184, 187)
184
Using a suitable lifting device, support the differential,

and using a plastic-tip hammer tap it to the right-hand
side.
Lift the differential out of the gearbox housing (52).
(Fig. 185, 187)
Dismantle the differential.
185

186
Gearbox, exploded view:
7 Gearbox
10 Washer
11 Cylinder roller bearing Nj 307 e.tvp2 DIN 5412
12 Drive shaft
14 Control rod
15 Threaded bolt
16 Spring washer 12
17 Stud M 8 x 16 DIN 915
18 Hex. bolt M 10 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
19 Spring washer 10
20 Gearbox cover
21 Seal
22 Expansion pin 3.5 x 36 DIN 8752
24 Selector fork
25 Bung M 10 x 1 DIN 906
27 Double gear
28 Control rod
29 Selector fork
30 Main drive shaft
31 Cylinder roller bearing Nj 2308 e.tvp 2 DIN 5412
32 Shaft seal B 1 35 x 62 x 10
34 Circlip 45 x 1.75 DIN 471
35 Shifter gear

36 Double gear
37 Intermediate gear
41 Intermediate axle
42 Breather
43 Hex. bolt M 8 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
Countersunk bolt M 8 x 20 DIN 7991
45 Gearbox cover
46 Seal
47 Spring
48 Ball 14 kl3
49 Oil splasher plate
50 Hex. bolt M 6 x 25 DIN 933-8.8
51 Contact washer
52 Gearbox housing
53 Magnetic bolt
54 Bush
(Fig. 187)

187

Assembling the gearbox

NOTE:
Before assembling any of the components,

especially the bearings, please ensure that they
have been lightly oiled with general purpose oil.
Bolts that do not go into blind holes, please
ensure that a thread sealer is applied, such as
Omni FIT FD10.
Installing the differential:

1. Using a suitable lifting device, lower the differential
into the gearbox housing (52).
2. Place the gearbox housing (52) onto a piece of
wood, and using a plastic-tip hammer, tap the
differential into its end position.
(Fig. 187, 188)
188
3. Lightly oil and insert new shaft seals (E) in the left-
and right-hand brake shield flanges.
(Fig. 187, 189)
189

4. Bolt the left- and right-hand brake shield flanges

along with the new seals into the gearbox
housing (52). Observe the correct assembly.
the socket head bolts and insert. Tighten to
45 Nm.
(Fig. 187, 190)
190
5. Check the axle play of the differential using feeler

gauges. Using a suitable lever, load the differen-
tial in either direction, pressing against the
bearings.
(Fig. 187, 191)
191
6. Bolt on the oil splasher plate (49) to the

gearbox (52). For this apply a thread sealer
such as DELO-ML-5349 to the hex. bolts.
7. Set the gap between the splasher plate (49)
and the crown wheel of the differential to a gap
of 1 mm.
(Fig. 186, 187, 193)
Fit the intermediate axle.
192

Installing the intermediate axle:

8. Insert the bush (54) using a probe carefully and
without tipping into the support block of the
gearbox (52).
(Fig. 187, 193)
193
9. Heat the cylinder roller bearing inner ring (38)

to approx. 100 °C and place on the intermediate
axle (41).
seated correctly.
(Fig. 187, 194)
194
11. Insert the intermediate gear (37) into the

gearbox (52)
12. Carefully tap the intermediate axle (41) using
a plastic-tip hammer ensuring that it does not tip.
CAUTION!
The support block in the gearbox (52) must

be supported with a piece of wood (Q).
(Fig. 187, 195)

195
Install the main shaft.

Install main drive shaft:

approx. 100 °C and place on the main drive
shaft (30).
seated.
(Fig. 187, 196)
196
15. Feed the main drive shaft (30) into the gearbox
housing (52) from the left-hand side. Slide on
the double gear (36), the shifter gear (35) and
the circlips (34).
(Fig. 187, 197)
197
16. Support the double gear (36) to the shifter

gear (35) using a piece of wood, then using
a soft hammer, tap the main drive shaft (30)
into the double gear (36).
17. Fit the circlips (34) into the grooves of the main
shaft (30).
(Fig. 187, 197, 198)
198

approx. 100 °C and place on the main drive
shaft (30).
seated.
20. Slide on the left-hand cylinder roller bearing outer
ring (33) and the right-hand cylinder roller
bearing (31) onto the main drive shaft (30).
(Fig. 187, 199)
199

21. Insert the available washers (10) into the flange

housing (B) and with these and the new seals bolt
on the gearbox housing (52).
the hex. bolts and insert. Tighten to 45 Nm.
(Fig. 186, 187, 200)
200
22. Bolt on the gearbox cover (20) along with the

seals (21) and the available washers (10) back
to the gearbox housing (52).
(Fig. 186, 187, 201)
201
23. Check the axle play of the main shaft (30) by

using a gauge.
If necessary correct with washers (10) in the
flange housing (B) or gearbox cover (20).
ATTENTION!
202 (Fig. 187, 202)

24. Slide back the brake units.
ATTENTION!

(Fig. 187, 203)
203
25. Refit the parking brake drum to the dimensions

previously set to, and lock with the key.
(Fig. 187, 204)
204
Refitting the drive shaft:

approx. 100 °C and place on the drive shaft (12).
correctly seated.
(Fig. 187, 205)
205

28. Move the circlip (34) out of the groove of the main
drive shaft (30) and slide the shifter gear (35) to
the left.
29. Slide the main drive shaft slightly to the right out of
the gearbox (52) and fit the double gear (27).
30. Slide the main drive shaft (30) to the left and
secure the shifter gear (35) with a circlip (34).
(Fig. 187, 206)
206
31. Slide the drive shaft (12) into the gearbox (52)
from the left and secure the double gear (27)
with a circlip (26).
(Fig. 187, 207)
207
32. Heat the ball bearing (C) to approx. 100 °C and

place on the drive shaft (12).
correctly seated.
(Fig. 187, 208)
208

34. Insert the available washers (10) into the flange

housing (B) and with these and the new seals bolt
on the gearbox housing (52).
(Fig. 187, 209)
209
35. Bolt on the gearbox cover (20) along with the

seals (21) and the available washers (10) back to
the gearbox housing (52).
(Fig. 187, 210)
210
36. Check the axle play of the main shaft (12) by

using a gauge.
If necessary correct with washers (10) in the
flange housing (B) or gearbox cover (20).
ATTENTION!
211 (Fig. 187, 211)

37. Slide back the brake units.
ATTENTION!

with oil or grease.
(Fig. 187, 212)
212
38. Refit the parking brake drum to the dimensions

previously set to, and lock with the key.
(Fig. 187, 213)
213
Refitting the control rods:

39. Lightly oil the shaft seals (13) and insert into the
(Fig. 187, 214)
214
fork (24). Observe the correct installation (the flat
side on the control rod (14) faces the front).
rod (14) using the expansion pin (22 and 23).
(Fig. 187, 215)
215

rod (28) using the expansion pin (22 and 23).
(Fig. 187, 216)
216
44. Insert the balls (48) and the springs (47) into the
(Fig. 187, 217)
217
45. Fit the gearbox cover (45) along with new

seals (46) back onto the gearbox housing (52).
(Fig. 186, 218)
Refit the gearbox.
218

Dismantling the differential

Remove the differential.
Using a pulley and special tool, remove the ball
bearing (15) from the differential.
Special tool:
Tube, inner dia. 65 mm, outer dia. 80 mm,
150 mm long (self-manufactured),
washer dia.17 mm x 80 mm x 6 mm,
hex. bolt M 16 x 25 DIN 933-8.8 (head centralised)
219 (Fig. 219, 226)
Unbolt the ring gear (5) from the differential

housing (6).
DOMINATOR 108 VX:
Mark the position of both ends of the hex. bolts (7).
Oil hole in the differential housing (6) can be found
near the oil splasher plate (31).
(Fig. 220, 226)
220
Remove the yoke (14) and the crown wheel (9).

(Fig. 221, 226)
221

Separate the ring gear (5) from the differential

housing (6) using a plastic-tip hammer.
(Fig. 222, 226)
222
Pull the ball bearing (4) from the differential using

a puller and special tool.
Special tool:
Tube, inner dia. 65 mm, outer dia. 80 mm,
150 mm long (self-manufactured),
washer dia.17 mm x 80 mm x 6 mm,
hex. bolt M 16 x 25 DIN 933-8.8 (head centralised)
(Fig. 223, 226)
223
Tap out the expansion pins (26 and 27) from

the differential housing (6).
(Fig. 224, 226)
224
Using a punch, tap out the differential axle (25) from

the differential housing (6).
Remove the differential bevel gears (10) and the
crown wheel (9).
Remove the spacer from the differential axle (25).
(Fig. 225, 226)
225

226
Differential, exploded view: 31 Oil splasher (DOMINATOR 108 VX)
1 Brake shield flange (Fig. 226)
2 Shaft seal Basl 48 x 72 x 12
3 Seal
5 Ring gear
6 Differential housing
7 Hex. bolt M 12 x 170 DIN 931-8.8
8 Lock nut VM 12
9 Crown wheel
10 Differential bevel gear
11 Bush
13 Circlip 42 x 1.75 DIN 472
14 Yoke
16 Washer
17 Brake shield flange
18 Spring washer 12
19 Hex. bolt M 12 x 40 DIN 933-8.8
21 Lock nut VM 12
22 Securing bolt M 12 x 35
25 Differential axle

227
Assembling the differential
1. Smear the surface areas of the crown wheels (9)
and the differential bevel gears (10) with Molykote
paste Part No. 177 571.0 at (A).
2. Before assembling, cover all moving parts,
in particular bearings with a light coat of oil.
3. Stick the bearing bushes (11) using something
like DELO-ML-5328 into the differential bevel
gears (10).
(Fig. 227)

4. Fit the pre-assembled differential bevel gears (10)

along with the crown wheel (9) and the differential
axle (25) into the differential housing (6).
5. DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX:
Fit the additional spacer between the differential
bevel gears.
6. Secure the differential axle (25) in the differential
housing (6) using the expansion pins (26 and 27).
(Fig. 227, 228)
228

and fit to the differential housing (6).
8. Tap the bearing with a plastic-tip hammer to
ensure it has been seated correctly.
(Fig. 227, 229)
229
9. Slide on the ring gear (5) onto the differential

housing (6) and secure with the expansion
pins (23 and 24).
(Fig. 227, 230)
230

10. Insert the crown wheel (9) into the differential

housing (6). Bolt on the yoke (14) using the
hex. bolts (7) and new lock nuts (8).
CAUTION!
In the area of the oil hole in the differential

housing (6), do not fit the two hex. bolts (7)
for fixing the oil splasher (31).
231
(Fig. 227, 231)

and fit to the differential housing (6).
12. Tap the bearing with a plastic-tip hammer to
ensure it has been seated correctly.
(Fig. 227, 232)
Install the differential.
232

Installing the gearbox

Using a suitable trolley jack, raise the gearbox under
the machine.
(Fig. 233)
233
Bolt the support plates (O) back to the drive axle using
the hex. bolts (P).
Line the holes on the support plates (O) to those on
the axle.
Insert the four expansion pins.
ATTENTION!
The support plate (O) must not be turned

or replaced. When fitting a new support
plate (O) then the one available must be
234 used as a drilling pattern.
(Fig. 234)
Connect the connector back to the speed sensor,

secure the cable at the gearbox cover by using
straps (M) and the drive axle by using cable tie.
(Fig. 235)
235

Tighten the hex. bolts (P).

(Fig. 234, 236)
236
Slacken off the support plates (O) on the gearbox.

Remove the trolley jack, and tighten up the hex. bolts.
(Fig. 237)
237
With drum brakes:

On the left-hand side, bolt the complete brake
assembly (L) onto the gearbox. For this, use new
lock nuts M 12.
(Fig. 238)
238

With drum brakes:

On the left- and right-hand side, insert the intermediate
drive shaft along with the brake drums into the gear-
box.
ATTENTION!

so that is does not get damaged entering the
gearbox.
239
(Fig. 239)
With disc brakes:

(DOMINATOR 98 VX)
On the left- and right-hand side, bolt the flange (R)
complete with the brake assemble on the brake shield
flange (S). For this ensure that the hex. bolts have had
a liquid sealing compound such as DELO-ML-5349
applied.
(Fig. 240)
240
With disc brakes:

On the left- and right-hand side, lightly oil the inter-
mediate shaft and insert into the gearbox along with
the brake assemble.
ATTENTION!

so that is does not get damaged entering
the gearbox.
241
Do not key the brakes yet.
(Fig. 241)

Apply suitable grease such as Shell Retinax EP2 to

the splines on the coupling (D), then slide the bush
onto the gearbox input shaft (E). Take care of the
positioning of the coupling (the hole in the coupling (D)
is what is used by the speed sensor for its signals).
ATTENTION!
When fitting a new coupling (D), check

the length and type with the one available
beforehand.
242
(Fig. 242)

(Fig. 69, 243)
243
Secure the hydraulic pipes to the chassis

of the machine using the pipe clamps (G).
(Fig. 244)
244

Fit the cable to the cable retainer (F).

(Fig. 245)
245

Insert the bolt (A) into the control rod (U) and secure
(Fig. 246)
246

catch.
ends (Q).
fully locate in the control rods. The gear lever must not
catch in the gates (V).
247 Refit the gear lever gaiter.
Refit the left- and right-hand final drives.
(Fig. 247, 248)
248

With disc brakes:

(DOMINATOR 98 VX)
Slide the brake discs onto the left- and right-hand side,
so that they sit exactly between the brake units. For
this the axle play of the intermediate drive shaft is
important – see fitting axle gearbox.
Key the brake discs.
ATTENTION!
Do not hit the keys with too much force

249 otherwise damage will occur to the brake
disc. Key the brake discs.
(Fig. 249)
With drum brakes:

On the left- and right-hand side, screw in the hex.
bolts (K) until the brake shoes come into contact
with the foot brake drums.
Press the left- and right-hand foot brakes, so that the
brake units centralise in the brake drums.
Slacken off the hex. bolt (K) about ¾ of a turn so that
the brake drum does not foul the brake shoes causing
premature wear.
250 Check the brakes. For this ensure that both brakes
have the same resistance at the same pedal height
and the brakes are fully activated within the first third
of the brake pedal travel.
If necessary adjust the hex. bolt (K).
(Fig. 250)


F = oil filler
G = level plug
H = drain plug
Fill with general gearbox oil to the lower edge
of the oil level plug (G).
DOMINATOR 108 VX = 6 litres
DOMINATOR 98 VX / 88 VX = 6.8 litres
ATTENTION!
251
The magnetic plug in the drain plug (H) must
Refit the left- and right-hand drive wheels.

(Fig. 251, 252)
252


Under-walker return floor
UNDER-WALKER RETURN FLOOR
Removing the under-walker return floor

DOMINATOR 88 VX
With the straw chopper installed, unscrew the lighting
brackets (A) on the left-hand and right-hand side.
(Fig. 1)
Unscrew the under-walker return floor from the front

rocker arms (B) on the left-hand and right-hand side.
(Fig. 2)
Unscrew the rear rocker arms (C) from the machine

side walls.
(Fig. 3)
Lift the under-walker return floor out of the machine

towards the rear.
(Fig. 4)

Front rocker arm, exploded view

1 Bearing neck
2 Metal / rubber bearing neck
3 Rocker arm, left and right
4 Bearing bracket for sieve pan
5 Bearing bracket for return pan
6 Washer
8 Hexagon bolt
M 10 x 30 DIN 933-8.8
(Fig. 5)
11968 5
Rear rocker arm, exploded view

1 Rocker arm
2 Washer
3 Housing
4 Rubber bushing
6 Hexagon bolt
M 8 x 20 DIN 933-8.8
Contact washer A 8
(Fig. 6)
24730
6

Installing the under-walker return floor

Lift the under-walker return floor into the machine
from the rear.
CAUTION!
The sealing strips (D) provided at the sides must

not be bent downwards when installing the floor.
(Fig. 7)
7
Bolt the rear rocker arms (C) to the machine side

walls.
Bolt the under-walker return floor to the front rocker
arms (B) on the left-hand and right-hand side.
CAUTION!
When installing new rubber bushings and/or

bearing brackets, make sure that these are
tension-free when the under-walker return
floor is in its centre position. This avoids
8 unnecessary wear of the rubber bearing
when the under-walker return floor vibrates.
(Fig. 8, 9)
DOMINATOR 88 VX:
With the straw chopper installed, install the lighting
brackets (A) on the left-hand and right-hand side.
(Fig. 10)
10


Valve combinations – low-pressure hydraulics
VALVE COMBINATIONS – LOW-PRESSURE

HYDRAULICS
Removing the 3/2 way low-pressure solenoid

valve
A = 3/2 way solenoid valve for the cutterbar
engagement
B = 3/2 way solenoid valve for the threshing
engagement
C = 3/2 way solenoid valve for the grain tank
unloading engagement
(Fig. 1)

hydraulic tank (P) for the ground hydraulics.
Special tool:
(Fig. 2)
Slacken and then remove the connector (32).

(Fig. 3, 8)

Remove the cap from the solenoid (9) and then

remove the solenoid (9).
(Fig. 4, 8)
Unscrew the solenoid spool (E).

(Fig. 5, 8)
Remove the valve insert (12) by pulling and at the

same time twisting.
ATTENTION!
Under no circumstances must it be forced.

If necessary reduce the vacuum in the
hydraulic tank (P), so that there is not such
a large vacuum in the valve unit.
(Fig. 2, 6, 8)
6

In order to completely remove the 3/2 way solenoid

valve block, the two hex. bolts (30) as well as the
hydraulic pipes (K) must be removed and closed with
bungs at both ends. Contain any oil that may leak.
The individual valves have O-rings (27) between for
sealing purposes.
(Fig. 7, 8)

8
Solenoid valve and pressure relief valve for the 28 Hex. bolt M 6 x 35 DIN 931-8.8
low-pressure hydraulics, exploded view Hex. nut M 6 DIN 934
Contact washer B 6
1 Union
29 Bracket
2 O-ring 9.4 x 2.1 –n DIN 3771
3 Bung
31 Cap seal
4 Union
32 Connector
5 Hex. bolt M 6 x 170 DIN 931-8.8
Diode
33 Socket head bolt M 3 x 35 DIN 84
7 Low-pressure valve assembled
34 Test port connection M 12 x 1.5
8 O-ring 18 x 2 –n DIN 3771
9 Solenoid (Fig. 8)
10 O-ring
11 O-ring 13 x 2 –n DIN 3771
12 Valve insert
13 O-ring 10 x 1.5 –n DIN 3771
14 O-ring
16 Low-pressure valve assembled
17 Low-pressure relief valve
18 Flange nut
19 Stud M 8 x 1 x 25 DIN 914
20 Cap
21 O-ring 13 x 2 –n DIN 3771
22 Pressure spring
23 Spring plate
24 Low-pressure relief valve insert
25 O-ring 10 x 1.5 –n DIN 3771
27 O-ring 8.3 x 2.4 –n DIN 3771

Installing the 3/2 way low-pressure solenoid

valve
1. Insert the valve insert (12) into the low-pressure
valve block using the O-rings (13 and 14).
2. Screw in the solenoid spool (E) with the
O-ring (11) into the low-pressure valve.
(Fig. 8, 9)
3. Slide the solenoid (9) with the O-ring (10) onto

the solenoid spool (E).
4. Screw the cap with the O-ring (8) onto the
solenoid (9).
5. Screw back the connector (32).
CAUTION!
In order for the 3/2 way solenoid valve to func-

tion correctly, the adjusting screw (F) must be
unscrewed fully.
10
NOTE: The operation of the relative solenoid valve

can be tested without the relative operation being
switched from the cab. This is done by having the
engine running, and for a short period of time screwing
in the adjusting screw (F).
(Fig. 8, 10)

Removing the pressure relief valve for the

low-pressure hydraulics
Special tool:
(Fig. 11)
11
Remove the cap (20) from the pressure relief valve.

Remove the spring (22) and the spring plate (23) from
behind.
CAUTION!
If the flange nut (18) is released and the

stud (19) turned, a new setting for the
pressure relief valve becomes necessary.
(Fig. 8, 12)
12
Remove the pressure relief valve insert (24) and

the O-ring (25) that lays behind.
(Fig. 8, 13)
13

In order to completely remove the 3/2 way solenoid

valve block, then the two hex. bolts (30) as well as the
hydraulic pipe (K) must be removed and closed with
bungs at both ends. Contain any oil that may leak.
The pressure relief valve has an O-ring (27) between it
and the rest of the 3/2 way solenoid valve block.
(Fig. 8, 14)
14
Installing the pressure relief valve for the

low-pressure hydraulics
1. Insert the low-pressure hydraulics pressure relief
valve along with the O-ring (25) into the pressure
relief valve block.
2. Screw on the spring plate (23) with the spring (22)
and the cap (20).
CAUTION!
If the flange nut (18) is released and the

15 stud (19) turned, then a new setting for the
pressure relief valve becomes necessary.
(Fig. 8, 15)

Checking and adjusting the pressure relief

valve for the low-pressure hydraulics
Connect a pressure gauge (0 – 50 bar) onto the test
port (O) of the pressure relief valve block.
Start the engine.
Extend a ram connected to the low-pressure hydrau-
lics (i.e. cutterbar engagement) fully and hold in that
position.
Read the pressure from the system on the gauge.
The pressure should lie between 19 – 23 bar with the
16
oil at 50 °C.
If necessary correct the setting by slackening the
flange nut (18) and turning the stud (19).
ATTENTION!
Only test the system for a short period of

time, otherwise the system will overheat.
(Fig. 8, 15, 16)

Valve combinations – working hydraulics
VALVE COMBINATIONS – WORKING

HYDRAULICS
Removing the grain tank unloading tube lock

valve
Remove the hydraulic pipes (A) from the lock valve (1)
and close the ends with bungs. Contain any oil that
may leak.
Unscrew the hex. bolt (B) and remove the lock
valve (1).
(Fig. 1)
Grain tank unloading tube lock valve,

exploded view
1 Lock valve assembled
2 Restrictor
3 Union
4 Spring guide
5 Pressure spring
6 Drop valve
7 Threaded insert
8 Union
9 Plunger
2 (Fig. 2)
Installing the grain tank unloading tube lock

valve
Screw the lock valve (1) back to the chassis of the
machine using the hex. bolt (B).
Reconnect the hydraulic pipes (A) back to the lock
valve (1). Observe the correct tightening torques.
(Fig. 1)

Removing the CLAAS Auto-Contour lock

valve
Unbolt the guard (L).
(Fig. 3)
Remove the hydraulic pipes (A) from the lock valve (1)
and close the ends with bungs. Contain any oil that
may leak.
Unscrew the hex. bolt (B) and remove the lock
valve (1).
(Fig. 4)
CLAAS Auto-Contour lock valve, exploded view

1 Lock valve assembled
2 Union
3 Spring guide
4 Pressure spring
5 Drop valve
6 Threaded insert
7 Union
8 Plunger
(Fig. 5)

Installing the CLAAS Auto-Contour lock valve

Bolt the lock valve (1) back onto the trunking using
the hex. bolt (B).
Reconnect the hydraulic pipes (A) back to the lock
valve (1). Observe the correct tightening torques.
Refit the guard (L).
(Fig. 3, 4)
Removing the working hydraulics pressure

relief valve
hydraulic tank (P) for the ground hydraulics.
Special tool:
(Fig. 6)
Remove the hydraulic pipes (A) from the pressure

relief valve (1) from the right-hand side under the
driver’s platform. Close the ends with bungs.
Remove the two hex. bolts from (C) above the
pressure relief valve (1).
Remove the four hex. bolts (D) and remove the
pressure relief valve (1).
(Fig. 7)

Dismantling the working hydraulics pressure relief

valve
Remove the bung (3) from the valve block.
(Fig. 8, 13)
Pull the pressure spring (6), the washers (5) and the
support washers (4) from the valve block.
(Fig. 9, 13)
Using the special tool, remove the valve

insert (7, two parts) from the valve block.
Special tool:
(Fig. 10, 13)
10

Using the special tool, unbolt the valve insert

(7, two parts) from the valve block.
Special tool:
Socket spanner Part No. 181 934.2
CAUTION!
The valve insert (7, two parts) has been fitted

with liquid sealing compound and therefore
needs to be heated to a temperature of 100 °C
for removal.
11
(Fig. 11, 13)
Using the special tool, remove the valve insert

(7, two parts).
Special tool:
(Fig. 12, 13)
12
Working hydraulics pressure relief valve,

exploded view:
1 Pressure relief valve
2 Union
3 Bung
4 Support washer
5 Washer
6 Pressure spring
7 Valve
8 Test port
(Fig. 13)
13

Assembling the working hydraulics pressure relief

valve
DELO-ML-5349 to the valve insert (7, two parts)
and using the special tool, insert into the valve
block.
Special tool:
Socket spanner Part No. 181 934.2
14
ATTENTION!
Do not allow any of the liquid sealing

compound to enter the valve chambers.
2. Insert the pressure spring (6), the washers (5) and

the support washers (4) into the valve block.
NOTE: Insert the support washers to the
spring (6).
3. Insert the bung (3) into the valve block.
(Fig. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15)
15
Installing the working hydraulics pressure

relief valve
Bolt the pressure relief valve (1) to the 3/3 way
solenoid valve (L) using new O-rings and the four
hex. bolts (D).
Tighten the two hex. nuts at (C) above the pressure
relief valve (1).
Connect the hydraulic pipes (A) to the pressure relief
valve (1). Observe the torque settings.
Test / adjust the pressure relief valve.
16
(Fig. 16)

Testing and adjusting the working hydraulics

pressure relief valve
Connect the pressure gauge (0 – 250 bar) to the
pressure relief valve test port (8).
Start the engine.
Extent a hydraulic ram such as cutterbar ram fully and
hold.
Read off the pressure.
Pressure reading should read 180 – 200 bar with the
oil at 50 °C.
17
If necessary the pressure can be adjusted:
Remove the bung (3).
The pressure is adjusted by the washers (5). To lower
the setting remove one washer, and to raise the pres-
sure insert one washer.
Refit the bung (3) and check the pressure again.
ATTENTION!
Only carry out the tests for a short period

otherwise the oil will be overheated.
18
(Fig. 13, 17, 18)

Removing the working hydraulics valve block

A = End plate
B = 3/3 way solenoid valve for the drum speed
adjustment
C = 4/3 way solenoid valve for the reel fore and aft
D = End plate
With CLAAS Auto-Contour system:
E = 4/3 way solenoid valve for the
CLAAS Auto-Contour
19 (Fig. 19, 20)
20

hydraulic tank (P) for the working hydraulics.
Special tool:
(Fig. 21)
21
Mark the position of the hydraulic pipes (G) on the

valve block, then remove closing the ends with bungs.
Slacken and remove the connector (H).
Unbolt the bracket (K) from the driver’s platform.
Remove the connecting rod (L) from the valve block,
then remove the front valve block.
(Fig. 19, 20, 22)
22

Installing the working hydraulics valve block

1. Bolt the valve block back to the driver’s platform
with the bracket (K).
2. Re-connect the hydraulic pipes (G), back to the
marked valve block observing the correct torques.
3. Screw back the cap (H).
4. Re-connect the connecting rod (L) to the valve
block.
5. Check the hydraulic oil level in the hydraulic
23 necessary top up.
7. Check the operation of the valves (B, C and E,
when available).
8. Check again the hydraulic oil level.
(Fig. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23)

Removing the 3/3 way control valve for the

drum speed adjustment
Remove the front valve block for the working
hydraulics.
Mark the bracket (A) to the valve block, then unbolt
the valve block.
(Fig. 24)
24
Remove the studs (B) from the valve block and

separate the valves at (W).
The individual valves have O-rings (27) between
for sealing purposes.
(Fig. 25)
25
Dismantling the 3/3 way control valve for the drum

speed adjustment
Knock out the expansion pin (2) from the control
spool (C).
(Fig. 26, 34)
26
Unbolt and remove the bung (12) from the valve block
along with the pressure spring (9) and the delivery
valve (8).
(Fig. 27, 34)
27

Unbolt and remove the bung (12) from the valve block
along with the pressure spring (9) and drop valve (15).
(Fig. 28, 34)
28
Remove the bracket (5) and the spring housing (20)

from the valve block.
(Fig. 29, 34)
29
Remove the control spool (C) complete from the valve

block.
(Fig. 30, 34)
30
Remove the support washers (6) and the O-rings (7).

(Fig. 31, 34)
31

Remove the ball (14) from the valve block using the
special tool.
Special tool:
(Fig. 32, 34)
32
Unbolt the expansion screw (19) from the control

spool (C).
Remove the two spring plates (17) as well as the
pressure spring (18).
CAUTION!
The expansion screw (19) is fitted with liquid

sealing compound, which will have to be heated
to a temperature of 100 °C when dismantling.
33
(Fig. 33, 34)

34
3/3 way control valve for the drum speed adjustment,
exploded view:
1 3/3 way control valve
4 Spring washer 5
5 Bracket
6 Support washer
7 O-ring 16.3 x 2.4
8 Delivery valve
9 Spring
11 Seal
12 Bung
14 Ball 5.5 kl3 DIN 5401
15 Drop valve
17 Spring plate
18 Pressure spring
19 Expansion screw
20 Spring housing
25 Union
(Fig. 34)

Assembling the 3/3 way control valve for the drum

speed adjustment
1. Slide the two spring plates (17) as well as the
pressure spring (18) onto the control spool (C).
DELO-ML-5349 to the expansion screw (19),
then screw the expansion screw to the control
spool (C).
3. Slide the support washers (6) and the O-rings (7)
onto the control spool (C), then slide into the valve
block.
35
4. Slide the control spool (C) into the valve block.
5. Screw the spring housing (20) as well as the
bracket (5) back onto the valve block using the
socket head bolts (3).
6. Place the ball (14) as well as the drop valve (15)
and the pressure spring (9) into the valve block,
then screw on the bung (12) along with the
seal (11).
7. Insert the delivery valve (8) along with the
pressure spring (9) into the valve block.
8. Fit the bung (12) with the expansion pin (10)
and seal (11) back into the valve block.
36
9. Tap back the expansion pin (2) into the control
spool (C).
(Fig. 34, 35, 36, 37, 38)
37
38

Installing the 3/3 way control valve for the

drum speed adjustment
Bolt the valves back together at (W) using new seals
and the studs (B).
Refit the bracket (A) back according to the marking on
the valve block.
Refit the front working hydraulics valve block.
(Fig. 39, 40)
39
40
Removing the 4/3 way solenoid valve for the

reel fore and aft adjustment and the CLAAS
Auto-Contour
Remove the front working hydraulics valve block.
Mark the bracket (A) to the valve block, then remove
the valve block.
(Fig. 41)
41
Remove the studs (B) from the valve block and sepa-
rate the valves at (W).
The individual valve units have O-rings sealing them
together.
(Fig. 42)
42

43
4/3 way solenoid valve for the reel fore and aft
adjustment and CLAAS Auto-Contour, exploded
view
1 Solenoid valve
2 O-ring 30 x 2 -n DIN 3771
3 Solenoid
4 O-ring 55 x 2 -n DIN 3771
5 O-ring 24 x 2.5 -n DIN 3771
6 Spring
7 Spring plate
10 Union
11 Square seal
12 Connector
Diode
13 Socket head screw M 3 x 35 DIN 84
(Fig. 43)

Installing the 4/3 way solenoid valve for the

reel fore and aft adjustment and CLAAS
Auto-Contour
Bolt the valve blocks back together at (W) using new
seals and studs (B).
Refit the bracket (A) back according to the marking on
the valve block.
Refit the front working hydraulics valve block.
(Fig. 44, 45)
44
45
Removing the rear working hydraulics valve

block
A = Pressure relief valve for
the working hydraulics
B = 3/3 way solenoid valve for the
cutterbar raise and lower
C = 4/3 way solenoid valve for swinging
the grain tank unloading tube
out and in
D = 3/3 way solenoid valve for the reel
raise and lower
E = End plate
46
(Fig. 46)


hydraulic tank (P) for the working hydraulics.
Special tool:
(Fig. 47)
47
Mark the position of the hydraulic pipes (F) on the

valve block, then remove closing the ends with bungs.
Slacken and remove the connector (G).
Unbolt the bracket (H) from the driver’s platform and
remove the rear valve block.
(Fig. 48)
48

Installing the rear working hydraulics valve

block
1. Bolt the valve block back to the driver’s platform
with the bracket (H).
2. Reconnect the hydraulic pipes (F) back according
to the marking on the valve block observing the
correct torques.
3. Screw back the connector (G).
4. Check the hydraulic oil level in the hydraulic
49 necessary top up.
6. Check the operation of the valves (B, C and D,
if available).
7. Check the operation and the settings of the
pressure relief valve (A).
8. Check again the hydraulic oil level.
(Fig. 46, 47, 48, 49)

Removing the 3/3 way solenoid valve for the

reel raise / lower and cutterbar raise / lower
Remove the rear working hydraulics valve block.
Mark the bracket (A) to the valve block and unbolt it.
(Fig. 50)
50
Remove the studs (B) from the valve block and sepa-
rate the valves at (W).
The individual valves have O-rings between for sealing
purposes.
(Fig. 51)
51
Dismantling the 3/3 way solenoid valve for the reel

raise / lower and cutterbar raise / lower
Unscrew the cap from the solenoid (37).
Remove the O-ring (38) and the solenoid (37).
(Fig. 52, 65)
52
Unscrew the solenoid spool (C) from the pilot

valve (28).
(Fig. 53, 65)
53

Unscrew the pressure screw (34) from the pilot

valve (28).
(Fig. 54, 65)
54
Remove the valve insert (D) and the ball (14) from the
pilot valve (28) using the special tool.
Special tool:
(Fig. 55, 65)
55
Remove the pressure spring (29) along with the

needle (32) from the pilot valve (28) using the special
tool.
Special tool:
(Fig. 56, 65)
56
Unbolt the pilot valve (28) from the valve block (E).
(Fig. 57, 65)
57

Remove the pilot valve (28) along with the pressure

spring (11) from the valve block (E).
(Fig. 58, 65)
58
Remove the plunger (F) using a hex. bolt

M 5 x 30 DIN 933-8.8 from the valve block (E).
(Fig. 59, 65)
59
Remove the control spool (G) using a hex. bolt

M 5 x 30 DIN 933-8.8 from the valve block (E).
(Fig. 60, 65)
60
Unbolt the complete pilot valve (28) from the valve

block (E).
(Fig. 61, 65)
61

Remove the drop valve (8) and the pressure

spring (10) from the valve block (E) using the
special tool.
Special tool:
(Fig. 62, 65)
62
With the 3/3 way solenoid valve block for the cutterbar
raise / lower:
Remove the restrictor insert (20) from the valve
block (E).
(Fig. 63, 65)
63
Remove the bung (18) with the pressure spring (15)

and delivery valve (14) from the valve block (E).
(Fig. 64, 65)
64

65
3/3 way solenoid valve for the reel raise / lower and 25 Threaded fitting
cutterbar raise / lower, exploded view: 26 Restrictor spindle
28 Pilot valve
1 3/3 way control valve
29 Pressure spring
2 Hex. bolt M 6 x 55 DIN 931-8.8
30 Ball 4.5 g3 DIN 5401
3 Spring washer 6
31 O-ring 5.28 x 1.78 -n DIN 3771
32 Needle
5 O-ring 6 x 2 -n DIN 3771
33 O-ring 12 x 1.5 -n DIN 3771
6 O-ring 16.3 x 2.4
34 Pressure washer
7 O-ring 3.3 x 2.4 -n DIN 3771
35 O-ring 15.6 x 1.78 DIN 3771
8 Complete drop valve
36 O-ring 40 x 1.5 -n DIN 3771
9 O-ring 11.3 x 2.4 -n DIN 3771
37 Solenoid
10 Spring
38 O-ring 22 x 2 -n DIN 3771
11 Spring
40 Union
12 Stud M 4 x 5 DIN 913
41 Square seal
13 Screw restrictor
42 Connector
14 Delivery valve
Diode
15 Pressure spring
16 Expansion spring 10 x 14 DIN 13337
17 Seal (Fig. 65)
18 Bung
(2 off with 4 3/2 way solenoid valve
for reel raise / lower)
20 Restrictor insert
(with 3/3 way solenoid valve for
the cutterbar raise / lower)
21 Snap ring A 7 DIN 7993
22 Bush
23 O-ring
24 Support ring

Assembling the 3/3 way solenoid valve for the

Screw in the bung (18) along with the pressure
spring (15), the delivery valve (14), the expansion
pin (16) and the seal (17) into the valve block (E).
With the 3/3 way solenoid valve for the cutterbar
raise / lower:
Screw in the restrictor insert (20) into the valve
block (E).
Insert the drop valve (8) and the pressure spring (10)
along with the O-ring (9) into the valve block (E).
66
Bolt the complete pilot valve (28) along with
O-rings (5, 6 and 7) onto the valve block (E).
Insert the control spool (G) and the plunger (F) com-
plete into the valve block (E).
Bolt the pilot valve (28) together with the pressure
spring (11) and O-rings (5, 6 and 7) onto the valve
block (E).
Insert the ball (30) with the needle (32), pressure
spring (29) and valve insert (D) into the pilot valve (28)
and tighten with the pressure screw (34).
Screw the solenoid spool (C) with O-ring (35) into the
pilot valve (28).
67
Slide on the solenoid (37) along with O-ring (38) and
screw on cap.
(Fig. 65)
68

Installing the 3/3 way solenoid valve for the

Bolt the valve blocks back together at (W) using new
seals and studs (B).
(Fig. 69)
69
Bolt the bracket (A) back according to the marking on

the valve block.
Refit the rear working hydraulics valve block.
(Fig. 70)
70
Removing the 4/3 way solenoid valve for

swinging the grain tank unloading tube
in and out
Remove the rear working hydraulics valve block.
Mark the bracket (A) to the valve block and unbolt it.
(Fig. 71)
71
Remove the studs (B) from the valve block and

separate the valves at (W).
The individual valve units have O-rings sealing
them together.
(Fig. 72)
72

73
4/3 way solenoid valve for swinging the grain tank
unloading tube in and out, exploded view
1 Solenoid valve
2 O-ring 30 x 2 -n DIN 3771
3 Solenoid
4 O-ring 55 x 2 -n DIN 3771
5 O-ring 24 x 2.5 -n DIN 3771
6 Pressure spring
7 Spring plate
10 Union
11 Square seal
12 Connector
Diode
(Fig. 73)

Installing the 4/3 way solenoid valve for

swinging the grain tank unloading tube in and
out
Bolt the valve blocks together with the studs (B) and
with new O-rings fitted at (W).
Bolt the bracket (A) back according to the markings
on the valve block.
Refit the rear working hydraulics valve block.
(Fig. 74, 75)
74
75
Removing the flow control valve for the

CLAAS Auto-Contour
Remove the hydraulic pipe (A) to the flow control
valve (1) and close both ends with a bung.
Unbolt the flow control valve (1) from the hydraulic
ram (B).
(Fig. 76, 77)
76

Flow control valve for the CLAAS Auto-Contour,

exploded view
1 Flow control valve
2 Insert
3 Pressure spring
4 Spool
6 Seal
7 Union
(Fig. 77)
77
Installing the flow control valve for the

CLAAS Auto-Contour
Screw the flow control valve (1) into the hydraulic
ram (B).
Reconnect the hydraulic pipe (A) to the flow control
valve (1). Observe the correct torque settings.
Bleed the hydraulic rams for the CLAAS Auto-Contour
system.
(Fig. 77, 78)
78


Working hydraulics rams
WORKING HYDRAULICS RAMS
Removing the cutterbar rams

Raise the trunking and support securely.
(Fig. 1)
Unlock the bolt (18) and remove.

Lower the front of the hydraulic ram (21).
Remove the ram stop (A) from the left-hand side of
the machine.
(Fig. 2, 9)
Disconnect the connector and cable ties from the

cable (B).
Remove the hydraulic line (C) from the hydraulic
ram (21) and close both ends with bungs. Contain any
oil that may leak.
Remove the hex. bolts (17) as well as the bushes (16)
behind, then remove ram (21).
(Fig. 3, 9)

Dismantling the cutterbar rams

(Fig. 4, 9)
Pull the cylinder head (24) along with the ram (28) out
of the ram casing (30).
(Fig. 5, 9)
CAUTION!
Should the casing (30) have to be removed,

then determine the dimension (X) of the
tensioned pressure spring (6).
(Fig. 6, 9)

Determine the dimension (Y) between the casing (30)

and the lock nuts (9).
Machines not fitted with CLAAS Auto-Contour require
the ground pressure sensor (D) from the left-hand cut-
terbar ram to be removed.
Remove the potentiometer from the right-hand cutter-
bar ram.
(Fig. 7, 9)
Undo the three socket head bolts (1) equally, until

the springs (6) are fully de-tensioned.
Remove lock nuts (9).
Remove the bushes (8) and the spring
plates (3 and 7). Remove the spring guide (5).
(Fig. 8, 9)

9
Cutterbar ram, exploded view: 29 Snap ring A 55 DIN 7993
30 Ram casing
1 Socket head bolts M 12 x 380 x 360
31 Bush
DIN 4762-8.8
32 Union
2 Washer
3 Spring plate (Fig. 9)
4 Snap ring A 80 DIN 7993
5 Spring guide
6 Pressure spring
7 Spring plate
8 Bush
11 Lock
14 Lock
15 Spring clip
16 Bush
17 Hex. bolt M 16 x 45 DIN 933-8.8
18 Bolt
21 Hydraulic ram
22 Scraper
23 Seal
24 Cylinder head
25 Securing cord
26 Back-up ring
27 O-ring 58 x 3 -n DIN 3771
28 Ram

Assembling the cutterbar rams

groove of the cylinder head (24).
CAUTION!
The O-ring (27) must always be on the pressure

side (oil side) of the cylinder head (24).
(Fig. 9, 10)
10
Insert the seal (23) and the scraper (22) into the
grooves of the cylinder head (24). Observe the order
shown in the figure.
(Fig. 9, 11)
11

Slide in the cylinder head (24) with the ram (28) into
the casing (30).
Screw in the cylinder head (4) into the casing (30)
using a new securing cord (5).
(Fig. 9, 12)
12

Fit the pressure spring (6) along with the guide (5)
and the spring plates (3 and 7) onto the casing (30)
using the socket head bolts (1) and tightening to the
dimension (X).
Bolt back the bushes (8) to the dimension (Y) onto
the spring plates (7), using new lock nuts (9).
CAUTION!
The dimension (X) is only a basic adjustment.

The correct setting can only be done with the
13 cutterbar attached.
(Fig. 6, 7, 8, 9, 13)
Installing the cutterbar rams

Bolt the hydraulic ram (21) along with the bushes (16)
and the hex. bolts (17) onto the drive axle.
CAUTION!

DELO-ML-5349 to the hex. bolts (17).

14 Connect the connector to the wiring loom (B) and
attach with cable ties.
Connect the hydraulic line (C) to the ram (21)
observing the correct torque settings.
(Fig. 9, 14)

Start the engine.
Bleed the cutterbar rams. For this raise and lower the
trunking several times.
With the trunking down, check the oil level in the
hydraulic tank again.
(Fig. 15)
15
Removing the grain tank unloading tube ram

Remove the hydraulic lines (A), and close both ends
with bungs. Contain any oil that may leak.
Remove the bolts (B) and (19) and then remove the
ram (1).
(Fig. 16, 22)
16
Dismantling the grain tank unloading tube ram

(Fig. 17, 22)
17
Remove the cylinder head (11) along with the ram

rod (7) from the casing (2).
Remove the ram rod guide ring (3) as well as the
double seal (4) from the ram (5).
(Fig. 18, 22)
18

After slackening off the hex. nut (14), remove the

yoke (15) from the ram rod (7).
(Fig. 19, 22)
19
Unbolt the ram (5) from the ram rod (7) using the
special tool.
Special tool:
Pin spanner Part No. 181 624.0
CAUTION!
The ram has had a liquid sealing compound

applied and when dismantling will need to be
heated to approx. 100 °C.
20
(Fig. 20, 22)
Pull the damper (6) from the ram rod (7).
CAUTION!
Take care of the positioning of the damper (6).

The conical end is facing the ram rod (7).
(Fig. 21, 22)
21

22
Grain tank unloading tube ram, exploded view:
1 Hydraulic ram
2 Casing
3 Ram rod guide
4 Ram seal
5 Ram
6 Damper
7 Ram rod
9 Dual seal ring
10 Securing cord
11 Cylinder head
12 Seal
13 Scraper
14 Hex. nut Bm 18 x 1.5
15 Yoke
16 Union
18 Lock nut VM 16
19 Bolt
(Fig. 22)

Assembling the grain tank unloading tube ram

Slide on the damper (6) onto the ram rod (7).
CAUTION!
Take care of the positioning of the damper (6).

The conical end is facing the ram rod (7).
(Fig. 22, 23)
23

DELO-ML-5349 to the ram (5), then screw onto
the ram rod (7). Tighten with the special tool.
Special tool:
Fit the ram rod guide ring (3) and the double ram
seal (4) into the grooves of the ram (5). Observe the
order shown in the figure.
(Fig. 22, 24)
24
Fit the dual seal ring (9) into the groove of the cylinder
head (11).
(Fig. 20, 22, 25)
25

(Fig. 22, 26)
26

Insert the pre-assembled ram rod (7) and the cylinder
Screw the cylinder head (11) along with a new
securing cord (10) into the casing (2).
(Fig. 17, 22, 27)
27
Screw the hex. nut (14) and the yoke (15) loosely onto
the ram rod (7).
When the ram rod (7) is fully extended, the
dimension (Y) from centre to centre of the bearings
needs to be checked.
Dimension (Y) = 1542 mm
CAUTION!
The dimension (Y) is only a basic adjustment.
28
(Fig. 19, 22, 28)

Installing the grain tank unloading tube ram

Loosely fit the hydraulic ram (1) to the machine
chassis and to the unloading tube using the
bolts (B) and (19).
Connect the hydraulic lines (A) to the hydraulic
ram (1). Observe the torque settings.
(Fig. 22, 29)
29
Adjust the yoke (15) on the ram rod (7) so that with
the ram rod completely extended the unloading tube is
fully located in the support (C).
Secure the settings with the hex. nut (14).
CAUTION!
The ram rod (7) must be fully extended before

carrying out the settings.
(Fig. 22, 30, 31)

30
31
Start the engine.

Bleed the ram. For this move the unloading tube in and
then out several times.
Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank (P) via the
(Fig. 32)
32

Removing the CLAAS Auto-Contour hydraulic

ram
Remove the hydraulic lines (A) from the hydraulic
ram (1) and close both ends with bungs. Contain any
oil that may leak.
(Fig. 33)
33
Remove the hex. bolts (25).

Remove the spacers at the side of the hydraulic
ram (1), then lift the hydraulic ram (1) from the
machine.
(Fig. 34, 39)
34
Dismantling the CLAAS Auto-Contour hydraulic

ram
Unbolt the flow control valve (12) from the hydraulic
ram (1).
(Fig. 35, 39)
35
Remove the cylinder head (11) from the hydraulic

ram (21) using the special tool.
Special tool:
(Fig. 36, 39)
36

Pull the hydraulic ram casing (21) from the ram rod (2).
Remove the seals (3) and the ram guide ring from the
ram (4).
CAUTION!
Look at the position of the seal (3)

(lip seals are facing towards the outside).
(Fig. 37, 39)

37
Remove the ram (4) from the ram rod (2) using the
special tool.
Special tool:
CAUTION!
The ram (4) has been fitted with a liquid sealing

compound and will therefore need heating to
approx. 100 °C when dismantling.
38
(Fig. 38, 39)

39
Hydraulic ram for the CLAAS Auto-Contour, 25 Hex. bolt M 16 x 140 DIN 931
exploded view: Hex. nut M 16 DIN 934
Contact washer A 16
1 Hydraulic ram
26 Washer
2 Ram rod
27 Dual seal ring
3 Seal
4 Ram (Fig. 39)
Ram guide
5 Bung
6 Seal
7 Seal
9 Scraper
10 Seal
11 Cylinder head
12 Flow control valve
13 Insert
14 Pressure spring
15 Spool
17 Seal
18 Union
21 Hydraulic ram
22 Union

Assembling the CLAAS Auto-Contour hydraulic

ram
cylinder head (11).
(Fig. 39, 40)
40
(Fig. 39, 41)
41

Slide the ram rod (2) into the cylinder head (11).
DELO-ML-5349 to the ram (4) and fix to the
ram rod (2) using the special tool.
Special tool:
Fit the ram guide and the seals (3) with the lip seals
facing towards the outside onto the ram (4).
42 (Fig. 39, 42)

Slide the ram casing (21) onto the ram (4) and tighten
on the cylinder head (11).
(Fig. 39, 43)
43
Screw the flow control valve (12) into the hydraulic

ram (1).
(Fig. 39, 44)
44

Installing the CLAAS Auto-Contour hydraulic

ram
Slide the hydraulic ram (1) into the trunking along with
the spacers and tighten using the hex. bolts (25).
Attach the hydraulic lines (A) to the ram (1) observing
Bleed the CLAAS Auto-Contour hydraulic rams.
(Fig. 45)
45
Bleeding the CLAAS Auto-Contour hydraulic

ram
Open the tap (E). For this the lever (F) should face
downwards.
(Fig. 46)
46
Slacken off the bungs (5) on both hydraulic rams (1).

On the right-hand hydraulic ram cylinder head (11),
slacken off the socket head bolt (8).
(Fig. 39, 47)
47

Start the engine.

Switch on the safety switch (G).
Press the rocker switch (H) to the right, so that both
rams fully extend.
After bleeding the rams, tighten the bungs (5) and the
socket head bolt (8) on the right-hand ram.
When both hydraulic rams are extended, slacken off
the socket head bolt (8) on the left-hand ram.
Operate the switch (H) in the opposite direction.
48 After the hydraulic ram has been bleed, then tighten

the socket head bolt (8) on the left-hand side. For this
the left-hand hydraulic ram (1) should be retracted.
Close the tap (E). The lever (H) should now be in the
upper position.
(Fig. 39, 46, 47, 48, 49)
49
(Fig. 50)
50

Removing the rotary coupling for the drum

variable-speed drive
Disconnect the hydraulic line (A) from the rotary
coupling (29) and close both ends with bungs.
Unscrew the rotary coupling (29) from the pressure
flange (28) and close both ends with bungs. Contain
any oil that may leak.
(Fig. 51, 67)
51
Dismantling the rotary coupling for the drum

Remove the circlip (39).
(Fig. 52, 67)
52
Separate the screw section (34) from the oil line (40)
using the special tool. Take care of components falling
out.
(Fig. 53, 67)
53

Special tool:
1 Draw bolt Part No. 181 606.0
2 Slide hammer Part No. 181 604.0
1 Up to machine number ...
3 Adaptor piece M 8 Part No. 181 608.0
5 Union nut 12s DIN 3870 Part No. 244 061.1
From machine number ...
2 3 Adaptor piece M 10 Part No. 181 609.0

5 Union nut 15 L DIN 3870 Part No. 633 589.1
(Fig. 54)
3
32276
54
Remove the circlip (36) from the oil line (40).

(Fig. 55, 67)
55

Pull the ball bearing (37) along with the two middle
spacers (38 and 49) as well as the Belleville
springs (48) from the oil line (40) using the special
tool and a puller.
NOTE: Parts (48 and 49) are only available from
machine number ...
Special tool:
Tube (self-manufactured)
inner dia. 6 mm, outer dia. 8 mm, 30 mm long
(Fig. 56, 67)
56
Remove the circlip (30), the step drive pulley (31) and
the seal (32) from the screw section (34).
(Fig. 57, 67)
57

58
Assembling the rotary coupling for the drum
Fit the O-ring (47), the seal (32) and the step drive
pulley (31) into the screw section (34) and secure with
the circlip (30).
NOTE: O-ring (47) is only available from machine
number ...
(Fig. 58, 59)
59

Insert the thrust washer (35) and the support ring (33)
into the screw section (34).
CAUTION!
The support ring (33) is drilled slightly larger on

one side. The side with the larger hole needs to
be fitted in a way that it faces towards the thrust
washer (35).
(Fig. 58, 60)

60
Fill the ball bearing (37) and the empty space (F) with
grease (Rhenus Norlith STM3).
Press the bearing (37) and the spacers (38 and 49) as
well as the Belleville springs (48) onto the oil line (40)
using the special tool and secure with the circlip (36).
NOTE: Components (48 and 49) are only available
from machine number …
Special tool:
Tube, inner dia. 10 mm, outer dia. 12 mm, 50 mm long
61
CAUTION!
The open side of the deep groove ball

bearing (37) must face towards the inside.
The oil line (40) must not be tensioned whilst
being pressed on.
(Fig. 58, 61)

Press the pre-assembled oil line (40) into the screw

section (34) and secure with the circlip (39).
(Fig. 58, 62)
62
Installing the rotary coupling for the drum

Bolt the rotary coupling (29) into the pressure
flange (28).
Connect the hydraulic line (A) to the rotary
coupling (29).
(Fig. 63)
63
Start the engine.

Start the threshing mechanism, then speed up and
slow down the drum variable-speed drive several
times.
fresh air filter element (R) and top up if necessary.
(Fig. 64)
64

Removing the hydraulic ram for the drum

Remove the rotary coupling.
Remove the grease pipe (A).
Remove the hex. bolts (B) and remove the hydraulic
ram.
(Fig. 65)
65
Dismantling the hydraulic ram for the drum

Tap out the hydraulic ram (27) from the pressure
flange (28) using a punch.
(Fig. 66, 67)
66

67
Hydraulic ram / rotary coupling for the drum 47 O-ring 19.3 x 2.2 -n DIN 6149
variable-speed drive, exploded view: (from machine No. …)
48 Belleville washer
27 Hydraulic ram
(from machine No. …)
28 Pressure flange
49 Spacer
29 Rotary coupling
(from machine No. …)
31 Step drive pulley (Fig. 67)
32 Seal
33 Support ring
34 Screw piece
35 Thrust washer
37 Ball bearing 6000 z DIN 625
38 Spacer
40 Oil line
41 Seal ring 14 x 19 x 4.5
(up to machine No. ...)
42 Assembled restrictor
(up to machine No. ...)
43 Restrictor
(up to machine No. …)
(up to machine No. …)
45 Seal

Assembling the hydraulic ram for the drum

Insert the seal (45) into the groove of the pressure
flange (28).
(Fig. 67, 68)
68
Lubricate the ram (27) with hydraulic oil and insert into
the pressure flange (28).
(Fig. 67, 69)
69
Installing the hydraulic ram for the drum

Bolt the hydraulic ram onto the drum variable-speed
drive using the hex. bolts (B).
Attach the grease pipe (A).
Refit the rotary coupling to the drum variable-speed
drive.
(Fig. 70)
70

Torque settings
Torque settings
TORQUE SETTINGS
Bolts
Torque settings (in Nm) for hex. bolts, Allen bolts and hex. nuts
Bolts and nuts Anodized, plated or zinc plated
Class 8.8 10.9 12.9
Measurement Metric standard thread
M4 2.7 3.8 4.6
M5 5.5 8.0 9.5
Hex. bolts M6 10.0 14.0 16.0
DIN 931
M8 23.0 33.0 40.0
DIN 933
M 10 45.0 63.0 75.0
M 12 78.0 110.0 130.0
M 14 122.0 175.0 210.0
Allen bolts
DIN 912 M 16 195.0 270.0 325.0
M 18 260.0 370.0 440.0
M 20 370.0 525.0 630.0
Hex. nuts M 22 510.0 720.0 870.0
DIN 934
M 24 640.0 900.0 1080.0
M 27 980.0 1400.0 1650.0
M 30 1260.0 1800.0 2160.0
Measurement Metric fine thread

M8x1 25 35 42
M 10 x 1.25 48 67 80
Hex. bolts M 12 x 1.25 88 125 150
DIN 960
M 12 x 1.5 82 113 140
DIN 961
M 14 x 1.5 135 190 225
M 16 x 1.5 210 290 345
M 18 x 1.5 300 415 505
Hex. nuts
DIN 934 M 20 x 1.5 415 585 700
M 22 x 1.5 560 785 945
M 24 x 2 720 1000 1200
M 27 x 2 1050 1500 1800
M 30 x 2 1450 2050 2500
NOTE! Cadmium plated bolts and nuts have a torque setting 25% less than stated.

Torque settings
Hydraulic fittings
Torque settings for hydraulic O-ring fittings according to ISO 6149
Measurement Torque setting according to ISO 6149
M8x1 7+2 Nm
M 10 x 1 11+4 Nm
M 12 x 1.5 16+5 Nm
M 14 x 1.5 23+8 Nm
M 16 x 1.5 29+10 Nm
M 18 x 1.5 38+13 Nm
M 20 x 1.5 46+15 Nm
M 22 x 1.5 67+22 Nm
M 24 x 1.5 86+29 Nm
M 26 x 1.5 103+34 Nm
M 27 x 2 103+34 Nm
M 30 x 2 170+57 Nm
M 33 x 2 200+67 Nm
M 36 x 2 245+82 Nm
M 38 x 2 245+82 Nm
M 39 x 2 310+103 Nm
M 42 x 2 380+127 Nm
M 45 x 2 440+147 Nm

Claas Dominator 108vx 98vx 88vx

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Claas Dominator 108vx 98vx 88vx

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety rules

SAFETY RULES Important

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.2.1

Identification of warning and danger signs Correct use of the machine

1.2.2 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

Leaving the machine Basic rule

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.2.3

1.2.4 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

Component Type of lubricant Capacity

Transmission gearbox CLAAS 6.0 l

Grain tank unloading tube – Multipurpose grease

Transmission gearbox CLAAS 6.0 l

Grain tank unloading tube – Multipurpose grease

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.5.1

Component Type of lubricant Capacity

Working hydraulics and hydro- CLAAS hydraulic oil approx. 20 litres

Foot brake ATE brake fluid Reservoir must always be full

Air Conditioning System

Sanden compressor SD 7 H 15 Sanden oil SP 20 PAG As required

** When selecting hydraulic oil, observe the following guidelines:

1.5.2 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

Refill Oil change Setting pressure at the resp. PRV bar

Lift hydraulics 175+15

DOMINATOR 108 VX 8.5 approx. 7 Steering* 115+15

Lift hydraulics 175+15

DOMINATOR 98 VX 8.5 approx. 7 Steering* 115+15

Lift hydraulics 175+15

DOMINATOR 88 VX 7.5 approx. 6 Steering* 115+15

Hydrostatic ground travel drive

Cold start valve 25+2.5

Cold start valve 18+1.5

Cold start valve 18+1.5

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.5.3

1.5.4 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.1.1

Introduction to the CLAAS-REPAIR MANUAL

1.1.2 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

Key to symbols The meaning of the symbols will soon be learned by

Remove, Prevent damage

Disassemble Oil Special tool

Lock, bound, seal

Renew on each Note direction of

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.1.3

1.1.4 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

General information for repair

Spare parts Correct tension of steel roller chains

No solid grease must be used when

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.3.1

1.3.2 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

Olive (ferrule) fittings on hydraulic lines Pre-assembly:

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 1.3.3

Deviating tightening torques reduce the

When carrying out electric welding on

Some advice for speedy and correct repair:

1.3.4 RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX - 297 977.0

When working on the hydraulic system,

When working on the hydraulic system,

297 977.0 - RHB DOMINATOER 108 VX – 88 VX 9.1.1

Checking the hydraulic oil level

Before checking the hydraulic oil level, please

The hydraulic oil level must be up to the mark on the

Linde unit Changing the hydraulic oil

Take extreme care when draining hot